User s Guide: Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows Text and graphics in this book are all copyright 1996-2014 Best Case, LLC. No part of this manual may be copied, reproduced, or transmitted by any means, mechanical, electrical or otherwise, or in any form without the express written consent of Best Case, LLC. Names and case data found in examples and graphics are solely fictitious, and do not represent any persons or entities, living or dead. Copyright 1996-2014 Best Case, LLC. All rights reserved. Best Case is a registered trademark of Best Case, LLC, Evanston, Illinois. OneTouch is a registered trademark of Best Case, LLC, Evanston, Illinois. Revised February 2014.
Table of Contents Introduction... 12 Purpose of Best Case Bankruptcy... 12 Overview of Best Case Bankruptcy... 12 Customizing Your Program... 12 Client List Window... 12 Adding Clients... 13 Forms and Schedules Menu... 13 Entering Case Information... 13 Printing Forms... 14 Electronic Filing... 14 System Requirements... 14 Running Best Case on a Mac?... 14 How this Manual is Organized... 15 Context Sensitive Help is a Good Alternative to User s Guide... 15 Technical Support... 16 Customer Comments... 16 Visit our Web Site... 16 Installation and Setup... 17 Installing the Single-User Version... 18 Entering Unlock Information... 18 Installing the Multi-User Network Version of Best Case Bankruptcy... 18 Installing the Single-User Version of Best Case Bankruptcy on a Network... 19 Starting Best Case Bankruptcy... 19 The Setup Wizard and Installing Jurisdictions... 20 The Welcome Window... 21 Review Exemption Statutes... 22 Printer Selection... 22 Entering Information... 23 The Client List Window... 24 Adding a New Client... 24 Opening an Existing Client File... 26 Forms and Schedules Shortcuts... 27 Opening Forms and Schedules... 27 Tips on Entering Information in Best Case Bankruptcy... 28 Never Enter None... 28 Moving from field to field... 28 Spell Check... 29 AddressHelper... 29 Common Creditor List and AddressFill... 29 AddressClipper... 30 Printing... 30 Cut, Copy, and Paste... 31 Working with Forms and Schedules... 32 Voluntary Petition... 33 Debtor/Business Debtor... 33 Joint debtor... 34 Business Info... 34 Filing Information... 34 Info 2/ Ex D... 36 Chapter 11... 36 Prior/Related... 37 Statistical/Administrative... 38 Editing the Voluntary Petition... 39 522 Exemption Analyzer... 39 Using the Exemption Analyzer... 39 What the Analysis Results Mean... 40 Exhibit A to Voluntary Petition... 40 Exhibit C to Voluntary Petition... 41 Exhibit D to the Voluntary Petition... 42 Form 3A. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments... 42 Form 3B. Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee... 44 Preparing Form 3B for Filing... 44 Where the Information in Form 3B Comes From... 45 Table of Contents 3
Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims... 47 Insiders Will Be Excluded... 48 Print Order of Creditors... 49 Emergency Filings... 49 Editing this Form in Special Cases... 49 Matrix of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Claims... 49 Creditors Marked Do Not Print/Total on Sch.... 50 Form 6. Summary of Schedules... 50 Viewing information for the Summary of Schedules... 50 View Secured and Unsecured Totals for Schedule D... 50 View Priority and Non-Priority Totals for Schedule E... 50 Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities and Related Data (28 U.S.C. 159)... 50 Editing the Summary of Schedules... 51 Overview of Links Between Schedules... 51 Schedules A-H: Summary List Windows & Entry Screens... 51 Adding items to summary list screens... 52 Editing items appearing on list screens... 52 Deleting items on list screens... 53 Schedule A. Real Property... 53 If the debtor has no real property... 53 Entering real property... 53 Add another item of real property... 55 Closing Schedule A... 55 Entering Lien and Exemption Information through Schedule A... 55 Entering liens through Schedule A... 55 Changing Rank Order for Liens... 56 Entering exemptions through Schedule A... 57 Editing Schedule A... 59 Moving Property from Schedule A to Schedule B... 59 Schedule B. Personal Property... 59 Opening Schedule B... 59 Specifying no property of a given category... 60 Adding Property to Schedule B... 61 Adding another item to Schedule B... 62 Entering exemption and lien information through Schedule B... 62 Moving Property from Schedule B to Schedule A... 62 Editing Schedule B... 62 Schedule C. Property Claimed as Exempt... 63 Claiming Property as Exempt... 63 If the Debtor Has No Exempt Property... 63 Specifying that Property is Exempt... 63 Specify multiple statutes for a single piece of property... 66 Schedule C for Corporate Debtors... 66 Viewing and Printing Exemption Summaries... 66 Exemption Detail Tab... 66 Property Summary Tab... 66 Printing the Property Summary... 67 Editing Property Through Schedule C... 67 Statute Summary Tab... 67 Printing the Statute Summary... 68 Liquidation Analysis... 68 Editing Schedule C... 69 Tools and Shortcuts Available in Creditor Schedules... 69 Alphabetizing Creditors by Last Name... 69 AddressHelper Fills in the City and State When You Enter the Zip Code... 69 Common Creditor List... 69 Creditor Pick List... 71 AddressClipper... 71 Locator Key... 71 Foreign Addresses... 72 Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another... 72 Cut and Paste from Summary List Window... 72 Creditor Import/Export... 72 Copy an Entire Creditor Schedule from One Case to Another... 72 Exclude Creditor from Matrix... 72 Exclude Creditor from Schedule and Schedule Total... 73 4 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Schedule D. Creditors Holding Secured Claims... 73 Entering secured claim information... 73 Creditor information... 74 Means Test Treatment (only appears for Chapter 7 & 13 cases)... 76 Form 8 Intention (only appears for Chapter 7 cases)... 77 13 Plan treatment (only appears for Chapter 13 cases)... 77 Codebtors... 78 Additional Notice... 79 Notes/POC... 79 When there are Multiple Liens against One Piece of Property... 80 When Multiple Pieces of Property Secure a Lien... 80 Editing Schedule D... 80 Schedule E. Creditors Holding Unsecured Priority Claims... 81 Sort by name or priority type... 83 Form 22 Means Test Treatment (only appears for Chapter 7 & 13 cases)... 83 13 Plan treatment (only appears for Chapter 13 cases)... 83 Codebtors... 83 Additional Notice... 84 Notes/POC... 84 Editing Schedule E... 85 Schedule F. Creditors Holding Unsecured Nonpriority Claims... 85 13 Plan treatment (only appears for Chapter 13 cases)... 86 Codebtors... 87 Additional Notice... 87 Notes/POC... 88 Editing Schedule F... 88 Schedule G. Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases... 88 Editing Schedule G... 89 Schedule H. Codebtors... 89 Editing Schedule H... 91 Schedule I. Current Income of Individual Debtors... 91 Marital status/employment... 91 Dependents... 92 Wages... 92 Other Income... 94 Prorating Amounts... 94 Expected changes... 95 Form Preferences... 95 Editing Schedule I... 95 Attachment for Business Income and Expenses... 95 Schedule J. Current Expenditures of Individual Debtors... 96 Prorate calculator... 96 Separate spouse s schedule... 96 Net Income... 97 Other Expenses... 97 Special Form Preference... 97 Editing Schedule J... 97 Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules... 98 Form 7. Statement of Financial Affairs... 98 Never type None... 98 Entering Information... 98 Shortcuts for Particular Questions... 99 Reordering Answers to a Question... 100 Questions 19-25... 101 All Answers... 101 Signature Section... 101 Editing the Form... 101 Printing a single page... 101 Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention... 101 Specifying Treatment of Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases... 102 Specifying Treatment of Unsecured Claims... 103 Specifying Multiple Intents for One Claim... 103 Checkboxes... 104 Editing the Statement of Intention... 104 Compensation Statement of Attorney for Debtor(s)... 104 Specifying What Your Fee Includes and Excludes... 105 Table of Contents 5
Formatting Options... 105 Completing the Form... 105 Copying Amount Paid to Statement of Financial Affairs... 105 Editing this Form in the Best Case Editor... 105 Notice to Individual Consumer Debtor of Available Chapters... 106 Editing this Document... 106 List of Equity Security Holders... 106 Sorting Equity Security Holders... 107 Verification of Creditor Matrix... 107 Formatting Options... 108 Custom Formats... 108 Variations: Add Phrase Under Penalty of Perjury or Text About Disk File... 108 Editing the Verification... 108 Creditor Address Matrix... 108 Printing the Matrix... 109 Duplicate Checking... 109 Adding names other than creditors to the matrix... 109 Creating an ASCII Text File of the Creditor Address Matrix/Copying the Matrix to Disk... 111 View/edit matrix text file... 112 Troubleshooting problems with the matrix on disk... 112 Numbered List of Creditors... 112 Corporate Ownership Statement (Rule 7007.1)... 113 Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number... 113 Form 22. Statement of Current Monthly Income & Means Test Calculation/ Calculation of Commitment Period & Disposable Income... 114 Supplemental Forms Folder... 114 Form 23 Certification Concerning Financial Management... 115 Form 25A Plan of Reorganization in Small Business Case... 116 Form 25B Disclosure Statement in Small Business Case... 116 Form 25C Small Business Monthly Operating Report... 116 Form 26 Periodic Report... 116 Form 283 Chapter 13 Debtor s Certifications Regarding Domestic Support Obligations and Section 522... 116 527(a) Disclosure Statement... 116 527(b) Disclosure Statement... 116 Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet... 116 Amended Schedules Signature Declaration... 118 Amendment Cover Sheet... 118 Application/ Order for Fees... 118 Business Income and Expenses... 118 Caption (Generic)... 119 Certificate of Service... 119 Checklist of Forms to File... 119 Creditor Letter - Notice of Filing/ Automatic Stay... 119 Debtor s Rebuttal for Presumption of Abuse... 120 Declaration of Compliance with Rule 9009... 120 Designation of Agent... 120 Discharge of Debtor... 120 Household Goods Sheet (Generic)... 120 How Credit Reports Can Help in Bankruptcy (to give to client)... 120 Motion to Amend Bankruptcy Petition (Generic)... 120 Motions to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13, and from Chapter 13 to Chapter 7 (Generic)... 121 Non-Attorney Preparer Compensation Statement... 121 Non Attorney Preparer Declaration Form 19A... 121 Non Attorney Preparer Declaration Form 19B... 121 Notice of Change of Address... 121 Notice of Motion or Objection... 121 Notice of Motion... 121 Order to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13 and From Chapter 13 to 7... 121 Payment Advices Coversheet... 121 Proof of Authority to Sign and File Petition/Corporate Resolution... 122 Proof of Claim... 122 Proof of Service by Mail... 122 Reaffirmation Agreement... 122 Redemption of Property Agreement... 122 Statement of Information Required by 11 U.S.C. 341... 122 Suggestion of Bankruptcy... 122 6 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Supplemental Schedule for Property Acquired after Discharge... 123 Client Questionnaires... 123 Creditor Forms... 123 Proof of Claim... 123 Creating Proof of Claim Forms When You Represent the Debtor... 123 Creating a Proof of Claim Form When You Represent the Creditor... 126 Accessing the Proof of Claim Form... 126 Involuntary Petition... 127 Means Test Calculator... 129 Means Test Quick Start... 130 What is the Best Case Means Test Calculator?... 131 A Quick Overview of the Means Test Concept... 132 Applying the Means Test/ Calculating Commitment Period & Disposable Income... 133 Indicate Marital Status, Family Size and Household Size... 133 Determining Current Monthly Income... 134 Comparing the Debtor s CMI with the State Median... 137 Deducting the IRS Living Allowance... 139 Deducting the Health Allowance... 140 Other Necessary Expenses: Health Care... 140 Deducting the IRS Housing Allowance... 141 Deducting the Transportation Allowance... 142 Necessary Expenses... 144 Additional Expenses... 145 Entering Debt Payments... 145 Summary and Outcome... 147 Special Circumstances... 148 Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims... 149 Specifying a Means Test Treatment for Priority Claims... 152 Frequently Asked Questions about the Means Test and the Best Case Means Test Calculator... 153 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator... 157 Introduction to the Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator... 158 Quick Overview (Assigning treatment classes, working out a plan, printing, and editing)... 158 What Every Lawyer Should Know About Chapter 13 Plans... 159 Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule D Claims... 159 Accessing this screen... 159 What do the different sections of this screen refer to?... 160 Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule E Claims... 162 Accessing this Screen... 162 Choosing the Treatment Class... 163 Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule F Claims... 163 Accessing this screen... 163 Choosing the Treatment Class... 163 Reference Table of Treatment Classes... 164 Working Out a Repayment Schedule... 166 Sections of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator... 167 Working Out a Plan: The Summary Tab... 167 Accessing the Summary Tab Screen... 167 Summary Totals... 170 Printing the Summary Data... 170 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator: Claims Tab... 171 Entering Attorney s Fees/Filing Fees... 171 Explanation of Columns in Claims tab... 171 Editing Claims from the Claim Treatment Tab... 172 Payout Tab... 172 Explanation of columns in Payout tab:... 172 Liquidation Analysis... 173 Entering Administrative Costs... 173 To Print the Liquidation Analysis... 173 How the Numbers are Calculated... 174 Split Claim Tab... 174 Wage Deduction Tab... 175 Errors! Tab... 176 Other Tab... 177 Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options... 177 Printing Options... 177 Common Questions... 179 Table of Contents 7
Troubleshooting Problems... 180 General Tips... 180 Other Problems... 181 Accessing the 13 Plan Section of the Setup Menu... 182 Changing the Percentage Paid to the Trustee... 183 Don t Accrue Interest on Claims While Unpaid... 183 Changing the Usual (Default) Classification of a Given Type of Claim... 183 Editing Classification Treatments... 184 Adding Classifications... 184 Payout Rank... 185 Undo changes and go back to original settings... 185 Printing Forms... 187 Printing Forms... 188 Selecting All Documents to Print... 188 Printing Options... 189 Privacy Tab... 190 Globally Changing Mask on Form Choices... 191 Options... 192 Printing Multiple Copies... 193 Print Preview Function... 193 Printing Double-Sided on Printers that Can t Duplex... 196 Printing Blank Forms... 197 Amending a Form or Petition... 197 Printing Only the New or Changed Items on an Amended Schedule... 197 Removing All Amended Checkmarks... 198 Creating an Attachment... 198 What is an Attachment in Best Case Bankruptcy?... 198 Adding Attachments... 199 Editing and Reordering Attachments... 200 Changing Attachment Options... 200 Printing Attachments... 200 Replacing a Form with an Attachment You Create... 201 The Best Case Editor... 202 RTF Documents and the Best Case Editor... 202 Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor... 203 Printing from the Best Case Editor... 203 Importing a Scanned Document into the Best Case Editor... 203 Creating a PDF from the Best Case Editor... 203 Print Preview... 203 Saving Documents... 203 Options in the Best Case Editor... 204 Importing RTF Documents from Other Applications... 205 Saving to Your Hard Drive... 205 Printing Multiple Copies of a Document... 206 Exiting the Best Case Editor... 206 Additional Documents Library... 206 Printing Documents in the Additional Documents Library... 207 Merging Several Creditor Records into a Form... 208 Changing Documents in the Additional Documents Library... 209 Adding a Document to the Additional Documents Library... 209 Merge Codes for Adding Documents to the Additional Documents Library... 211 Working with Forms in Your Word Processor... 215 Opening a Form in MS Word or WordPerfect... 216 Saving Merged Forms... 217 Electronic Case Filing... 219 Electronic Case Filing... 220 Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them... 220 Paying Filing Fees On-line... 226 Assigning Judge and Trustee... 226 Filing Form 23 with OneTouch... 226 ECF Manager... 227 Prior Filings Tab... 229 ECF Options... 230 Scanning Documents with BestScan:... 230 How to Use BestScan in the ECF Manager... 231 Working with BestScan in the ECF Manager... 231 8 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
What to Name Your Scanned PDF... 232 Creating Motions for Electronic Filing... 233 PDF Bookmarks... 234 Incorporating PDF Documents Created in Other Applications Using PDF Attachments... 235 Adding Existing PDF Attachments... 235 Scanning an Attachment... 236 Printing PDF Attachments... 237 Replacing a Form with a PDF Attachment You Create... 237 Filing an Amended Document Electronically... 237 Creating a PDF of a Proof of Claim, Involuntary Petition, or Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet... 238 ECF FAQ... 239 Troubleshooting Problems... 241 ECF Requirements... 242 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education... 243 Credit Report Manager... 243 Credit Report Manager... 244 Introduction to the Credit Report Manager... 244 Independent Vendors Provide Credit Reports... 244 Getting Started... 244 Join a Credit Reporting Service... 244 Credit Report Manager Configuration... 247 Report Providers... 247 Login... 247 Ordering and Importing Credit Reports... 248 Viewing Reports and Importing to Best Case... 250 To View Credit Reports... 250 To Import Claims to Best Case Bankruptcy... 250 Data Imported... 251 Working with the Credit Report Manager... 251 Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education... 253 Credit Counseling Requirement (pre-petition)... 253 Debtor Education Requirement (Prior to Discharge)... 253 Ordering Credit Counseling and Debtor Education through Best Case... 253 Ordering Due Diligence and Credit Counseling from OCR Suite Solutions... 255 Filing Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Certificates... 255 Saving Your Credit Counseling Certificate in the Right Place... 256 Scanning a Paper Certificate of Credit Counseling... 257 Attaching the CCC.PDF to Exhibit D... 257 Filing the Debtor s Certification of Completion of Instructional Course Concerning Personal Financial Management (Debtor Education Certification)... 258 File Management, Case Management and General Procedures... 259 AddressFill *... 260 Turning AddressFill On or Off... 261 Spell Check... 261 Case Status, Notes and Filing Information... 262 Accessing notes while working on a case... 262 Date Picker... 262 Changing File Status and Case Status... 263 Adding/changing a follow-up date... 263 Marking a case that needs attention... 263 Adding comments and notes... 264 Adding debtor s phone number, etc.... 264 Changing the way a client is listed in the Client List Window... 264 Changing/adding an office file number... 265 Changing the chapter of filing or type of debtor... 265 Case dates and filing information... 265 Important Dates... 265 User Defined Note Fields... 266 Changing the Case Number and Filing Date... 266 Assigning a Judge or Trustee to a Case... 266 Working with the Client List... 267 Right-Click on Client Name for File Options... 267 Using the Filter Tabs to Hide and Sort Cases... 267 Searching the Client List... 268 Searching Within the Filtered Client List... 268 Printing a List of Clients or Client Count Summary... 269 Table of Contents 9
Exporting the Client List to Comma Seperated Variable (CSV) Format... 270 Printing a Client Summary Sheet/Client Notes... 270 Copying One Client File to a Diskette or a Separate Folder... 270 Drag and Drop Files... 271 Copying a Client File from a Diskette or Another Drive to Your Computer... 271 Rebuilding the Client List... 272 Emailing a Client File... 272 Backing Up and Restoring Files... 273 Tips for backing up files... 273 Backing up files... 274 Restoring backed up files... 275 Restoring Deleted Files... 275 General Procedures... 276 Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another... 276 Copying Creditors from One Schedule to Another... 276 Exporting and Importing a Common Creditor List... 277 Exporting Your Common Creditor List... 277 Importing a Common Creditor List... 277 About the Generic CSV format... 278 Combining Common Creditor Lists from Multiple Machines... 279 Making a Duplicate Copy of a Client File... 279 Making a Standard Client Template... 280 Using the Calculator... 280 Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export... 280 Creditor Import... 281 File format for creditor import... 281 Tips about Data Format... 283 Tips on Exporting from Other Applications in CSV Format... 284 Deleting All Creditors on a Schedule... 285 Creditor Export... 285 Copying a Creditor Schedule from One Client to Another... 286 Converting Word or WordPerfect Addresses into CSV Format for Import... 286 Property Import and Export... 287 Property Import... 288 Property Export... 289 Copying Property Schedules from One Client File to Another... 290 Internet Options... 290 Connect to Websites... 290 U.S. Courts Web Information... 291 Online Tools... 291 Check for Update... 291 What Happens When I Check for Updates?... 292 The Setup Menu... 293 Law firm information... 295 Attorney names... 295 Jurisdictions... 296 Installing Jurisdictions... 296 Some settings for your district are pre-defined in Best Case Bankruptcy... 296 Other settings are defined by the user... 296 Editing Jurisdiction Settings... 297 Basic Information Tab... 298 Jurisdiction Forms List... 299 To Reorder Forms:... 299 To Remove a Form from Your Forms and Schedules Menu... 299 To Add a Form to Your Forms and Schedules Menu... 299 Supplemental Forms... 299 To Specify that a Form Should/Should Not Appear for a Given Type of Case... 300 To Change the Title of a Form... 300 Form Preferences... 300 Print as QuickForm to Allow Editing Before Printing... 300 To Reset to Standard Settings... 301 Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup... 301 Creditor Address Matrix: Disk File Formatting Options... 304 Accessing Disk Formatting Options... 304 Formatting Options for Matrix on Disk... 305 Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options... 305 10 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Jurisdiction: 13 Plan Setup... 308 ECF Setup... 308 Defining Your Own Jurisdiction Settings... 309 Defining settings for divisions within a district... 310 Define settings for different types of cases... 310 Print Report of Jurisdiction Settings... 311 Exemption tables... 311 Printing and Editing Exemption Statutes... 312 Printing exemption statutes... 312 Editing exemption statutes... 313 Canceling Your Changes... 314 Non-attorney preparer information... 314 Preferences... 314 Attorney Compensation Statement Setup... 317 AddressHelper * (Zip Code Lookup List)... 319 Editing Zip Codes in the Zip Code Database... 319 Converting City and County Names to all Uppercase... 320 Macro Phrase List... 320 To use a shortcut that you have already defined... 321 Printing your list of macros... 321 Changing the Hotkey for Spell Check... 321 Common Text Blocks... 321 Accessing the Common Text Blocks:... 322 Creating a Standard Common Text Block... 322 Creating an Updateable Common Text Block... 322 Using a Common Text Block... 323 Common Questions and Troubleshooting... 325 How can I change the chapter of filing?... 326 How can I create a matrix on disk?... 326 Can I enter negative property values for Schedule B?... 326 What if there is no property of a given type for Schedule B?... 326 Whoops! I misspelled the debtor s name. How do I change it?... 326 How do I get a creditor alphabetized under his/her last name?... 327 How do I enter foreign addresses?... 327 Can I copy a creditor from a schedule to my Common Creditor List?... 327 Aside from the AddressFill List, is there a keyboard command to bring up the Common Creditor List?... 327 Is there a way to insert the debtor s name and/or address in places like the description of property?... 327 I m having trouble selecting exemption statutes. I m getting a message that says No exemption table is available.... 327 I want to change to Federal Exemptions, but that selection is grayed out.... 327 How can I make the section symbol?... 327 I have a debtor who is filing as an individual and, in a separate case, as a business. Do I need to retype all of the information?... 328 My court accepts/requires electronic filing. Can I create a PDF file with Best Case Bankruptcy?... 328 Buttons and Icons... 329 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse... 333 For Users New to the Windows Environment... 336 What is Windows?... 336 Windows-based programs... 336 Switching Between Programs in Windows... 336 The Mouse... 336 Terminology of Windows Screens... 336 Icons and buttons... 336 Toolbars, taskbars, menu bars, title bars and scroll bars... 337 Getting Around in Windows Programs... 338 Table of Forms... 340 Technical Details of Installation... 342 Chapter 13 Plan Tutorial... 343 Using the Year-to-Date Subtraction Method to Calculate the Debtor s Gross Income... 349 BestScan for Attachments or BestScan in the ECF Manager?... 352 Table of Contents 11
Introduction Purpose of Best Case Bankruptcy Best Case Bankruptcy was designed to aid law firms in the preparation of debtors forms for bankruptcy filings. It organizes and stores client information, performs calculations, and produces Official Forms and Schedules, ready for filing with the court. Best Case also includes some local forms and variations. If you are in a live CM/ECF district, Best Case can also help you create files for electronic filing and upload them to the court s web site. In Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows, you will enter client information through simple entry screens. Shortcuts throughout the program allow you to copy information from one schedule to another, reducing the chance of typos and the time it takes to prepare forms. Client information is stored in data files, allowing for easy, last-minute changes. The program was not designed for debtors seeking to prepare forms without the help of an attorney, nor was it designed as a tool to learn about or research bankruptcy law. It is assumed that the user is familiar with bankruptcy law, procedures for completing the debtor s filing, and local regulations and rules. We strongly recommend that you obtain a copy of the latest local rules from your bankruptcy court. Many bankruptcy courts make local rules and forms available on their web sites. Overview of Best Case Bankruptcy Customizing Your Program Before entering any case information, you ll customize your program with the Setup Wizard, adding your firm name, attorney choices, installing jurisdictions, and customizing your attorney compensation statement. You will only need to enter this information once, and it can be changed at any time through the Setup Menu. You ll also want to review exemption statutes for accuracy before filing any cases. Although we provide exemption statutes in order to save you time, it is your responsibility to insure that these are accurate and up-to-date. The Setup Wizard appears when you start Best Case Bankruptcy. Client List Window All of your bankruptcy clients will be listed in the Client List Window. For each case, the client s name, chapter of filing, entity, and case status are displayed here. Before entering any case information, you ll select a client or add a new client. Each client s data is stored in an individual data file and can easily be copied from one computer to another. 12 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Client List Window is generally where you will start Adding Clients When you add a new client, you ll be asked to specify the chapter of filing, the type of debtor (individual, joint, corporation, or partnership), and the jurisdiction where the case is being filed. Best Case Bankruptcy uses this information to determine which forms apply to this client. You can later change this information if you need to through the Voluntary Petition. Forms and Schedules Menu When you open a client s file, you ll see a menu of all of the Official Forms and Schedules that apply to this client. You ll work your way through each form, answering questions about the debtor. Generally, you work through the Forms and Schedules Menu from the top down. Complete the Voluntary Petition first, then property schedules and then creditor schedules. The Forms and Schedules Menu, with forms listed in correct print order for your district. Entering Case Information Each entry screen was designed to be easy to follow and quick to complete. As you enter information, you ll notice shortcuts throughout the program. Best Case Bankruptcy automatically checks None boxes, copies the debtor s name and case number to all relevant forms, adds and counts continuation sheets, totals schedules, assembles the creditor address matrix (mailing list), and fills out the Summary of Schedules. To save time, you ll have access to a prorate calculator, state and federal exemption statutes, an AddressHelper, a macro feature and your own Common Creditor List which allows you to build a directory of creditors you encounter frequently. In addition, several questions allow you to build a list of common answers that don t need to be retyped. Introduction 13
Special links allow you to link information between schedules so that it doesn t need to be retyped and remains consistent throughout the filing. For example, descriptions and market values of property items on Schedules A and B can easily be linked to property listed on the exemption and/or lien schedules. Since the information is linked, if you change it in one place, it is changed in all places. Likewise, creditor information can be linked to the codebtor schedule. Printing Forms When you are ready to print, you ll return to the Forms and Schedules Menu and select documents to print: To mark individual documents, press s or click in the white print box to the right of the form. Or, press S-s to mark all forms. Click the Print button in the toolbar, select your printing options, and then click Print to send documents to your printer. Forms produced are typeset quality. Electronic Filing No other software makes electronic filing so easy! After inputting all case information, return to the Forms and Schedules Menu and click the ECF button in the toolbar. This opens the ECF Wizard, which will help you pick the appropriate forms and lead you to the ECF Manager. In the ECF Manager, you can review documents before filing, and then click OneTouch to file your case. System Requirements Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows requires a PC-compatible computer with at least 60 MB of free space on the hard disk, a Pentium III (or equivalent) processor or better, a minimum of 128 MB of RAM, Windows XP, Vista, or 7 installed, a mouse, and a printer attached to the computer which works with Windows. If you would like to use the Best Scan feature, you will need to have a TWAIN compliant scanner installed. If you want to use the Additional Documents Library or the merge feature, you need to have one of the following word processing packages installed: WordPerfect for Windows version 6.1, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11, X3 or Microsoft Word 97, 2000, XP, or 2003. If you are upgrading to a later version of your word processing software, please contact Best Case Solutions to see if our latest version is compatible. Running Best Case on a Mac? Best Case cannot run natively on the Mac. However, Best Case will function on an Intel Core 2 Duo based Mac running either: Boot Camp (Included with each Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard operating system) or Parallels Desktop for Mac (http://www.parallels.com/products/desktop/) Additionally, you will need the following items to run Best Case on an Intel based Mac: A two-button USB mouse A licensed copy of Microsoft Windows XP, Vista or 7. A licensed copy of Microsoft Word 2000 or higher and/or Corel WordPerfect 2000 or higher Adobe Acrobat Reader (free download at http://www.adobe.com) An anti-virus software A scanner (must be TWAIN compliant, and you must install the Windows scanning software to use Best Scan) Note that there are several Windows emulators available for Mac. The Best Case staff is currently testing other programs that mimic the Windows environment on the Mac. Other emulators will be added to the list of acceptable Windows emulators when testing on them has been successfully completed. In the mean time, if you attempt to run Best Case on one of these untested systems, you do so at your own risk, and the Best Case staff will not be able to provide you with technical support. 14 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
How this Manual is Organized Chapter 1 - Installation and Set up will tell you how to install the program under Windows XP, Vista, or 7, how to start the program, and how to customize Setup Options using the Setup Wizard. Chapter 2 - Entering Information provides you the basic information you need to enter data in Best Case Bankruptcy. Chapter 3 - Working with Forms and Schedules explains each form and schedule in detail and walks you through entering data. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator provides and overview of the Means Testing process and shows you how to use the Means Test Calculator to determine a debtor s current monthly income. Chapter 5 - Chapter 13 Plan shows you how to use the Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator to develop a workable plan. Chapter 6 - Printing Forms explains how to print forms in Best Case Bankruptcy, how to preview before printing, how to print multiple copies of forms, how to add attachments, how to edit forms in the Best Case Editor, and how to use the Additional Documents Library. Chapter 7 - Electronic Case Filing includes descriptions of the Best Case OneTouch electronic filing system, the creation of files for electronic filing using our ECF Wizard, and more. Chapter 8 - Creditor Forms and the Credit Report Manager explains how to input information for the Proof of Claim and Involuntary Petition forms and how to use our Credit Report Import and Manager features. Chapter 9 - File Management and General Procedures provides detailed information about managing files, entering case status and comments, time-saving features like spell check, AddressFill, archiving client files to a floppy disk, and other issues not related to entering financial and general client information. Chapter 10 - The Setup Menu describes options tied to the Jurisdiction settings (such as matrix formatting and the order of forms), editing exemption statutes, using the AddressHelper and Macro features and more. Chapter 11 - Common Questions and Troubleshooting has answers to questions that our tech support team encounters frequently, and is a good place to check for quick questions. The Appendix includes a table of buttons used in Best Case Bankruptcy, a comprehensive list of keyboard shortcuts, a table of forms generally applicable to each type of filing, a Chapter 13 Plan Tutorial, as well as some basic information for those who are new to the Windows environment. The Index is a good way to find information quickly if you do not know where to look. We have deliberately left room on the page for you to add your own comments or notes, and have used the binder format to allow you to add additional pages to keep with your manual. This User s Guide is also included on your Best Case CD-ROM in PDF format. Your online help system contains information about the local forms that are included with Best Case Bankruptcy. Search your help file for Local Forms. Context Sensitive Help is a Good Alternative to User s Guide Don t like reading a manual? Best Case Bankruptcy has thorough, context-sensitive help built in. While you re working in the program, just click the Help button in the bottom right corner of the window, or press 1 for detailed instructions for filling out the screen you are in. Introduction 15
Keep Help Open You can keep your help topics open as you work by pressing the Help button, then clicking Options/Keep Help on Top/On Top. When you switch to a new screen in Best Case, press 1 to update the help topic. Technical Support Included in the purchase price of the program is one year of toll-free technical support. You can reach us for technical support in any of the following ways: By telephone: 1.800.492.8037 or 1.847.492.8037 By fax: 1.847.492.8038 By e-mail: help@bestcase.com (be sure to identify yourself and your law firm! Only licensed users are eligible for technical support.) Technical support is available via email during our regular business hours, listed below. You should receive a response within a few hours. If you don t, please call us at the toll-free number above, as email is not always reliable. Our office hours are 8:00 a.m. - 5:30 p.m. Central Time, Monday-Friday. To receive technical support after the first year of ownership, you will need to purchase a maintenance package annually, which includes automatic updates, free technical support, and the use of web services such as OneTouch Plus electronic filing, credit report import, ECF Express, and Check for Update. Our maintenance packages are reasonably priced and are the cheapest way to receive updates to our software. Customer Comments Best Case Solutions welcomes customer feedback. Many of the features in Best Case products have grown out of suggestions from Best Case users. With your comments and suggestions, we are able to continually improve our software. If you have any comments at all about Best Case Bankruptcy, about this manual, or about the help you receive from our technical support representatives, please contact us. Please include your name and the name of your firm in case we need to contact you for clarification. You can write to us at: Best Case Solutions, Inc. Customer Comments PO Box 32 Evanston, IL 60204-0032 Or call us at 1.800.492.8037 or e-mail your comments to info@bestcase.com or fax your comments to 1.847.492.8038. Visit our Web Site For news about our software, links to bankruptcy and legal technology resources, electronic filing resources, and more, we invite you to visit our web site at http://www.bestcase.com. 16 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 1 Installation and Setup In This Chapter Installing the Single-User Version... 18 Entering Unlock Information... 18 Installing the Multi-User Network Version of Best Case Bankruptcy... 18 Installing the Single-User Version of Best Case Bankruptcy on a Network19 Starting Best Case Bankruptcy... 19 The Setup Wizard and Installing Jurisdictions... 20 The Welcome Window... 21 Review Exemption Statutes... 22 Printer Selection... 22 Chapter 1 Installation and Setup 17
Installation and Set up Installing the Single-User Version Exit all programs that are currently running. (This will speed up the installation process and minimize the chance of errors.) With Windows XP, Vista, or 7, the installation window will appear when you insert the CD-ROM; click Install Now to continue. If installation does not automatically begin after a minute: 1. Click the Start button on the Taskbar then choose Settings. 2. Choose Control Panel then double click Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel window. 3. Click the Install button (or the Add New Programs button) then follow the on-screen instructions. 4. The default setting is to install to your C: drive in a new BESTCASE sub-directory. Unless you have a reason to install to a different location, you should just accept the defaults during installation by pressing R or clicking OK. 5. When you get the Installation Complete message, press R or click OK, then remove the CD and store in a safe place. Entering Unlock Information When you start Best Case Bankruptcy, the Registration/Unlock Screen will appear. Best Case Bankruptcy will function in demo mode until you enter the registration name, serial number and code, which can be found on the back of your CD sleeve or the unlock sheet included with your program. Click the Register/Unlock button, enter the registration name, serial number, and registration code exactly as we have them printed on your unlock label. If you enter the registration name incorrectly, you will not be able to unlock your program. Your registration information is for your use only. Allowing other law firms or attorneys to use it is strictly prohibited by our licensing agreement. If you have purchased an add-on, such as a custom Chapter 13 plan, you ll also need to enter your option code. You ll have a separate option code for each add-on you purchased; separate your option codes with a space. If you did not purchase an add-on, leave the option field blank. The Registration System will keep track of your maintenance expiration date for you, and remind you when your maintenance comes up for renewal! When you renew your maintenance package, you ll get a new unlock code to reset the maintenance reminder system. After you successfully enter the unlock information and accept the terms of the license agreement, the Setup Wizard will run, prompting you to enter law firm, attorney, and jurisdiction information. The Setup Wizard is described on page 20. Installing the Multi-User Network Version of Best Case Bankruptcy Our Multi-user Network Version allows several people to use Best Case Bankruptcy simultaneously on a network. Best Case users can even access the same client file at the same time. If you install Best Case Bankruptcy on a network, all users will have access to the same client information and Common Creditor List. Network Licensing: The basic multi-user network version allows one firm to use Best Case Bankruptcy in one office location, with three simultaneous users. If you require additional 18 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
simultaneous users or additional location licenses, or need to run Best Case over a WAN, contact Best Case Solutions at 1.800.492.8037 for pricing. To install on a network: 1. You ll only install Best Case Bankruptcy ONCE. Follow the installation instructions above, substituting your network or shared drive letter for the C:\ drive. 2. From each workstation, create a shortcut from the desktop that points to the bestcase\winbfs.exe file on your network drive: go to the blank desktop where you see all of your program icons. Hold the mouse in the blank space, not over any icon, and press the right mouse button. Go to New, then to Shortcut. In the command line, browse to the winbfs.exe file on the network or type the network drive letter then bestcase\winbfs.exe. For example, if your network drive is F:, you ll type f:\bestcase\winbfs.exe 3. Click Next. When asked for a name for the shortcut, type Best Case Bankruptcy. Click Finish. 3. Repeat step 2 for other workstations. 4. Most network operating systems allow you to assign specific rights to users within each directory. All users who will be running Best Case Bankruptcy should be granted FULL rights to the \BESTCASE directory and all of its subdirectories. 5. The network version requires that each user have a personal work directory for temporary files that are created during the print process. The default location for these files is on the local hard drive in the C:\BESTCASE directory. This local directory will be created automatically when the user starts Best Case Bankruptcy. 6. See Entering Unlock Information on page 18. You only need to enter the unlock information once. Removing the Demo if You Installed the Program to a Different Directory: If anyone has installed the demonstration version on his/her workstation, you ll want to remove it. Check first to see if there are any client files in the demo version which the user wants to save. (You can copy these to a diskette and then to the network version of Best Case Bankruptcy using the Copy Client File to Disk feature described on page 270.) You then want to delete the entire C:\BESTCASE directory on the workstation and the BESTCASE.INI file found in the C:\WINDOWS directory. Installing the Single-User Version of Best Case Bankruptcy on a Network The single-user version of Best Case Bankruptcy can be installed on a shared or network drive, but only for use by one person at a time. With the single-user version on a network, if someone is working in Best Case Bankruptcy, the second person who tries to access Best Case Bankruptcy will get a message saying that someone is already in the program. If you install Best Case Bankruptcy on a network, both users will have access to the same client information and Common Creditor List, but not simultaneously. Install the program once, following the instructions under Installing the Single-User on page 18 but substituting your network drive letter for the C:\ drive. From each desktop, create a shortcut to the Best Case program using step 2 above, under Installing the Multi-User Network Version of Best Case Bankruptcy. Starting Best Case Bankruptcy 1. Click the Start button in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. 2. At the pop-up menu, move the mouse to Programs. 3. In the Programs menu, click on the Best Case Bankruptcy icon: The Best Case Bankruptcy icon also appears on your desktop. You can start the program with either icon. Chapter 1 Installation and Setup 19
The Setup Wizard and Installing Jurisdictions If you start Best Case Bankruptcy and no law firm information has been entered, the Setup Wizard will appear asking for information about the law firm, attorney names, and the jurisdictions you want to install. Information in the Setup Wizard only needs to be entered once, and can be changed at any time through the Setup Menu. (You can also run the Setup Wizard through the Setup Menu at any time. To access the Setup Menu, the Client List Window must be closed.) 1. Enter information as prompted. You will first be asked for the law firm information which will appear on Voluntary Petitions. Click the Setup Law Firm Information button, enter the name of the law firm, press T, then enter the address and phone number, pressing T to move to the next field and S-T to move back. Click OK when you have entered the firm information. If you are a non-attorney bankruptcy petition preparer, click the Non-Attorney Information button instead. 2. For the attorney names, click the Setup Attorney List button, then click Add to add a new name. These are the attorney names as they will appear on signature lines. You will be able to choose from this list for each case. For each attorney, add the attorney name and the state bar number, if you want the bar number to print on signature lines. Normally, the state bar number just appears on the Voluntary Petition, but if you want it to appear wherever the attorney signature appears, click the option Always print state bar number with attorney name, then click OK. When you have finished, click Close. 3. Click the Setup Jurisdictions button to install jurisdiction settings. These settings contain the matrix formatting settings for each district, and, in some cases, lists of local forms and variations. You should install all jurisdictions where you will file cases. For each jurisdiction you want installed, click Install New Jurisdiction, highlight the jurisdiction, and click Select. Click Close when you have all jurisdictions that you want installed. You can install new jurisdictions at any time through your Setup Menu. 4. In the Usual Jurisdiction window, you ll pick the jurisdiction where you file most of your bankruptcy cases. Click the M to view the full list of installed jurisdictions, then click the name of your jurisdiction. This will be the default jurisdiction for all new cases. Click Next. 5. The Attorney Compensation Statement window appears next. You have the option of customizing the attorney compensation statement to specify what your fee excludes and includes. We have set it up with common answers. If you want to change our answers, click the Setup Attorney Compensation Statement button, highlight the appropriate chapter, and click the Change button. There are two tabs here; Basic Layout and Other Included/Excluded, which has standard text regarding what your fee covers. Check this for accuracy. You can click Help to see more detailed information about each question. (You can always return to the Attorney Compensation Setup window through the Preferences section of your Setup Menu later. This is described on page 317.) Click OK to move on. 6. The Creditor Account Number Masking window appears, explaining changes to creditor schedules made in the Official Form changes of December, 2003. Amended forms state that the debtor may either mask all but the last four digits of account numbers or may list full account numbers on creditor schedules and the Statement of Financial Affairs. So that you can mask some account numbers and not others, we ve added a Mask on Form check box to each creditor entry screen. By default, the Mask on Form box will note be checked; so full account numbers will print. If you click the option labeled Default to mask creditor account numbers and show last four digits, then for each new claim you add, Best Case will check the Mask on Form box. Please note that when printing documents, you can override the Mask on Form check box for each claim and choose to mask or show all account numbers. For more information, see Privacy Tab on page 190. 20 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
7. Next, you have a chance to add Common Creditors to your Common Creditor List. If you want to type common creditors now, click the Add Common Creditors button. Typically, you would just add them as you work through the schedules. Notice that you also have the option of having all new creditors added to your Common Creditor List automatically. Click in the check boxes for Schedules D, E, F, and/or G if you want all new creditors to be added automatically. You can also have additional notice parties (parties such as collection agencies who should be notified of the filing but are not creditors) added automatically. Click Next to move on. Import Your Common Creditor List From Competing Programs: If you have been using Best Case Bankruptcy for DOS or Matthew Bender s TopForm for DOS, or Chap7..13 DOS by West Group (Typeset version), you will be able to import your old Common Creditor List after going through the Setup Wizard. See Exporting and Importing a Common Creditor List on page 277. If you were using TopForm for Windows or Chap7..13 for Windows, we can convert your common creditor list for you. If you were using a different competing package, contact our technical support department for information about whether we can convert your common creditor information at 1.800.492.8037 or help@bestcase.com. 8. Next, you can set up keyboard macros for phrases you ll be using frequently. You can add these now or at any time while working in Best Case Bankruptcy. To define macros now, click the Define Macro Keys button. Otherwise, click Next. (For more information about macros, click the More Info button or see page 320.) 9. The next window introduces you to the AddressHelper feature, which fills in the city and state when you enter the zip code throughout Best Case Bankruptcy. There is no information to enter here, but if you want to know more about the AddressHelper, click More Info. Click Next when you are ready to get to the next window in the Setup Wizard. 10. Click Finish Setup Wizard. The Welcome Window appears. The Welcome Window Each time you start Best Case Bankruptcy, the Welcome Window appears. The Welcome Window contains tips about Best Case Bankruptcy. From the Welcome Window, you can open your list of clients, open the last client file you were working on, or start a new client. The Welcome Window displays a tip of the day. Click to open the selection made on the left: either the Client List Window or the last client file. The Welcome Window Double-click on the text here to open the Client List Window or your last client file. Click to start a new file. Chapter 1 Installation and Setup 21
Review Exemption Statutes Best Case Bankruptcy comes with brief descriptions of exemption statutes for all fifty states and D.C. along with the individual and joint dollar limits, where applicable. Best Case Bankruptcy tracks the amount you have claimed under each statute for your reference, but does not limit the amount you can claim. Before filing your first case, please review the exemption statutes that we have provided. (See Printing Exemption Statutes on page 312.) We do not guarantee that these statutes are accurate, complete, or up to date. You are able to edit these statutes, as needed. See page 312 for instructions. We have provided the statutes and limits to save the user time, but in many cases the exemption laws are complex, subject to interpretation, or restricted to certain cases. For example, certain exemptions may not have individual limits, but may be mutually exclusive of other statutes, or may have limits when combined with other statutes. Best Case Bankruptcy doesn t take these limitations into account and cannot be relied on to prevent you from claiming exemptions that are not allowed. Best Case Bankruptcy does not know how to practice law; it is a form preparation tool. The fact that we provide statutes is NO SUBSTITUTE FOR LEGAL KNOWLEDGE. Best Case Bankruptcy does not claim to help you apply exemption statutes correctly. For each case, the attorney representing the debtor should review Schedule C carefully to ensure that all laws have been complied with. It is the responsibility of the attorney filing the forms to be sure that the exemption laws have been applied correctly. Printer Selection Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows uses your default Windows printer settings, so if your printer has been installed properly, there are no settings to change. If your printer has not been installed properly, our tech support team may have some trouble-shooting tips. Call 1.800.492.8037. 22 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 2 Entering Information In This Chapter Adding a New Client... 24 Opening an Existing Client File... 26 Tips on Entering Information... 28 Chapter 2 Entering Information 23
Entering Information When you start Best Case Bankruptcy, the Welcome Window appears. All options in the Welcome Window are explained on page 21. If the Client List Window is not already open, click Open in the Main Toolbar. If you want to know what a button does, hold the mouse over it without clicking on it and a tooltip will appear. Add a new client. Open the Client List Window. The Notes button lights up when a client file has been opened or selected. The Main Toolbar The Client List Window The Print and ECF buttons will light up when a client file is open and the Forms and Schedules Menu is displayed. When you click Open, the Client List Window appears, as pictured below. If this is the first time you have used Best Case Bankruptcy, only the Joseph and Sarah Sample file will be listed. Follow up date and case status are displayed here. Click to make a duplicate copy of the highlighted client. The Client List Window Click the Forms button to open the highlighted client Cases needing attention can be marked through options in the Notes section. By default, cases are sorted by name. Best Case Bankruptcy is designed so that only one client file is open at a time. The first thing you will do before entering information or printing forms is to select an existing client or add a new client. Adding a New Client 1. Click the New button in the Main Toolbar or, if the Client List Window is open, you can click the New Client button in the Client List Window. 2. A window labeled Creating New Client File appears, as below. 24 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
New Client Window 3. Specify the type of debtor and chapter of filing You can click on the appropriate selections with your mouse, or use the T key to move to the next question and use the t or b to move to the answer you want. If you have purchased our Chapter 7-Only or 7 & 13 packages, you will not be able to select from the full list of chapters. Keyboard Shortcut: Wherever you see an underlined letter, you can press A plus the letter to activate the option or jump to that field. Other keyboard shortcuts are listed on page 333. 4. Enter the debtor s first, middle, and last names, and generation (Jr., Sr., and III), if applicable, then presses T. 5. Index As is the way the debtor will appear in the Client List Window and is purely for your reference. You can accept our answer here or type in a new one. Press T to get to the next field. 6. If your office uses numbers to keep track of clients, enter a file number here. This field is optional. Press T. 7. If you have chosen a default jurisdiction in the Setup Wizard, (on page 20), that jurisdiction name will appear. Use the m button to select from a drop-down list of jurisdictions. If you don t see the jurisdiction you want listed, see Installing Jurisdictions on page 296. Your answer for the jurisdiction determines the list of forms to be created. Miscellaneous Printing Options associated with the jurisdiction are stored in the Setup Menu, described in the jurisdiction section of this guide starting on page 296. 8. Selecting the Federal Forms Set: When you create a new client file, Best Case defaults to using the Official Forms and Schedules effective December 1, 2013. If you want to select a different set of forms, click the Forms drop-down list at the top of the New Client Window, and you will be given the following choices: 2013-12 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 12/1/13 and after version of Official Forms and Schedules. 2013-04 Forms sets the debtor s forms to the 4/1/13 11/30/13 version of Official Forms and Schedules. 2012-12 Forms sets the debtor s forms to the 12/1/12 3/31/13 version of Official Forms and Schedules. 2011-12 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 12/1/11 11/30/12 version of Official Forms and Schedules. 2010-12 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 12/1/10-11/30/11 version of Official Forms and Schedules. Chapter 2 Entering Information 25
2010-04 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 4/01/10 11/30/10 version of the Official Forms and Schedules. 2009-12 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 12/01/09 3/31/10 version of the Official Forms and Schedules. 2008-12 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 12/01/08 11/30/09 version of the Official Forms and Schedules. 2008-01 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 1/01/08-11/30/08 version of the Official Forms and Schedules. 2007 Forms sets the debtor s forms list to the 12/01/07-12/31/07 version of the Official Forms and Schedules. 2006 Forms BAPCPA sets the debtor s forms list to the October 1, 2006 version of the Official Forms and Schedules. 2005 Forms BAPCPA indicates that you will be using the post-bankruptcy Reform forms and schedules valid 10/17/2005-9/30/2006. 1979-2005 Forms indicates that you will be using the pre-bankruptcy Reform version of the forms and schedules. 9. When you have finished selecting the chapter and type of debtor, click the OK button or press R. The new client now appears in the Client List Window. Opening an Existing Client File If there is nothing on the screen, click the Open button in the toolbar to open the Client List Window. There are several ways to open a client file: Double-click on the client name in the Client List Window OR Use the Last button in the toolbar to open any of the last 9 clients you ve worked on. The keyboard equivalent is A-F for the file menu, R, then the number corresponding to the case OR Highlight the client then click the Forms button in the bottom left-hand corner of the window OR Move the highlighter bar to the client s name using the b key (or begin to type the client s name) then press R. If you have a lot of cases, you can jump to a client file by starting to type the client name. This will take you to the Forms and Schedules Menu for this client, with the client name, chapter of filing, type of debtor, and district displayed in the title bar of the window. You will see a list of all Official Forms and Schedules that apply to this client, based on the chapter of filing and type of debtor. For some districts, a Local Forms folder will appear at the bottom of the list. 26 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Select items to print by clicking in this box, or by pressing the s. All official forms and schedules that apply to the client will appear, based on the chapter of filing and type of debtor. Click to close the Forms and Schedules Menu and return to the Client List Window. The Forms and Schedules Menu This section of the User s Guide will lead you through the entry screen for each form. Since not all forms apply to every client, some forms listed below will not appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu for your client. Although Best Case Bankruptcy keeps track of which of the Official Forms need to be produced, we ve included a chart for your reference that lists the Official Forms usually required for each type of debtor in Appendix D. Note that your local court may have additional local forms that need to be filed. Check your local rules for information. Forms and Schedules Shortcuts Right-click on a form to get a drop-down menu of choices: Open Form - opens the data entry screen for the form. Attachments - opens the attachments screen so you can create, edit or view attachments for this document. Prints Preview - shows the document as it will look when printed. Print - Marks the form to print and opens the print dialog box. Print All - Marks all forms to print and opens the print dialog box. Mark to print - just marks the form to print. Click the Print button to open the Print dialog box. Unmark to print - removes the printer from next to the document so that it will not be included in the next job you send to the printer. Keyboard Shortcut: The R key is equivalent to double-clicking in places where one item in a list is highlighted. Use it to open a highlighted client s file, to open a highlighted form in the Forms and Schedules Menu, or to change a highlighted entry on the summary list windows for Schedules A-H. (Use the t and b keys to highlight the item if you don t like to use the mouse.) Opening Forms and Schedules You can open a form or schedule in any of the following ways: Starting at the Client List Window, double-click on a client s name. In the Forms and Schedules Menu: Double-click on the name of the form or Chapter 2 Entering Information 27
Click on the name of the form then click the Open button in the bottom left corner or Move the highlighter bar to the appropriate form with your b key, then press R. For the most common forms, there are hotkeys you can use to open the form; see the list in the sidebar. Time-Saver: Hotkeys to Open Forms To open a form, you can double-click on it or press one of the keys listed below: 1 Opens the Voluntary Petition 3 Opens the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 4 Opens Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims 6 Opens the Summary of Schedules 7 Opens the Statement of Financial Affairs 8 Opens the Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention A B C D E F G H I J Opens Schedule A Opens Schedule B Opens Schedule C Opens Schedule D Opens Schedule E Opens Schedule F Opens Schedule G Opens Schedule H Opens Schedule I Opens Schedule J Appendix B on page 333 lists keyboard shortcuts throughout the program. Tips on Entering Information in Best Case Bankruptcy Never Enter None You never need to enter the word none ; none boxes will be checked for you and the word none will be inserted where appropriate when you leave items blank. For example, if the debtor has no real property, leave Schedule A blank. Best Case Bankruptcy will type None on the form. On Schedule B, the none column will be checked automatically when no property in a given category is listed. (i.e. - When you don t insert any property of that type.) Likewise, the none boxes will be checked on the Statement of Financial Affairs for questions you do not answer. Moving from field to field Use T to move forward from field to field. Use S-T to move backward. Press R in an entry screen to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Pressing R is identical to clicking OK in most places. In multi-line answer fields, R inserts a line break. To jump to a field, double-click in that field. Information in the field will be highlighted, and any information you type will overwrite the current information. 28 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
To insert information in a field without typing over what is already there, single click in the field. An insertion bar will appear where you clicked. Text to the left of the insertion bar will stay put, and text to the right will move right as you type. Press C-z to undo a change in a field. Spell Check You can run Spell Check in text fields by pressing C-\. Spell Check is described fully on page 261. AddressHelper You can change the hot key for spell check using your Macro feature. See page 320. When you enter address data, our AddressHelper fills in the city and state for you after you enter the zip code. This will mean quicker data entry time and fewer misspelled city names or incorrect state abbreviations. You ll notice that after entering the street and pressing T, the cursor will jump to the zip code field, skipping the city and state. More information about AddressHelper is provided on page 319. Common Creditor List and AddressFill The Common Creditor List allows you to save names and addresses of creditors that you encounter frequently. You can access the Common Creditor List from Schedules D, E, F, G, H, I, the List of Equity Security Holders and relevant sections of the Statement of Financial Affairs. (It is described more fully on page 69.) The Common Creditor List contains an AddressFill feature; in the creditor name field, just begin to type the creditor name and your Common Creditor List appears, as pictured below: The AddressFill List appears when you add new creditors allowing you to select a creditor from your Common Creditor List As you type, the highlighter moves to the creditor which most closely matches what you ve typed. Press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. The creditor name and address will be filled in for you, as pictured below. Chapter 2 Entering Information 29
More information about AddressFill can be found on page 260. If you don t want to use AddressFill, access your Common Creditor List with the following keyboard commands instead: Press 0 to access your Common Creditor List while in the creditor name field or press 9 to access a list of scheduled creditors. In Schedule I, press 0 to access the Common Creditor List while in the employer name field. In entry screens for the creditor schedules D, E and F, and additional notice parties, press C-0 from the creditor name field to copy a scheduled creditor to the Common Creditor List. Schedules D-G have an Add to CCL check box that allows you to add the creditor to your Common Creditor List. Just click on the box or press A-L from any field to mark the box. To add an entry that is not in your Common Creditor List, type the name then press T. The AddressFill list will disappear. AddressClipper AddressClipper allows you to put a name and address from Best Case Bankruptcy onto your Windows clipboard. You can then paste the name and address in other places within Best Case Bankruptcy or in other Windows applications. To copy an address to the clipboard, position the cursor in any field that is part of the address and press C-S-c. In the entry below, the cursor can be positioned in the creditor name field, any of the street address fields, the city, state or zip code fields. Wherever you position the cursor, the entire address will be copied to the clipboard. Position the cursor in any of these fields then press C-S-C to copy to your clipboard To paste the name and address elsewhere in Best Case Bankruptcy, just position the cursor in a name or address field and press C-S-v. The entire name and address will be copied for you and each bit of information will appear in the correct place. Note that you won t be able to paste the address in a non-address field. To paste the name and address in a different Windows application, such as Word or WordPerfect, use the standard Windows paste command: C-v. Printing When you are ready to print in Best Case Bankruptcy, you ll first select which forms you want to print by marking them. When a document is marked to print, a printer icon appears next to it on the right side of the window. In the picture below, the Voluntary Petition and Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments are marked to print. 30 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Voluntary Petition Exhibit D and Form 3 are marked to print You can print single forms, all forms, or a few forms at one time. To mark a form to print, highlight the form using the b key, then press s. Or, to use the mouse, click in the white box that appears to the right of the document name when the document is highlighted, where the printers appear in the picture above. To mark all forms to print, press S-s. Once a form or forms are selected, click the Print button in the toolbar or press C-P to open the Print Documents dialog box. Printing Options displayed in the Print Documents window are explained in detail in Chapter 4. Press R to begin printing. To exit print preview or the Print Documents dialog box, press E. Cut, Copy, and Paste There are shortcuts throughout the program that allow you to copy information from one schedule to another. However, there may be other places where you want to copy bits of information or cut and paste. You can highlight the information that you want to cut or paste then use the Cut, Copy and Paste commands listed under the Edit option of the main menu bar. Alternatively, you can use the standard Windows keyboard commands for cut and paste. Using the mouse, highlight the information that you want to copy or cut. 1. Press C-C to copy the information, or C-x to cut. 2. Move the cursor to the place where you want the information inserted and press C-v. Since the information is still in the clipboard, you can move to another location and paste again if you need to. This bit of information will stay in the clipboard until you cut or copy another piece of information. Chapter 2 Entering Information 31
Chapter 3 Working with Forms and Schedules In This Chapter Voluntary Petition...33 Exhibit C to Voluntary Petition...41 Exhibit D to the Voluntary Petition...42 Form 3A. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments...42 Form 3B. Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee...44 Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims...47 Form 6. Summary of Schedules...50 Overview of Links Between Schedules...51 Schedules A-H: Summary List Windows & Entry Screens...51 Schedule A. Real Property...53 Entering Lien and Exemption Information through Schedule A...55 Schedule B. Personal Property...59 Schedule C. Property Claimed as Exempt...63 Tools and Shortcuts Available in Creditor Schedules...69 Common Creditor List...69 Schedule D. Creditors Holding Secured Claims...73 Schedule E. Creditors Holding Unsecured Priority Claims...81 Schedule F. Creditors Holding Unsecured Nonpriority Claims...85 Schedule G. Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases...88 Schedule H. Codebtors...89 Schedule I. Current Income of Individual Debtors...91 Schedule J. Current Expenditures of Individual Debtors...96 Prorate calculator...96 Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules...98 Form 7. Statement of Financial Affairs...98 Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention...101 Compensation Statement of Attorney for Debtor(s)...104 Notice to Individual Consumer Debtor of Available Chapters...106 List of Equity Security Holders...106 Verification of Creditor Matrix...107 Creditor Address Matrix...108 Numbered List of Creditors...112 Corporate Ownership Statement (Rule 7007.1)...113 Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number...113 Form 22. Statement of Current Monthly Income...114 Supplemental Forms...114 Creditor Forms...123 (See Index to find forms not listed above.) 32 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Voluntary Petition Tabs at the top of the window help to organize information. Voluntary Petition - Debtor Information Click to access the next tab listed at the top of the window, or press C-T. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press 1 or double-click on Form 1. Voluntary Petition. The Voluntary Petition Window appears with several tabs at the top. The section headings below correspond to the tab titles. Debtor/Business Debtor This screen contains basic debtor information. Debtor s Name: This is copied from the New Client window, and will appear in all places on the Official Forms asking for the debtor s name. Press T to move to the next field. Index As: This refers to the way the client is listed in the Client List Window, and was copied from the New Client Information that you entered. It is for your reference only. If you change this answer, the client will be listed differently in the Client List Window, but the information on the forms will not be changed. Social Security/Federal Tax ID: Enter the full Social Security number or federal tax ID of the debtor. If you enter a nine digit answer, Best Case Bankruptcy will insert dashes appropriately. You can enter more than one ID number here, if necessary. If the text you type does not follow the standard social security number format (###-##-####), you will receive a warning message but you can keep your answer. Note that when you print forms, Best Case will mask the Social Security number for you on all forms except Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number. (See Privacy Tab on page 190.) Office File Number: The office file number is for your reference only, and is optional. You can use any combination of letters and numbers in this field. All other names: To enter another name, click the Other Names button to the right of the Name Field. Select Insert from the right hand side of the window. Select a Role Code from the drop-down menu, and then enter in the other information in the fields provided. Enter any other names the debtor has used in the past eight years, including married, maiden and trade names. /s/ Signature: The Debtor or Joint Debtor electronic signature defaults to the name entered in the Voluntary Petition. If the debtor is incapacitated, or there is another reason why they cannot sign, this button can be used to enter a substitute signature. Street Address: If the street address should be divided into two lines, type the first line, press R, then type the second line. Press T. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 33
Zip Code: The zip code field allows you to enter a five-digit zip code or the five digit zip code with the four digit extension. If you do not enter the four-digit extension of a zip code, the last four digits will appear as 0000 on the screen, but only the first 5 digits will be printed on the forms. Why did it skip the city and state? Pressing T will take you from the street address field to the zip code field. When you type the zip code, our AddressHelper feature will fill in the city, state and county for you. For a complete description of the AddressHelper, and instructions for turning it on or off, see page 319. County: We fill in the most common county for this zip code. You can accept this answer or type a new one. An option in the Miscellaneous Options section of your Setup Menu allows you to include the debtor s phone number on the Voluntary Petition if you or your court prefers it. A separate option for the Eastern District of New York prints an Attorney Code in the upper right corner. See page 305. When you have completed the debtor information, click on the button labeled Next Tab or press C-F. Joint debtor If this is a joint case, your next tab will be Joint Debtor. Type the name, full social security number, and other names of the joint debtor, if applicable. Same as Debtor button: If the address of the joint debtor is the same as the debtor s, click the button labeled Same as Debtor. The debtor s address and mailing address will be copied to the joint debtor screen. When you have entered the joint debtor information, click Next Tab. Business Info If the client is a corporate debtor or partnership, or if you indicate in the nature of debt question in the Filing Information tab that the debts are business debts, you ll have a tab labeled "Business Info". The corresponding entry screen asks for the location of principal assets and the name and title of the authorized signer. Signer of a Foreign Representative: Check this box if you want the form to indicate that the authorized business signer is a foreign representative pursuant to 11 U.S.C. 1511. Click on Next Tab to get to the filing information. Filing Information The Filing Information tab in the Voluntary Petition entry screen 34 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Nature of Debt and Venue: By default, Best Case Bankruptcy selects Non-Business/Consumer for the Nature of Debt if you have selected Individual or Joint for the entity, and Business if you have selected any other answer for entity. You can change the answer here if you like. Click on the appropriate button(s) to specify the venue; note that the venue choices are not mutually exclusive. Nature of Business: Use the checkboxes here to identify certain types of debtors for which the Bankruptcy Code provides special treatment or requirements. Filing Fee: By default, Best Case Bankruptcy selects Attached for this question. If you indicate in this screen that the filing fee will be paid in installments, Form 3. The Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments will appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu for this client. If this is a corporate debtor, you will not have the choice of paying the filing fee in installments. Selecting the Waiver of Filing Fee option indicates that the debtor is applying for a waiver of the filing fee under the enactment of 28 U.S.C. 1930(f), and automatically adds Form 3B. Application for Waiver of Chapter 7 Filing Fee to the Main List of forms and Schedules for the client. (For more information, see Form 3B. Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee on page 44.) The filing fee portion is grayed out for business debtors who must pay the entire filing fee at the time of filing. Type of Debtor, Chapter of Filing, and Jurisdiction: The type of debtor, chapter of filing, and jurisdiction have been copied from the Creating New Client File Window. You can change them here at any time while you re entering a case, but if you do, the list of forms on the Forms and Schedules Menu may also change. If you want to change the jurisdiction, click the m next to the jurisdiction field and click on your choice. If you do not see your choice, see Installing Jurisdictions on page 296. The matrix format, the set of exemption statutes, and various printing options for this case will depend on the jurisdiction you select here, as defined in the Jurisdictions section of the Setup Menu. Case Number & Date Filed: When you use OneTouch Plus Electronic Filing to submit your case, Best Case inserts the case number and the filing date in the Client Notes screen for you. If you know the case number, or you need to change or delete it, you can do so in the Case Status tab of the Client Notes. Exemption Election: Specify whether you will be using federal or state exemptions with this case. This choice corresponds to the exemption check box on Schedule C when it is printed. If you choose state exemptions, you can choose which state s laws you want to use; Best Case Bankruptcy defaults to the state s laws associated with this district in the Jurisdictions section of your Setup Menu. Exemption Analyzer: Clicking on the Exm 522 Analysis button opens up the 522 Exemption Analyzer, which examines information you enter about the debtor's domicile and homestead purchase histories and helps you to determine which state's exemptions the debtor should use and whether or not the debtor qualifies for the entire homestead exemption under the new Code. For more information see 522 Exemption Analyzer on page 39. If the federal exemption choice appears grayed out in the program, an option in the Setup Menu specifies that federal exemptions are not allowed in this state. You can change this setting through the jurisdictions section of the Setup Menu. (See Editing Jurisdictions Settings on page 297.) Choosing the Default Exemption Set for this District: For some states, the federal bankruptcy exemptions are more generous than the state s, and you might always want to use the Federal Exemptions. You can make a quick change in your Setup Menu to default to the Federal Statutes: Close the Voluntary Petition, then press C-S-J to edit the jurisdiction. With the box Federal Bankruptcy Exemptions permitted checked, check the box that says Default for new cases then click OK Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 35
Attorney Names: If just one attorney has been entered in the Setup Menu, this name will be filled in for you on the Voluntary Petition. If you have several choices, select the attorney by clicking on the m button next to the attorney field. You will get a pop-down list of all attorneys that you have entered through the Setup Menu. Click on the appropriate attorney name or, you can type a new name directly into the field if you don t want the name saved for new cases. Press T to move to the next field. Editing Attorney Names: If you need to edit the attorney name through the Setup Menu, reselect it here to register your changes for this case. Pro Se Filings: If you are preparing forms for this debtor but are not representing him or her, click the Debtor not represented by an attorney box. A field will appear where you can type in the debtor s phone number, which will print in lieu of the attorney signature. Your firm name will not print on forms for this Pro Se filing. When you have completed the filing information, click Next Tab. Info 2/ Ex D If this is an individual filing, click the Exhibit D Debtor Counseling Button and then select the Debt Counseling Certification option that applies to the debtor. If you select that the debtor is requesting a waiver of the Debt Counseling Certification prior to filing, you can detail the "exigent circumstances" in the text box provided. If you will be attaching the debtor s certificate, see page 255 for help scanning and attaching the PDF file. (Note that for joint filings a separate button is available for the joint debtor s credit counseling requirement, and debtor and joint debtor version of Exhibit D will be included in the client s forms and schedules menu.) If you indicate that the debtor is requesting a waiver of the debt counseling certification requirement prior to filing, you can use the Best Case Editor to create a standard attachment detailing the exigent circumstances behind the debtor's request for waiving the certification requirement. (For more information see Creating an Attachment on page 198.) If the Debtor is the tenant of a residential property and the landlord has a judgment for possession, check the appropriate box, and then fill in the landlord's name and address information. Check the appropriate boxes to indicate whether debtor's landlord has a judgment for possession of the premises, whether the debtor is permitted to cure a default and/or whether a deposit for rent due has been included with the petition. if the debtor has property which is harmful or is alleged to be harmful to the public health, click the Exhibit C checkbox. When you check this box, the form Exhibit C will appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu which you will need to fill out to describe the nature and location of the property. Click Next Tab to continue. Chapter 11 Use the Chapter 11 tab to determine which boxes should be marked in the Chapter 11 Debtor s section of the form, such as whether the debtor is a small business, whether the debtor s liquidated debts are less than $2.19 million and whether a plan will be included with the petition. If you will be filing Exhibit A for this debtor, check the box marked Exhibit A is attached and made a part of this petition. Checking this box causes Exhibit A to appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Click on Next Tab to get to the filing information. Note that in March, 1998, the category of chapter 11 debtors required to file Exhibit A : was modified to include corporations, partnerships, or other entities, but only if the debtor has issued publicly traded equity securities or debt instruments. Most small corporations are not required to file Exhibit A. 36 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Chapter 11 tab is available for any Chapter 11 filing; however the checkboxes available on this tab will vary based on the filing type and version of the form you are using. (See Selecting the Correct Set of Federal Forms for more info on switching form sets.) Click Next Tab to continue. Prior/Related The Prior/Related tab makes it easy to enter multiple prior or pending filings and create an attachment. If the debtor has filed for bankruptcy in the last 8 years click the Insert button and fill in the date, location and case number, and then click OK. If there are multiple prior filings, simply hit Insert again and fill in the details for the additional Case. Best Case will print the prior cases on the form in reverse chronological order, and if there are more than two prior filings, Best Case will enter See Attachment in the prior bankruptcies section of the form and generate an attachment detailing the additional prior filings. To add a pending bankruptcy to the form click the Insert button below the list of pending cases and fill in the appropriate information. Do this for each pending bankruptcy you wish to list on the Voluntary Petition. If there is more than one pending bankruptcy, Best Case will print See Attachment on the form and generate an attachment to detail the additional pending bankruptcies. If there is a pending filing concerning the debtor s affiliate, general partner or partnership in the same district, be sure to check the box under the pending filings list. If your computer is connected to the Internet and you want to search PACER to see if the debtor has any prior filings on record, simply click the U.S. Party/Case Index button. The PACER login page will open in a new browser window, and the debtor's Social Security Number is copied to your clipboard so that you can quickly paste it in to the search box when running your query. Click Next Tab to continue. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 37
Statistical/Administrative The Statistical/Administrative Tab in the Voluntary Petition. There are two auto-calculation options here. This screen asks for the funds available, estimated number of creditors, assets and liabilities. You can choose your answers here or have Best Case Bankruptcy calculate these for you. Usually, you ll answer the Funds Available question yourself then use the Calculate automatically check box at the bottom of the screen for the estimated number of creditors, assets and liabilities, as shown here. Answers on this screen will be updated as you add information to the Schedules. Note that: 1. There are two separate Calculate checkboxes: one to the right of the Funds Available section which calculates just the funds available question and one at the bottom of the screen which calculates the estimated assets, liabilities, and number of creditors. You can turn on both of these, either one of these, or neither of them. Neither of these boxes affects any of the other calculations Best Case makes. 2. When you have Best Case calculate these answers automatically, the answers are updated as you add information in the property and creditor schedules. If you do use calculate automatically for either or both of these sections, make sure you have entered all property and creditor information in Schedules A-F before printing the Voluntary Petition. 3. If you are preparing an emergency filing, and won t be filing the Schedules with the Voluntary Petition, you ll want to turn the auto-calculation features in this screen off and answer these questions yourself. Funds Available You can use the mouse to click on the appropriate answer or click on the box labeled Calculate Funds automatically to have Best Case Bankruptcy answer this question for you based on information you enter for the schedules. How Best Case Calculates Funds Question Automatically: If you choose to have Best Case Bankruptcy calculate the funds available question, the program takes all of the debtor s assets from Schedules A and B and subtracts all exempt property (from Schedule C), all priority claims (from Schedule E) and all secured claims (from Schedule D). If the amount left is greater than 0, Best Case Bankruptcy checks the box that indicates that funds will be available for unsecured (Schedule F) creditors. If the amount left is less than or equal to 0, it checks the box which indicates that no funds will be available. Since there may be special circumstances that make this calculation less straightforward than our formula above indicates, you have the option of choosing the answer here yourself by removing the checkmark from the calculate automatically button and clicking on your answer. 38 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Estimated Assets, Liabilities and Number of Creditors You can either click on your choices for these answers or click in the box labeled Calculate Estimated Creditors, Assets and Liabilities automatically to have Best Case Bankruptcy calculate them based on information you enter for the property and creditor schedules. When you have finished entering information for the Voluntary Petition, click the OK button or press R. If you have left vital information blank for this form, an error message will appear. When you exit, you will be returned to the Forms and Schedules Menu. You ll notice that the form icon to the left of the Voluntary Petition now looks like it is filled in. Editing the Voluntary Petition For added flexibility, the Voluntary Petition can be opened and edited in the Best Case Editor feature. You might want to edit the Voluntary Petition if you have numerous other names to list or pending bankruptcies and don t want to create an attachment. Attachments are described on page 198. To edit the document in the Best Case Editor, please see The Best Case Editor on page 202. We do not recommend merging this form into Word or WordPerfect using the merge feature. Although it is possible, merging will produce an older version of the form which does not contain the latest changes. 522 Exemption Analyzer The 522 Exemption Analyzer examines information you enter about a debtor's domicile and homestead purchase history and helps you to determine which state's exemptions the debtor should use and whether or not he is eligible for the full homestead exemption. Using the Exemption Analyzer To perform an exemption analysis: NOTE: The results of the analyses Best Case performs and the exemption statutes recommended are only suggestions. Exemption laws can be complex, subject to interpretation or restricted to certain cases. It is the responsibility of the attorney representing the debtor to select which exemption statutes to use and to ensure that all laws are complied with and that statutes are applied correctly and are up to date. The fact that we recommend a state's exemptions or make suggestions regarding how the homestead exemption limit applies to a debtor are NOT SUBSTITUTES FOR LEGAL KNOWLEDGE. Best Case Bankruptcy does not know how to practice law; it is a form preparation tool. 1 Open a client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu, and then open Form 1. Voluntary Petition to the Filing Information tab. 2 Click the Exm 522 Analysis button in the exemption election section of the screen. 3 In the fields provided enter the state abbreviations and move in dates for the debtor's domicile history starting with the most recent date and proceeding in reverse chronological order. 4 If applicable, enter the state abbreviations and acquisition dates of the debtor's homestead history. Again, be sure to start with the most recent dates first and proceed in reverse chronological order. (If the debtor's current homestead is a family farm or if he is a tenant in entirety, be sure to check the appropriate box.) 5 Case Filing Date: When calculating the length of time a debtor has been domiciled in his current state, or how long it has been since the debtor made his last homestead acquisition, the date Best Case uses for comparison is the Case Filing Date. By default, the case filing date is the current date. If you want to Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 39
change this date, you can do so by clicking the up or down arrows next to the date field or by simply typing a new date in the Case Filing Date field. 6 When you have finished entering the information, click the Analyze button. The results of the 522 Exemption Analysis are displayed in the text box at the bottom of the Analysis Parameters tab where you entered the debtor's information. To see the results in a larger screen, click the Analysis tab. 7 Click the OK button to save your changes and exit the 522 Exemption Analyzer. What the Analysis Results Mean Choosing a State for Exemptions: If the debtor meets the 730 day requirement, the Analyzer recommends choosing the exemptions for the debtor's current state of domicile. If the debtor does not meet the 730 day requirement, the Analyzer looks at the debtor's domicile history for the 180 days prior to the 730 day period and recommends a state based on the dates entered. Analyzing the Homestead Exemption Limit: The debtor is eligible for the entire state homestead exemption if he has owned the homestead for over 3.3 years, or if he purchased the homestead with money using the interest transferred from another property in the same state that was purchased prior to the beginning of the 3.3 year period. If the debtor's homestead purchase record does not meet either of the above requirements, the new Code places a $125,000 cap on the debtor's homestead exemption limit. NOTE: The property may be exempt from the Homestead exemption limit if it is: (1) the principal residence of a family farmer; (2) Or a property in which the debtor is a Tenant by Entirety. For more information, see New Homestead Exemption Rules Under the Bankruptcy Reform Act of 2005 ( 522(o) (p) (q)). Exhibit A to Voluntary Petition Exhibit A will only appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu if this is a corporation or partnership and you checked the option Exhibit A is attached and made a part of this petition in the Business Info tab in the Voluntary Petition. The data entry screen for Exhibit A closely matches the questions asked on the printed form. If any of the company s securities are registered under section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, enter the SEC file number here. The financial data reflects the debtor s condition on this date. Dollar fields are formatted for you. Exhibit A to Voluntary Petition: Financial Data Tab 40 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The unknown box will insert the word unknown in the debt securities column and leave the number of holders blank. Click on the Comments/Shareholders tab at the top of the window to enter other information. Exhibit A to Voluntary Petition: Comments/Shareholders Tab Exhibit C to Voluntary Petition As of December 1, 2001, the Voluntary Petition contains a question about whether the debtor has any property that is (or is alleged to be) harmful to the public health or safety. This question appears on the second page of the Voluntary Petition in the Exhibit C section. By default, Best Case Bankruptcy checks the No box for you. If your debtor does have hazardous property: 1. Open the Voluntary Petition and click the Info 2/ExD tab. 2. Check the Exhibit C box at the bottom of the window then click OK to save your changes. 3. Back in the Forms and Schedules Menu, you ll notice that Exhibit C to the Voluntary Petition appears below the Voluntary Petition. Double-click on Exhibit C to open the form. 4. There are only two parts to Exhibit C. In the first part, you ll describe the harmful property and in the second part, you ll describe the nature and location of the dangerous condition. These are large text boxes, but if you do need extra room, you can use our attachment feature to add additional pages described on page 198, or edit the document in the Best Case Editor, described on page 202. Note: This Exhibit C form is a federal form that is new in 2001. It is completely different from the Oregon Local Form, Exhibit C, which bears the same name. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 41
Exhibit D to the Voluntary Petition Exhibit D to the Voluntary Petition lets you specify the Debtor and Joint Debtor s credit counseling status. Any individual debtor must complete and file Exhibit D. In a joint case, the joint debtor must also complete and file a separate copy of Exhibit D. You can access Exhibit D by double clicking it in the forms and schedules menu or by clicking on the Info Exhibit D - Debtor Counseling button available in the Info/Ex D tab of the Voluntary Petition. You must open Exhibit D and set and set a credit counseling status for the debtor /joint debtor before Best Case will allow you to file the case with OneTouch Plus electronic filing. (Note that for joint filings, a separate form will be available in the forms and schedules menu, and the Info 2/ Ex D tab will have a separate button for entering the joint debtor s credit counseling status.) Debtor Counseling/ Joint Debtor Counseling The options available in this tab match the options on the form. By default, Best Case will select Credit Counseling has NOT been obtained, if this option is selected you will not be able to file the case with OneTouch. If you indicated that the debtor Requested but was unable to obtain counseling within 7 days be sure to enter the exigent circumstances in the text field provided. You can use the standard attachment feature to create the accompanying motion for determination. (See Adding Attachments on page 199 for more information.) If the debtor has completed credit counseling in the last 180 days and he has the certificate, you can save a PDF copy of the certificate to the ECF Manager as CCC.PDF, and Best Case will upload it as part of your OneTouch Filing. If you need to include the certificate with Exhibit D, you can use the standard attachment feature to attach a copy of the PDF to the form. Form 3A. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments Enter up to four subsequent payment dates and amounts. If the balance is to be paid through the Chapter 13 trustee, you can only enter three payment amounts. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments 42 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If this client is an individual or a husband and wife filing jointly, and if you specified on the Voluntary Petition in the Filing Information tab that the filing fee will be paid in installments, this form will appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu. To open this form, highlight it in the Forms and Schedules Menu and press R. The entry screen allows you to specify the amount paid with the filing and dates and amounts for up to four future payments. The total is calculated for you at the bottom of the entry window. Date Picker The Date Picker is available in Form 3 and the Notes section of the program to help you select dates. You ll see the Date Picker icon, pictured above, in the Case Notes section next to the follow-up date field and next to all date fields in the Filing Information tab of Notes and in Form 3. To access it, just click on the icon pictured above next to the field or press [F10]. When you click the Date Picker icon, a calendar appears with today s date marked. When you click on a date in the Date Picker, the date will be filled in for you and the Date Picker will disappear. You can navigate through the calendar using the following tools: Jump backward or forward one year. Jump backward or forward one month. Paste in today's date. Find a date exactly 1, 2, 3 or 4 weeks or 15, 30, 60, 90 or 120 days from today's date and paste it in. Close Date Picker without selecting a date. If you prefer to use the keyboard: Press [T] to fill in today s date Without pulling up the Date Picker calendar, press [+] to move up one day, [-] to move back one day, [pagedown] to move forward one week, [pageup] to move back one week. If part of the filing fee is going to be paid through the Chapter 13 Plan, click the box labeled Balance to be paid through plan by Chapter 13 Trustee. (This box doesn t appear for chapter 7 cases.) You ll notice that the fourth payment slot disappears. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 43
You can indicate that the balance of the filing fee is to be paid through the plan Enter Filing Fee to be Paid Through Chapter 13 Trustee in the Plan Calculator: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on the Chapter 13 Plan. Click the Claims Tab at the top of the window. Enter the filing fee that is to be paid through the plan in the filing fee box at the bottom of the window. Two Form Preferences are available for this document: one allows you to replace the word Judge with the word Clerk in the Order that accompanies the Application, and one adds the phrases in installments and within 120 days to the payment section of the form. Form Preferences are accessible through the Jurisdiction Forms List in the Setup Menu, described on page 298. This form can be edited through the Best Case Editor as described on page 202. Form 3B. Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee Form 3B, is the form used by individual Chapter 7 debtors who apply for a waiver of the filing fee. If your client is an individual or a husband and wife filing jointly under Chapter 7, and you specified in the voluntary petition that the debtor(s) will be applying for a waiver of the filing fee, Form 3B automatically appears in the list of forms and schedules for the client. Best Case automatically fills in several sections of the form based on the data you enter into other forms and schedules for the client. The form is also a QuickForm, so you can open it in the Best Case Editor to fill in any required information not already filled in by Best Case. Preparing Form 3B for Filing If this client is an individual or a husband and wife filing jointly under Chapter 7, and if you specified in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition that the debtor will be applying for a waiver of the filing fee, Form 3B automatically appears in the Forms and Schedules Menu. To open it, highlight it in the Forms and Schedules Menu and press R. 1. The QuickForms dialog box appears with printing options. You can have no options checked, all options or just one. Click OK. 2. The document will appear in the Best Case Editor which has basic word processing features. Depending on how much information has been entered for the client, several sections of the form may already be completed for you. (See Where the Information in Form 3B Comes From, on page 45, for more information on how Best Case fills in the form.) 3. For those sections not automatically completed or where more information is needed, use the Editor to add or delete text and to mark Check boxes as appropriate. 4. When you have reviewed your changes and are ready to save the document, click File > Save in the menu bar. 44 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
5. A "Save Document in Case" window opens. By default Best Case names the edited document "Form 3b. Application for Waiver of Filing Fee," and attaches it as a replacement to the original form 3B. in the Main List of Forms and Schedules. Replacing Form 3B with the Edited Version 6. Click the Save to Case button, and then close the Editor to return to the List of Forms and Schedules. 7. Form 3B will have an icon of a paper clip and the word "Replaced" next to it in the List of Forms and Schedules, and the edited version can now be marked for printing and included with electronic filings. NOTE: If you change information in the other forms and schedules after you have edited Form 3b, the information does not automatically get updated in the edited form. If you wish to include these changes on the edited form, you must either edit the attachment, as described on page 200, or delete the existing attachment and follow the steps above to create a new version of the form. Three Form Preferences are available for this document. One allows you to replace the word Judge with the word Clerk in the Order that accompanies the Application. Another gives you the option of excluding the Order that normally accompanies the Application, and the third lets you choose whether or not the debtor information and instruction cover sheet for the form gets included. Form Preferences are accessible through the Jurisdiction Forms List in the Setup Menu, described on page 298. Where the Information in Form 3B Comes From Part A. Family Size and Income With the following exceptions, all information from Part A of Form 3B is taken from the corresponding information entered into Schedule I. The Family Size is calculated based on the marital status and number of dependents you enter for the debtor on Schedule I. Monthly Net Income from Dependents: If there is additional dependent income not included on Schedule I, use the Editor to enter it here. Total Monthly Income: By default this will be the Monthly Income from Schedule I. If income for dependents is added on Line 3, then you need to re-total this number and use the Editor to modify the form accordingly. Part B. Monthly Exceptions All information in this section of the form comes from the corresponding information in Schedule J. Part C. Real & Personal Property Information in this section of the form is taken from Schedule A and Schedule B. Cash on Hand is the total of the Market Values for all properties entered on Schedule B. to which you have assigned the property type "1. Cash on Hand." Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 45
Money in Savings, Checking or Other Accounts equals the total of the Market Values for all properties entered on Schedule B. that are assigned the property type "2. Checking, Savings or Other Financial Accounts, Certificates of Deposit." The description of the account is taken from the property description on Schedule B. Assets Owned by the Debtor: o o Home\ Other Real Estate: Any property listed on Schedule A is included here. Value is the market value entered in the Property Description tab. The Address is the information entered for the property description, and the Amount owed on mortgages and liens represents the total of all Schedule D liens linked to this property. Motor Vehicle: Any property from Schedule B assigned the property type "25. Automobiles, Trucks Trailers & Other Vehicles" is listed in this section. Value is the market value entered in the Property Description tab. The Model\Year is the information entered for the property description, and the Amount owed represents the total of all Schedule D liens linked to this property. o Other Property: All properties on Schedule B that are not assigned the property types 1, 2 or 25 appear in this category. Value is the market value entered in the Property Description tab. The Description is the information entered for the property description, and the Amount owed represents the total of all Schedule D liens linked to the property. Person, business, organization or governmental unit that owes the debtor money: Information for this part of the form is not taken from any schedule in Best Case. If the debtor is owed money by an entity of this type, use the Editor to enter it here. Part D. Additional Information Attorney Compensation Paid and Attorney Compensation Promised are completed based on information entered into the Attorney Compensation Statement. If any amount is entered for either Total compensation promised or Compensation received, then the amount will list on the appropriate line on Form 3B, and the "Yes" checkbox for that line will be checked. Non- Attorney Compensation and Non-Attorney Compensation Promised: Line 14 and line 15 ask about compensation paid or promised to a non-attorney preparer. This information is not filled in automatically. If you there are payments made or promised to a non-attorney preparer, use the editor to enter the information here. Payments Made to an Attorney or Preparer on the Debtor's Behalf: Information for line 16 is completed based on the information entered for the Sources of Compensation PAID section of the Attorney Compensation Statement. If this question is answered "Yes" for the compensation statement, then the "Yes" checkbox for line 16 will be checked, and the explanation entered in the Attorney Compensation Statement will be added as well. Bankruptcy Relief Sought in the Past Eight Years: For the first bankruptcy, the Case Number, Year filed, and Location of filing, are taken from information entered into the Prior Filings section on the "Prior/ Related/Ex C" tab of the Voluntary Petition. If there is prior filing information entered, the "Yes" box is automatically checked as well. Information regarding whether or not the case was discharged, as well as any information regarding any other filings in the previous eight years can be entered manually using the Best Case Editor. Additional Information as to why the debtor is unable to pay the filing fee in installments can be entered with the Editor. 46 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Signature Lines are completed based on the information entered for the debtor and joint debtor names entered in the Voluntary Petition. The date on the signature lines is taken from the Date on Signature Lines field in the QuickForms Options screen that appears whenever the form is opened for editing. Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims If this client is filing under Chapter 11, Form 4. will appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Best Case Bankruptcy will assemble this list of creditors based on information you have entered on Schedules D, E and F. You ll need to open Form 4 to enter contact information for each creditor. Keyboard Shortcut: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press 4 to access Form 4. For creditors with secured claims, only the unsecured portion of the claim is taken into account when compiling the list of creditors with the largest unsecured claims, though both the secured and unsecured amount will be listed on the form. If you don t have at least 20 claims with unsecured amounts, but do have some with unknown unsecured amounts, the unknown claims will be included in Form 4 in alphabetical order until there are 20. When you open Form 4, you ll see a list of creditors holding the twenty largest unsecured claims sorted alphabetically by the company name: Form 4. Summary List Window: Creditors Sorted by Name If you would like to view the creditors by the amount owed instead, click on the Sort by Amount tab at the top of the window: Form 4. Summary List Window: Creditors sorted by Amount Owed Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 47
To jump to a creditor in the list, press the number corresponding to the creditor. For double-digit numbers, press the first number again to cycle through numbers that begin with that digit. To enter contact information: 1. In the Form 4 Summary List Window, highlight a creditor and click Edit. The entry screen for Form 4 appears, with the name of the creditor and amount of the claim in the top half of the screen as shown below: Entry Screen for Form 4. as it first appears The creditor s name and address appear at the top on the screen as they appear on the creditor schedule. The amount of the claim and the secured amount, if any, are copied from the creditor schedule as well. The nature of claim is copied from the description of property in Schedule D or the consideration answer in E or F. The address of the contact person is copied from the creditor address, but can easily be changed if it is different. For each creditor, you will need to enter the name and phone number of the contact person for the creditor, and, if different from the main address of the creditor, the contact person s address. The nature of claim is filled in for you based on your answer for the description of property on Schedule D or the consideration answer on E or F. You can change this answer if you need to. Since you might want a different answer for nature of claim than the answer on the creditor schedule, these answers are not linked together. Note that if you make changes to the creditor address in Schedule D, E, or F, this change won t be reflected in the contact information section of Form 4. This is because the contact information is often different from the main creditor information and we have designed this form so that your changes to the contact information will stay in place. However, you can use AddressClipper to copy and paste updated addresses from creditor schedules to Form 4, described on page 30. Insiders Will Be Excluded If a creditor listed on the Form 4 Summary List Window is an insider, you will need to indicate that on the Form 4 Entry Screen by checking the Insider box. The creditor with the next largest unsecured claim will be added to Form 4. The insider will be listed in the summary list window, but will not be printed on Form 4. 48 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If the creditor is an insider, click here. Type the nature of the claim here. Entry screen for Form 4. Enter contact person and phone, and indicate whether an insider Your help file lists the definition of Insider for your reference. Just click the Help button in Form 4. When you have completed information for this creditor, click OK and repeat for each creditor appearing in Form 4 for which you have contact information. Print Order of Creditors By default, this form will print creditors sorted by creditor name. To print sorted by amount of claim instead, see Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. Emergency Filings If you are preparing an emergency filing for a corporate case, you ll often be required to include Form 4 with the Voluntary Petition. To do this, you ll need to enter basic creditor information (name, address and claim amount) through creditor Schedules D-F first. If you are in a hurry, you might want to enter all creditors on Schedule F for now. You can always move secured and priority claims to Schedules D and E later. You ll also want to turn the auto-calc feature off in the Statistical/Administrative section of the Voluntary Petition, as described on page 38. Editing this Form in Special Cases This form can be edited through the Best Case Editor as described on page 202. Matrix of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Claims In some districts, local rules require that you file a matrix of the Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims in addition to the creditor address matrix and Form 4. To prepare a printed matrix of the 20 largest creditors: 1. Return to the list screen for Form 4 (pictured on page 44) and click the Print Matrix button. 2. The Print Documents dialog box appears. The only printing option available is to print DRAFT across the form. Click Print to send the document to your printer. To prepare a matrix on disk of the 20 largest creditors: 1. Return to the list screen for Form 4 (pictured on page 44) and click the Matrix Disk File button. 2. Choose the drive and directory where you want to create the disk file, then click OK. 3. The matrix will be created as an ASCII text file, and a message will appear telling you how many creditors were included. Click OK to acknowledge the message. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 49
Creditors Marked Do Not Print/Total on Sch. The option to exclude entries on Schedules D, E and F does not affect which creditors appear on Form 4. To exclude a creditor from Form 4, you should mark it as an insider as described above. Form 6. Summary of Schedules View summaries here; this information is assembled for you based on information you have entered for each schedule. Totals are updated as you update schedules. Summary of Schedules There is no entry screen for the Summary of Schedules. This form will be completed for you based on the information that you enter for each schedule. Note that the Official Form does not allow for a total for Schedule C; this portion is grayed out. Viewing information for the Summary of Schedules At any point in entering a case, you can view the information that will be printed in the Summary of Schedules by pressing 6 or highlighting the form in the Forms and Schedules Menu and clicking Open. You cannot change information through this screen. If you need to edit data, go to the relevant schedule entry screens. As you add items to the schedules, the Summary of Schedules will be updated. View Secured and Unsecured Totals for Schedule D In the bottom left corner of the Summary of Schedules window, the total amounts of secured claims and unsecured claims from Schedule D appear. These figures don t print on any of the forms, but are there for your information. View Priority and Non-Priority Totals for Schedule E In the bottom of the Summary of Schedules window, the total amounts of all priority and non-priority amounts from Schedule E appear. These figures don t appear on the forms, but are there for your information. Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities and Related Data (28 U.S.C. 159) For all debtors filing an individual or joint petition, Form 6 includes a "Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities. This page totals all priority domestic support obligations, taxes and other debts owed to governmental units and any Schedule E claims. In addition the statistical summary includes, student loan obligations and obligations to pension or profit sharing obligations from Schedule F as well as other types of domestic support obligations, separation agreements or divorce decree declarations not included on schedule E. The Statistical Summary also includes the Debtor's CMI from Form 22, the Net Income from Schedule I, the Net Expenses from Schedule J, the total unsecured debt from Schedule D, the total non-priority debt from Schedule E and the total of all general unsecured debts listed on Schedule F. 50 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Best Case automatically completes the Statistical Summary section based on the claim amounts entered in the Creditor Information screens. Schedule F and Schedule D include new check boxes for designating a claim for inclusion in the summary, and claims from Schedule E are automatically included based on the priority type assigned. Editing the Summary of Schedules Since you may need to edit the text of the Summary of Schedules, particularly when filing an amendment, it has been included in a special format so that you can open it in the Best Case Editor. See Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. Overview of Links Between Schedules Best Case Bankruptcy can link information listed on one schedule to another schedule. For example, if you claim an item listed on Schedule B as exempt, the property description and market value entered on Schedule B are linked to Schedule C. The advantages of the links are: You save time because you don t have to type the information more than once. The chance for typos is reduced. Changes can be made more quickly. If you update information in one place it is automatically updated in other places. Information remains consistent throughout the filing. Best Case Bankruptcy contains the following links : If there is a piece of property that you want to claim as exempt, you can link the property description and market value from the property schedule, A or B, to the exemption schedule, Schedule C. If there is a secured claim against a piece of property, you can link the property description and market value from Schedule A or B to Schedule D, the list of creditors holding secured claims. If there is a codebtor for a claim, you can link the creditor name and address from the creditor schedule, D, E or F, to the codebtor schedule, Schedule H. To allow you greater flexibility, our program was designed so that you are not required to use the linking features. Each of these links is described in greater detail later in this chapter. Schedules A-H: Summary List Windows & Entry Screens For each of the Schedules A-H, there is a corresponding summary list window (or list screen), which displays a summary list of all items which will appear on the schedule, and an entry screen, where you can enter and change information. When you select a schedule from the Forms and Schedules Menu, you will get the list screen for that schedule first. If no items have been entered, the list will be empty. Keyboard Shortcuts in Summary List Windows Press I to add an item Use b to highlight an item, then R to edit it. Press E to return to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Press D to delete a highlighted item. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 51
Click to edit the highlighted item or to view detailed information. Click to add a new item to the list. Click to delete the highlighted item. A Sample Summary List Window You input and change information in the entry screen for each schedule: The total of the schedule is calculated as you work and displayed here. Click to go to the next tab listed at the top of the window. Click to save changes and return to the list screen for this schedule. Click to cancel changes and return to the list screen for this schedule. A Sample Entry Screen Adding items to summary list screens For each item to be added to a schedule, go to the summary list screen for that schedule and click the Insert button or press Z on your keyboard. After entering an item through the entry screen, you can press A-R to save the item and add a new item, OR click OK to return to the list screen. Once returned to the list screen, you can click Insert again to add another item or click Close to return to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Editing items appearing on list screens 1. Double-click on the item that you want to edit OR click on the item and click Change. 2. If you prefer using the keyboard, highlight the item to be changed using the b key, then press R. 3. You will be taken to the entry screen for this schedule where you can edit information about this item. When you have finished, click OK to save your changes. Keyboard Shortcuts in Entry Screens Press R to save changes and return to the Summary List Window, unless you are in a multi-line text field. Press E to exit without saving changes. Press C-T to move to the next tab to enter or edit related information. Press A-R to save a new entry and add another one. 52 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
More keyboard shortcuts are listed in the Appendix, page 333. Deleting items on list screens 1. To delete an item, highlight the item on the list screen then click the Delete button or press X on your keyboard. 2. You will get a pop-up box asking if you are sure you want to delete the item. If you still want to delete it, click OK. Schedule A. Real Property If the debtor has no real property If the debtor has no real property to list, leave Schedule A blank; the word None will be typed in for you. In Best Case Bankruptcy, you don t have to type the word None. Keyboard Shortcut to Open Schedule A: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press A to open Schedule A. From a list screen of any other Schedule, B H, press C-A to jump to Schedule A. Entering real property From the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight Schedule A. Real Property then press R. A window appears with Schedule A. Real Property in the title bar, a column labeled description and location, a column for the market value of the property, and several buttons at the bottom. This is the Schedule A Summary List Window, which will contain a list of all property for Schedule A entered for this client. If no items have been added, the list will be blank, as shown below: Click to add an item of real property. Click to copy a selected property and make a duplicate entry. Schedule A Summary List Window Notice that there is also a tab at the top of this window labeled B. Personal Property. Click this tab to view, add, or edit property items for Schedule B, personal property. To add an item of real property, click the Insert button in the Real Property tab or press the I key on your keyboard. A blank entry screen appears, with Real Property Information: in the title bar. Notice that there are tabs at the top labeled Liens and Exemptions. These tabs allow you to enter related information about this piece of property that will appear on Schedules D and C. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 53
If you make a mistake and enter this item on the wrong property schedule, you can move it by clicking the (B) Personal radio button. Click to access your own list of common answers for this question or press 0. An exemption analysis for this piece of property is displayed here. Schedule A. Entry Screen Click to enter related information. 1. Description and Location of Property: Enter the description and location of one piece of real property. Notice that you can insert the address of the debtor or the joint debtor by clicking the Paste: Debtor Address or Joint Debtor button above the description box. These are copied from the Voluntary Petition. Press T to move to the next field. 2. Nature of the Debtor s Interest in Property: You can type an answer here or browse the list of answers as described in the sidebar. Press T. Save Common Answers for the Nature of Debtor s Interest To browse the list of choices, press 0 or click on the list button to the right of the Nature of Debtor s Interest field. Note that this is not an exhaustive list, but allows you to save your own common answers. The list is in alphabetical order. Once in the list of choices, you can type the first letter of the answer you want to highlight it, then press R to select it, or use the mouse to highlight your answer then click on Select. To add a new item to the list, click Add. You will get a pop-up box prompting you for the new answer choice. Enter the new choice then click OK. The pop-up box will close, leaving you at the list of choices with the item you just added highlighted. Click Select or press R to choose that item. 3. Property Owned By: For joint debtors, you ll need to specify whether the property is owned by the husband, the wife, both or the community. Click on your answer in the dropdown list, or press the letter that corresponds to your choice: H=Husband, W=Wife, J=Joint, C=Community, N=NA. Press T. 4. Market Value: Enter the market value of the property, or click on unknown to indicate that the value is unknown. Do not add the $ sign. Partial Interest: If you want to show that the debtor has only partial interest in this property, click the Partial Interest checkbox then enter a percentage in the % Owned box that appears, as shown below. Note that this amount does not print on Schedule D, but it does affect the default answer that Best Case Bankruptcy fills in for amount claimed as exempt on Schedule C. For certain custom Chapter 13 Plans, partial interest may also affect the liquidation analysis calculations. Entering Partial Interest in Property on Schedule A 54 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
5. Amount of Secured Claim: For this field, you generally will want to leave the Linked to Liens check box marked then enter the secured claim through the Liens tab, as described on page 55. Once you enter the lien or liens, the secured claim amount will be filled in for you. For added flexibility, we give you the option of removing the check mark from the Linked to Liens box and entering a secured claim amount yourself, but generally you don t want to do this. Note that the Linked to Liens box refers only to the secured claim amount that prints on Schedule A and does not affect Schedule D. If you want to link a lien to this property item so that the market value and property description are copied from Schedule A to Schedule D, but want to override the calculated answer for the secured claim amount on A, just remove the check from linked to liens and type in a new amount, then follow instructions below to specify the lien information. After you have input the property description and market value, you have several choices: Enter Liens and Exemptions: To enter related information about this item of property, click the Liens tab or Exemptions tab at the top of the window as described below. Add More Real Property: To save changes to this record and enter another piece of real property, press A-R. Exit Schedule A: To save your changes and return to the Schedule A Summary List Window, click OK. Once at the Schedule A List Screen, you can click Close or press E to return to the Forms and Schedules Menu to work on another form, or you can enter another piece of property as described below. Keyboard Shortcut In the list windows for Schedules A-H, C-N will take you to the next schedule and C-P will take you to the previous schedule. You can switch to a different Schedule (A-J) by pressing C-A through C-J. Add another item of real property If you would like to continue to add property items to Schedule A: 1. At the Schedule A List Screen, you will see the property that you just entered listed. The total market value of all items listed for Schedule A is displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the list window; it will continue to be updated on the list screen as you add property. 2. Add another piece of property by clicking the Insert button or by pressing I on your keyboard. Closing Schedule A When you have finished with Schedule A, return to the Schedule A List Screen and click the Close button. You will be returned to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Entering Lien and Exemption Information through Schedule A As you enter the description and market value of each piece of property, you will have the option of entering exemption and lien information that will appear on Schedules C and D, respectively. Or, if you prefer, you can enter information for all of the property first then go through the entry screens for Schedules C and D to enter exemption and lien information. Either way, the property description and market value can be linked between schedules so that it does not have to be retyped. Entering liens through Schedule A To enter the lien information through the Schedule A Entry Screen: Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 55
1. Get to the Schedule A Entry Screen that contains the piece of property: from the Schedule A List Screen, highlight the piece of property that you want to add lien information for and press R. 2. In the Schedule A Entry Screen, click on the Liens tab at the top of the window, or click on Next Tab until you get to the Liens information. 3. You will get a list screen that will list all liens against this piece of property. From the lien list screen, click on the Insert button to add lien information. If you are going to claim this property as exempt, it is usually best to enter the lien against the property before the exemption, because when you enter the exemption, a default value for the amount claimed as exempt will be filled in for you based on the debtor s interest in the property and the limit of the statute. The Liens Window is Accessible from Schedule A and B. A lien has already been input for this item of property. Input Liens in Order of Priority: When there is more than one lien against a single item of property, Best Case keeps track of which lien has priority by ranking liens based on entry order. This helps Best Case fill in the appropriate amounts of unsecured portions of subsequent liens. Therefore, you ll want to input the lien with highest priority first. The rank of each lien is displayed in the far left column of the Lien tab pictured above. If there is more than one lien, you can change the rank order by clicking the Change Rank button, as described on page 56. After clicking Insert, you will get a Schedule D entry window, with several tabs at the top. You ll notice that the property description and market value have been copied for you from Schedule A and appear in gray. Claim Information: You ll now need to enter the claim information, which will appear on Schedule D. For details on entering information into the Schedule D entry screen, see Creditor information on page 74. After you have entered the creditor and claim information, click OK, which will save the entry and take you back to the lien list screen for this piece of property. If there is another lien against the property, you can press Insert to enter it now; otherwise, click the Exemptions tab to specify that the property is exempt, or click OK to return to the Schedule A List Screen. Link Lien: Note: This procedure works identically for items listed on Schedule B. Changing Rank Order for Liens About Rank Order When there is more than one claim against a single piece of property, Best Case Bankruptcy tracks the priority of the liens by assigning each lien a rank. This rank order does not print on the forms, but it is 56 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
displayed in the Liens tab of Schedules A and B for your reference and it is used to calculate the unsecured portions of subsequent claims in Schedule D. Columns in the Liens Tab: The Liens tab of Schedules A and B (pictured below) shows the following for each lien against: the rank order (1, 2, 3, etc.), the name of the creditor, the nature of the lien, the total claim amount, the amount of all senior liens against the property, and the unsecured portion of the lien. The Liens Tab in Schedules A and B Showing Multiple Liens Against a Piece of Property Changing Rank Order: By default, Best Case Bankruptcy ranks liens in the order that you input them into the program. You can change the ranking at any time by doing the following: 1. Open the property schedule (A or B) where the item is listed. Highlight the item and click Change. 2. Click the Liens tab at the top of the window. 3. Highlight the lien, click the Change Rank button, then move the lien up or down in the list by clicking the Up or Down button. Click OK to accept the new position. Make sure the unsecured amounts are correct. Click OK to exit the entry screen. Entering exemptions through Schedule A If you want to claim an exemption for the piece of property that you just entered on Schedule A do the following: 1. From the Schedule A List Screen, double click on the piece of property to get to the entry screen for that item. 2. In the Schedule A Entry Screen, click on the tab labeled Exemptions or press A-X. (For corporate entities, this tab will not appear.) 3. If you have not yet claimed this property as exempt, Best Case will now create an exemption entry, filling in the property description and market value. A list of statutes will appear and you will need to pick one. Skip to step 5 below for instructions. 4. If you have already claimed this item as exempt under one statute, but want to claim it as exempt under another as well, click the Insert button to add another entry, or press the I key on your keyboard. Best Case creates an exemption entry, filling in the property description and market value. You will need to select the statute you want to use. 5. Statute selection: A list of statutes appears as pictured below. The three tabs at the top of the list (By Description, By Statute, and By Common) allow you to sort the list in three different ways. The default sort order is By Common, which puts the most commonly used statutes for this property at the top of the list in blue, followed by those sometimes used, followed by those rarely used. This sort order is based on the Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 57
property type (real or personal) and, if personal property, the property category (household goods and furnishings, wearing apparel, etc.) Exemption Set Used: The set of exemptions that appear in the exemption window is based on your selection in the Filing Information Tab of the Voluntary Petition. To change this selection (federal vs. state, different state), return to the Filing Information tab, described on page 34. If it s easier for you to find the statute by description or by statute number, click on the corresponding tab. Exemption Statutes Sorted Based on Property Type Choose the statute you want by using the b key to highlight then R to select, or by double-clicking on it. If you accidentally select the wrong statute, click the button to bring the list back up. Columns in Exemption Tables: For each statute, you ll see a brief description of the statute, the table where this statute appears (the state abbreviation, non for non-bankruptcy federal, or US for federal bankruptcy exemption statutes), and the statute number. The limit column displays the total amount of property that can be exempted under this statute. (For each statute, we have defined a limit for joint debtors and one for individual debtors. The limit that appears here depends on whether this debtor is a husband and wife or an individual.) The Claimed column on the far right keeps track of how much property you have already claimed under each law for this debtor. Only the statute number will appear on Schedule C; the other information is provided for your reference only. Sort preference for exemptions: The button in the top right corner allows you to change the default sort order of exemptions. Click this button then select the default tab to start on (by description, by statute or by common, with the statutes most often applied to this property type listed first), then, when statutes are sorted by common, choose the sort order for statutes within each category. Common order by statute yields a list with common statutes listed first, sorted by statute number, followed by less common statutes by statute number, followed by least common exemptions by statute number. 6. Law Comments: The statute you selected will be copied to the entry screen, and the cursor will move to the optional Law Comments field. Any text that you type for the law comments will appear next to the statute number, under the heading Specify Law Providing Each Exemption. If you want to differentiate between the wife s exemptions and the husband s, you can type Wife or Husband here. Press T to move on. 7. Exemption Amount: The cursor will appear in the field asking for the value of the claimed exemption. The default value is the lesser amount of the debtor s interest in the property or the amount remaining of the limit that the selected statute allows. (The debtor s interest is calculated here as the market value of the property minus any liens on the property. If you have specified on Schedule A or B that the debtor has only 58 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
partial interest in property, the percentage interest is included in this calculation.) If you want to claim a value other than the default value, just type that amount without typing the dollar sign. Exemption Amount as a Percentage: If you want the value of the exemption to appear as a percentage on the printed form, type the percentage as a fraction of one then click on the box labeled % Percent. (For example, to claim 100% of the property, type 1 then click on %Percent. To claim 75% type.75 then click on %Percent. The percentage will appear on the screen as a fraction of one but will appear on the printed form as 100% or 75%, etc.) Property and Statute Totals: You ll notice property and statute totals on the right half of the screen. The property total section displays the market value of the property, the value of any liens against the property, the debtor s equity, the amount claimed as exempt, and any unexempt amount. The statute total displays the limit of the exemption statute, the amount claimed so far (from all property being exempted by this statute), and the amount available. If you have claimed more than the amount allowed, the words Over Limit will appear in red in the statute total section. 8. Your next move depends on what you want to do: a) Claim property as exempt under more than one statute: In Best Case Bankruptcy, you can apply multiple statutes to exempt the full value of the property. To add another statute for this piece of property, press A-R. Your first exemption will be saved, and a new exemption entry screen will appear with the property value filled in for you. Select a statute, the value that you are claiming under this statute, then click OK. Note that this will appear as two entries on the screen, but the piece of property will just print once on Schedule C, with both statutes listed to exempt it. b) Save information and return to Schedule A Summary Window: If you have finished entering information about this piece of property, click OK. The information you have entered will be saved and you will be returned to the Schedule A List Screen. You can then click Insert again to add another piece of property, or click Close to return to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Editing Schedule A For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. Moving Property from Schedule A to Schedule B If you accidentally enter an item of property on Schedule A (real property) that belongs on B (personal property), you can make a quick change to move it: 1. Open Schedule A, highlight the item and click Change. 2. In the upper right-hand corner, you can select the schedule that the item is to appear under as shown below. Click on (B) Personal or press A-b to move the property. 3. You ll need to select the Type of Property from the drop-down list. 4. Click OK. A list of Schedule B items will appear including the item you just moved, and the item will no longer appear in Schedule A. Schedule B. Personal Property Opening Schedule B 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Schedule B. Personal Property. Keyboard Shortcut Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 59
From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press b to open Schedule B. From a list screen of any other Schedule A H, press C-b to jump to Schedule B. 2. The list screen for Schedule B appears as pictured below, which will give you a summary of all items entered for this schedule. It will be blank when you first open it. Use the mouse in the summary list windows to adjust column widths, if necessary. Schedule B List Screen Schedule B Items An item on Schedule B is usually one single piece of property, instead of all pieces that will be listed under a certain category. For example, the debtor may own two cars. These would be listed as two items both under property categorized as Automobiles, trucks, trailers, and other vehicles and accessories. In general, each item is listed on a separate entry screen. Items of little value, or items that would be tedious to list separately, such as clothing and certain household furnishings are often grouped together with a statement like Debtor s clothing-no single item worth more than $100, or Kitchen utensils, tools, and cooking wares-no single item worth over $10 or Two lamps, 1 side table, 1 goldfish tank, 1 shag carpet. Specifying no property of a given category For each item of property that you enter on Schedule B, you ll be choosing a property category heading under which the item will appear on the printed form. If there is no property to be listed under a given category on the Official Form, (e.g. if the debtor has no cash on hand) there is no need to insert an entry for this category. Best Case Bankruptcy will automatically check the None column on the printed form for any categories that have not been selected. You should not type the word None. In the picture above, the debtor has no property of type 3, so the user ignored this category. 60 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Just like in Schedule A, you can enter exemption and lien information through the Schedule B Entry Screen. Click Sort to sort by description instead of number. Click to choose from a pop-down list of Schedule B property categories. Enter the property description and location here. You need to type something here in order to save this entry. Schedule B Entry Screen Adding Property to Schedule B 1. With the Schedule B list screen open as described above, click Insert. 2. Type of Property: You will now get the Schedule B Entry Screen. The first question asks for the type of property. Click on m at the right side of the field for a pop-down list of types of property or press b on your keyboard. Move the mouse to the type of property you want and click, or use one of the keyboard shortcuts described below. Press T to get to the description and location of property. Keyboard Shortcut With property types sorted by category number, you can type the first digit of that number to get the property type instead of using the mouse. For example, press 6 for wearing apparel. For higher numbers, like 24, repeatedly pressing 2 will cycle though all items in the twenties. Likewise, if you check the Sort checkbox to have property sorted by category name, type the first letter of the category to select that option. If multiple categories start with the same letter, keep pressing the letter to cycle through choices. Or, press the b key to access the list, then press the b key again to move the highlighter to your choice. Press R to select it. Property categories are sorted by category number. If you prefer to have them sorted alphabetically by category name, click the Sort checkbox. 3. Description and Location: You cannot leave this field blank, so type in a description and location. To insert the debtor s or joint debtor s address, click the corresponding paste button above the field. Press T. 4. Property Owner: If you need to specify whether the property belongs to the husband, wife, community, or is owned jointly, do so by clicking on the appropriate choice, or by typing the first letter of your choice. Press T to get to the market value. 5. Market Value: Enter the market value of the property, or click on unknown to indicate that the value is unknown. Do not add the $ sign. Troubleshooting Market Value If you are having trouble getting Best Case to save your answer for market value, you may have either entered a dollar sign or single-clicked in the market value field and inserted text, which resulted in an incorrect currency format. Before typing in your answer, move to the market value field by double-clicking in the field or pressing T. This will highlight the 0.00 default answer so that your answer overwrites it. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 61
You will not be able to list negative property values in Best Case Bankruptcy. If the debtor s bank account is overdrawn, this is not an asset, but a liability, and the bank belongs on a creditor schedule. If you want an account with a negative balance listed on B, you can note the balance in the description, but leave the market value 0. Partial Interest: If you want to show that the debtor has only partial interest in this property, click the Partial Interest checkbox then enter a percentage in the % Owned box that appears, as shown below. Note that this amount does not print on Schedule D, but it does affect the default answer that Best Case Bankruptcy fills in for amount claimed as exempt on Schedule C. For certain custom Chapter 13 Plans, partial interest may also affect the liquidation analysis calculations. Entering Partial Interest in Property on Schedule B 6. Amount of Secured Claim: For this field, you generally will want to leave the Linked to Liens check box marked then enter the secured claim through the liens tab, as described on page 55. Once you enter the lien or liens, the secured claim amount will be filled in for you. Unlike Schedule A, the secured claim amount does not print on Schedule B. It appears here for your reference. 7. To save changes to this record and enter another piece of personal property, press A-R. Or, click OK to save your changes and return to the Schedule B List Screen. Adding another item to Schedule B To add another item to Schedule B, return to the Schedule B List Screen and click Insert. You will get a blank entry screen, where you can again select a property category (the last one used is filled in for you) and enter a description and market value for this piece of property. Click OK to save your work and return to the Schedule B List Screen. Entering exemption and lien information through Schedule B As with real property listed on Schedule A, you can enter lien and exemption information about personal property while in the property entry screen. At the top of the entry window are tabs labeled Exemptions and Liens. Click on the appropriate tab and follow instructions outlined in Entering Lien and Exemption Information through Schedule A on page 55. Moving Property from Schedule B to Schedule A If you accidentally enter an item of property on Schedule B (personal property) that belongs on A (real property), you can make a quick change to move it: 1. Open Schedule B, highlight the item and click Change. 2. In the upper right-hand corner, you can select the schedule that the item is to appear under as shown below. Click on (A) Real or press A-A to move the property. 3. You ll need to specify the Nature of the Debtor s Interest. Type your answer or click the list button to the right of the field to browse a list of choices. 4. Click OK. A list of Schedule A items will appear including the item you just moved, and the item will no longer appear in Schedule B. Editing Schedule B For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. 62 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Schedule C. Property Claimed as Exempt In Best Case Bankruptcy, you can specify which property is exempt from creditors claims as you input property for Schedules A and B, (as described in Entering exemptions through Schedule A on page 56), or you can input all property first in A and B then go into Schedule C to specify which property is exempt. The end result is the same; pick whichever is more convenient for you. Even if you input all Schedule C entries through Schedules A and B, you may find the detailed exemption summary information provided in Schedule C helpful in identifying property that has not been fully exempted. The Schedule C summary list screens are described in the section Viewing and Printing Exemption Summaries on page 66. Please Read About Exemption Statutes in Best Case Bankruptcy Note that we have given a brief summary of each statute, along with the dollar limit, where applicable. (Best Case Bankruptcy tracks the amount you have claimed under each statute for your reference but does not limit the amount you can claim.) We have provided the statutes to save the user time, but in some cases the exemption laws are complex, subject to interpretation, or restricted to certain cases. (For example, certain exemptions may not have individual limits, but may be mutually exclusive of other statutes, or may have limits when combined with other statutes.) Best Case Bankruptcy doesn t take these limitations into account and cannot be relied on to prevent you from claiming exemptions that are not allowed. Furthermore, exemption statutes are subject to change at any time. As an attorney practicing in your state, you are in a better position to track these changes in the law than we are. You can edit the exemption statutes at any time through the Setup Menu. (See Editing exemption statutes on page 312.) Best Case Bankruptcy does not know how to practice law; it is a form preparation tool. The fact that we provide statutes is NO SUBSTITUTE FOR LEGAL KNOWLEDGE. Best Case Bankruptcy does not claim to help you apply exemption statutes correctly. For each case, the attorney representing the debtor should review Schedule C carefully to ensure that all laws have been complied with. It is the responsibility of the attorney filing the forms to be sure that the exemption laws have been applied correctly. Claiming Property as Exempt If the Debtor Has No Exempt Property If the debtor has no exempt property, leave this schedule blank. The word None will be inserted for you. Specifying that Property is Exempt You can enter information about property claimed as exempt in one of two ways: Through the Schedule A and B property entry screens (as described in Entering Lien and Exemption Information through Schedule A on page 55) or Through the Schedule C Entry Screen, as described below. The two methods have the same effect; pick whichever is more convenient for you. To claim property as exempt from Schedule C: 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on Schedule C or press C on your keyboard. Keyboard Shortcut From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-c to jump to Schedule C. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 63
2. You can insert an exemption from any of the three tabs in Schedule C: the Exemption Detail, Property Summary or Statute Summary Tab, depending on which approach you want to use: o o o Pick an item of property first: Click the Property Summary tab, highlight the item of property you want to exempt, then click Insert. The property description and market value will be filled in for you, and the list of exemption statutes appears in a list. Skip to step 5. Pick a statute first: Click the Statute Summary tab, highlight the statute you want to use, then click Insert. The statute will be copied to the entry for you. Go to step 3, then skip to step 6. Start from scratch: From the Exemption Detail tab, click Insert you will need to select or type in the property description and statute in the entry window. If you start from the Property Summary tab, this will be filled in for you. Click the house button for a list of property from Schedules A and B. The Schedule C Exemption Entry Screen If you start from the Statute Summary tab, this will be filled in for you. Click the law book button for a list of statutes. 3. Property Description: Press 0 or click the house button to select from the list of property entered on Schedules A and B, or type a description if you don t want to link the exemption to just one item. (E.g. - you may want an item on Schedule C to read all debtor s household furnishings. ) Double-click on the piece of property that you want to claim as exempt, or highlight it then click Select. The property description will be copied to the Schedule C Entry Screen for you, along with the market value of the property. 4. Pulling Up List of Exemptions: The list of statutes should appear when you get to this field. If you accidentally cancel out of it, press 0 from the statute field or click the Choosing the Exemption Set for the Case 64 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide button to view a list of statutes. When the list of available statutes is displayed, you ll see a column labeled Set which tells you which set of exemptions the statute is from, either a two-letter state abbreviation, Non for federal non bankruptcy laws, or US for federal bankruptcy laws. You can change the exemption set for this case in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition. Settings in the jurisdiction section of the Setup Menu determine whether federal exemptions are permitted in this state. (See Basic Information Tab on page 298 to change this setting.) You can edit statutes through your Setup Menu. See page 312. 5. Selecting a Statute: The list of statutes is sorted with the commonly-applied statutes for this type of property listed first (listed in blue), followed by the statutes less commonly used (if any, listed in purple), followed by those rarely used, (listed in black). Press the b to move to the statute you want, then press R to select, or doubleclick on it to select it. Specifying Common Statutes for Types of Property Best Case Solutions contains a feature that allows you to map property types with exemption statutes to have the most commonly applied statutes appear first based on the property. We have provided sample matching, but an experienced bankruptcy attorney should review this mapping in the Setup Menu. See Printing and Editing Exemption Statutes on page 312.
Sort preference for exemptions: The button in the top right corner allows you to change the default sort order of exemptions. Click this button then select the default tab to start on (by description, by statute or by common, with the statutes most often applied to this property type listed first), then, when statutes are sorted by common, choose the sort order for statutes within each category. Common order by statute yields a list with common statutes listed first, sorted by statute number, followed by less common statutes by statute number, followed by least common exemptions by statute number. 6. Law Comments: This field is optional. Any text that you type here will appear next to the statute number on the printed form, under the heading Specify Law Providing Each Exemption. If you want to differentiate between the wife s exemptions and the husband s, you can type Wife or Husband here. 7. Exemption Amount: This refers to the amount of the property that you are claiming as exempt. Best Case Bankruptcy fills in a default value which is the lesser of the debtor s unexempt equity in the property or the amount remaining on the limit that this statute allows. The debtor s equity is calculated here as the debtor s interest in the property value minus any liens against the property. You can accept the default or type a different amount. 8. Exemption Amount as a Percentage: To show the exemption amount as a percentage, enter the percentage as a fraction of 1, then click on the percentage box. For example, if you want to claim 100% of the value, enter 1 then click on %Percent. On the printed form, this will appear as 100%. Enter.5 for 50%, etc. Exemption Amount When There Are Liens to be Avoided: If the debtor will be avoiding the lien on this item of property, many users show that the full value of the debtor s property is exempt instead of just the debtor s equity. There may be other instances where you want to show that the full amount of the property is exempt and not just the debtor s equity. Check with the responsible attorneys if you have questions about what to fill in for the exemption amount. 9. Property and Statute Totals: You ll notice a property total and statute total on the right half of the screen. The property total section displays the market value of the property, the value of any liens against the property, the debtor s equity, the amount claimed as exempt, and any unexempt amount. The statute total section displays the limit of the exemption statute, the amount claimed so far, (from all property being exempted by this statute), and the amount available. If you have claimed more than the amount allowed, the words Over Limit will appear in red in the statute total section. 10. Homestead Exemption Exceeding $125,000: Check this box if the debtor is claiming a homestead exemption greater than $125,000. If the box is checked for any exemption claimed, Best Case Automatically checks the box on Schedule C indicating that the debtor has claimed a homestead exemption that exceeds 125,000. When you have chosen a statute, the limit and amount claimed for this statute appear here. Property and statute totals are displayed in the Schedule C entry window 10. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Schedule C List Screen. To add another item, click Insert and repeat above process. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 65
Specify multiple statutes for a single piece of property In Best Case Bankruptcy, you can easily claim a piece of property as exempt under more than one statute. Follow steps 1-10 above to add an item to Schedule C, then repeat, selecting the same piece of property. Although the piece of property will be listed twice on your Summary List Window, (or more, depending on how many statutes you select), it will be listed just once on the printed Schedule C form. Schedule C for Corporate Debtors Normally, this form is only filed for consumer debtors. If your court requires that Schedule C be filed for all debtors, see Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. Viewing and Printing Exemption Summaries Exemption Detail Tab This tab, pictured on the next page, shows a quick list of all property claimed as exempt, the amount claimed as exempt, and the statute or statutes used to exempt it. If you have claimed an item of property as exempt under multiple statutes, the item will be listed more than once on this screen but will print just once on Schedule C. Sort order: By default, this list is sorted by property, with Schedule A items listed first, sorted alphabetically, followed by Schedule B items, sorted by property category. To sort by statute instead, click the 2 Statute radio button in the bottom right corner or press A-2. This tab shows each exempted property item and the statute used to claim it as exempt. Change the sort order at the bottom. Exemption Detail view shows all property being claimed exempt and the statutes used to exempt it Property Summary Tab The Property Summary Tab provides details about every item of property entered on Schedule A and B, whether or not the property has been claimed as exempt. For each item of property, the top half of the screen lists the property description, amount of equity in the property (property value minus secured claims), amount claimed as exempt (this reads 0.00 if you have not exempted the property), and the amount of the debtor s equity that is unexempt. If this is a joint case, an H, W, J or C will appear indicating the owner of the property. The bottom half of the window lists the statute or statutes used to exempt the highlighted property. Move the highlighter bar down with the b key to view statute information about each item. If no statute is listed, you have not claimed this item as exempt. 66 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
This tab shows detailed information about exemptions for each item of property. Change the Show selection at the bottom of the window to show either all property, only property with unexempt equity, or only property that is fully exempt. The Property Summary Tab in Schedule C Show All Property/Unexempted Equity/Fully Exempt Property: The Show option in the bottom right corner is a helpful diagnostic tool: it lets you choose whether to display all property in this screen, just property with unexempt equity, or just property that is fully exempt. By default, the Show selection is set to All Property. Change the view by either clicking on the down arrow then clicking your choice, or by pressing A-w then the first letter of your choice (A for All Property, U for Unexempted Equity, or E for Exempted Fully). The Drop-Down Show List in the Property Summary Tab Printing the Property Summary In the Property Summary Tab, click the Print button, then in preview mode, click the printer to print the report. This is a diagnostic report for your reference, and not a document you would file with the court. Editing Property Through Schedule C Both the Exemption Detail and Property Summary Tabs in Schedule C have a Change Property button. Highlight an item of property then click the Change Property button to open the Schedule A or B entry window and edit the property. Statute Summary Tab The Statute Summary Tab shows detailed information about each statute in the exemption set selected. (You selected the set of exemptions to use for this case in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition, as described on page 34). For each statute, the top half of this tab lists a brief description of the law, the statute number, the limit for this debtor based on whether it is a joint or individual case (if there is a limit), the amount claimed as exempt under this statute thus far, the number of items claimed as exempt under this law, and the amount available, if there is a limit. For the statute selected in the top half of the screen, the bottom half lists all property claimed as exempt under that law. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 67
This tab shows detailed information about each statute: the limit, amount claimed, amount available, and items of property claimed as exempt under that law. The Statute Summary Tab in Schedule C Show Selection: By default, Best Case Bankruptcy displays all exemptions in the set you chose in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition. You can change which exemptions appear by choosing a different option for the Show choice in the bottom right corner of the window. Your choices are All Exemptions, Used (only those used to claim property as exempt), Not Used (exemptions not used to claim property as exempt), Money Available (exemptions for which you have not claimed up to the full limit), and Over Claimed (exemptions where you have gone over the limit.) Click the down arrow then make your choice, or press A-W then the first letter of the option you want. The Show selection allows you to find exemptions with money available Printing the Statute Summary In the Statute Summary Tab, click the Print button, then in preview mode, click the printer to print the report. This is a diagnostic report for your reference, and not a document you would file with the court. Liquidation Analysis The Liquidation Analysis in Schedule C shows the approximate percentage that unsecured creditors would receive if the debtor filed under Chapter 7 and the estate were to be liquidated. Liquidation Analysis Tab in Schedule C 68 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Each line in the liquidation analysis is taken from information you entered in Schedules A-F. For detailed information about how Best Case Bankruptcy calculates these lines, please refer to How the Numbers are Calculated on page 174 in the Chapter 13 Plan section of this User s Guide. Editing Schedule C For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. Tools and Shortcuts Available in Creditor Schedules This section describes some of the features that are available in the creditor schedules to help save you time. These features include an AddressHelper feature that fills in the city and state when you enter the zip code, a Common Creditor List Feature that allows you to save the names and addresses of creditors you encounter frequently, a pick list button that allows you to select a creditor that has already been listed for this debtor, a feature that lets you alphabetize the creditor by the last name, an import/export feature, and more. Alphabetizing Creditors by Last Name Best Case Bankruptcy automatically alphabetizes creditors on Schedules D, E, F, G (contract/lease parties), H (codebtors), the List of Equity Security Holders and the matrix. If the creditor is an individual, insert a tilde character before the creditor s last name to alphabetize the creditor by last name. (e.g. type Jane R. ~Smith to have Jane R. Smith appear on the matrix and schedule alphabetized under S.) The tilde character will not appear on the printed form. (The ~ is generally found to the left of the number 1 on your keyboard.) AddressHelper Fills in the City and State When You Enter the Zip Code Our AddressHelper feature comes with a database of all United States Zip Codes. To help save time and reduce the chance of misspelled city name or incorrect state abbreviations, AddressHelper fills in the city and state when you enter the zip code. The AddressHelper feature is available throughout Best Case Bankruptcy, wherever you enter address data. After you type in the street address and press T, the cursor will skip the city and state fields and jump to the zip code field. Type in the zip code (either 5 or 9 digits), and the city and state will be filled in for you. You can read more about the AddressHelper on page 319. Common Creditor List Your Common Creditor List is available wherever you see this symbol. The Common Creditor List allows you to build a directory of creditors that you encounter frequently in your practice, and use those names and addresses for any of your bankruptcy clients without retyping. Your Common Creditor List is accessible from Schedules D, E, F, G, H, I (for common employers), the List of Equity Security Holders, relevant sections of the Statement of Financial Affairs, and in the Jurisdiction Section of the Setup Menu for names at the beginning of the matrix. It is also available in screens where you type in additional notice parties, (parties who are not creditors but need to be notified of the filing). Creditors that you enter into the bankruptcy program are not automatically entered into your Common Creditor List, unless you specify in the Preferences section of the Setup Menu that you want them to be. (See Preferences on page 314.) Importing Common Creditor Data from Other Programs If you were using a competing program such as Collier s TopForm or West s Chap7..13 (formerly by Specialty Software), you can import your common creditor information into Best Case Bankruptcy! See page 277. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 69
Accessing Your Common Creditor List In most places where the Common Creditor List is accessible, the AddressFill list will appear as pictured below. You can begin to type the creditor name, then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. A creditor entry screen with the AddressFill list displayed. If you have the AddressFill feature turned off, or if you want to see the notes or contact information that you ve entered for a creditor, you can pull up the actual Common Creditor List either by pressing 0 or by clicking on the button that looks like a rotary card file. To locate a creditor, begin to type the name or use the b key. To select a creditor that is highlighted, press R or click Select. Adding a Scheduled Creditor to Your Common Creditor List In Schedules D, E, F, and G, there is a check box in the upper right corner of each entry screen marked Add to CCL. This box also appears in additional notice party screens. Click in this box (or press A-L) to mark it; the creditor will be added to the Common Creditor List when you save this creditor entry. Alternatively, in Schedules D, E, F and the additional notice party entry screens, you can position the cursor in the creditor name field and press C-0. A message will appear telling you that the creditor has been added to the Common Creditor List. Adding a Creditor to your Common Creditor List When the List is On Your Screen or From Schedules G and H and the Statement of Financial Affairs With the Common Creditor List open, click New or press the I key. Type the name and address of the creditor, then click OK. The name appears in the creditor list highlighted. If you want that creditor to be copied to the entry screen you are working in, click Select. Adding Notes about a Creditor to Your Common Creditor List In the Common Creditor List, you can enter notes to yourself about this creditor. The notes do not print on the forms. To add notes, access the Common Creditor List from any creditor schedule, or through the Setup Menu. Highlight the creditor name and click the Edit button. Click the Notes tab in the top of the Common Creditor Information Window, then enter information. Click OK when you have finished. Adding Contact Information for a Creditor to Your Common Creditor List You can add contact information about a creditor such as the contact name, phone and fax. This information is just for your reference, and does not print on the forms. To add contact information, access the Common Creditor List from any creditor schedule, or through the Setup Menu. Highlight the creditor name and click the Edit button. Enter information then click OK when you have finished. Default Consideration Through the Common Creditor List, you can enter a default answer for this creditor for the consideration question which appears on Schedules E and F. If you do add consideration here, this answer will automatically be filled in each time this creditor is selected for Schedule E or F from the Common Creditor List. Associating Additional Notice Parties with Creditors Using the Common Creditor List, you can associate additional notice parties with creditors, such as collection agencies or attorneys that are usually associated with a given creditor. 70 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If you associate additional notice party information with a creditor in the Common Creditor List, then, when you select this creditor from the Common Creditor List, a message will pop up telling you that this additional notice party is usually associated with the creditor and asking if you want to add it to the additional notice tab. If you click Yes, the additional notice party will automatically be added. To add an additional notice party, your party already needs to be in the Common Creditor List. If it isn t, add it by accessing the Common Creditor List through any creditor schedule or by clicking Setup, Common Creditor List, New. Then, in the Common Creditor List, highlight the creditor s name and click the Edit button. Click the Additional Notice tab in the top of the Common Creditor Information window, click Add, then select the appropriate party. Click OK when you have finished. Editing an Entry in the Common Creditor List To edit an entry in the Common Creditor List, highlight the creditor in the AddressFill list and click Edit, or go to any screen where the common creditor button appears, access the list by clicking the common creditor button or by pressing [F10], then highlight your creditor and click Edit. Make your changes, then click OK. Note that your changes are not retroactive. Also note that you cannot edit an entry by correcting it in a creditor entry screen then clicking the Add to CCL check box. (This will add a new entry to the Common Creditor List.) Printing Your Common Creditor List Access your Common Creditor List as described above. Click the Print button in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you want to include creditor notes. Click Yes or No. When the report appears on your screen, click the button with the printer on it to send it to your printer. Or, if you want to cancel without printing, click the X button or press E. More print preview options are described on page 193. Creditor Pick List Combining Common Creditor Lists from Multiple Machines Our Common Creditor Import/Export Feature allows you combine Common Creditor Lists from multiple machines! See page 278. The creditor pick list button, pictured below, allows you to select a creditor that has already been listed for this case. You can also access your creditor pick list by pressing 9 or through the DEF tab in the AddressFill list, described page 69. AddressClipper Creditor Pick List: or press 9 The AddressClipper feature allows you to copy and paste an address from anywhere in Best Case Bankruptcy to any other name and address entry. For example, if a codebtor in a case is also a creditor, and you entered the person as a codebtor first, you can copy the name and address from the codebtor record to your clipboard then paste it into a new creditor entry. To use the AddressClipper, just position the cursor anywhere in the address and press C-S-c. The name and address will be copied to your clipboard. To paste this information, position the cursor in the address for the new record and press C-S-v. For more information about AddressClipper, see page 30. Locator Key Summary List Windows for Schedules D, E, F, G and H and the List of Equity Security Holders contain a special locator function: To jump to a creditor in the list, begin to type the name. Press R when the creditor you want to edit is highlighted. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 71
Foreign Addresses When entering foreign addresses for creditors, enter the street address, city and postal code in the street address lines in Best Case Bankruptcy, then type the country name in ALL CAPS in the city field. If you follow this procedure, no comma will appear between the city and state on the printed matrix. Although the zip code appears as 00000-0000 on the screen, it will not print out. Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another In the Summary List Windows for Schedules D, E and F, you ll see Move to E/F, Move to D/E and Move to D/F buttons. If you entered a creditor on the wrong schedule, just highlight it in the Summary List Window and click the Move button, then pick the new schedule. You will probably have to enter some additional information in the new schedule for this creditor. Cut and Paste from Summary List Window In Summary List Windows for Schedules D, E and F, the name and address of the highlighted creditor appear in the bottom of the window. You can highlight this information then press C-c to copy it to your clipboard, where you can use it in other applications. Press C-V to paste it somewhere else. You can highlight a creditor s name and address here, then copy to your clipboard for use in other applications. Creditor Import/Export If your client can give you a file of creditor names and addresses in text format, you can import these directly into Best Case Bankruptcy. Our creditor export feature allows you to export creditors for use in other applications. See Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export on page 280 for details. Copy an Entire Creditor Schedule from One Case to Another For related cases, you can use our creditor Import and Export features to copy an entire schedule from one case to another. See Copying a Creditor Schedule from One Client to Another on page 286. (Alternatively, you can make a duplicate copy of an entire client file see page 278.) Exclude Creditor from Matrix The entry window for Schedules D, E and F includes a check box in the upper right corner that allows you to exclude a creditor from the matrix. You generally would not want to use this option since all creditors are required to be listed on the matrix, but there may be special circumstances where you want a party listed on a creditor schedule and not the mailing matrix. 72 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Checkboxes in the upper right corner of the entry screens allow you to exclude this entry from the matrix and or schedules Exclude Creditor from Schedule and Schedule Total Entry screens for Schedules D, E and F also allow you to exclude the creditor from the schedule but include them in the mailing matrix, Form 4. The List of Creditors Holding the 20 Largest Unsecured Claims, Form 8. The Debtor s Statement of Intention, and the Chapter 13 Plan. To use this option, put a check in the box in the upper right corner marked Do Not Print/Total on Sch. D/E/F. This option was added to give you additional flexibility for Forms 4, 8 and the Chapter 13 Plan, and would only be used in special circumstances. Schedule D. Creditors Holding Secured Claims Click the property button to edit the highlighted property on Schedule A or B. Schedule D Summary List Window As with exemption information, you can enter information about creditors holding secured claims through the property entry screens (described in Entering Lien and Exemption Information through Schedule A on page 55), or through the Schedule D Entry Screen, described below. Again, the methods produce the same results; pick whichever is more convenient. If there are no secured claims, leave this schedule blank. The appropriate box will be checked on the form. Entering secured claim information 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Schedule D. Creditors Holding Secured Claims. Keyboard Shortcut to Open Schedule D From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press D to open Schedule D. From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-D to jump to Schedule D. 2. You will get the Schedule D List Screen. To add a secured claim, click Insert. If there are multiple liens against one item of property, enter the most senior lien first. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 73
Tabs allow you to enter related information about Form 22 treatment, Chapter 13 treatment or Form 8 intent, codebtors and additional notice parties. Click to access a list of creditors already entered for this case. Schedule D Entry Screen 3. You will get a blank Schedule D Entry Screen with the following tabs at the top, each of which is described in greater detail below: Creditor Information, where you will enter the information that will appear on Schedule D, 13 Plan Treatment, (if a Chapter 13 Case), which lists the treatment of the claim in the Chapter 13 Plan, or Form 8 Intention (if a Chapter 7 case), Codebtors, where you can enter information about any codebtors of the claim which will appear on Schedule H, and Additional Notice, where you can enter parties related to the claim who need to be notified of the filings, such as collection agencies. These parties will be added to the matrix. Notes/POC, where you can enter notes on a particular creditor and track the receipt of a Proof of Claim Creditor Screen Shortcuts Don t miss all of the shortcuts listed in the previous section Tools and Shortcuts Available in Creditor Schedules starting on page 69! Creditor information 1. Creditor Name Already in Common Creditor List: If this creditor is already in your Common Creditor List, just start to type the creditor name. When the correct creditor is highlighted, press R to select it. This feature is called AddressFill. If you have AddressFill turned off, you can click the rotary card file button to select from your Common Creditor List instead. The Common Creditor List and AddressFill are described more fully on page 69. Creditor Name New: If this is a new creditor, type the name, then press T. The AddressFill list will disappear; type the address and press T again. Best Case will skip the city and state fields and prompt you for the zip code. When you enter the zip, the city and state will then be filled in automatically. Creditor Name Already Listed in Case: The button or the 9 key will give you a list of all scheduled creditors in the case. You might use these if you have AddressFill turned off. Alphabetizing by Last Name If the creditor is an individual, insert a tilde character before the creditor s last name to alphabetize the creditor by last name. (e.g. type Jane R. ~Smith to have Jane R. Smith appear on the matrix and schedule alphabetized under S.) The tilde character will not appear on the printed form. 74 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Punctuation in the Matrix: If your local rules specify that the creditor address matrix should not contain punctuation, or shouldn t include certain characters such as the %, don t use these when entering address data. An option in the Setup/Jurisdiction/Matrix screen allows you to exclude certain characters from the matrix. See page 301. 2. Account Number: Enter the account number, if applicable. If you want to mask all but the last four digits of the account number on the printed form, click the Mask on Form box. (For more privacy options, see Privacy Tab on page 190.) Press T. 3. Date Incurred: Type a date or a range of dates then press T. You can use any date format in this field. 4. Nature of Lien: You can either type in a description or browse a list of common answers. To browse the list, press 0 or click the button to the right of the field then type the first letter of your choice. If you don t see the choice you want in the list, you can add it for future use by clicking Add. Like the Common Creditor List, this list will be accessible as you enter information for other bankruptcy clients. 5. Description of Property: You can either link a piece of property from Schedule A or B to Schedule D, or you can type in a new description. Linking is the preferred method because it will save you time and will help Best Case to properly calculate the debtor s equity in property for Schedule C and the liquidation analysis. To link property from Schedule A or B: Press 0 or click on the house button to the right of the field for a list of all property. With the list displayed, move the highlighter bar to the desired property and press R, or click on the piece of property that you want then click Select. The full description and market value of the property will be copied to this entry screen for you. If you update the property description or market value on Schedule A or B, changes will be reflected here as well. The override check box which appears after you have selected property allows you to keep the link between the two entries but have a different property description for the item on D. You might use this feature if you have a particularly long description on Schedule A but want a shorter description to appear on Schedule D. To create an entry without linking: If you don t want to link this claim to a particular piece of property, you can just type the description of property instead of using the list button. This may be useful when, for example, a taxing authority has a lien against all of the debtor s property and you want a claim on Schedule D to read all of debtor s personal property. To add a new item of property to Schedule A or B: Press 0 or click on the button to the right of the field for a list of all property. With the list displayed, click the New A button to add a piece of real estate, or the New B button to add a piece of real property. You will be prompted to enter all of the information that will appear on the property schedule, such as the description and location of property, the nature of the debtor s interest (if real property), the type of property (if personal property), and the market value. When you have entered this information, click OK. The new item will be highlighted. Press R or click Select to link the item to the current entry on Schedule D. The property description and market value will appear in Schedule D, and the item has been added to the property schedule. Overriding the Property Description from Schedule A/B: The Override checkbox beneath the property description allows you to keep the link from Schedule A or B to Schedule D, but type in a different property description on D. You might use this feature if you have a lengthy property description on Schedule A, but just want to create a short reference to it on Schedule D. 6. Market Value: If you linked a piece of property from A or B, the market value has been copied for you from the property schedule. Otherwise, enter that amount. 7. Senior Liens: This refers to other liens against this item of property that take priority over this lien. Best Case Bankruptcy ranks all liens against a piece of property in order to calculate the unsecured portion of each claim. By default, Best Case ranks liens in the order that they are input, but you can change the Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 75
ranking through the property schedule, A or B, as described in the section Changing Rank Order for Liens on page 56. Note that this information does not print on Schedule D and is listed here for your reference. 8. Person liable for debt (H, W, J, C): If this is a joint debtor, indicate whether the wife, husband, both, or the marital community is liable for the debt by typing h, w, j or C or by clicking on the m button to the right of the field labeled H, W, J, C and selecting your choice from the drop-down list. (If this is not a joint case, NA will appear in this field.) Community Property States If you are filing in a Community Property State, an option in the Setup Menu allows you to specify that by default, community should be selected as the responsible party for all debts. See Jurisdictions: Basic Information on page 298. 9. Contingent, Unliquidated, Disputed: If the debt is contingent, unliquidated, or disputed, use the mouse to mark the appropriate check boxes on the screen, or tab to the check boxes and press s to mark them. 10. Support 523(a)(15): If you check this box, the creditor's claim amount is included in total of the "Domestic Support, Separation Agreement and Divorce Decree Obligations Not Recorded on Schedule E" which prints in the Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities section of the Summary of Schedules, as described on page 50. 11. Amount of Claim: Type the amount of claim, or, if the value is unknown, click on the unknown box or press A-k. Don t enter a dollar sign. 12. Unsecured Amount: The unsecured amount of the claim will be filled in automatically as follows: If there are no senior liens, the unsecured portion is calculated as the total amount of claim minus the value of the property securing the claim. If there are senior liens, the unsecured amount is calculated as the total claim amount minus the debtor s equity in the property, where the debtor s equity is the property value minus other secured claims against it. To type in your own answer for the unsecured portion, click on the Auto box (for autocalculation ) so that the check mark goes away, then type in your answer. 13. Adding Related Information: If you want to enter other information about this claim, as described in the section headings below, (Form 8 Intention, 13 Plan Treatment, Codebtors, Additional Notice Parties), click Next Tab or press C-T. 14. Saving Changes: To save changes to this record and enter another secured claim, press A-R. Or, click OK to save your changes and return to the Schedule D List Screen. Locator Function to Find a Creditor: Summary List Windows for Schedules D, E and F contain a special locator function: To jump to a creditor in the list, begin to type the name. Press R when the creditor you want to edit is highlighted. Means Test Treatment (only appears for Chapter 7 & 13 cases) Form 22 allows the debtor to deduct the average of payments due to secured creditors over the next 60 months. In addition, if a secured claim is in default, and the property securing the claim is necessary for the support of the debtor or the debtor's dependents, the debtor may deduct 1/60th of the cure amount. 76 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Form 22 Means Test Tab You can use the Form 22 Means Test tab for Schedule D creditors to compute the 60-month average payment on a secured claim as well as to include or exclude any arrearages. You can also use the Means Test tab to designate a claim as secured by the debtor's house or vehicles, which Best Case uses to calculate the debtor's housing and utilities and transportation allowances. (For more information see, Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims on page 149.) NOTE: The extra information collected in the Form 22 Means Test tab is only required if the debtor's income is above the state median. If the debtor's income falls below the state median, you can skip this tab. Form 8 Intention (only appears for Chapter 7 cases) As you enter creditor information in Schedule D, the Form 8 Intention tab provides a shortcut for you to specify information that will appear on Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention. This tab appears for each secured creditor in Chapter 7 cases only. The Form 8 Intentions Tab appears in Chapter 7 cases Click on the appropriate choice then click OK to save your changes, or click the Codebtor or Additional Notice party tab to add more information about this creditor. Note that this tab only appears for Schedule D creditors. If you want to specify intentions for unsecured creditors, you need to go the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Form 8, click the Show priority and Unsecured Claim check box, then specify an intention for any Schedule E or F creditor that you want to appear on Form 8. See Form 8 Intention (only appears for Chapter 7 cases) on page 76 for more information. 13 Plan treatment (only appears for Chapter 13 cases) From the creditor information screen, access the 13 Plan Treatment tab by clicking on it or by pressing A-1. The 13 Plan Treatment tab This tab indicates the treatment of this claim under the Chapter 13 Plan. You may not need to change anything on this screen, since the usual treatment (Secured, Pro rata) is listed, which means that the creditor will be paid in full Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 77
up to the secured value of the claim on a pro rata basis. For complete information about assigning treatment classes to Schedule D claims, see page 159. Codebtors From the creditor information screen, click the Codebtors tab or press A-B. In this screen, you ll get a list of all codebtors related to this claim. Codebtors for all claims will be listed on Schedule H. Codebtors. The Codebtor tab 1. To add a codebtor for this claim, click Insert. The entry screen will appear as pictured below. The left half of the screen contains questions about the codebtor, and the right half contains questions about the creditor. You ll notice that the creditor information has been filled in for you. Codebtor Entry Screen 2. If this is the first codebtor that you have entered for this case, type the name and address of the codebtor; that name and address will automatically be entered in the Codebtor List for this case, where you can access it when you enter other claims, as described in the sidebar. Notice that you also have access to your Common Creditor List here, through the button or the 0 key. Codebtor List Best Case Bankruptcy automatically keeps a list of the names and addresses of all codebtors in the case so that if a person is a codebtor for more than one claim, you can copy the codebtor information without having to retype it. In addition, parties entered in Schedules D-H, Form 7 and Additional Notice can also be retrieved from this list. To access the codebtor list, click on the list button to the right of the name field, move to the codebtor you want to select, and click Select. Or, if you prefer to use the keyboard, press 9 while the cursor rests in the codebtor name field. You can then use the b to move the highlighter bar to the desired name, or begin to type the name, then press R when it is highlighted. 3. After you have entered the name and address of the codebtor, enter any comments in the comment fields, then click OK to save your changes or press A-R to enter another codebtor for this claim. 4. When you click OK, you will be returned to the Codebtor List Screen. If there is another codebtor for this claim, you can enter that information now by clicking Insert again. 78 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
5. If there are additional notice parties associated with this claim, such as collection agencies, click Next Tab. If you have finished entering information about this claim, click OK; you will be returned to the Schedule D List Screen. Additional Notice The Additional Notice tab on the Schedule D Entry screen allows you to enter the names and addresses of any parties who should be informed of the proceedings in the case, such as collection agencies, attorneys representing creditors, etc. These parties will be listed on the creditor address list (matrix). When you go to the Additional Notice tab, you will see the Additional Notice List Screen, which lists all parties entered for this claim. To add a party, click Insert. Additional Notice Entry Screen An Additional Notice Entry Window appears, with the AddressFill list of your Common Creditors and scheduled creditors in it as pictured above. You can select a creditor from the AddressFill list, or type in a new name and address. If you don t use the Common Creditor List, the AddressHelper will help you by filling in the city and state when you enter the zip code. If this party is not in your Common Creditor List already, you can add it by checking the CCL box below the rotary card file button. To save this entry and add another Additional Notice Party for this creditor, press A-R. Or, if there are no more, just click OK. You will be returned to the Additional Notice List Screen, where you can click OK to return to the Schedule D List Screen. Associating this Party with this Creditor for Future Cases: For common creditors that frequently use the same collection agencies or attorneys to represent them, you can associate an additional notice party with a creditor in your Common Creditor List. Whenever you pick that creditor, you ll be asked if you want to add the additional notice party. See Common Creditor List on page 69. Listing Additional Notice Parties on Schedules: Usually, additional notice parties are listed on the matrix but not on creditor schedules. If you want them on the creditor schedules, see Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. They will print with the phrase Representing (Creditor name) to indicate that they are not actual creditors. For more information about additional notice parties, see Adding names other than creditors to the matrix on page 109. Notes/POC The Notes/POC tab allows you to keep track of information related to particular creditors and includes a checkbox that lets you track the receipt of a Proof of Claim, the date the Proof of Claim was filed, and the Proof of Claim amount. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 79
When there are Multiple Liens against One Piece of Property If there are multiple liens against one piece of property, follow the steps above in Creditor Information, which begins on page 74. Best Case Bankruptcy ranks liens against a piece of property based on entry order, so enter the most senior lien first. This ranking is used to calculate the unsecured portion of each claim on Schedule D and to calculate the debtor s equity in each property item for Schedule C and, in a Chapter 13 case, the liquidation analysis. Lien ranking does not print on any of the Official Forms, however. The rank order of liens can easily be changed through Schedule A or B: Return to the Schedule D Summary List Window which lists all secured claims, then highlight the claim. Click the Property button with the house icon to edit the property. Click the Liens tab, then highlight the claim and click the Change Rank button. See Changing Rank Order for Liens on page 56 for more information. When Multiple Pieces of Property Secure a Lien When multiple pieces of property secure one claim, the best way to enter the lien is through Schedule D, and to type a description of the property without linking it to Schedule A or B. To do this: 1. While entering the property securing this lien on Schedules A and/or B, don t click the Liens tab to enter creditor information. If the property appears on Schedule A, remove the check mark from the Linked to Liens check box. You will then be able to type the amount of the secured claim. 2. From the Forms and Schedule Menu, double-click on Schedule D. 3. Click the Insert button. 4. Enter the claim normally, except you should manually type the description of property. (In other words, don t use the list button to pick a single piece of property.) Type a short description of the multiple pieces of property that secure this lien. 5. For market value, type the cumulative value of all property securing the lien. 6. The unsecured portion will be filled in for you. If you need to edit this amount, click the Auto box to remove the check mark, then type the unsecured amount. 7. When you have finished with this screen, click OK or enter related information about the claim, such as Chapter 13 Plan treatment, codebtors or additional notice parties by clicking the tabs at the top. Secured and Unsecured Totals on Schedule D From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open the Summary of Schedules to view a total of the secured and unsecured portions of claims entered on Schedule D. Editing Schedule D For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. 80 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Schedule E. Creditors Holding Unsecured Priority Claims Choose the type of priority from the drop-down list. If this creditor has already been entered for this case, click here to copy the name and address to this window. Use your Common Creditor List or type the name of the creditor and address. Schedule E Entry Screen Type an answer here or choose from your list of common answers. Each claim for Schedule E should appear on a separate entry screen. For example, if there are two ex-wives with alimony claims against the debtor, these would appear on two separate entry screens. Do not try to enter all claims of the same priority type on one entry screen, or all claims by one creditor on one entry screen. No debts of a given priority type If there are no priority debts of a certain category, don t select the category. Best Case Bankruptcy will mark the appropriate check boxes according to which categories you select. 1. Open Schedule E: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Schedule E. Creditors Holding Unsecured Priority Claims. Keyboard Shortcut to open Schedule E From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press E to open Schedule E. From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-E to jump to Schedule E. Creditor Screen Shortcuts Don t miss all of the shortcuts listed in the previous section Tools and Shortcuts Available in Creditor Schedules starting on page 69! 2. Add a Creditor: You will get a summary list screen that will list all items entered for Schedule E. Click Insert to add a creditor. 3. Type of Priority: To select the priority type, click on the m or press the b key on your keyboard, then click on the appropriate priority type. Or, use the keyboard to type the first letter of the type of priority. ( D=domestic support obligations, E=extensions of credit in an involuntary case, w=wages, etc. If there is more than one priority type that begins with this letter, press the letter again to cycle through your choices.) After selecting the priority type, press T to get to the next field. 4. Creditor Name and Address: To choose a creditor that is in your Common Creditor List, just begin to type the name, then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. To choose a creditor that is not in your Common Creditor List but has already been listed for this case, click the DEF tab or press 8, begin to type the name, then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. Other Ways to Access Common Creditor List Note: The rotary card file button or 0 will also allow you to access your Common Creditor List. Use either of these commands if you have the AddressFill feature turned off or if you want Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 81
to view notes or contact information in the Common Creditor List. The button and the 9 key will give you a list of all scheduled creditors in the case. Why Zip Code First? If you are entering a new creditor and you have the AddressHelper turned on, you will be prompted for the zip code first, and the city and state will be filled in for you. See page 319 for more information about the AddressHelper. If this is a new creditor, just type the name, press T, then type in the address. AddressFill will disappear as soon as you press T. (For more information about AddressFill, see page 260.) Alphabetizing by Creditor s Last Name If the creditor is an individual, insert a tilde character before the creditor s last name to alphabetize the creditor by last name. (e.g. type Jane R. ~Smith to have Jane R. Smith appear on the matrix and schedule alphabetized under S.) The tilde character will not appear on the printed form. 5. Account Number: Enter the account number, if applicable. If you want to mask all but the last four digits of the account number on the printed form, click the Mask on Form box. (For more privacy options, see Privacy Tab on page 190.) Press T. 6. Date Incurred: Type a date or a range of dates then press T. You can use any date format in this field. 7. Consideration: You can either type in a description or browse a list of common answers. To browse the list, press 0 or click the button to the right of the field, then type the first letter of your choice. Press the letter again to cycle through choices that begin with that letter. Press R when your choice is highlighted. If you don t see the choice you want in the list, you can add it for future use by clicking Add. Like the Common Creditor List, this list will be accessible as you enter information for other bankruptcy clients. 8. Person Liable for the Debt: If the client is a joint debtor, indicate whether the wife, husband, both, or the marital community is liable for the debt by pressing h, w, j, or C or by clicking on the m button to the right of the field labeled H, W, J, C and selecting your choice from the drop-down list. (If this is not a joint case, NA will appear in this field.) Community Property States If you are filing in a Community Property State, an option in the Setup Menu allows you to specify that by default, community should be selected as the responsible party for all debts. See Jurisdictions: Basic Information on page 298. 9. Contingent, Unliquidated, Disputed: If the debt is contingent, unliquidated, or disputed, use the mouse to mark the appropriate check boxes on the screen or press A and the underlined letter. 10. Amount of Claim: Enter the amount of the claim, or click on Unknown to indicate that the value is unknown. Press T to move to the next field. 11. Priority Amount: Best Case fills this out for you using the lesser amount of the amount of claim or the stated dollar limit for a claim of this priority type as listed on the first page of Schedule E. You can override the answer Best Case Bankruptcy fills in by typing over it, or check the Unknown box. Note: Amounts entitled to priority were last updated in April 2004, and are subject to adjustment in April 2007. 12. Saving Your Entry: If you want to save this information and enter another priority claim, press A- R. The last type of priority you selected will automatically be filled in. Or, to return to the Schedule 82 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Sort by name or priority type E List Screen, click OK. If you want to enter other information about this claim, as described in the section headings below, click Next Tab or press C-T. Schedule E Summary List Window: sorted by priority type The Summary List Window for Schedule E allows you to sort creditors by name or by priority type. Click the tab at the top to change the sort order. Note that this sort option will help you to find certain creditors, but does not affect how Schedule E will print. Number of Pages in Schedule E Schedule E prints with one summary sheet listing all types of priority and at least one continuation sheet for each applicable priority type. If you have only two priority claims, but they are of different types, Schedule E will print on three pages. View Priority and Nonpriority Totals From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open the Summary of Schedules to view a total of the priority and nonpriority amounts of all Schedule E claims. Form 22 Means Test Treatment (only appears for Chapter 7 & 13 cases) The Form 22 Means Test tab is available for all individual or joint Chapter 7 and 13 Filings. Use this tab if you want the amount of a priority claim listed on Form 22 to be different than the amount you list on Schedule E. You can also use this tab to completely exclude a priority claim from the total of priority claims that gets calculated on Form 22. (For more information see Specifying a Means Test Treatment for Priority Claims on page 152.) NOTE: The extra information collected in the Form 22 Means Test tab is only required if the debtor's income is above the state median. If the debtor's income falls below the state median, you can skip this tab. 13 Plan treatment (only appears for Chapter 13 cases) This tab indicates the treatment of this claim under the Chapter 13 Plan. You may not need to change anything on this screen, since the usual treatment was selected automatically. (Unsecured, Priority for the priority portion, Unsecured General Nonpriority for the nonpriority portion, if any.) For information about assigning treatment classes to Schedule E claims, see page 162. Codebtors To access the codebtor screen from the creditor information screen, click the Codebtors tab or press A-B. In this tab, you ll get a list of all codebtors related to this claim. Codebtors for all claims will be listed on Schedule H. Codebtors. 1. To add a codebtor for this claim, click Insert. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 83
2. The Codebtor entry screen will appear. The left half of the screen contains questions about the codebtor, and the right half contains questions about the creditor. You ll notice that the creditor information has been filled in for you. 3. If this is the first codebtor that you have entered for this case, type the name and address of the codebtor; that name and address will automatically be entered in the codebtor list, where you can access it when you enter other claims, as described below. Notice that you also have access to your Common Creditor List here, accessible through the button or the 0 key. Codebtor List: Best Case Bankruptcy automatically keeps a list of the names and addresses of all codebtors in the case so that if a person is a codebtor for more than one claim, you can copy the codebtor information without having to retype it. In addition, parties entered in Schedules D-H, Form 7 and Additional Notice can also be retrieved from this list. To access the codebtor list, click on the list button to the right of the name field, (or press 9), move to the codebtor you want to select, and click Select. 4. After you have entered the name and address of the codebtor, enter any comments in the comment fields. If there is another codebtor for this claim, press A-R to save this entry and add a new one. If not, just click OK. 5. You will be returned to the Codebtor List Screen. If there is another codebtor for this claim, you can enter that information now by clicking Insert again. If there are additional notice parties associated with this claim, such as collection agencies, click on Next Tab. If you have finished entering information about this claim, click OK; you will be returned to the Schedule E List Screen. Additional Notice The Additional Notice tab on the Schedule E Entry screen allows you to enter the names and addresses of any parties that should be informed of the proceedings in the case, such as collection agencies. These parties will be listed on the creditor address matrix. When you go to the Additional Notice tab, you will see the Additional Notice List Screen. To add a party, click Insert. An Additional Notice Entry Window appears, with the AddressFill list of your Common Creditors and scheduled creditors in it. You can select a creditor from the AddressFill list, or type in a new name and address. If you don t use the Common Creditor List, the AddressHelper will help you by filling in the city and state when you enter the zip code. To save this entry and add another Additional Notice Party for this creditor, press A-R. Or, if there are no more, just click OK. You will be returned to the Additional Notice List Screen, where you can click OK to return to the Schedule E List Screen. For more information about additional notice parties, see Adding names other than creditors to the matrix on page 109. Printing Additional Notice Parties on Schedules If you want additional notice parties printed on the creditor schedules, see Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. They will print with the phrase Representing (Creditor name) to indicate that they are not actual creditors. For common creditors that frequently use the same collection agencies or attorneys to represent them, you can associate an additional notice party with a creditor in your Common Creditor List. Whenever you pick that creditor, you ll be asked if you want to add the additional notice party. See Common Creditor List on page 69. Notes/POC The Notes/POC tab allows you to keep track of information related to particular creditors and includes a checkbox that lets you track the receipt of a Proof of Claim, the date the Proof of Claim was filed, and the Proof of Claim amount. 84 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Editing Schedule E For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. Schedule F. Creditors Holding Unsecured Nonpriority Claims Use your Common Creditor List to add this creditor or to select from your list. Click to access a list of creditors already entered for this case. Use the mouse to indicate whether the claim is contingent, unliquidated, disputed, or subject to setoff or press A and the underlined key. Schedule F Entry Screen Select the appropriate option under which to list the creditor in the Statistical Summary on the Summary of Schedules. Creditor Screen Shortcuts Don t miss all of the shortcuts listed in the previous section Tools and Shortcuts Available in Creditor Schedules starting on page 69! If there are no nonpriority claims, leave this schedule blank. The appropriate box will be checked on the form. 1. Open Schedule F: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Schedule F. Creditors Holding Unsecured Nonpriority Claims. Keyboard Shortcut From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press F to open Schedule F. From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-F to jump to Schedule F. 2. Insert a new record: You will get a summary list screen that will list all items entered for Schedule F. Click Insert to add a creditor. 3. Creditor Name and Address: If this creditor is already in your Common Creditor List, just start to type the creditor name. When the correct creditor is highlighted, press R to select it. This feature is called AddressFill. If this is a new creditor, type the name, with a tilde (~) inserted before the word you want this entry alphabetized under, then press T. The AddressFill list will disappear; type the address and press T again. Best Case will skip the city and state fields and prompt you for the zip code. When you enter the zip, the city and state will then be filled in automatically. Note: The rotary card file button or 0 will also allow you to access your Common Creditor List. The button and the 9 key will give you a list of all scheduled creditors in the case. You might use these if you have AddressFill turned off. 4. Account Number: Enter the account number, if applicable. If you want to mask all but the last four digits of the account number on the printed form, click the Mask on Form box. (For more privacy options, see Privacy Tab on page 190.) Press T. Credit Card Validation In Schedule F, when you enter an account number that is formatted like a Visa, MasterCard, American Express or Discover, our credit card validation system checks to see if it is a valid Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 85
card number. If it is not a valid card number, either because numbers have been left out or it doesn t fit the credit card formula for that type of card, a warning message will appear. Click OK to acknowledge the message. You can correct the number or just press T to move on. You can turn the credit card validation system on or off through your Setup Menu. See Preferences on page 314. 5. Date Incurred: Type a date or a range of dates then press T. You can use any date format in this field. 6. Consideration: You can either type in a description or browse a list of common answers. To browse the list, press 0 or click the button to the right of the field. If you don t see the choice you want in the list, you can add it for future use by clicking Add. Like the Common Creditor List, this list will be accessible as you enter information for other bankruptcy clients. 7. Amount of Claim: Type the amount of claim, or, if the value is unknown, click on the unknown box or press A-U. Don t enter a dollar sign. 8. Person liable for debt (H, W, J, C): If this is a joint debtor, indicate whether the wife, husband, both, or the marital community is liable for the debt by typing h, w, j or C or by clicking on the m button to the right of the field labeled H, W, J, C and selecting your choice from the drop-down list. (If this is not a joint case, NA will appear in this field.) Community Property States If you are filing in a Community Property State, an option in the Setup Menu allows you to specify that by default, community should be selected as the responsible party for all debts. See Jurisdictions: Basic Information on page 298. 9. Contingent, Unliquidated, Disputed, Subject to Setoff: If the debt is contingent, unliquidated, disputed, or subject to setoff, use the mouse to mark the appropriate check boxes on the screen, or tab to the check boxes and press s to mark them. 10. PND Statistics for 28 U.S.C. 159: PND Statistics for 28 U.S.C. 159: In addition to certain types of priority creditors from Schedule E, the Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities that prints with the Summary of Schedules also includes sections for certain types of primarily non-dischargeable debts (PND) that are typically listed on Schedule F, specifically, "student loans", "domestic support, separation agreements or divorce decree obligations not listed on Schedule E" and "obligations to pension or profit sharing or other similar obligations." To include a Schedule F creditor in the Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities, click the "Student Loan," "Support, Sep, Divorce" or "Pension" radio button to indicate the proper obligation. The claim amount automatically gets added to the proper section of the Statistical Summary. (For more information on the Statistical Summary, consult Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities and Related Data (28 U.S.C. 159) on page 50.) 11. Saving Your Entry: If you want to save this information and enter another claim for Schedule F, press A-R. If you want to save this information and return to the Schedule F List Screen, click OK. If you want to enter other information about this claim, as described in the section headings below, click Next Tab or press C-T. Summary List Windows for creditor schedules contain a special locator function: To jump to a creditor in the list, begin to type the name. Press R when the creditor you want to edit is highlighted. 13 Plan treatment (only appears for Chapter 13 cases) This tab indicates the treatment of this claim in the Chapter 13 Plan. You may not need to change anything on this screen, since the usual treatment is listed (Unsecured, General, Nonpriority). For instructions on assigning treatment classes to Schedule F claims, see page 163. 86 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Codebtors In this screen, you ll get a list of all codebtors related to this claim. Codebtors for all claims will be listed on Schedule H. Codebtors. 1. To add a codebtor for this claim, click on Insert. 2. The Codebtor entry screen will appear. The left half of the screen contains questions about the codebtor, and the right half contains questions about the creditor. You ll notice that the creditor information has been filled in for you. 3. Type the name and address of the codebtor or select one from the codebtor list, described below. If you are entering a codebtor for the first time, that name and address will automatically be added to the codebtor list where you can access it when you enter other claims. Notice that you also have access to your Common Creditor List here, accessible through button or the 0 key. Codebtor List: Best Case Bankruptcy automatically keeps a list of the names and addresses of all codebtors in the case so that if a person is a codebtor for more than one claim, you can copy the codebtor information without having to retype it. In addition, parties entered in Schedules D-H, Form 7 and Additional Notice can also be retrieved from this list. To access the codebtor list, click on the list button to the right of the name field, (or press 9), move to the codebtor you want to select, and click Select. 4. After you have entered the name and address of the codebtor, enter any comments in the comment fields. Press A-R to enter another codebtor for this claim, or click OK to save to your changes. 5. When you click OK, you will be returned to the Codebtor List Screen. If there is another codebtor for this claim, you can enter that information now by clicking Insert again. If there are additional notice parties associated with this claim, such as collection agencies, click Next Tab. If you are finished entering information about this claim, click OK; you will be returned to the Schedule F List Screen. Additional Notice The Additional Notice tab on the Schedule F Entry screen allows you to enter the name and address of any party that should be informed of the proceedings in the case, such as collection agencies. These parties will be listed on the creditor address list. When you go to the Additional Notice tab, you will see the Additional Notice List Screen, which lists all parties entered for this claim. To add a party, click Insert. An Additional Notice Entry Window appears, with the AddressFill list of your Common Creditors and scheduled creditors in it. You can select a creditor from the AddressFill list, or type in a new name and address. If you don t use the Common Creditor List, the AddressHelper will help you by filling in the city and state when you enter the zip code. To save this entry and add another Additional Notice Party for this creditor, press A-R. Or, if there are no more, just click OK. You will be returned to the Additional Notice List Screen, where you can click OK to return to the Schedule D List Screen. Printing Additional Notice Parties on Schedules If you want additional notice parties printed on the creditor schedules, see Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. They will print with the phrase Representing (Creditor name) to indicate that they are not actual creditors. For more information about additional notice parties, see Adding names other than creditors to the matrix on page 109. Associating Additional Notice Parties with Creditors in Your Common Creditor List For common creditors that frequently use the same collection agencies or attorneys to represent them, you can associate an additional notice party with a creditor in your Common Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 87
Creditor List. Whenever you pick that creditor, you ll be asked if you want to add the additional notice party. See Common Creditor List on page 69. Notes/POC The Notes/POC tab allows you to keep track of information related to particular creditors and includes a checkbox that lets you track the receipt of a Proof of Claim, the date the Proof of Claim was filed, and the Proof of Claim amount. Editing Schedule F For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. Schedule G. Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases For Chapter 7 or 13 cases, click here to indicate the debtor s intention with regard to contract or lease. Schedule G Entry Screen If there are no contracts/leases, leave this schedule blank. The appropriate box will be checked on the form. 1. Open Schedule G: In the Forms and Schedules Menu, press G to open Schedule G. Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases. (From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-G to jump to Schedule G.) 2. Insert an Entry: A list screen for Schedule G will appear. Click Insert to add an item to this schedule or press the I key on your keyboard. Importing Schedule G Parties from Spreadsheets or Other Client Files For Chapter 7 filings, click here to include the lease or contract on Form 8. Our Import/Export feature works for Schedule G parties, too! See Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export on page 280. 3. Contract or Lease Party Name: The AddressFill list appears to help you fill in the name: To choose a creditor that is in your Common Creditor List, just begin to type the name, then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. To choose a creditor that is not in your Common Creditor List but has already been listed for this case click the DEF tab or press 8, begin to type the name, then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. If this is a new person or company, just type the name, press T, then type in the address. AddressFill will disappear as soon as you press T. (For more information about AddressFill, see page 260.) Best Case will fill in the city and state for you when you enter the zip code. Alphabetizing by Last Name: This schedule is alphabetized for you. Insert the tilde ~ character before the last name to alphabetize the codebtor by last name. (e.g. type Jane R. ~Smith to have Jane R. Smith alphabetized under S.) The tilde character will not appear on the printed form. 88 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
4. Description of Contract or Lease and Nature of Debtor s Interest: Type the description of the lease or contract. There is a built-in word wrap feature that breaks the line naturally if you type to the end of the line, but you can use R if you want to insert line breaks. 5. Intention: If this is a Chapter 7 filing or a Chapter 13 case, you ll also have an Intention section where you can select assume or reject to indicate the debtor s intention regarding the contract or lease. If this is a Chapter 7 filing, and you want an assumed lease or contract to be included on the debtor's Statement of Intention, check the "List Lease on Form 8" checkbox. 6. Exclude From Matrix: By default, your creditor address matrix is configured to include creditors listed on Schedule G. A checkbox appears for each creditor entered that gives you the option of whether or not to include it on the matrix. See Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup on page 301 for information on excluding Schedule G creditors from the matrix. 7. Saving Your Entry: Press A-R to enter another contract/lease party or click OK to save your changes and return to the Schedule G List Screen. When you click OK, you will be returned to the Schedule G Summary List Screen where you can see all items to be printed for this schedule alphabetized by name. If there is another item to list for Schedule G, click Insert again and follow steps 3-6. Click Close in the Schedule G Summary List Window to return to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Excluding Schedule G Parties from the Matrix By default, Schedule G parties are included in the matrix. To exclude them, you can make a quick change to the matrix settings in the Jurisdictions portion of your Setup Menu. See page 301. Locator key shortcut From the list window in Schedule G, start typing the name of the party you want to edit. The highlighter bar will jump to that entry. Editing Schedule G For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. Schedule H. Codebtors Click for a pop-down list of all codebtors entered for this case or press 9 with the cursor in the codebtor name field.. Click to access your Common Creditor List. Click for a list of all creditors entered for this case. Click to add multiple creditors. Schedule H Entry Screen Codebtors can be entered through creditor entry screens as described on pages 78, 83, and 87, or through the Schedule H Entry Screen as described below. If there are no codebtors, leave this schedule blank. The appropriate box will be checked on the form. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 89
To enter codebtors through the Schedule H entry screen: 1. Open Schedule H: In the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight Schedule H. Codebtors and click Open or press H. From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-H to jump to Schedule H. 2. Add an Entry: The Codebtor List Screen appears, with columns for the name of the codebtor and the name of the corresponding creditor. Click Insert to add an item, or press the I key on your keyboard. 3. Codebtor Entry Screen: The codebtor entry screen appears, which is divided into two halves: the left half contains information about the codebtor, and the right half contains information about the creditor with the corresponding claim. 4. Codebtor List for this Case: Above and to the right of the codebtor s name field, you ll see a list button: Best Case Bankruptcy keeps a list of all codebtors entered for this client, so that if one person is a codebtor in more than one claim, that person s name and address can be inserted without being retyped. In addition, parties entered in Schedules D-H, Form 7 and Additional Notice can also be retrieved from this list. If this is the first codebtor that you have entered, the list will be blank: type the name and address of the codebtor directly into Schedule H and it will automatically be added to the codebtor list. If you want to use the name of a codebtor that you have used before with this client, click on the codebtor list button or press 9, move to the desired name, and click on Select. Alternatively, you can pick a name from your Common Creditor List by clicking the Common Creditor List button or by pressing 0. Alphabetizing by Last Name: This schedule is alphabetized by codebtor name. Insert a tilde character before the last name to alphabetize the codebtor by last name. (e.g. type Jane R. ~Smith to have Jane R. Smith alphabetized under S.) The tilde character will not appear on the printed form. 5. Codebtor comments: Type any relevant comments in the comment field, then press T. 6. Creditor Name and Address: For the creditor name and address, you can choose a name from the AddressFill List. If the creditor is in your Common Creditor List, just begin to type the name then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. If the creditor is not in your Common Creditor List but was a scheduled creditor for this case, click the DEF tab or press 8 then begin to type the creditor name. Press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. Alternatively, clicking on the list button in the Creditor side of the screen will give you a list of all creditors entered for this debtor. (Equivalent to pressing 9 with the cursor in the creditor name field.) Clicking on the Common Creditor List will give you a list of all creditors in your Common Creditor List. (Equivalent to pressing 0 with the cursor in the creditor name field.) If you don t want to select a creditor from your Common Creditor List or from the list of scheduled creditors, you can just begin to type a creditor name and address. Press T after entering the name to move to the next field and make the AddressFill list disappear. When you enter the zip code, the city and state will be filled in for you. (This is called AddressHelper; see page 319 for more information about the AddressHelper feature.) 7. Creditor Comments: Add any relevant comments. 8. Saving your entry: Press A-R to enter another codebtor, or click OK to save to your changes and return to the Codebtor List Screen. Codebtors are alphabetized for you. At the Codebtor List Screen, you can click Insert again to add another codebtor or click Close to return to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Excluding Codebtors from the Matrix: 90 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
By default, codebtors are not included in the matrix. To include them, you can make a quick change to the matrix settings in the Jurisdictions portion of your Setup Menu. See Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup on page 301. Editing Schedule H For added flexibility, this form can be edited in the Best Case Editor described on page 202. Schedule I. Current Income of Individual Debtors Questions for Schedule I are divided into several entry screens. Choose marital status from a drop-down list. If this box is marked, spousal information will be grayed out. The debtor s income from Schedule I, expenses from Schedule J, and excess income are displayed here as you work in this schedule. Schedule I Entry Screen - Marital Status/Employment Open Schedule I: In the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Schedule I. Current Income of Individual Debtors. To use the keyboard, press I from the Forms and Schedules Menu, or from a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-i to jump to Schedule I. The Schedule I Entry Screen will appear, divided into two halves: the left half contains information about the debtor s income and the right half contains information about the debtor s spouse s income. You will see a box marked Spouse N/A above the spouse s half. If the spouse s information is not required, the Spouse N/A box will be checked and the spouse s questions will be grayed out. You can click on the box to unmark Spouse N/A if you need to add the spouse s information. Married Filing as Individual: Instructions on Schedule I indicate that the spouse s information should be filled out if the debtor is married, not separated, and filing under Chapter 12 or Chapter 13, even if the debtor is filing as an individual. The forms themselves contain more detailed instructions than the entry screens; you may want to print out a blank Schedule I form if you need the full description of the information that is required on the form. The headings below correspond to the tabs at the top of the Schedule I Entry Screen. Marital status/employment 1. Marital Status: Click the m button to get a drop-down list of choices, or use the keyboard to type the first letter of the status you want to select then press T. 2. Employer: Enter the debtor s employer and the employer s address. You can choose a common employer from the AddressFill list, or type in a new address using R in the address field to insert line breaks. Press T to get to the next question. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 91
More Than One Job: If the debtor has more than one job, click the Additional Employers tab at the top of the window then click Insert to enter them. With the Additional Employers tab, you can enter several other jobs, and Best Case will automatically create an attachment to Schedule I to list them. Use your Common Creditor List to save common employers! See page 69 for more information about your Common Creditor List. 3. Occupation: Enter the debtor s occupation, then press T. 4. How long employed: Enter the length of time that the debtor has worked for this employer, then press T. If the Spouse N/A box is not checked, the cursor will move to the spouse s information. Enter the spouse s information just as you entered the debtor s, then click Next Tab. Dependents 1. Add Dependent: When you get to the dependents section, you will see a list screen. Click Insert to add a dependent. Enter the dependent s relationship to debtor, and age. For the relationship, you can either type an answer or choose from the drop-down list. To choose from the drop-down list using the keyboard, press the b until you get to your answer then press R to select it. 2. Save Entry: If there is another dependent, press A-R to save this entry then get to a blank entry screen. If this is the only dependent, click OK. 3. Moving On: When you have finished adding dependents, click Next Tab. If there are no dependents, click Next Tab. The word None will print in the dependents section automatically. Form Preference: If the debtor has no dependents, the word "None" appears in the Relationship column on the printed form. If you want the column to be left blank when there are no dependents, there is a special form preference which allows you to do so. For more information on using this preference, see Form Preferences on page 300. Wages Enter the debtor s pay period here, and we ll convert the below answers to monthly amounts. The Prorate button opens the Schedule I prorate calculator. The debtor s and debtor s spouse s total income appear here, along with the expense total from Schedule J and the excess income, if any. Schedule I Entry Screen - Wages 1. Pay Period: First, enter the debtor s regular pay period. Once you do this, you can enter all dollar amounts in the Wages tab directly from the debtor s paystub, no matter what the payroll interval; when Best Case prints the form, it will convert each of these answers to monthly amounts. The conversions are also 92 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
reflected in the Total Net Monthly Take Home Pay at the bottom of the entry screen. Best Case also gives you several options for viewing, prorating and rounding the amounts: To get a quick view of the monthly amounts that will appear when Schedule I prints, press [Alt- M] on your keyboard, or click the Show Monthly button located next to the Net Pay Per Period totals. A pop-up window appears with the monthly conversion info. If you want to round your entries to the nearest dime, dollar or penny and display the converted monthly amounts in the Schedule I data fields, click the Prorate button, as pictured above, next to the Net Pay Per Period to open the Schedule I prorate calculator. (For more information on how the prorate calculator works, see Schedule I Prorate Calculator on page 94.) Rounding Numbers: If you want to round the amounts entered on the printed form, but you do not want to change the payroll interval or the expenses on the wages tab, click the Round button ([Alt-U] on the keyboard) next to the Total Net Monthly Take Home Pay: Setting Rounding Methods on Schedule I 1 In the Select Rounding Method pop-up, select whether you want to round to the nearest penny, dime, dollar or cut all trailing cents of dollar amounts. Note: The Round $1.00 option will round all amounts to the nearest dollar (e.g. $1.50 becomes $2.00), while the 1.-- Cut Off Cents option will simply eliminate any trailing cents and print the whole dollar amount (e.g. $1.50 becomes $1.00.) 2 As you change rounding methods, you will notice the monthly amounts in the Select Rounding screen changing to reflect the rounding method. These changes will also be reflected on the printed Schedule I, and in the Total Net Monthly Take Home Pay on the Wages tab of Schedule I, but the pay interval and other information will not change. 3 If you round the wage information for all clients, you can use the Set Default button to set the rounding method used for this client as the default rounding method for all new cases. (Existing cases will not be affected by setting a default rounding method.) 4 Click OK to save your changes and return to Schedule I, or Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes. Twice Per Month vs. Every Two Weeks: Note that twice a month and every two weeks are not the same. A person getting paid every two weeks gets paid about 26 times per year, while a person getting paid twice a month gets paid exactly 24 times a year. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 93
2. Dollar amounts: Enter the dollar amount for each question directly, pressing T to move from field to field. Do not enter $ signs or negative signs. 3. Deductions: In the deductions section, you can type a description of other deductions in the fields labeled Other. If you have more deductions than you can enter in this screen, you can type see attachment, enter the total dollar figure of all other deductions, then create an attachment where you itemize deductions. Our attachment feature is described on page 198. 4. Spouse s Information: Enter the spouse s information, if applicable. 5. Totals: You ll notice that Best Case Bankruptcy keeps a running total of the debtor s and spouse s incomes at the bottom of the column. A combined total of both incomes is displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen, along with the expense total from Schedule J and the excess amount, the difference between the income and expenses. Click on Next Tab to get to the next section. Other Income Enter the dollar amounts for each question, pressing T to move from field to field. Again, you ll see that the total for the schedule is being tracked at the bottom left corner of the screen; Monthly Income lists the total for the debtor and the debtor s spouse. You may find the prorate calculator described below helpful. You ll notice that for a few questions, a button appears which allows you to input additional lines. If you add more lines than will fit on the page, Best Case will automatically add an attachment for you. Press Next Tab to get to the next entry screen. Prorating Amounts Schedule I Prorate Calculator Schedule I asks for monthly amounts, but sometimes the debtor may be paid biweekly, weekly, etc. With the prorate calculator, you can enter all financial information from the debtor s pay stub then convert to monthly amounts. To use the prorate calculator: 1. Go to Schedule I. 2. Click in the "Wages" tab at the top of the window. 3. Copy all numbers from debtor s pay stub into appropriate places in the Schedule I entry window. 4. Click on the button at the bottom of the debtor s income column. 5. The Prorate Calculator appears. 6. To select the payment interval, click the arrow to get a drop-down list of choices. Your choices are: Monthly, weekly, twice a month, and every two weeks. Click on your answer choice. Note that twice a month and every two weeks are not the same. A person getting paid every two weeks gets paid about 26 times per year, while a person getting paid twice a month gets paid exactly 24 times a year. 7. Select how you want to round the amounts. Note: The Round $1.00 option will round all amounts to the nearest dollar (e.g. $1.50 becomes $2.00), while the 1.-- Cutoff Cents option will simply eliminate any trailing cents and print the whole dollar amount (e.g. $1.50 becomes $1.00.) 8. When you click the Prorate button, all amounts in this column will be converted to monthly amounts, as required on Schedule I. Note that there is a separate prorate calculator button in the spouse s income column. 94 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Basic (keyboard) Prorate Calculator The basic prorate calculator converts one answer to its monthly equivalent. It is accessible from any currency field in any schedule. 1. With the cursor in the answer field of the dollar figure to be converted, press the gray * key in the number key pad on the right side of your keyboard. 2. Use the b key to move to the payment interval, or use the mouse to click on the payment interval. 3. As you move the highlighter bar, you ll see that the monthly equivalent of this amount is updated in the right side of the prorate window. When you get to the correct choice, press R or click the Paste button. 4. The monthly equivalent now appears in the answer field. Expected changes Type any increase or decrease of more than 10% in any of the categories listed on Schedule I that is expected to occur within a year of the filing date. Click OK to exit Schedule I and save your changes. Form Preference: If you do not enter any expected changes for the debtor, this line will be left blank on the printed form. If you want the word "None" to print here instead, there is a special form preference which allows you to do so. For more information on using this preference, see Form Preferences on page 300. Form Preferences Schedule I includes two form preferences which allow you to modify the text that appears on the form: 1. "If there are no dependents, print 'None' in Relationship Column?" Defaults to "Yes." If the preference is set to "No," and there are no dependents, the word "None" is removed from the relationship column, and it is left blank. 2. "For #17 print 'None' if left blank?" Defaults to "No." If the preference is activated and the debtor has no expected changes, the word "None" prints for Line 17, Expected Changes. Editing Schedule I Since you may need to edit this form, particularly if the debtor has more than one employer, it has been included in a special format so that you can open it in the Best Case Editor. See Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. Attachment for Business Income and Expenses An attachment for business income and expenses can be found in the Supplemental Forms Folder which allows you to itemize business income and expenses. This form, which is not an Official Form, can be edited in the Best Case Editor for added flexibility. See Amended Schedules Signature Declaration This is a simplified version of Form 6. Declaration Concerning Debtor's Schedules, specifically designed to accompany amended filings. Before printing users can specify how many pages are included in the Amended schedules. The Form includes one form preference: "Ask 'What document(s) are you amending?' each time?" When activated it allows the user to specify the Schedules being amended as well as the number of pages included in the amendment. (See Business Income and Expenses on page 118.) Printing Schedule I for Corporate Debtors: By default, this form is only listed for non business debtors. If you want it to appear for corporate or partnership debtors, see To Add a Form to Your Forms and Schedules Menu in the Jurisdiction Forms List section of the User s Guide, on page 299. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 95
Schedule J. Current Expenditures of Individual Debtors From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press J to open Schedule J. From a list screen of any other Schedule, A H, press C-J to jump to Schedule J. The debtor s total income from Schedule I appears here, along with the expense total and the excess, if any. Schedule J Entry Screen - Rent...Medical This entry screen is divided into several tabs to make it easier to enter and view information. The first tab, Rent Medical refers to the first 10 questions that appear on Schedule J. Enter the dollar amounts for each item, leaving items 0.00 where $0.00 should appear, and using the T key to move between fields. There is no need to use the $ sign; this will print as part of the form. To jump to a field, double-click in that field or use the accelerator key (press A and the underlined letter). The information in the field will be highlighted, and any information you type will overwrite the current information. To insert information in a field without typing over what is already there, single click in the field. An insertion bar will appear where you clicked. Click Next Tab to move to the next section. Enter information in the Transportation...Taxes and Installment Other tabs in the manner described above. Prorate calculator The form asks for monthly amounts, but you may have amounts for other intervals such as biweekly, weekly, etc. The prorate calculator quickly converts to monthly amounts. When using the prorate calculator, your interval choices are: daily (365 times per year), weekly (52 times per year), bi-weekly (every other week), semi-monthly (twice a month), bi-monthly (every other month), quarterly (4 times per year), semi-annually (twice a year) and annually (each year). To use the Prorate Calculator: 1. With the cursor in the answer box of dollar figure to be converted, press the * key in the number keypad on the right side of your keyboard. 2. Use the b key to move to the payment interval, or use the mouse to click on the payment interval. 3. As you move the highlighter bar, you ll see that the monthly equivalent of this amount is updated. When you get to the correct choice, press R or click the Paste button. 4. The monthly equivalent now appears in the answer box. Separate spouse s schedule You ll notice a checkbox in the bottom left-hand corner of the Rent..Medical tab labeled Check this box if a joint petition is filed and debtor s spouse maintains a separate household. If you check this box, you will get a button 96 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
labeled Spouse s Schedule that you can click to access a blank entry screen for Schedule J for the spouse s information. Net Income This tab displays the a summary of the totals entered on line 20 a-c: Other Expenses a. Total Monthly Income is the total monthly income from line 16 of Schedule I. b. Total Monthly Expenses equals the total monthly expenses from line 18 of Schedule J. c. Monthly Net Income is the result of the Total Monthly Income less the Total Monthly Expenses. NOTE: For chapter 12 & 13 filings, the Net Monthly Income tab replaces the old Chapter 12 & 13 Only tab. If you have other expenses to itemize, click the appropriate other button in Schedule J to list them. In the entry screen, notice the Save as Default button which allows you to save these categories to use with other client files. The Clear All button clears erases all other lines on this screen, and the Clear $0 button removes lines with text but no dollar amounts filled in. If the answers you type into the other screen do not fit on Schedule J, Best Case will automatically create an attachment for you. You can click the Other buttons to itemize other expenses. Best Case will automatically create an attachment. Attachment for Business Income and Expenses: An attachment for business income and expenses can be found in the Supplemental Forms Folder. This form, which is not an Official Form, can be edited the Best Case Editor for added flexibility. See Business Income and Expenses on page 118. Special Form Preference If you do not enter any anticipated increases or decreases in expenditures for line 19, it will be left blank on the printed form. If you want the word "None" to print here instead, there is a special form preference which allows you to do so. For more information on using this preference, see Form Preferences on page 300. Editing Schedule J Since you may need to edit the text of Schedule J, it has been included in a special format so that you can open it in the Best Case Editor. See Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. Listing Schedule J for Businesses: By default, this form is only listed for non business debtors. If you want it to appear for corporate or partnership debtors, see To Add a Form to Your Forms and Schedules Menu on page 299. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 97
Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules This is a form the debtor signs declaring that the information in the schedules is correct. In Best Case Bankruptcy, there is no entry screen for this form since there is no information for you to enter. It appears in the Forms and Schedules Menu so that it may be selected to print. This form is provided in a special format so that you can edit it using the Best Case Editor, though you would generally not need to do this. If you do want to edit it, see Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. Form 7. Statement of Financial Affairs Open Form 7 from the Forms and Schedules Menu by pressing 7. The Menu for the Statement of Financial Affairs contains the headings for each question on the form. When you click here, you ll get a list screen for this question which displays the full text of the question. Statement of Financial Affairs Menu Screen Never type None For any question on the Statement of Financial Affairs that you do not answer, Best Case Bankruptcy will automatically check the None box. You never need to type the word None. Keyboard Shortcut: In the screen pictured above, you can jump to a question by pressing the question number on your keyboard. For double-digit question numbers, press the first digit again to cycle through numbers that begin with that number. Or, use the b to move the highlighter to the question you want to answer. With the question highlighted, press R to see answers, then press I to add new answers. Entering Information 1. When there is information to report: If you have information to list for a question, highlight the question and click Answers or double-click on the question. 2. Inserting a record: After selecting a question, a list screen will appear which displays the full text of the question as it appears on the form. Click Insert to add an item. Just like in Schedules A-H, you will list each answer as a separate item. 98 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Scroll down to see the full text of the question on the form. If you hold your mouse over this corner, a double-headed arrow will appear. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse down and to the right to make this window bigger. Statement of Financial Affairs: Screen for Question 7 If you have several items to insert for a question, Best Case Bankruptcy will increase the amount of space for the answer on the form. Likewise, if you have no information to report for a question, the space will be minimized. You ll enter each item for a question in a separate entry window like this one. Best Case Bankruptcy gives you plenty of room to type long text answers. Statement of Financial Affairs: Entry Screen for Question 1 In some places, you will be able to pull creditor names and addresses into the Statement of Financial Affairs from Schedules D, E and F, or from your Common Creditor List. In those cases, the rotary card file button will appear next to the creditor name field, and the AddressFill list will appear, as pictured below. Press 8 or click the DEF tab to select from a list of creditors on Schedules D, E and F. Click to bring up a list of all creditors entered for this client on Schedules D, E and F or press 9. Entry Screen for Question 5 of the Statement of Financial Affairs Shortcuts for Particular Questions In Question 3, Payments to Creditors, Best Case Bankruptcy fills in the amount still owed when you select a scheduled creditor from the DEF tab in the AddressFill list or through the 9 shortcut. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 99
Best Case automatically assigns creditors to section 3a, individual consumer debts, or 3b, nonconsumer debts, based on the Nature of Debt selected in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition. Creditors Exempt from Recovery: A checkbox has been added to the creditor entry screen for 3a so that payments to creditors as part of a domestic support obligation or as part of an alternative repayment schedule negotiated by an approved nonprofit budgeting and consumer credit counseling agency can be marked as exempt from recovery. In question 5, Repossessions, foreclosures and returns, and Question 6 Assignments and receiverships, press 9 or click the creditor list button for a list of scheduled creditors, choose a Schedule D creditor, and the creditor and property description will be pasted in for you. In Question 9, Payments related to debt counseling or bankruptcy, there is an Atty Fee button that copies the law firm name and address from the Setup Menu and the amount paid from the Compensation Statement to the entry screen. Just fill in the payment date. In Question 10, Other Transfers, we have added radio buttons which allow you to choose whether the property recipient will be listed in 10a, ordinary transfers, or 10b, transfers to a self-settled trust in the previous ten years. For corporate or partnership debtors, a Copy button appears in Question 18 (Nature, location, and name of business) which copies the name, location and tax id from the Voluntary Petition to this entry screen. Reordering Answers to a Question Sometimes, after you have answered a particular question, you may find that you want to reorder your answers. For example, you may want the answer you typed in last to appear first. From the list screen for that question as pictured below, use the and buttons to move an answer. Moving an answer in the Statement of Financial Affairs In the picture above, we ll move the highlighted answer to the bottom by clicking the three times: 100 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Answer is in the new slot Keyboard Shortcut: Press C-t or C-b to move the highlighted answer up or down in the list. Questions 19-25 By default, Best Case Bankruptcy prints the business debtor questions, questions 19-25, for all debtors. If you only want to print questions 19-25 if the debtor is engaged in business or if you answer any one of the questions 19-25 you can make a quick change in your Setup Menu. See Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. If you change this option, you ll still see questions 19-25 on the screen, but they won t print if the debtor is a consumer with no information to report for these questions. All Answers This tab allows you to easily view all the answers entered in the Statement of Financial Affairs. From this tab, it is also possible to enter, change, or delete answers. Signature Section You can have the signature page of this form print separately. See Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. Editing the Form This form has been included in this version of Best Case as an rtf form so that you can edit it in the Best Case Editor if you need to add comments in special cases. To edit the form, mark JUST THIS FORM to print, click the Print button in the toolbar, then click the Edit Form button. The document appears in the Best Case Editor where you can add text. See The Best Case Editor on page 202 for more information. Printing a single page If you ve already printed this form but need to make a quick change, you can just print the one page that has your corrections by using the button in your print preview screen. See Print Preview Function on page 193. Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention As you work through Schedule D, you can specify the debtor s intention for each claim by clicking the Form 8 Intention tab. Or, you can open Form 8 from the Forms and Schedules Menu and specify intentions there as described below. 1. Open Form 8: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press 8 or select Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention and click Open. You will get the list screen for Form 8, which lists all secured claims from Schedule D. 2. Choose a secured claim: By default, the treatment of all claims is None Specified, (meaning the claim won t show up on Form 8) so you ll need to make sure you specify an intention for each claim. You can either doubleclick on the claim or highlight the claim and click Specify Intention. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 101
Click to get to the entry screen where you will specify the debtor s intention for the highlighted claim. Each debt secured by a claim is listed, with the name of the creditor. Form 8 List Screen Click to include priority and unsecured claims (Schedules E and F) on Form 8. 3. Specify treatment: This will take you to the Form 8 Entry Screen. Use the mouse to select the treatment of the claim, then click OK. Repeat for each claim. Creditor name, description of property and value of lien are listed here. Use the mouse to click on the appropriate choice. Click to save changes and Form 8 Entry Screen return to list screen. Normally, the signature portion of this form prints at the bottom of the form. If you want it to print on a separate page, see Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous options on page 305. Specifying Treatment of Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases For any executory contract or unexpired lease the debtor plans to assume, you can specify the debtor's intention and designate them for inclusion on Form 8 in the Contract/ Lease Information screen for Schedule G, as described on page 88. Or you can follow the instructions below to open Form 8 and pick an intention for each party. 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention, or press [8]. You will get the list screen for Form 8, which lists all property secured by a claim, (listed on Schedule D). 2. Click the Lease(s) tab at the top of the list screen to view a list of all of the parties listed on Schedule G. 102 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Use the tabs at the top of the list to toggle between creditors and leases. Click to get to the entry screen where you will specify the debtor s intention for the highlighted claim. Form 8 List of Leases 3. Highlight a party and click Specify Intention. 4. This will take you to the Contract/ Lease Information screen for the party. Use the mouse to select the debtor's intention. Then click the "List Lease on Form 8" checkbox. 5. Click OK. Repeat for each claim. Specifying Treatment of Unsecured Claims By default, the Form 8 List Screen only lists secured claims. However, there may be unsecured claims that the debtor wants to reaffirm. To specify treatment of an unsecured claim: 1. From the Form 8 List Screen, click on the check box in the bottom left-hand corner marked Show priority and unsecured claims. 2. All claims listed on Schedules E and F will appear. The default treatment for each of these claims is Do Not List. 3. To change the treatment of an unsecured claim so that it will appear on Form 8, highlight the claim and click Specify Intention. 4. The Form 8 Entry Screen will appear for this claim. Click on the appropriate treatment, then click OK. Keyboard Shortcut: Choose the intention by pressing A and the underlined letter. If you choose the Property is claimed as exempt option, the appropriate column will be marked and phrase avoid lien will print next to the claim. 5. You will be returned to the Form 8 List Screen. Notice that you don t need to specify intentions for every priority or unsecured claim because by default these are marked Do Not List. You only need to specify the intention if you want the claim listed on Form 8. 6. After you have changed the treatment for all unsecured claims that you want listed on Form 8, you can click the Show priority and unsecured claims box again to remove Do Not List unsecured claims from view on the List Screen. Step 6 is an optional step, and does not change the form; it is there to allow you to view the Form 8 List Screen without looking at numerous unsecured claims which are not going to appear on Form 8. Specifying Multiple Intents for One Claim Sometimes, a debt may be secured by multiple pieces of property, some of which the debtor plans to surrender and some of which he plans to keep and reaffirm the debt or claim as exempt, etc. You ll want to show multiple intents Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 103
for these claims on the Statement of Intention. In Best Case Bankruptcy, you ll insert a dummy creditor record in Schedule D to do this. After entering your original claim on Schedule D which shows the debt secured by multiple pieces of property, insert a dummy creditor record: 1. Go into Schedule D and enter a second creditor record for this claim. 2. Type in a property description and the creditor name, then check the box labeled Do Not Print/Total Sch.D in the upper right corner; this option will exclude the creditor from Schedule D and the Summary of Schedules. You ll also want to check the box beneath it to exclude the creditor from the matrix. 3. Return to Form 8 and select the intention for this item of property. You can do this for as many different pieces of property as you want. Note that you don t need to specify an intent for the original claim that shows all of the property because by default, this claim will be assigned the **none specified** choice for Form 8. Checkboxes Form 8 for Other Chapters: This form only appears in the Forms and Schedules Menu for Chapter 7 debtors. If you want it to appear for other chapters, you can specify that in the Setup Menu. See Jurisdiction Forms List on page 299. At the top of Form 8 are three checkboxes that are automatically filled in based on information entered into Best Case: I have filed a schedule of assets and liabilities which includes consumer debts secured by property of the estate automatically gets checked when a Secured Creditor is added to Schedule D. I have filed a schedule of executory contracts and unexpired leases which includes personal property subject to an unexpired lease is automatically filled in when the "List on Form 8" checkbox on the Contract/ Lease Information screen for a party listed on Schedule G gets checked. I intend to do the following with respect to the property of the estate which secures those debts or is subject to a lease is automatically checked whenever an intention is assigned to any creditor or party listed on Schedules D, E, F or G. Editing the Statement of Intention According to the instructions given by the Administrative Office of the U.S. Court, the list of choices that print on the form regarding the debtor s intention is not meant to be an exhaustive list of legally acceptable actions. We have included more intentions in the entry screen than are listed on the form based on customer request. You may have a claim which doesn t fall into any of the choices listed, or a claim which requires additional explanation. For those reasons, this document can be edited through the Best Case Editor as described on page 202. Compensation Statement of Attorney for Debtor(s) Attorney Compensation Statement Entry Screen 104 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Specifying What Your Fee Includes and Excludes Before entering information in the Attorney Compensation Statement, you may want to customize your attorney compensation statement using the Preferences option in the Setup Menu, described on page 317. These settings allow you to specify what your fee includes and excludes and apply those choices to all of your cases. Formatting Options There are many local version of this form which appear automatically in certain districts. In addition, Form Preferences exist for this document. See Form Preferences on page 300 for instructions. We also have a shorter, simpler form available that you can use if you prefer. It does not specify what your fee includes and excludes. To use the short form instead, you can select the Compensation Statement (Short Form) in the Jurisdiction Forms List. See page 298 for instructions. Completing the Form 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open the Attorney Compensation Statement. 2. Enter the total amount of compensation promised to you and the amount already paid. The balance will be calculated for you. 3. Enter the amount of the filing fee which has been paid, if this question appears. Whether this question appears is an option in the Attorney Compensation Setup Window in the Preferences section of you Setup Menu. 4. If you were paid by someone other than the debtor, mark the Other radio button and type an explanation. 5. If the remaining compensation will be paid by someone other than the debtor, mark the Other radio button and type an explanation. 6. If there is a division of fees or sharing of compensation, mark the Shared radio button and enter an explanation. Click OK when you have finished. Paying the Fee Through the Chapter 13 Plan: If this is a Chapter 13 case and the debtor will be paying part of the attorney s fee through the plan, go into the 13 Plan calculator and enter the attorney s fee in the Claims tab, in the box labeled Attorney s Fee: Unpaid balance of. Copying Amount Paid to Statement of Financial Affairs Using the Jump to SFA#9 button that appears in the bottom left corner, you can quickly create an entry on the Statement of Financial Affairs, Question 9 Payments Related to Debt Counseling or Bankruptcy. When you click the Jump to SFA button, if you have not added any entries yet to question 9, a new entry will appear with the law firm name filled in from the Setup Menu and the amount of money filled in based on the amount paid in the Compensation Statement. Enter the date of payment then click OK. Click Close to close the Statement of Financial Affairs. If you had already added entries to #9 before clicking the Jump button, your existing entries will appear. Click the Insert button to add a new entry, then click the Atty Fee button to copy law firm and fee information into the entry screen. Editing this Form in the Best Case Editor Since you may often need to edit the text of the attorney compensation statement, it has been included in a special format so that you can open it in the Best Case Editor. See Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. Before editing the document, you might want to check to see whether there are Setup Options that accomplish what you want on the form. Setup Options for the Attorney Compensation Statement are described on page 317. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 105
Notice to Individual Consumer Debtor of Available Chapters In accordance with 342(b) of the Bankruptcy Code, the Notice to Individual Consumer Debtors is a simple form which: Describes briefly the services available from credit counseling services; Describes briefly the purposes, benefits and costs of the four types of bankruptcy proceedings you may commence; Informs the debtor about bankruptcy crimes and notifies him that the Attorney General may examine all information he supplies in connection with a bankruptcy case; Cautions the debtor that bankruptcy law is complicated and not easily described, and advises him to seek the advice of an attorney to learn of his rights and responsibilities; Reminds the debtor that Court employees cannot give him legal advice. NOTE: If your district has a local version of the Notice to Individual Consumer Debtor's, Best Case has updated it to include the new filing fees and moved it the Local Forms Folder. For more information on replacing the official federal version of the form with your local version, see Editing Jurisdiction Settings on page 297. There is no information to enter for this form. It appears in the Forms and Schedules Menu so that it may be selected to print. Editing this Document For added flexibility, this document can be edited using the Best Case Editor feature, described on page 202. List of Equity Security Holders The List of Equity Security Holders is filed for corporations and partnerships filing under Chapter 11. Continuation sheets are inserted automatically by Best Case Bankruptcy as they are needed. When you double click on the List of Equity Security Holders in the Forms and Schedules Menu, a summary list window appears: All equity security holders that will be printed on the form are listed in the summary list window in alphabetical order, along with the security class, number of securities and kind of interest. List of Equity Security Holders: Summary List Window Click Insert or press the I key to add an Equity Security Holder. Your AddressFill List appears. You can select a name from AddressFill or just type in a new name. If you don t want to select a name from AddressFill, just type the name then press T. The AddressFill List will disappear when you press T. 106 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Type in the security class, number of securities, and kind of interest, then press A-R to save this entry and add another one. Enter the security class, number of securities and kind of interest for the security holder then click OK or press A-R to enter another Equity Security Holder. List of Equity Security Holders: Entry Screen Locator key shortcut: From the list window in this form, start typing the name of the party you want to edit. The highlighter bar will jump to that entry. Import/Export Equity Security Holders: Our creditor import/export feature works for Equity Security Holders, too! If the client can give you a file of equity security holder names and addresses which you can convert into the proper format, you can import them directly into Best Case Bankruptcy. The export feature allows you to export a text file of equity security holders for use in other applications. See Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export on page 280. Sorting Equity Security Holders Equity Security Holders will be sorted for you alphabetically. To sort by last name, insert a tilde (~) just before the word you want the entry alphabetized under, with no space after the tilde. For example, type Wanda ~Owner to alphabetize under O. Including Equity Security Holders in the Mailing Matrix: Equity Security Holders are not normally included in the matrix, but see the creditor address matrix setup screen on page 301 if you would like to include them. Verification of Creditor Matrix This form is a signature page which the debtor is asked to sign verifying that all creditors have been listed in the matrix. Not all districts require this form, but since most do, we have included it in the Forms and Schedules Menu. If you want to exclude the form, you can do so by making a quick change in the Jurisdiction Forms List section of the program: 1. With the Forms and Schedules Menu open, click Setup/Edit Case Jurisdiction and skip to step 6, or 2. Close Client List Window. 3. Click on Setup in the Main Menu Bar. 4. Click on Jurisdictions. 5. Double-click on the name of the jurisdiction that does not require the Verification of Matrix. 6. Click on the Edit Forms List button. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 107
7. Press V to jump to the Verification on the left side of the screen, or scroll down to the Verification. 8. With the Verification highlighted, click the Remove >> button. A Remove Form window appears asking if you really want to remove the form. Click Yes, then click Close. Click OK, then Close again to close your jurisdiction list. Likewise, if you removed the Verification and now you need to add it, follow steps 1-6 above, then choose the Verification from the Available Forms list on the right and click <<Add. Although this form will appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu, there is no information to enter for this form; the debtor s name will be inserted automatically. Print this form as you would any of the forms in the list. Formatting Options We have several formatting options for the Verification which can be changed in the Jurisdictions section of your Setup Menu, in the Misc. Options tab. These options were added to comply with varying local rules. The default setting is to include a line for the debtor s signature but not the attorney s signature. You can change it so that no debtor s signature line appears an attorney signature line appears in addition to or instead of the debtor s signature If you include the attorney s signature line, you can also choose to add a paragraph which states that the attorney has checked the matrix against the actual schedules and that the clerk can rely on the matrix to be accurate. Note that the attorney verification text also has a line which specifies how many pages are included in the matrix. This page count will only appear if you print the verification and the matrix at the same time. Custom Formats For some districts, we have included custom formats for the Verification. These custom forms will appear automatically in the Forms and Schedules Menu so there is nothing to change in the Setup Menu. If you don t get these custom forms, you can replace the standard Verification with the custom one by following steps 1-7 above, highlighting your Verification of Creditor Matrix in the Local Forms section of the Available Forms list and clicking <<Add. Variations: Add Phrase Under Penalty of Perjury or Text About Disk File Two variations of the verification are included which you can use instead of the basic format. The first adds the phrase under penalty of perjury to the verification and the second adds a sentence which states that the attorney verifies that the matrix on disk is true and correct to the best of his or her knowledge. If you want either of these alternative formats, you can follow instructions 1-7 to remove the standard format in the Jurisdiction Forms List, then highlight the Verification of Creditor Matrix (Under Penalty of Perjury or Attorney Verification/Disk File) in the Available Forms list on the right side of the screen and click <<Add. Editing the Verification For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor as described on page 198. Creditor Address Matrix The matrix is a list of names and address of all creditors in the case which is sometimes scanned in by the court and used as a master list for mailing notices about the case. In Best Case Bankruptcy, the creditor matrix is assembled and alphabetized for you based on information you enter through Schedules D, E and F, and the format, which varies by district, is defined in the Jurisdictions portion of the Setup Menu. Since formatting requirements are subject to change, you will want to check with the Bankruptcy Clerk s office periodically to be sure that the formatting you are using is still correct. 108 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Formatting the Matrix: To change the format, sort order or grouping, or to include Equity Security Holders, Schedule G or H parties, the name of the debtor, attorney, etc., see Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup on page 301. Printing the Matrix The matrix prints like any other form: mark it to print in the Forms and Schedules Menu then click the Print button in the toolbar. The Print Numbered List of Creditors option in the Creditor Address Matrix screen does NOT print a matrix; it prints a numbered list of all creditors in the case, complete with the type of claim and claim amount. Duplicate Checking An option in the Jurisdiction section of the Setup Menu lets you specify how you want duplicates handled as described on page 301. Some courts specifically state in their local rules that they do not want duplicates in the matrix. If you set the duplicate checking option to Display and Ask, which is the default setting, then whenever you print the matrix, a Possible Duplicate dialog box will appear which asks what you want to do with each duplicate, as pictured below: Duplicate Checking for the Creditor Address Matrix If you want one of the creditors excluded but want Best Case to continue checking for dupes, click either Exclude #1 or Exclude #2. If you want to include both but want Best Case to continue to ask about possible duplicates, click Keep Both. If you want Best Case to remove all exact matches for this matrix automatically, but you want to be asked about duplicates where only the first line (creditor name) matches, click Exclude Exact Matches, Ask if Not Exact. If you want all duplicates listed on this matrix, click Keep All Duplicates. (Best Case will stop checking for this matrix.) If you want to exclude all exact matches and include all close-but-not-exact matches, click Exclude Exact Matches, Keep All Others. (Best Case will stop asking for this matrix.) If you want to automatically exclude all exact matches or to automatically leave them in, you can change the duplicate handling option in the Setup Menu, described on page 301. Adding names other than creditors to the matrix There are some organizations or individuals who are not creditors but should receive notice of filing. These parties fall into four basic categories: Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 109
1. Constant names that need to appear at the top of every matrix (in some districts) like the names of the debtor, joint debtor, attorney, and/or US Trustee. 2. Parties relevant to the case who are not usually required to be notified, but may be required in some districts such as codebtors, contract or lease parties, or equity security holders. 3. Parties who are associated with particular creditors, such as collection agencies retained by creditors or attorneys representing creditors. 4. Parties who are not associated with particular creditors, but need to be notified of this particular filing. For example, some courts require a particular address of the state tax department to be included in the matrix for corporate filings or if the debtor owes the government money. The first category, the constant names are part of the basic matrix setup in the Jurisdictions section of the Setup Menu. Once you specify in the Setup Menu that the debtor s name should appear at the top of the matrix, matrices for all petitions filed in that jurisdiction will have the debtor s name at the top. (See Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup on page 301 for basic instructions.) Note that some courts specifically request that you not list the debtor and attorney, since they add these automatically. Parties of the second category, such as equity security holders, also can be included in the matrix by changing options in the matrix section of the Setup Menu. (See Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup on page 301.) The third category, the parties who are associated with creditors, can be entered as you enter creditors. The entry screen for each creditor schedule has a tab labeled Additional Notice which allows you to enter an unlimited number of parties associated with the claim who should be notified of the filing. Generally, these parties are to appear on the matrix only and not the creditor schedules, but an option in the Setup Menu under Jurisdictions/Misc. Options allows you to include them on the creditor schedules also. (See page 305.) The last category, parties who are not notified of every filing, and are not associated with any particular creditor, such as tax authorities, can be entered as described below. Note that parties you enter here will appear on the matrix for this case only and will not appear on any of the other forms. To enter an additional notice party: 1. Go to the Forms and Schedules Menu for your client. 2. Double-click on Creditor Address Matrix. The Creditor Address Matrix Window appears, as pictured below: Creditor Address Matrix Window 3. The left half of the screen lists Additional Names for Address List. Click Insert to add a party. Your AddressFill list appears, as pictured below: 110 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
When you insert an entry directly onto the matrix, the AddressFill list will appear 4. Use your AddressFill list to select a name or type a new name and address. To save the entry and add another additional notice party, press A-R. When you are finished, click OK. Import/Export Additional Notice Parties: For large filings, you can use our Creditor Import/Export feature for additional notice parties added through this screen. See Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export on page 280. Matrix for Emergency Filing: If you are doing an emergency filing and just need to produce a matrix of creditors, don t enter them through this screen because you won t have a way of automatically transferring them to creditor schedules when you need to print the rest of the forms. Just enter them in creditor schedules, even if you don t have the claim amounts and other information. The names and addresses will be transferred from the schedules to the matrix for you. Creating an ASCII Text File of the Creditor Address Matrix/Copying the Matrix to Disk If you will be filing this case electronically, use our ECF Wizard to create electronic files. Your matrix text file will be created automatically and given the proper name according to your local court s guidelines. You can view the matrix through our ECF Manager. If you will be filing this case on paper but need to submit a matrix text file, you can use the procedure below. Best Case Bankruptcy is capable of creating a matrix in ASCII text format as some courts require. The matrix in ASCII format can be created on a 3.5 diskette for submission to the court, or on your hard drive. Options in the Jurisdiction section of the Setup Menu (page 304) control some formatting options for the Disk File, including how many blank lines will be inserted between each creditor address block, the name of the file, (or whether to ask each time) whether to use upper and lowercase or all uppercase, the field separator, and whether constant names should be included in the disk file. To create a text file of your matrix, or to copy the matrix to a diskette: 1. Insert a blank, formatted diskette in your disk drive if you will be copying to diskette. 2. Go to the Forms and Schedule Menu for the desired client and double-click on the Creditor Address Matrix. 3. The Creditor Address Matrix window will appear as pictured on the previous page. The right side of the window, the Disk File section, refers to the text file of the matrix that you can create. If you are filing an amended matrix on disk, and want to include only the creditors you marked as amended on the creditor entry screens, put a check in the box marked Include only items marked amended. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 111
4. You are asked to select the A: drive, B: drive (if you have a B: drive), or Other Drive (which you will select if you want the file to be created on your hard drive or network drive.) Click on the appropriate drive. If you have the duplicate checking option set to Display and Ask, you will be asked what to do with each duplicate. 5. When the file has been created successfully, you will get a message which tells you the file name and location and the number of addresses in the file. (Some courts want to know this number so that they can verify that they have read the disk properly.) The file will be given the name that you specified in the Setup Menu in the Matrix section of your jurisdiction options. The default file name is creditor.scn which is the name most courts require. 6. Click OK to acknowledge the message, then take the disk out and label it with the client s name, attorney s name and phone number, the number of creditors on the disk, and any other information your court wants on the disk. View/edit matrix text file If you created the matrix through the ECF Wizard, you can view it through the ECF Manager window. Otherwise, you can pull it up in your Notepad, (in the Accessories folder in Windows), WordPad (also in the Accessories folder), or in your word processor. To view the file: 1. Start Notepad or WordPad or your word processor. (Access your WordPad by clicking Start/Programs/Accessories/ WordPad.) Click File, Open. 2. At the Open File dialog box, change to the drive that contains the file. Change the file type to All Files (*.*) or All Documents (*.*). 3. Double-click on the name of the matrix file, usually creditor.scn. If you make any changes, make sure you save it as a text file and not as a Word or WordPerfect file. Amended Matrix: Using our amended feature, you can create a matrix of just the amended creditors. See Amending a Form or Petition on page 197. Troubleshooting problems with the matrix on disk If you submit a matrix on disk to the court and the court tells you that they can t read your disk, try creating a matrix with a new diskette and be sure you are using the correct procedure. Often, users copy a client file to disk (with the tps extension) from the Client List Window, which does not create a file the court can read. Use the procedure above instead. Also, be sure you are giving the file the correct name with the correct extension (usually.scn or.txt). If you are still having problems, it is possible that your disk drive is out of alignment. If your drive is out of alignment, you may be able to create a matrix on disk, and you may even be able to view the matrix on disk on your machine, but other computers will not be able to read from disks created by your computer. You can test this by trying to view a matrix on disk created by your computer on another computer in the office. If you can t read from the disk, your drive is out of alignment. Solution: try creating the matrix from a different machine until you can have a service person fix your disk drive. Numbered List of Creditors The Numbered List of Creditors is a report of all creditors in a case. (This does not replace the matrix, but may be required in addition to the matrix in some areas and may be useful for reference in your office as you prepare a case.) For each creditor, the following information appears: the name and address of the creditor, the type of claim (unsecured, priority or secured, and if applicable, unliquidated, disputed, or contingent), and the amount of the claim. A signature page is also included. 112 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
To print the numbered list of creditors: 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on Creditor Address Matrix. Click here to print the numbered list of creditors. Print the Numbered List of Creditors from the Creditor Address Matrix screen 2. A button in the bottom left-hand corner is labeled Print Numbered Listing of Creditors. Click on the button. 3. The Print Documents Dialog Box appears. The options in this window are described in Printing Options on page 189. Click Print to send the document to your printer. Corporate Ownership Statement (Rule 7007.1) The Corporate Ownership Statement appears in the Forms and Schedules Menu for all corporate cases. This form asks for a list of non-governmental corporations which hold at least 10% equity in the debtor corporation. If there are no corporations to report, you won t need to do anything: Best Case will automatically check the None box for you. Data for this form is taken from the List of Equity Security Holders. To add corporations to this form: For Chapter 11 cases, as you enter information for the List of Equity Security Holders, you ll notice a check box at the bottom of the entry window to add the corporation to the Corporate Ownership Statement. Once this box is checked for each corporation required on the Corporate Ownership Statement, there is no additional information to enter for this form. For corporate cases filed under another chapter, the List of Equity Security Holders is generally not required. When you double-click on the Corporate Ownership Statement, you ll get an entry screen for the List of Equity Security Holders where you can input names and addresses. You can ignore the fields on the right (security class, number of securities, kind of interest), as this information won t be listed anywhere. For each entry you add, be sure to check the box at the bottom to add the entity to the Corporate Ownership Statement. Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number This form was added by the Judicial Conference of the Administrative Office of the U.S. Courts in December, 2003, when forms were changed to comply with new rules concerning the debtor s privacy. As of December 1, 2003, the debtor s social security number is to be redacted on the Voluntary Petition, with only the last four digits appearing on the form. Since creditors and trustees may need the debtor s social security number in order to process information, Form 21 was added which lists the social security number, and the courts are required to keep this document separate from the rest of the file, so that the social security number is accessible only to those with an interest in the case but not to the public. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 113
There is no information for you to fill in for this form. The debtor s and joint debtor s names, address(es), social security numbers, and tax ids for business debtors will be inserted into the form based on information you typed in the Voluntary Petition screen. When completing the Voluntary Petition, you will input the full social security number and Best Case will redact it on the Voluntary Petition. Also see Privacy Tab on page 190. Form 22. Statement of Current Monthly Income & Means Test Calculation/ Calculation of Commitment Period & Disposable Income The Means Test, the concept of Current Monthly Income, and the applicable forms (22A, B, and C), are components of the bankruptcy process introduced under the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005. Best Case Bankruptcy includes a Means Test Calculator that looks up applicable IRS expense allowances and Census Bureau income numbers for you, performs Means Test calculations, and helps you to complete the required forms. Depending on the Chapter of Filing, information from the Means Test Calculator gets plugged in to one of three forms: Form 22A. Statement of Current Monthly Income/Means Test for Chapter 7 filings; Form 22B. Statement of Current Monthly Income for Chapter 11 filings; Form 22C. Current Monthly Income/Disposable Income for Chapter 13 filings. For more information on using the Means Test Calculator, see Means Test Quick Start on page 130 or, if you are not yet familiar with the Means Test, see Applying the Means Test/ Calculating Commitment Period & Disposable Income on page 133. Supplemental Forms The Supplemental Forms folders appears at the bottom of your Forms and Schedules Menu and contains forms that are not filed with every case and are not district-specific. A few important things to note about these forms are: When you mark all forms to print, forms in the Supplemental Forms folder will not be marked. If you want to print a supplemental form with the other forms, mark all forms to print then mark the supplemental form, then click the Print button. (See Printing Forms on page 187.) If there is a supplemental form that you always want to print with the rest of the forms, you can move it into the main Forms and Schedules Menu. See Jurisdiction Forms List on page 299 for instructions. Documents noted as QuickForms (with Q s next to them on screen) are simple forms which, when you click on them, appear in the Best Case Editor for you to add text. Formatting options in the Editor are described in Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. The following documents are included in the Supplemental Forms folders. Form 23 Certification Concerning Financial Management Form 25A Plan of Reorganization in Small Business Case (Chapter 11) Form 25B Disclosure Statement in Small Business Case (Chapter 11) Form 25C Small Business Monthly Operating Report (Chapter 11) Form 26 Periodic Report Form 27 Reaffirmation Agreement Cover Sheet Form 240A Reaffirmation Documents, Form 240B Motion for Approval of Reaffirmation Agreement, Form 240C Order on Reaffirmation Agreement, and Form 240AB ALT Reaffirmation Agreement 114 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Form 283 Chapter 13 Debtor s Certifications Regarding Domestic Support Obligations & Section 522 527(a) Disclosure Statement 527(b) Disclosure Statement Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet (See page 115) Amended Schedules Signature Declaration (Generic) Amendment Cover Sheet (Generic) Application/Order for Fees (Generic) Business Income and Expenses (See page 118.) Caption (Generic) a blank document for you to create motions for electronic filing Certificate of Service (Generic) Checklist of Forms to File Creditor Letter - Notice of Filing/Automatic Stay Declaration of Compliance with Rule 9009 (Generic) Designation of Agent Discharge of Debtor Household Goods Sheet (Generic) How Credit Reports Can Help in Bankruptcy (to give to client) Motion for Exemption from Credit Counseling Requirement Motion to Amend Bankruptcy Petition (Generic) Motion to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13 (Generic) (Not with Chapter 7-Only package) Motion to Convert Case from Chapter 13 to Chapter 7 (Generic) Non-Attorney Compensation Statement Non-Attorney Preparer Declaration Form 19A Non-Attorney Preparer Notice to Debtor Form 19B Notice of Change of Address (Generic) Notice of Motion OR Objection (Generic) Notice of Motion (Generic) Order to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13 (Generic) (Not with Chapter 7-Only package) Order to Convert Case from Chapter 13 to Chapter 7 (Generic) Proof of Authority to Sign and File Petition/Corporate Resolution Proof of Claim Proof of Service by Mail (Generic) Reaffirmation Agreement Redemption of Property Agreement Statement of Information Required by 11 U.S.C. 341 Statement of Qualifications Under Section 109(c) Suggestion of Bankruptcy Supplemental Schedule for Property Acquired after Discharge (Generic) Client Questionnaire Non-Business Debtor Client Questionnaire Business Debtor Form 23 Certification Concerning Financial Management This form is a statement by the debtor that he has completed his instructional course in personal financial management. The form includes the date that the debtor completed his course and the name of the approved personal financial management instruction provider who taught the course. If the debtor has not completed the course the form details the reason the debtor did not complete it. The form includes one data entry screen which collects all of the appropriate information. For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor. See page 202 for more information. Note: Form 23 is specifically intended to be filed as a post-petition document. It is not the same as the Certificate of Credit Counseling the debtor files with the initial petition. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 115
Form 25A Plan of Reorganization in Small Business Case This Chapter 11 small business form opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. Form 25B Disclosure Statement in Small Business Case This Chapter 11 small business form opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. Form 25C Small Business Monthly Operating Report This Chapter 11 small business form opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. Form 26 Periodic Report This Chapter 11 form opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. Form 27 Reaffirmation Agreement Cover Sheet This form opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. Form 240A Reaffirmation Documents, Form240B Motion for Approval of Reaffirmation Agreement, Form 240C Order on Reaffirmation Agreement, and Form 240AB ALT Reaffirmation Agreement These forms open in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. Form 283 Chapter 13 Debtor s Certifications Regarding Domestic Support Obligations and Section 522 This form opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. 527(a) Disclosure Statement The 527(a) Disclosure is a generic document which informs the debtor of his responsibility to provide complete accurate and truthful information, describes some of the information the debtor is required to provide and advises the debtor that the information he provides may be audited. The form is intended for the debtor s general information, so there is no information to enter. However, there is a Form Preference that allows you to include signature lines on the form. (See Form Preferences on page 300 to change this preference.) 527(b) Disclosure Statement The Notice of 527(b) Disclosures is a generic document which informs debtors of their right to hire an attorney or a petition preparer. In addition, the 527(b) Disclosure Statement also gives a brief overview of what must be done in a routine bankruptcy case so that debtors can evaluate which services they require and whether or not they wish to hire representation. The form is intended for the debtor s general information, so there is no information to enter. However, there is a Form Preference that allows you to include signature lines on the form. (See Form Preferences on page 300 to change this preference.) Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet 1. Open a client file. The name of the plaintiff in this form is taken from the name of the debtor in the Voluntary Petition. If you are filing an adversary proceeding for a creditor or another party, you ll want to create a new client file where the name of the debtor is the plaintiff s name. 2. In the Forms and Schedules Menu, double click on the Supplemental Forms folder, or use the b to get to the Supplemental forms, then press R. 3. Double-click on the Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet. Notice that this section of the program allows you to create multiple adversary proceeding cover sheets for each plaintiff. Each adversary proceeding is listed as a separate line here in the summary list window. 116 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
4. Click Insert to add an adversary proceeding. You ll notice that the Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet entry screen is divided into six tabs: Defendant, Attorney, Cause of Action, Nature/Origin/Demand, Bankruptcy Case, and Related and Fee. Defendant Enter the name of the defendant exactly as it appears on the complaint. You can type in a new name and address, or use your Common Creditor List (click the rotary card file button or press 0) or your list of creditors scheduled for this case (click the list button or press 9). If there are multiple defendants, type the other defendants in the Other Defendants box. Attorney 1. Fill in the name and address of the defendant s attorney. Again, you can use your Common Creditor List or your list of scheduled creditors if you like. 2. In the party section at the bottom of the window, be sure to indicate whether the United States is a party named in the complaint. Cause of Action Write a brief statement of the cause of action including all U.S. Statutes involved. Nature/Origin/Demand 1. Select the nature of the suit from the drop-down list. If you select number 498 Other, you will be able to type an explanation in the other field. 2. Click on your answer for the origin of the proceedings. (Note that there is no #3.) 3. If this is a class action under FRCP 23, put a check in the check box. 4. For the demand, enter the demand in thousands, rounded to the nearest thousand. From the instructions for the form: For $1,000, enter 1, for $10,000 enter 10, for $100,000 enter 100, if $1,000,000, enter 1000. If $10,000,000 or more, enter 9999. If the amount is less that $1,000, enter 0001. If no monetary demand is made, enter XXXX. 5. If other relief is sought, type in a brief explanation. If this is a jury demand, check the appropriate box. Bankruptcy Case 1. By default, the debtor s name, jurisdiction, and case number are filled in for you from the information in the Voluntary Petition. If you like, you can override this feature. Just click the override check box then fill in the debtor s information. 2. Type the name of the judge in the Judge Name box. Related and Fee 1. If there are related proceedings, fill in the information in this tab. 2. In the Filing Fee section, indicate whether the filing fee is attached, not required, or deferred. According to the instructions for this form: The fee must be paid upon filing unless the plaintiff meets one of the following exceptions. The fee is not required if the plaintiff is the United States government of the debtor. If the plaintiff is the trustee or a debtor in possession, and there are no liquid funds in the estate, the filing fee may be deferred until there are funds in the estate. (In the event no funds are ever recovered for the estate, there will be no fee). There is no fee for adding a party after the adversary proceeding has been commenced. Printing the Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet You won t be able to print this form from the Forms and Schedules Menu like other forms. You need to be at the Adversary Proceeding Summary screen to print this form. If you have just entered information, click OK to save Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 117
your changes, then click the Print button. The Print Documents dialog box appears. You can make any selections in the options list then click Print to print. If the Print button is grayed out, you need to add information first. Click Insert. You ll need to type in a defendant before saving the record. Type in the defendant then click OK. You can now print. Note that this form cannot be opened in Word or WordPerfect for editing like most other forms. Printing a Blank Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet If you have already added an Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet for any of your cases, you can go in the Adversary Proceeding summary screen from the Supplemental Forms section of the Forms and Schedules Menu and highlight one of the records. Click the Print button. When the Print Documents dialog box appears, click in the Print Blank Forms check box, then click Print. If you haven t added an adversary proceeding cover sheet, you ll need to add one before you can print. Select the defendant name to save the record as described in Printing above, then click OK to save. (It doesn t matter what the defendant name is, since it won t print when you select the Print Blank Forms option.) Click the Print button, select the Print Blank Forms option, and then click Print. Amended Schedules Signature Declaration This is a simplified version of Form 6. Declaration Concerning Debtor's Schedules, specifically designed to accompany amended filings. Before printing users can specify how many pages are included in the Amended schedules. The Form includes one form preference: "Ask 'What document(s) are you amending?' each time?" When activated it allows the user to specify the Schedules being amended as well as the number of pages included in the amendment. (See Form Preferences on page 300 to change this preference.) Amendment Cover Sheet The Amendment Cover Sheet is a generic sheet filed in front of amendments to forms and schedules. The document contains information about what is being amended and a Notice of Amendments(s) to Affected Parties. This document is a QuickForm which you will complete in the Best Case Editor. The Form includes also includes a form preference which allows you to add the debtor(s) signature block to the end of the form. (See Form Preferences on page 300 for more information on accessing this preference.) Note: Best Case also includes several district specific Amendment Cover Sheets, which can be found in the Local Forms Folder. Application/ Order for Fees The Application/ Order for Fees is a generic application for attorney s fees. It is a QuickForm which opens in the Best Case Editor, so that you can fill in the necessary information. By default, an order prints with the Application for Fees. If you want to removes the order, there is a form preference which allows you to do so. (See Form Preferences on page 300 for more information on changing this preference.) Business Income and Expenses The Business Income and Expenses form is a supplemental form that you might want to file to itemize business expenses in place of or in addition to Schedules I and J. It appears in the Supplemental Forms folder at the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu. Double-click on the form to open it. The entry screen is divided into two tabs: Income/Expenses and Details. Type dollar amounts in the appropriate places in the Income/Expenses tab, without typing the $. 118 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Question 20 on the printed form asks for information about payments being made directly to secured creditors for pre-petition business debts. If there are any of these, click the Details tab then click Insert in the Direct Payments section. Add a description and the monthly payment amount. You can add as many of these as you need to. If you don t have any of these, the word None will automatically appear in this section on the printed form. Question 21 allows you to list other expenses which don t fall into any of the other categories. To itemize other expenses, click the Details tab, then click the Other Expenses tab. Click the Insert button and type in a description and monthly expense amount. Again, you can add as many other expenses as you want to. If you don t have any other expenses to list, the word None will appear automatically on the printed form. Adding Signature Line: You can add verification text and a signature line by making a quick change to the Form Preferences for this form, described in the section Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. Moving to Main Forms List: If you want this form to appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu for all business debtors, above the Supplemental Forms folder, see Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor. See page 202 for more information. Caption (Generic) The Generic Caption is a blank form to help you create motions for electronic filing. Located in the Supplemental Forms Folder at the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu, this document is a QuickForm which you will complete in the Best Case Editor. When you open it, you ll have the option to include signature lines at the bottom. We automatically put the standard caption at the top, complete with the debtor s name. Certificate of Service The Certificate of Service contains a statement that a document was served to all parties interested in a case. For some jurisdictions, there are district-specific versions of this form in the Local Forms folder. The Supplemental Forms folder contains a generic version of this form that can be opened in the Best Case Editor and modified to fit district-specific requirements. When you open the Certificate of Service, you ll be able to choose the creditors to list on the form through the Multiple Address Selector. You can choose some or all creditors in a case. There is a Form Preference that allows you to include addresses of the creditors and to add Trustee, Judge, and Debtor information as well. (See Form Preferences on page 300 to change this selection.) To see if a local version of this form is available in your district, consult the list of Local Forms list included in the Best Case help file or visit www.bestcase.com/localforms.htm. Checklist of Forms to File The Checklist of Forms is an official list of all the forms and schedules, plus any necessary additional supporting documentation that must be filed in a bankruptcy case. A different version of the form appears depending on the chapter of filing. There is no data entered for the form. It appears in the Supplemental Forms Folder so that it can be printed out and reviewed before the case is filed. Creditor Letter - Notice of Filing/ Automatic Stay The Creditor Letter - Notice of Filing/ Automatic Stay is a generic letter notifying creditors of the debtor s bankruptcy filing. The letter uses the Multiple Address Selector to facilitate the easy creation of a Notice of Filing for several creditors at once. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 119
Note that the Creditor Letter is specifically designed to be a very generic document. If you want to create a more detailed letter, or make other changes to its format, a similar letter can be found in the Additional Documents Library, as described on page 206. Debtor s Rebuttal for Presumption of Abuse This is a generic form that provides an opportunity for the debtor to present a justification for adjusted expenses or income in order to rebut a presumption of Abuse on Form 22 and entitle the debtor to file a Chapter 7. Declaration of Compliance with Rule 9009 This is a form not required by most courts, but it may be required by your local bankruptcy court. It is a simple signature page which states The undersigned is the attorney for the debtor in this case. The undersigned declares under penalty of perjury that the Schedules and Forms filed in this case for the debtor were computer generated using Best Case Bankruptcy and conform with those prescribed by Bankruptcy Rule 9009. There is no information to enter for this form. It appears in the Supplemental Forms folder in the Forms and Schedules Menu so that it may be selected to print. If you do need to file this form for every case, you might consider adding it to the main Forms and Schedules Menu, as described in the Jurisdiction Forms List section on page 298. Designation of Agent This is a form not required by most courts, but it may be required by your local bankruptcy court. It is a simple signature page which states that the debtor designates the attorney in the case as the agent to receive service of process and service of all pleadings in all proceedings. There is no information to enter for this form. The debtor s name and attorney are pulled from the Voluntary Petition. This form can be found in the Supplemental Forms section of the Forms and Schedules Menu. If you need to file this form for all cases, you can move it to the main Forms and Schedules Menu as described in Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor. See page 202 for more information. Discharge of Debtor This is a QuickForm in the Supplemental Forms folder ordering that all debts be discharged. Household Goods Sheet (Generic) This is a generic form that opens in the Best Case Editor, which allows you to enter any necessary information. How Credit Reports Can Help in Bankruptcy (to give to client) This is a form you can print for your clients which explains the benefits of ordering credit reports when filing bankruptcy. There is no information for you to input for this form, though you can edit it by right-clicking and choosing Edit Form. For information about our Credit Report Import feature, which allows you to import data from your consumer clients credit reports, see Credit Report Manager on page 244. Motion to Amend Bankruptcy Petition (Generic) The Motion to Amend Bankruptcy Petition is a generic document which allows youth fill in information about the original filing, the reason the bankruptcy needs to be amended, and the date that the mistake was discovered. It also includes an Order to sustain the Motion to Amend. There is a Form Preference that allows you to include the attorney's signature on the document as well. (See Form Preferences on page 300 to modify this preference.) 120 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Motions to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13, and from Chapter 13 to Chapter 7 (Generic) These generic versions of the forms are available in the Supplemental Forms Folder and can be modified through the Best Case Editor to meet the needs in your district. The Motion to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13 is not available with our Chapter 7-Only license. Non-Attorney Preparer Compensation Statement The Non-Attorney Preparer Compensation Statement is a generic version of the Disclosure of Compensation of Bankruptcy Petition Preparer. This QuickForm is located in the Supplemental Forms Folder, and opens in the Best Case Editor for you to add individual information for individual. If you wish to create a permanent list of documents prepared or services rendered, there are two form preferences which allow you to so. (See Form Preferences on page 300 to modify these lists.) Non Attorney Preparer Declaration Form 19A There is no information to enter for this form. It appears in the Supplemental Forms folder but if you want it to appear in the main Forms and Schedules menu, see Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor. See page 202 for more information. Non Attorney Preparer Declaration Form 19B There is no information to enter for this form. It appears in the Supplemental Forms folder but if you want it to appear in the main Forms and Schedules menu, see Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor. See page 202 for more information. Notice of Change of Address The Notice of Change of Address is a generic form you can use to notify the court of a debtor s change of address. It is a QuickForm which opens in the Best Case Editor, so you can enter in any additional necessary information or edit the form to meet your court s requirements. Notice of Motion or Objection The Notice of Motion or Objection is a generic document intended to serve as the basis for a Motion or Objection filed to seek relief from a previous event. This document is more detailed and formal than the Notice of Motion. It is a QuickForm which opens in the Best Case Editor, so you can enter in any additional necessary information or edit the form to meet your court s requirements. Notice of Motion The Notice of Motion is a generic document intended to serve as the basis for any Motion. It is a QuickForm which opens in the Best Case Editor, so you can enter in any additional necessary information or edit the form to meet your court s requirements. Order to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13 and From Chapter 13 to 7 The generic versions of these forms are available in the Supplemental Forms Folder and can be modified through the Best Case Editor to meet the needs in your district. The Order to Convert Case from Chapter 7 to Chapter 13 is not available with our Chapter 7-Only license. Payment Advices Coversheet This form is a generic version of the custom local Payment Advices Coversheets that are available in the Local Forms Folder for many districts. If you are a filing in a district that requires a coversheet to be submitted with the debtor s pay evidences, and there is no customized format for your district, you can use this form as a coversheet. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 121
Double click on the form to enter the debtor s employment status for the last 60-days, or open the form in the Best Case Editor to add any additional information you need to include. If you will be attaching the debtor s and/or joint debtor s paystubs or other evidence to the Payment Advices Coversheet, our BestScan feature makes it easy to scan the documents, convert them to PDF format and save them to your ECF Manager. (See Scanning Documents with BestScan: on page 230 and/or Adding Existing PDF Attachments on page 235 for more information on scanning and attaching the debtor s paystubs.) Proof of Authority to Sign and File Petition/Corporate Resolution This QuickForm in the Supplemental Forms folder opens in the Best Case Editor for you to fill in additional information. The name and title of the authorized signer are filled in based on information you entered in the Voluntary Petition. Proof of Claim The Proof of Claim in the Supplemental Forms folder contains a wizard that allows you to create multiple Proof of Claim forms for creditors in a case when you represent the debtor. See Creating Proof of Claim Forms When You Represent the Debtor on page 123. Proof of Service by Mail This QuickForm can be found in the Supplemental Forms folder. Once you select the form, a Multiple Address Selector appears asking which creditors in the case you want to list on the form. This document then opens in the Best Case Editor so that you can customize it further. Reaffirmation Agreement Find this QuickForm form in the Supplemental Forms folder. Once you select the form, a Multiple Address Selector appears asking which creditors in the case you want to include. The document which opens in the Best Case Editor will contain a Reaffirmation Agreement for each creditor selected. Long-time Best Case users may also see a Reaffirmation Agreement in the Additional Documents Library, but the one in the Supplemental Forms folder is newer and easier to work with for electronic filing. Redemption of Property Agreement This QuickForm is located in the Supplemental Forms Folder, and opens in the Best Case Editor for you to complete. Statement of Information Required by 11 U.S.C. 341 This is a form required in some districts which is used to inform the debtor of his or her options in bankruptcy. There is no information for you to enter for the form. It prints with a line for the debtor to sign it. It appears in the Supplemental Forms folder but if you want it to appear in the main Forms and Schedules menu, see Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298. For added flexibility, you can edit this form through the Best Case Editor. See page 202 for more information. Suggestion of Bankruptcy This QuickForm can be found in the Supplemental Forms folder. Once you select the form, a Multiple Address Selector appears asking which creditors in the case you want to list on the form. This document then opens in the Best Case Editor so that you can customize it further. 122 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Supplemental Schedule for Property Acquired after Discharge The Supplemental Schedule for Property Acquired after Discharge provides a generic letter to notify the bankruptcy Trustee of the acquisition of new property within 180 days of filing and the method by which it was acquired. This document can be modified through the Best Case Editor to meet the requirements for your district. Client Questionnaires Client Questionnaires for business and non-business debtors are provided in Best Case Bankruptcy. These questionnaires follow the logical order of entry in the program and can be edited by the user as needed. To print a client questionnaire: 1. Open any client file. 2. In the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on the Supplemental Forms folder. 3. Mark the appropriate questionnaire to print, business or non-business. (Highlight the form and press s.) 4. Click the Print button in the toolbar at the top of the screen. 5. This is a QuickForm which will appear in the Editor. Click OK to continue. 6. The document now appears in the Best Case Editor. You can make any changes to the document that you want to customize it to the particular client, or to add your own contact information. When you are ready to print, click File/Print. 7. The print dialog box in the Best Case Editor appears. Make your selection (generally you want to print the entire file) then click OK. Note: If you want to customize this document, you can make changes in the Best Case Editor then choose File/Save As. Save the document in one of your regular word processing directories. Open the Editor by clicking Edit/Best Case Editor then clicking File/Open and navigating to the appropriate directory. See The Best Case Editor on page 202 for more details. Creditor Forms Proof of Claim There are two ways to access the Proof of Claim form in Best Case Bankruptcy. If you are representing the creditor, you ll use the Proof of Claim that is accessible through File/Creditor Forms/Proof of Claim when your Client List Window is closed. Using this feature, you can create proof of claim forms, but will have to type in the name of the debtor and detailed claim information. If you are completing the Proof of Claim on behalf of the creditor, but are representing the debtor, you can use the more fully featured Proof of Claim in the Supplemental Forms folder at the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu. Using this option, you ll take advantage of our Proof of Claim wizard to create Proof of Claim forms for all or some creditors in a case. The wizard displays a list of all creditors in the case: choose the ones you want to create Proof of Claims forms for, and Best Case pulls detailed claim information from the creditor schedules and information about the debtor from the Voluntary Petition. Creating Proof of Claim Forms When You Represent the Debtor This feature pulls debtor information from the Voluntary Petition, and allows you to use a wizard to pull detailed claim information from the creditor schedules. It also allows you to create several proof of claim forms quickly for multiple creditors in a case. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 123
To Create Proof of Claim Forms: 1. After entering all creditor data in creditor schedules, open the Supplemental Forms folder at the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. Double click on the Proof of Claim form. (You may need to scroll down to see it.) 3. Click the Insert button, or press A-I. The debtor s name and case number will be filled in for you based on the Voluntary Petition. 4. You can create a Proof of Claim for one creditor, for yourself, or for multiple creditors in the case using the Multi Add Wizard: Multiple Creditors: First, fill in information on the Proof of Claim that you would like to appear in the form for all creditors, then click the Multi Add Wizard button to select your creditors. The wizard will create a separate Proof of Claim form for each creditor, filling in the standard information you input in the Proof of Claim screen, and detailed claim information from the creditor schedules. The wizard is described in detail below. (Note that you ll want all data entered in creditor schedules before using the Wizard. The Wizard copies information from the creditor schedules but does not link it, so changes you make on creditor schedules after you ve created Proof of Claim forms will not appear on the Proof of Claim.) Single Creditor: If you want to create a single Proof of Claim with the creditor name and address copied from a creditor schedule, click the list button next to the creditor name field, which will give you a list of all creditors entered in the case in Schedules D, E and F. Follow instructions in Entering Data for the Proof of Claim on page 125. Attorney as Creditor: To create a Proof of Claim for yourself (as the creditor), click the Atty Fee button. (Information will be copied from your Attorney Compensation Statement. You will appear as the creditor, Services Performed will be checked as the basis for the claim, and the amount owing from the Compensation Statement will be copied to the Claim Amount on the Proof of Claim. Note that any changes you make in the Attorney Compensation Statement after creating the Proof of Claim will not be reflected here, as this information is not linked. You can have different claim amounts on the compensation statement and the Proof of Claim.) Follow instructions in Entering Data for the Proof of Claim on page 125. 5. You will then need to go through each of the tabs to complete the information for the form as described below. 6. When you are ready to print, notice that you can either choose to print the highlighted form (click the Print button) or all Proof of Claim forms for the case (Print All button). What is the Multi Add Wizard? The Multi Add Wizard will create Proof of Claim forms from data entered in your client file, such as creditor names and addresses, claim amounts, dates debts were incurred, priority types and descriptions of collateral. The Wizard lets you copy claim information from creditor Schedules D, E, and F, Contract/Lease party information from Schedule G, and codebtor information from Schedule H to the Proof of Claim. The Wizard will create a separate Proof of Claim for each of the creditors you specify. You can create Proof of Claim forms for one creditor, all creditors, or a selection of creditors, with a few mouse-clicks. Debtor information will be filled in for you from the Voluntary Petition. To use the Wizard: 1. When you are ready to select creditors in the Proof of Claim, click the Multi Add Wizard button in the General Tab. 2. NOTE that using the Wizard, creditor information is copied from creditor schedules for you, but isn t linked. If you create Proof of Claim forms then edit creditor schedules, your changes will NOT be reflected in the Proof of Claim forms. This gives you the flexibility to have different information on 124 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
the debtor s schedules and the Proof of Claim forms. Before using the Wizard, you ll want to make sure you have input all creditor data for the case. Wizard Options The Wizard can copy creditor name and address data from Schedules D-H, as well as claim amounts, dates debts were incurred, information about the collateral (if secured), account numbers, priority amounts, and answers for the basis for claim (for some Schedule E claims). There is additional information that you will have to fill in for each Proof of Claim which is not captured in the creditor schedules. When you click the Multi Add Wizard button, options appear allowing you to select which data will be copied into your Proof of Claim forms. Generally, you ll just accept the default by clicking Start, and Best Case will fill in all possible data for you, but other options are described below. Enter Only Name and Address - Copies names and addresses of creditors you will specify in the next step to your Proof of Claim forms, but does not include any other data from the creditor schedules, such as claim amounts. When you select this option, the others below appear grayed out. Leave Claim Amount Blank - Copies creditor names and addresses, priority and some basis types for Schedule E claims, collateral information for Schedule D claims, dates debts were incurred, and account numbers, but does not copy claim amounts. Leave Basis Type Blank - Best Case normally fills in the Basis for the Claim for some Schedule E claims, but will leave the basis blank if you check this option. Leave Priority Type Blank - Best Case normally fills in the Priority Type for Schedule E claims but will leave this blank if you check this option. Selecting Creditors After you click Start, the Multiple Address Selector appears allowing you to choose which creditors will appear on your Proof of Claim forms. A separate Proof of Claim form will be created for each creditor you select. Select creditors using the Multi Add Wizard button. After selecting your creditors and clicking OK, you ll see a list of Proof of Claim forms for the creditors you selected. Next to each creditor name, Wizard Sch (D, E, F, G or H) appears, alerting you to the fact that this Proof of Claim was added using the Wizard, and that additional data needs to be input. Once you have edited a Proof of Claim, this note disappears. For each Proof of Claim, be sure you complete all questions on each tab before printing as described in the following section. Entering Data for the Proof of Claim 1. In the General tab, you ll answer questions about whether the creditor has knowledge of anyone else filing a Proof of Claim for this claim, has received any notices from the bankruptcy court, and/or has an address which Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 125
differs from the address printed on the envelope received from the court. You ll also fill in the name and title of the signer. 2. In the Mail To Tab, if you used the Wizard, the name and address of the creditor have been filled in for you from the creditor schedule along with the last four digits of the account number, but you can edit this information if needed. Changes you make in this screen do not affect the creditor schedules. You ll type the telephone number and indicate whether the claim replaces and/or amends a previous claim, if applicable. 3. In the Claim Tab, the amount of the claim and date the debt was incurred have been filled in for you if you used the Wizard. Again, changes you make here will not affect the creditor schedules, and changes you make to the creditor schedules from now on do not affect the Proof of Claim. Indicate the basis for the claim, judgment date (if applicable), and indicate whether the amount includes interest. If the basis of the claim is unpaid wages, you ll enter the creditor s (employee s) social security number and dates for which no compensation was received. 4. In the Secured tab, Best Case has checked the box to indicate that the claim is secured if this claim was pulled from Schedule D using the Wizard. The value and description of collateral have been filled in from the Creditor Information tab. Indicate the type of collateral and arrearage amount, if applicable. If the claim is not secured, leave this screen blank. 5. In the Priority tab, Best Case has checked the priority box if this is a Schedule E claim, filled in the amount entitled to priority and indicated the type of priority from Schedule E. (Note that amounts entitled to priority were increased 4/1/01 and are subject to change every 3 years thereafter. Updated priority amounts (from 01) print on this form.) 6. In the Notes tab, you can jot down notes about this particular case or form. These notes do not print on the form, and are for your reference only. When you have finished entering information, click OK. You will be returned to the Proof of Claim list screen. Printing Proof of Claim Forms To print Proof of Claim forms, open the Proof of Claim option in the Supplemental Forms folder. To print one Proof of Claim, highlight the creditor name then click the Print button in the bottom of the window, which will open your Print Documents dialog box. Select your printing options then click Print. To print all Proof of Claim forms for the case, click the Print All button then click Print. To print a blank Proof of Claim form, highlight one of the creditors, click Print, then choose the Print Blank Forms option in the Print Documents Dialog box before clicking Print. If you want to print a blank form but have not added any Proof of Claim forms, you can Insert a new one, type BLANK for the creditor name, save it by clicking OK, then print it using the Print Blank Forms option. To Delete All Proof of Claim Forms for this Client To delete all Proof of Claim forms for this client, open the Proof of Claim screen in the Supplemental Forms folder and press C-S-A-KKk. There is NO WAY TO UNDO the delete, so use it with caution. Creating a Proof of Claim Form When You Represent the Creditor This option lets you create Proof of Claim forms for cases where you are representing the creditor and do not have a client file started in Best Case. If you are filing a proof of claim form on behalf of the creditor but are representing the debtor, you should use the Proof of Claim in the Supplemental Forms folder instead, which saves time by using a wizard to pull detailed information from creditor schedules in the file. Accessing the Proof of Claim Form 1. Close the Forms and Schedules Menu if you have a client file open, then close the Client List Window. 2. Click on File in the main menu. 126 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
3. Move the mouse to Creditor Forms, then click on Proof of Claim. 4. If you have already entered Proof of Claim forms, you ll see them listed here. If you haven t, this list screen will be blank. 5. To add a new Proof of Claim, click Insert or press the I key on your keyboard. 6. Follow instructions in Entering Data for the Proof of Claim on page 125. Involuntary Petition Accessing the Involuntary Petition Since the Involuntary Petition is filed by the creditor or creditor s attorney, you ll go to the creditor forms section of Best Case Bankruptcy to print this form. 1. Close the Forms and Schedules Menu if you have a client file open, then close the Client List Window. 2. Click on File in the main menu. 3. Move the mouse to Creditor Forms, then click on Involuntary Petition. 4. If you have already entered Involuntary Petitions, you ll see them listed here. If you haven t, this list screen will be blank. 5. To add a new Involuntary Petition, click Insert or press the I key. Entering Information The information for the Involuntary Petition is divided into several tabs. In the General Tab, you ll type an answer for Index As, (which refers to the way this case is to be listed on your Involuntary Petition list screen), the district, chapter of filing, nature of debts (consumer or business), the type of debtor, venue, and allegations. (If the jurisdiction you want does not appear in the drop-down jurisdictions list, you have not installed it. See Installing Jurisdictions on page 296 to add this choice or just type in the name.) In the Debtor Tab, you ll type the debtor s name, other names used, tax id and address. For the debtor s name and address, you can click the button to the right of the debtor s name field to choose a name from your Common Creditor List, or type a new name. If you type a new name, the AddressHelper feature will fill in the city, state and county for you after you type in the zip code. For consumer debtors, you ll input the full social security number of the debtor; Best Case will mask this information when you print. (See Privacy on page 190.) In the Mailing Address Tab, you can type the debtor s mailing address, if different from the street address. Again, you can choose from your Common Creditor List. In the Business Tab, type the location of principal assets, choose the type of business from the pop-down list, then type the nature of the debtor s business. In the Notes Tab, you can make notes about the case for your reference. These notes do not print on the petition form. In the Pending Tab, you can insert information about pending bankruptcy cases involving this debtor. For each pending case, click the Insert button and type the debtor s name in the pending case, the relationship to the current debtor, the case number, district, date and judge of the pending case. Continuation pages will be added automatically if there are multiple pending cases. If there are no pending cases, leave this tab blank. The Creditors Tab asks for information about the petitioning creditors. For each petitioning creditor, click the Insert button or press the I key on your keyboard. A window with three tabs at the top appears. In the Petitioning Creditor Tab, fill out the creditor s name, address, and the nature and amount of the claim. You can use your Common Creditor List or type in a new name and address. In the Signature tab, fill in the name and address of the signer. Chapter 3 Working With Forms and Schedules 127
In the Firm/Attorney Tab, type the name, address, and telephone number of the law firm representing the petitioner. If there are more than three petitioning creditors, continuation pages will be added automatically. Click OK to save this petitioner s information, then click Insert again to add another creditor. When you have finished entering creditors, click OK to save changes to this Involuntary Petition. This case is now listed in your Involuntary Petition list screen. To print the Involuntary Petition, highlight the form and click the Print button in the lower right corner. The Print Documents dialog box appears. The options in this window are described in Printing Options on page 189. Click Print to send the document to your printer. Printing a Blank Involuntary Petition 1. To get to the Involuntary Petition list screen, close the Client List Window then click File/Creditor Forms/Involuntary Petition. 2. To print a blank Involuntary Petition, you first must have an Involuntary Petition listed. If you don t have one, you can add one quickly: 3. Click Insert to add an entry. You ll need to type in a name for the Index As field in order to save the record. It doesn t matter what you type, since the form will not print with any data in it when you use the blank forms option. You can type blank if you like. Click OK to save your form. 4. The form is now listed in the Involuntary Petition list screen, and the Print button in the bottom corner of the screen is lit up. With your new Involuntary Petition highlighted, click the Print button. The Print Documents dialog box appears, with many printing options. Click in the Print blank forms check box to mark this option then click Print. 128 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator In This Chapter Means Test Quick Start... 130 What is the Best Case Means Test Calculator?... 131 A Quick Overview of the Means Test Concept... 132 Applying the Means Test/ Calculating Commitment Period & Disposable Income... 133 Indicate Marital Status, Family Size and Household Size... 133 Determining Current Monthly Income... 134 Calculating Income with the CMI Calculator... 135 Comparing the Debtor s CMI with the State Median... 137 Deducting the IRS Living... 139 Deducting the Health Allowance... 140 Deducting the Transportation Allowance... 142 Necessary Expenses... 144 Additional Expenses... 145 Entering Debt Payments... 145 Summary and Outcome... 147 Special Circumstances... 148 Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims... 149 Specifying a Means Test Treatment for Priority Claims... 152 Means Test FAQ... 153 Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 129
Means Test Quick Start The Quick Start is intended for people already familiar with the concepts involved in applying the Means Test. The instructions and screen descriptions in the Quick Start are for a Chapter 7 debtor. If you are using the Means Test Calculator for a Chapter 11 or Chapter 13 debtor, the screens you encounter and the information you enter differ slightly from what is described here. An introduction to the concept of the Means Test and full instructions for each screen can begin on page 131. Running a Chapter 7 Means Test 1. Start a client file in Best Case. You don t need to enter all case information to complete the Means Test. 2. In the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on Form 22A to open the Best Case Means Test Calculator. 3. If you have already filled in the debtor s address, the county will be chosen for you; otherwise, select a county. 4. In the General tab, indicate the debtor s marital status and household and family size. This information helps determine whether the spouse s income is included, which Census Bureau figures we compare with (household size), and which IRS allowances apply (family size). 5. First, we ll determine the debtor s Current Monthly Income, or CMI. In the Income tab, enter the average gross (pre-tax) monthly income the debtor received for the last six months in each of the categories listed. Note: Income received as a benefit of the Social Security Act is not included in the calculation of the debtor's CMI. If your debtor receives unemployment compensation, enter it in the appropriate spot: either in the income column, to be included in the Current Monthly Income, or below line 9, to be excluded from the calculation. 6. Click the Median tab to see how the debtor s income compares to the state median for his household size. Best Case has filled in the median income for you. For many debtors, you will stop here, since their income will be below median. Tip: If your debtor is above the median, then to complete Form 22, you need to enter Schedule D and E claims. You may want to exit Form 22 here and enter these claims before moving on to the screens where you enter deductions and determine allowances. To save time, you may not want to fill in all claim details: we just need the monthly payment, term, and past due amounts. For some debtors (those with disposable income between $6,000-$10,000), you ll need to complete all creditor information to accurately compute the unsecured total. 7. If your debtor s income is above median, you must continue, entering a variety of expenses to arrive at the Disposable Monthly Income (DMI). If the marital adjustment field is activated, enter the amount that the nonfiling spouse contributes to the household expenses. 8. Click the Living tab. Best Case will fill in the appropriate IRS allowance for living expenses such as food, clothing, personal care, housekeeping, and miscellaneous. IRS Living Allowances are based on family size (from the general tab), and income level (people in higher income brackets are allowed higher living expenses). If you want to claim up to an additional 5% for food/clothing, indicate that in this tab. 9. Click the Health tab. This is where you will enter information to calculate the debtor s health care allowance. Put simply, the health care allowance represents the number of people in the debtor s household multiplied by the IRS National Standards for Out-of-Pocket Health Care. There are two standards for health care; one for household members under age 65, and one for those 65 or older. If the household contains members that are both over and under 65, then you calculate the allowances for each age bracket separately. The two allowances are then added together to yield the total health care allowance that is claimed on the form. The Health tab is also used to determine the debtor s health care expenses for the Other Necessary Expenses section of Form 22. 130 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
10. Click the Housing tab. There are two allowances filled in for you based on family size and county: maintenance/ utilities and ownership. Click the Secured Claims button to find the claim that is secured by the house. Highlight it and click Change, then specify the monthly payment, number of payments due in the next 60 months, and any past due amount. You are required to list the full amount contractually due, which can include escrow amounts for taxes and insurance. Be sure to select Secured by House in the Means Test Treatment section. (Note: If you have not yet entered the claims secured by the house, you will need to exit the Means Test Calculator and do so before you can determine the debtor s mortgage/rent allowance.) 11. Back in the Housing tab, you ll see that the secured payment (or the average payment over the next 60 months) has been subtracted from the housing allowance, leaving you a net amount. The mortgage payment will appear on the Debt Payment Tab and will reduce the debtor s DMI. If the debtor rents, he gets the standard housing allowance. 12. Click the Car tab. Car allowances work the same way as the housing allowance: there is an operating allowance (based on IRS region and number of vehicles operated) and an ownership allowance (based on number of vehicles owned or leased). Specify the number of vehicles the debtor operates, then, if the debtor is making payments on the car, click the Secured Claims button and specify payments. Be sure to mark the Means Test Treatment as Secured by Car 1 or Secured by Car 2. The ownership allowance is reduced by the secured payment, which is carried to the Debt Pmt tab. If the debtor owns the car outright or leases the car, he gets the full ownership allowance but cannot deduct payments. (Note: If you have not yet entered the claims secured by the car, you will need to exit the Means Test Calculator and do so before you can determine the debtor s ownership allowance.) 13. In the Necessary and Additional tabs, you ll enter the debtor s actual monthly expenses in different categories, such as taxes (including income and personal property taxes, but not real estate). You may want to print out a copy of the form for full descriptions. Best Case keeps a running total of income and expenses at the bottom of the screen. 14. In the Debt Pmt tab, Best Case totals all secured claims contractually due in the next 60 months, any past due amounts on claims secured by property necessary for the debtor s support, and all amounts due on priority claims (from Schedule E). If there are secured claims other than the house and car payments (which you ve already listed), click the View/Edit Secured Claims button and specify payments. Without payment information, these claims are not included in the Means Test. Back in the Debt Pmt Tab, specify a projected Chapter 13 Plan payment and the multiplier for your district. 15. In the Summary tab, Best Case shows the DMI and DI calculations, and the amount of unsecured debt from D, E and F. The outcome of the test is also explained. 16. Enter Special Circumstances in the Special tab. These don t affect the calculations or selection of checkboxes ( presumption arises/does not arise ), but they are included in Part VII of the printed form. 17. Print the form from the Forms and Schedules Menu. What is the Best Case Means Test Calculator? The Means Test, the concept of Current Monthly Income, and the applicable forms (22A, B, and C), are new components of the bankruptcy process introduced under the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005. Best Case Bankruptcy includes a Means Test Calculator that looks up applicable IRS expense allowances and Census Bureau income numbers for you, performs Means Test calculations, and helps you to complete the required forms. Since the Means Test is a new requirement, there is not yet any case law to serve as precedent for its application. As a software provider, Best Case has attempted to simplify the application of the means test while still giving you the ultimate say in how you want to interpret each section, without locking you into one interpretation. If you have Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 131
suggestions for further means test development or features, please email them to us at help@bestcase.com. We appreciate your input! Depending on the Chapter of Filing, information from the Means Test Calculator gets plugged in to one of three forms: Form 22A. Statement of Current Monthly Income/Means Test for Chapter 7 filings; Form 22B. Statement of Current Monthly Income for Chapter 11 filings; Form 22C. Current Monthly Income/Disposable Income for Chapter 13 filings. All three versions of the form can be opened for editing in the Best Case Editor, as described on page 202,so that you can make changes and add any additional information that or descriptions that may be necessary. A Quick Overview of the Means Test Concept In a Chapter 7 case, Form 22A (Statement of Currently Monthly Income and Means Test Calculation) is used to determine whether a presumption of abuse exists. The test first compares the debtor s Current Monthly Income (actually an average of the last six months, excluding Social Security benefits), with the state median for the debtor s household size. If the debtor s income is lower than the median, the full means test does not apply, and there is no presumption of abuse. In many geographic areas, most debtors will have incomes below the median. If the debtor s income is higher than the median, the debtor must complete the full means test to determine Disposable Monthly Income (DMI), which is the debtor s income after necessary expenses have been subtracted. Expenses include: IRS standards for living expenses, such as clothing, food, housekeeping, personal care, etc. For these expenses, the means test requires you to list the IRS allowances instead of the debtor s actual expenses. Best Case will fill in the appropriate IRS allowances for you. IRS standards for housing and transportation, with secured payments deducted. Best Case will fill in allowable IRS allowances and deduct secured payments for you. Other expenses the IRS considers necessary, in specific categories (taxes, child care, etc.). Most of these do not have defined caps, but you are required to use the debtor s actual expenses. Additional expenses, again in specific categories. These are expenses that are not in the IRS code but are allowed under BAPCPA, including certain types of insurance, home energy costs in excess of the allowance, continued charitable contributions, etc. Again, these must be the debtor s actual expenses, and certain types do have maximum amounts. All secured payments contractually due in the next 60 months. Use our new Means Test Treatment tab in Schedule D to specify payments, and Best Case will calculate a 60-month average. All past due amounts on claims secured by property necessary to the debtor, divided by 60. All priority claims, divided by 60. With these expenses deducted, Best Case computes the Disposable Monthly Income, then multiplies it by 60 to determine the Disposable Income that would be applied to a hypothetical Chapter 13 Plan to repay unsecured, nonpriority debts. If the disposable income is sufficient to repay a significant portion of these debts, presumption of abuse arises, and the case may be converted to Chapter 13 or you may advise your client to file Chapter 13 instead. The Best Case Means Test Calculator will show you whether or not presumption arises. The Means Test is a Formula 132 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
It s important to understand that the Means Test is simply a formula, and use of this formula is required under the new law. The figures that you ll type into the means test aren t necessarily that meaningful outside their use in the formula. For example, the income figures are the debtor s average over the last six months, and are not necessarily the same as the debtor s current income. For certain expenses, you re required to use the IRS allowances in the Means Test instead of the debtor s actual expenses, even if the debtor s are lower. And although the IRS intended the Housing and Transportation allowances to cover reasonable expenses for these items, BAPCPA allows debtors to deduct all secured payments contractually due in the next 60 months. The IRS allowances for Housing and Transportation (ownership) essentially function as minimum deductions to the debtor s income in bankruptcy. Why not just use Schedules I and J to Determine Disposable Income? The concepts of income and expenses for the Means Test differ from the income and expenses reported on Schedules I and J. Schedule I lists the debtor s current income, while the Means Test requires an average from the last six months with Social Security Benefits excluded. Likewise, on the expense side, expense categories are different on the Means Test and Schedule J, and furthermore, Schedule J lists the debtor s actual current expenses while the Means Test uses IRS standards for some expenses, and actual for others. Moreover, Schedule J allows the attorney more discretion in listing other types of expenses, whereas the Means Test doesn t allow you to fill in unlimited other expenses. It is therefore our opinion that the Judiciary Committee, in designing the Means Test forms, came to the same conclusion: that BAPCPA requires a different income-expense calculation than what is presented on Schedules I and J. Online Tools: Quick Median Income Test This tool allows Best Case users with Internet access to quickly see if a debtor is above or below the median income level for their state and household size and can be used before starting the Form 22. To access the Quick Median Income Test, navigate to Tools/Online Tools/Quick Median Income Test in the Menu bar. Applying the Means Test/ Calculating Commitment Period & Disposable Income Indicate Marital Status, Family Size and Household Size The General tab is the first screen that appears when you open the Means Test Calculator. Best Case uses the household size and location of residence you enter for the debtor to determine which median income figure to compare to. The location and family size determine the amount of allowable IRS expenses for certain categories. General Tab: Indicate the Marital Status, Family Size and Household Size Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 133
Debtor Location: If you ve already entered the debtor s address in the Voluntary Petition, the county will be selected for you; otherwise, you must pick a county. You can select a different county by clicking the Change Location button. Exclusion for Miltary and Non-Consumer Debts (Chapter 7 only): Click the button under Part 1. Exclusion for Military and Non-Consumer Debt to exclude a debtor for the following reasons: Exclusion for Disabled Veterans, Declaration of Non-Consumer Debts, and Declaration of Reservists and National Guard Members. If this is a joint case, a checkbox will appear in this window allowing users to prepare a separate Form 22A for a non-excluded debtor. If the checkbox is marked, an additional Form 22A for the joint debtor will then be available in the Forms and Schedules. Marital Status: The marital status determines whether the debtor s spouse s income is listed and taken into consideration: o o o If the debtor is married filing jointly, both incomes will be included. If the debtor is married but not filing jointly, and declares that the spouse maintains a separate household, the spouse s income is not included. If the debtor is married, not filing jointly, without the declaration of separate households, the spouse s income is included in the Current Monthly Income, but is only included in the Disposable Monthly Income to the extent that the spouse contributes to household expenses. Household and Family Size: When you enter the number of dependents, Best Case fills in the household and family size based on this answer and the marital status. You can override these answers and fill in your own since the household and family size are not necessarily the same. o o o The Household Size will be used to determine the comparable median income. The Living Family Size will be used to determine allowable IRS living expenses. The Housing Family Size will be used to determine the allowable IRS expenses for rent/mortgage and other non-mortgage housing and utilities costs. Case Number and Filing Date: If you open the Means Test Calculator for a case that has already been filed, you will see the case number and the filing date displayed in blue at the bottom of the General tab. Best Case uses this information when selecting which year's IRS Allowances and Census Income information apply to the debtor. The look back period displayed in the Income tab will also be re-calculated based on the filing date. NOTE: You must have both a filing date and a case number for the client in order for this feature to apply. You can enter a filing date in the Filing Information tab of the Client Notes screen. The Case Number can be entered in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition. Determining Current Monthly Income The Code defines Current Monthly Income (CMI) as the debtor s average gross income (i.e. before taxes are taken out) for the last six calendar months. Best Case shows you the period to consider on the right side of the screen. You can enter the debtor's income figures directly into the fields provided on the Income tab, or you can use the CMI Calculator to determine the average income and create a more detailed account of the debtor's income. 134 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Best Case shows you the period to consider when entering the debtor s income. Income Tab: Enter the Debtor s Average Gross Income for the Last Six Months Use the Income and Expense buttons to calculate income and expenses for a business or real property. Entering the Debtor s Income Directly into the Means Test If you just want to do a quick Means Test to see if the debtor is above or below the median, or if the debtor only has one or two simple forms of income, you can enter the average monthly amounts directly into the fields provided on the Income tab. Line numbers on the screen correspond with the line numbers on the printed form, so you may want to print a copy of Form 22 to refer to as you work. Wages, salary, tips bonuses, overtime commissions: Enter the debtor's income from employment over the previous six months. If you are entering numbers from pay stubs, be sure you are using pre-tax income Business Income/ Rental Income: Form 22 requires that the debtor itemize income and expenses for all business rental income. If you are entering business or income information, click the I&E button next to the appropriate line to enter gross income and expenses. The net income will be calculated for you and added to the debtor's income. Unemployment Compensation: If your client collects unemployment compensation, you first need to determine whether you contend that this is a benefit under the Social Security Act, since SSA benefits are explicitly excluded from CMI. If you think it is, enter it in one of the boxes under line 9, and it will not be added to the total, but it will be listed on the form in the appropriate place. Otherwise, list the income in column A or B as appropriate. Income from other sources: Use this section to enter in any additional income for the debtor that does not fall into the other categories specifically listed on the form and which is not received as a benefit under the Social Security act. You can use the text boxes to the left of the income fields to specify the source of the income. Current Monthly Income: As you enter data, Best Case keeps a running total of the debtor's CMI and displays it on line 12, and in the CMI Summary section that appears at the bottom of all data entry screens for Form 22. Calculating Income with the CMI Calculator You can use the Best Case CMI Calculator to enter detailed information about the debtor s Current Monthly Income. For each source of income, you can specify the income type, whether it belongs to the debtor or the debtor s spouse, calculate the average monthly income based on the regular monthly income or the year-to-date totals and add additional information about the income that may not otherwise be reflected on Form 22. Best Case uses the data you enter to calculate the average monthly amounts for the corresponding lines on Form 22, and when Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 135
you print the form or create a PDF version for electronic filing, Best Case automatically generates an attachment sheet which includes a complete record of the debtor s income. Note: If you have previously entered income amounts in the Income tab of the Means Test Calculator, and you then enter income into the CMI Calculator, the amounts you originally entered will be overridden and only amounts for income that you enter in the CMI Calculator will be applied to the fields in the Income tab of the Means Test Calculator. The Year-to-date-total subtraction method allows you to compute the average income and expenses with as few as two statements. Use the Set as Default button to specify the default method used to compute the average monthly income Entering Income in the CMI Calculator 1. To open the CMI Calculator, click the Enter CMI Details button that appears in the Income tab of the Means Test Calculator. 2. Click Insert to create a new income source: Type: The income type you select determines where the income gets included on the Form. Click the drop down arrow to see a full list of income choices, or click the first letter of the income type you wish to select. Note that next to the income types in the drop-down list, Best Case alerts you to which line the income will be added. Source: Type in the source of the debtor s income here. For example if you are entering a debtor s gross income from a job you might want to enter the name of the debtor s employer. Notes About Income Types: Non-CMI Unemployment Income: Income classified as Unemployment compensation (Non- CMI) will not be included in the debtor s current monthly income, but it will print in the Unemployment compensation claimed to be a benefit under the Social Security Act section of Form 22.) Child Support (Form 22C): For Chapter 13 Clients. Best Case automatically adds the income to line 7 of the Form, and, if Part V of the Form is required, the income will be subtracted from the Total current Monthly income on Line 54. Debtor/ Spouse: Select whether the income belongs to the debtor or the debtor s spouse. Method: There are three methods available for calculating the average income. No matter which method you use, the CMI Calculator will keep track of the dates in the six-month look-back period and remind you of the approximate dates for which you should enter income data. 6 individual months: This method allows you to enter the debtor s income for each of the six-months in the look-back period and compute an average income based on the monthly totals. Using this method, you can manually enter the income and expenses for each individual month, or, if the debtor has several months where the income or expenses are identical, click the Copy Amount Down button. Same income every month: If the debtor receives the same amount every month (e.g. a pension or child support payment) you can use this method and just enter the regular monthly gross income the debtor receives. Year to date total subtraction: The year-to-date total subtraction method calculates the debtor s average income by taking the debtor s year-to-date gross income from the last income statement prior to the start of the CMI look-back period and subtracting it 136 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
from the debtor s year-to-date gross income from the last income statement received during the look-back period. If the debtor s expected filing date is June 30 or earlier, his look-back period extends into the previous year, and the CMI Calculator will help you to compute the year-to-date income separately for both years. ( See Using the Year-to-Date Subtraction Method to Calculate the Debtor s Gross Income on page 349 for examples of how this method might be applied.) 3. Remarks: If you want to add any additional information about the debtor s income, click on the Remarks tab, and you will find a text box where you can type any supplemental comments or details about the income source that you want to include on the attachment sheet. 4. When you are done entering the information click OK to save your changes and return to the main CMI Details screen. Here you can hit Insert to add a new income source, click Change to edit an existing record or click Close to return to the Means Test Calculator. Comparing the Debtor s CMI with the State Median The Median tab show's how the debtor's annualized current monthly income compares with the state median. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 137
Chapter 7: Comparing the Debtor s Income with the Median Median Tab for a Chapter 13 Debtor with Income Above the MedianMedian Income: The means test calculator automatically fills in the comparable state median, which is determined by the state of residence and the household size you selected in the General tab. Median incomes are based on Census Bureau numbers, and are adjusted for inflation and published by the U.S. Trustee. We calculate the debtor s annualized income and compare with the median for you, then display the result. Additional Information: The Median tab contains two buttons which display information you may find helpful as you review the debtor's CMI and how it compares to the median income: o o The Wait to File? button may be helpful for debtors with variable income. If your client is above the median income, it shows how much less per month would need to be earned if you waited 1-6 months to file. If your client is below, it shows how much extra could be earned for the debtor to still fall below median. The Show Table button next to line 14 allows you to view all median income values for this state. Above or Below the Median: In most cases, the debtor's income will fall below the median, and there is no presumption of abuse. If this is the case, you do not need to complete the full means test. However, if the debtor's income exceeds the median, then the full test must be completed. For these cases, more tabs appear at the top of the window. You ll enter expenses in these tabs to determine disposable monthly income. In addition, the CMI Summary at the bottom of the screen Chapter 13: Determining the Commitment Period and Disposable Income Part II Calculation of 1325 (b)(4) Commitment Period looks first at the debtor s annualized current monthly income. If the debtor is married and not filing jointly, and you, as the attorney, contend that the code does not require that the non-filing spouse s income be included, you can deduct the amount of the spouse s income that was not regularly contributed to the household from the debtor s CMI. This is called a marital adjustment. The CMI (with marital adjustment removed, if applicable), is then compared with the state median for this household size. o o If the debtor s income is below the state median for his household size, the applicable commitment period for the Chapter 13 Plan is three years, and the debtor does not complete the rest of the form. For these debtors, and in most geographic areas, most debtors will fall into this category, the form will not be used to determine the disposable monthly income. If the debtor s income is above the state median, the applicable commitment is five years, and the debtor must complete Part III, where we again do a comparison with the state median. Part III Application of 1325(b)(3) for Determining Disposable Income takes the Current Monthly Income and subtracts the marital adjustment if the debtor is married and not filing jointly. (Whereas Part II leaves room for interpretation of whether the marital adjustment should be subtracted, Part III specifically directs 138 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
expands to show a new running total of the income and expenses you have entered and the debtor's disposable monthly income. Marital Adjustment: If your debtor is married, not filing jointly, without the declaration of separate households, there is a marital adjustment to the income, which essentially removes the portion of the spouse s income which is not used to pay for household expenses. To calculate the debtor's marital adjustment, simply enter the nonfiling spouse s monthly contribution to household expenses, and Best Case will remove the remaining portion of the spouse s income for you. you to subtract it.) The resulting annualized Current Monthly Income is then compared with the state median for this household size: o o If the debtor s income is below the state median, disposable income is not determined by 1325(b)(3), and the debtor does not complete the rest of the form. If the debtor s income is above the state median, you ll complete the form to determine disposable income, which will be used as the basis for the Chapter 13 plan payment. Additional Information: o o The Show Table button next to line 16 allows you to view all median income values for this state. Always Compute DMI: Check this box if the debtor is below Median Income, but you still want to calculate the debtor's Disposable Monthly Income using the Formula set forth by form 22C. Tip: If your debtor is above the median, then to complete Form 22, you will need to enter Schedule D and E claims. You may want to exit Form 22 here and enter these claims before moving on to the screens where you enter deductions and determine allowances. To save time, you may not want to fill in all claim details: we just need the monthly payment, term, and past due amounts. Deducting the IRS Living Allowance In the Living tab, Best Case fills in the IRS Standard Allowances for living expenses, including clothing, food, housekeeping, personal care, and miscellaneous. For these items, you will deduct the IRS standard amounts no matter what the debtor s actual amounts are, per instructions on the form. The Show Table Button opens a pop up window which shows the IRS living allowances based on the debtor s income level and family size. Use the Override Table checkbox if there are special circumstances which require you to change the debtor s standard living allowance. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 139
The IRS Living Allowance: Best Case fills in the debtor s IRS living allowance based on the income level you specified, as described above, and the Living Family Size you specified in the General tab. o Overriding the IRS Living Allowance: If there are circumstances which require you to adjust the debtor's standard IRS living expenses, click in the Override check box located beneath the amount for living expenses, and you will be able to manually specify the debtor s adjusted expenses. Additional Food and Clothing Expenses: A deduction of up to 5% above the allowance for food and clothing can be taken if you can demonstrate that the additional amount is reasonable and necessary. Enter the additional amount in the field provided, or you can simply check the Take Max box to have Best Case calculate 5% and automatically adjust the amount if the income is changed. Deducting the Health Allowance The Health tab is where you will enter information necessary to calculate the debtor s health care allowance. It is also used to determine health care expenses for the Other Necessary Expenses section of Form 22. The Show Table button opens a pop up window that displays the IRS standards for Out of Pocket Costs. Use the Override Table checkbox if there are special circumstances which require you to change the debtor s standard allowances. Health Tab If there are no household members 65 or older: You do not need to do anything. By default, Best Case will multiply the IRS National Standard for Out-of-Pocket Health Care for persons under 65 years of age by the debtor s household size. If the Debtor or Debtor s Spouse is 65 or older: Check the appropriate box or boxes. Best Case will then recalculate the health care allowance using the numbers for household members over or under 65. If there are additional dependents 65 or older: Use the Dependents box to change the number of dependents who are 65 or older. Best Case will then recalculate the care allowance using the appropriate numbers for household members over or under 65 (Note that you can add as many dependents as you want here, but Best Case will base the final calculation on the median household size specified in the General tab.) To change the Best Case Calculation: Check the Override box, and then enter the new allowances or household member count you wish to use in determining the allowance. The allowance recalculates each time you move the cursor to a new text box Other Necessary Expenses: Health Care The instructions for Form 22 indicate that the health care expenses should represent the average monthly amount the debtor actually expends on health care that is required for the health and welfare of the debtor or their dependents, that is not reimbursed by insurance or paid by a health savings account minus the debtor s health care allowance. 140 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
To calculate the Health Care Expenses in Best Case: 1. Line Y. Health Care Expense: Enter the debtor s average monthly health care expenses. (Note that this number does not print on the form.) 2. Line Z. represents the debtor s health care allowance as described above. (Note that this number does not print on the form.) 3. Health Care in excess of Allowance. This number equals Line Y minus Line Z. It is the final number that Best Case prints on Form 22 for the debtor s other necessary health care expenses. Deducting the IRS Housing Allowance Form 22 allows debtor's to take two separate housing allowances: one for non-mortgage expenses, such as maintenance, and one for mortgage or rent expenses. Use the Housing tab to calculate these allowances for your debtor. The Show Table button opens a pop up window which shows the IRS Mortgage/ Rent and Maintenance/ Utilities allowances for each family size in the debtor's county. Use the Override Table checkbox if there are special circumstances which require you to change the debtor s standard housing allowances. Housing Tab: The IRS Standard Allowance is Filled in For You Use the Secured Claims button to specify a Means Test treatment for secured claims already entered on Schedule D. Housing: Maintenance/Utilities: The maintenance expense is fixed, and is determined by the county of residence and family size. Best Case fills this in from data provided by the Office of the U.S. Trustee. Housing: Mortgage or Rent: How the Mortgage/ Rent Allowance Works: Calculating the debtor's housing allowance for mortgage expenses is more complicated than determining the Maintenance/Utilities allowance. Although the IRS uses this allowance as a maximum amount to be spent on housing, BAPCPA allows debtors to deduct ALL PAYMENTS which are contractually due in the next 60 months that are necessary for the debtor to maintain his property. That means that when determining disposable monthly income, the debtor can deduct his full mortgage payment, including escrows for taxes and insurance, even if that payment is higher than the allowance. But Form 22 is clear that the debtor can t deduct BOTH the full housing allowance and the full mortgage payment. (He can t double-dip. ) If he s going to deduct a mortgage payment, which will be listed on the Debt Pmt tab in Best Case, he needs to reduce the amount claimed under the IRS Housing allowance by the mortgage amount. NOTE: If you have not already done so, you will need to enter any claims secured by the debtor's house on Schedule D before you can deduct them from the debtor's Mortgage/ Rent allowance on Form 22. When entering the claim on Schedule D, click on the Form 22 Means Test tab, as described on page 149. Here you can specify that the claim is secured by the debtor's house, determine the average monthly payment due on the claim over the next 60 months and specify any arrearage amounts to be deducted from the debtor's disposable income. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 141
Determining Your Debtor's Allowance: Best Case determines the IRS Standard Allowance for your debtor based on the debtor s location and the Housing Family Size you specified in the General tab and asks you for the mortgage payment. Click the Secured Claims button to specify the mortgage payment: 1. The Means Test Debt Payment Treatment Detail window appears which lists all secured claims (from Sch D) on one tab and all priority claims (from Sch E) on a second tab. 2. Highlight the mortgage claim and click, Change to open the Form 22 Means Test tab for the creditor. 3. Enter the debtor s monthly payment, the number of payments due in the next 60 months, and any escrow or balloon payments contractually due in the next 60 months. Best Case will show the 60 month average payment, which will be transferred to the Debt Pmt tab in the Means Test Calculator and deducted from the debtor s disposable income. Tip: If you are unsure of the monthly payment, the Form 22 Means Test tab includes a monthly payment calculator which you can use to determine the average monthly payment over the next 60 months. For more information on accessing and using this calculator see Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims on page149. 4. If the debtor is behind in payments, enter the cure amount. 5. In the Means Test Treatment section on the right side, select Secured by Home then click OK. 6. Click Close to return to the Means Test Calculator, where you ll see that the average payment over 60 months has been deducted from the IRS Housing allowance, and Best Case has entered the result of this calculation as the net housing allowance. Overriding the Housing Allowance: If there are circumstances which require you to adjust the debtor's standard IRS expenses for either mortgage or non-mortgage/ utilities expenses, click in the Override check box located beneath the amount for living expenses, and you will be able to manually specify the debtor s adjusted expenses. Housing and Utilities Adjustment: The IRS actually has just one allowance for both mortgage and utilities, but has split this allowance into the non-mortgage and mortgage/rent allowances for the purpose of the Means Test in bankruptcy. If you contend that splitting the allowance as indicated on the Means Test form does not allow your client to deduct the full amount to which he is entitled under the IRS Standards, you can enter a housing and utilities adjustment and state the basis for your contention. Home energy costs in excess of IRS utilities allowance: If the debtor's monthly home energy costs exceed the IRS allowance, he may be able to deduct the additional expenses. Enter the amount of the excess energy costs provided, and then use the Best Case Editor to create an attachment to document the reason you are claiming these expenses. (For more information see Creating an Attachment on page 198. ) Deducting the Transportation Allowance Form 22 allows debtor's to take two separate housing allowances: one for operating costs (maintenance), and one for ownership (lease or car payments). These allowances are filled in for you by Best Case based on the information you enter into the Car tab. The operating allowance is based on the IRS region the debtor lives in and the number of vehicles he operates. (Click the Show Table button opens a pop up window which shows the IRS operating allowances for the debtor's region.) The ownership allowance is national, and is based on the number of vehicles he owns or leases. 142 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Use the Override Table checkbox if there are special circumstances which require you to change the debtor s standard transportation allowances. The CMI Summary tracks your debtor s CMI, expense deductions and DMI. Car Tab: The Debtor Gets an Allowance for Operating Costs and one for Ownership Costs Number of Vehicles Operated/ Operating Allowance: When you click the Car tab, you ll first specify the number of vehicles operated: zero, one, or two or more. Best Case fills in a set operating allowance for you based on your answer and the debtor s location. If the debtor does not operate any cars, he ll get a public transportation allowance. Ownership Allowance: How the Ownership Allowance Works: In bankruptcy, the IRS ownership allowances for cars work the same way that IRS allowances for houses do: there is a set amount that the debtor can claim as an allowance, but it essentially functions as a minimum since the debtor is allowed to deduct from disposable income all secured payments contractually due in the next 60 months, even if the payments exceed the allowance. Any secured payments for cars can be deducted from the debtor's disposable monthly income. However, because "double-dipping" is prohibited, secured payments on vehicles are subtracted from the debtor's transportation allowance. In other words, the debtor will be able reduce his disposable income by all car payments due in the next 5 years. If the total of all secured payments on cars is less than the car ownership allowance, he ll also get to reduce his disposable income by the difference between his car payments and the allowance. If the car payments are greater than the ownership allowance, he ll just get the car payments. Determining the Debtor's Ownership Allowance: The IRS ownership allowances are filled in on line a; click the Secured Claims button to specify car payments if the car is not leased. NOTE: If you have not already done so, you will need to enter any claims secured by the debtor's vehicles on Schedule D before you can deduct them from the debtor's ownership allowance on Form 22. When entering the claim on Schedule D, click on the Form 22 Means Test tab, as described on page 149. Here you can specify that the claim is secured by either the debtor's first or second vehicle, determine the average monthly payment due on the claim over the next 60 months and specify any arrearage amounts to be deducted from the debtor's disposable income. 1. The Means Test Debt Payment Treatment Detail window appears which lists all secured claims (from Sch D) on one tab and all priority claims (from Sch E) on a second tab. 2. Highlight the claim on the first car and click, Change to open the Form 22 Means Test tab for the creditor. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 143
3. Enter the debtor s monthly payment, the number of payments due in the next 60 months, and any escrow and balloon payments contractually due in the next 60 months. Best Case will show the 60 month average payment, which will be transferred to the Debt Pmt tab for Form 22 and deducted from the debtor s disposable income. Tip: If you are unsure of the monthly payment, the Form 22 Means Test tab includes a monthly payment calculator which you can use to determine the average monthly payment over the next 60 months. For more information on accessing and using this calculator see Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims on page 149. 4. If the debtor is behind in payments, enter the cure amount. 5. In the Means Test Treatment selection on the right side, select Secured by Car 1 then click OK. 6. Click Close to return to the Means Test Calculator, where you ll see that the average payment over 60 months has been deducted from the IRS ownership allowance, and Best Case has entered the result of this calculation as the net ownership allowance for car 1. 7. If the debtor is claiming the ownership allowance for two vehicles, follow the steps above to specify the payments for the second car. Leased Vehicles and Cars Owned Outright: If your debtor leases a vehicle or owns it outright, then for that vehicle, he gets the standard ownership allowance no matter what the lease payment and remaining term are. There is nothing for you to enter regarding lease payments, and lease payments are not listed in the Dbt Pmt tab. Overriding the Standard IRS Transportation Allowances: If there are circumstances which require you to adjust the debtor's standard IRS operating expenses for vehicles owned and/ or operated, click in the Override check box located beneath the Operating Allowance amount on the right side of the screen, and you will be able to manually specify the adjusted operating and/ or ownership expenses. Necessary Expenses In the Necessary tab, pictured below, you ll enter expenses the debtor actually incurs which the IRS deems necessary. The first line, taxes, includes all payroll taxes since the income figures entered in the Income tab are gross income, before taking taxes out. This field can also include personal property taxes, such as taxes on cars. It does not include real estate taxes. Best Case provides basic descriptions of each expense category on the screen, but you may want to print a copy of Form 22 to refer to the complete descriptions. 144 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Necessary Tab: Enter Expenses the Debtor Actually Incurs for These Items Additional Expenses Expense categories on the Additional Tab are not recognized IRS expenses, but were written into BAPCPA as legitimate expenses that can be deducted from the debtor s disposable income. Like the expenses in the Necessary Tab, you are required to list the debtor s actual expenses here. Additional Tab: Enter the Debtor s Actual Expenses for Categories on this Tab. Providing Documentation: If the debtor is claiming additional expense deductions for home energy costs, education expenses for dependents or for food and clothing expenses, Form 22 stipulates that you must provide documentation demonstrating that the additional amount claimed is reasonable and necessary. Use the Standard Attachment feature in the Best Case Editor to scan in energy bills, clothing receipts or tuition bills or to create other documentation detailing the reasons for the claims. (For more information on scanning documents to create an attachment see Scanning Documents with BestScan:on page 230) Entering Debt Payments The Code allows you to deduct the following from the debtor s disposable monthly income: All secured payments contractually due in the next 60 months, divided by 60 All past due amounts on claims secured by property necessary to the debtor, divided by 60 All priority claims, divided by 60 The administrative expenses involved in a hypothetical Chapter 13 case, divided by 60 Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 145
In the Debt Pmt tab Best Case will help you do this by allowing you to specify payments and cure amounts on all Secured Claims entered in Schedule D, carrying priority debts from Schedule E to the Means Test, and showing you an estimated 13 plan payment. NOTE: If you have not already done so, you will need to enter any Schedule D and Schedule E claims before you can deduct them from the debtor's income on Form 22. When entering claims on Schedule D, click on the Form 22 Means Test tab, as described on page 149. Here you can specify that the claim is secured by the debtor's house, car or other property, determine the average monthly payment due on the claim over the next 60 months and specify any arrearage amount to be deducted from the debtor's disposable income. If you are entering priority claims, the Schedule E Form 22 Means Test tab, as described on page 152, allows you to override pride priority amounts or exclude them from priority debt calculation altogether. The Debt Pmt Tab Reduces the Debtor s DMI by the Amount of Secured and Priority Debt over the next 60 Months Future payments on secured claims/ Past due payments on secured claims: Any claims you have specified as being secured by the debtor's house and vehicles on the Housing and Living tabs are already included in the total debt payment calculation displayed on your screen. If there are any additional secured claims, click the View/Edit Secured Claims button to open the Means Test Debt Payment Treatment Detail window. For each claim without payment information entered: 1. Highlight the claim and click, Change to open the Form 22 Means Test tab for the creditor. 2. Enter the debtor s monthly payment, the number of payments due in the next 60 months, and any escrow and balloon payments contractually due in the next 60 months. Best Case will show the 60 month average payment, which will be transferred to the Debt Pmt tab for the Means Test Calculator and deducted from the debtor s disposable income. Tip: If you are unsure of the monthly payment, the Form 22 Means Test tab includes a monthly payment calculator which you can use to determine the average monthly payment over the next 60 months. For more information on accessing and using this calculator see Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims on page 149. If the debtor is behind in payments, enter the cure amount. Cure amounts reduce the debtor's DMI if the property is necessary for the debtor's support or the support of the debtor's dependents. If you do not want to deduct the arrearage for a claim, check the box labeled Property NOT necessary for debtor/dependent support. 3. In the Means Test Treatment selection on the right side, if the debt is not secured by the debtor's house or car, select Secured by Other then click OK. 146 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
4. Click Close to return to the Means Test Calculator, where you ll see that the average payment over 60 months has been included in calculation for future payments on secured claims. Priority Claims: The Best Case Means Test Calculator will automatically total all priority amounts of Schedule E Claims and divide by 60, as the code requires. If the Priority Claims line reads 0.00 or seems low, click the View/Edit Priority Claims button to review Schedule E claims, or return to Schedule E to add them. If you want to change the priority amount of a claim included in the Form 22 calculation or exclude it from the calculation altogether, you can do so quickly and easily using the Form 22 Means Test tab. To access this screen, simply highlight the claim in the Means Test Debt Payment Treatment Detail window and click Change. Chapter 13 Plan Payment and Administrative Expenses: To calculate administrative expenses involved in a Chapter 13 plan, you ll enter a projected Monthly 13 Plan Payment and the multiplier for your district, to be published by the U.S. Trustee. (Note: If you are filing in the Western District of North Carolina, check the override button to manually enter your multiplier. If you are unsure of the number, check with your Bankruptcy Administrator to obtain the multiplier.) Summary and Outcome Chapter 7: Determination of 707(b)(2) Presumption If this is a Chapter 7 filing, Best Case shows you the final calculations which are used in determining whether or not there is a presumption of abuse in the Summary tab. The debtor s current monthly income is listed along with total deductions detailed on the right, yielding the disposable monthly income. (If this is a Chapter 13 case, see Chapter 13: Determination of the Debtor s Disposable Income Under 1325(b)(2) on page 148.) Summary Tab for a Chapter 7 Filing Best Case calculates the 60-month disposable income, which is the hypothetical amount that unsecured creditors could receive in a five-year Chapter 13 plan. If the debtors five year disposable income: is less than $6,575, he passes the means test and may file Chapter 7 without presumption of abuse. is greater than or equal to $10,950, there is a presumption of abuse if the debtor files Chapter 7. is between $6,575 - $10,950, the Means Test looks at how much unsecured, non-priority debt there is. If there is enough disposable income to repay at least 25% of the debt, there is a presumption of abuse. NOTE: If the debtor's 60-month disposable income is between $6,000 and $10,000, you will need to exit the Means Test and enter the debtor's non-priority unsecured debts on Schedule F. To save time, you may not want to fill in all claim details: we just need the monthly payment, term, and past due amounts. Best Case totals the debts listed on Schedule F and enters them on the Means Test summary screen as the total non-priority unsecured debt. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 147
Chapter 13: Determination of the Debtor s Disposable Income Under 1325(b)(2) If this is a Chapter 13 Filing, Best Case shows you the final calculations which are used to determine the debtor s disposable monthly income. The debtor s current monthly income is listed, along with the total deductions detailed on the right, yielding the disposable monthly income. Summary Tab for a Chapter 13 Filing You can also use the Summary tab to make two additional deductions to the debtor s income: Support Income for Child Included in Line 7: Enter the monthly average of any child support payments, foster care payments, or disability payments for a dependent child, included in Line 7, that you received in accordance with applicable nonbankruptcy law, to the extent reasonably necessary to be expended for such child. (Note: For a quick reference, the Summary tab includes the amounts you entered for on line 7 for both the debtor and, if applicable, the debtor's spouse.) Qualified Retirement Deductions: Enter the monthly average of : a. All contributions or wage deductions made to qualified retirement plans, as specified in 541(b)(7) b. All repayments of loans from retirement plans, as specified in 362(b)(19). Best Case automatically subtracts any amounts you enter on this screen from the debtor's current monthly income, and displays the new amount as the debtors Monthly Disposable Income on line 58. Special Circumstances If the debtor has any additional expenses required for the health and welfare of himself or his family that are not already listed on the form, and you contend that that they should be an additional deduction from the debtor's CMI, you can enter them in the Special tab. 148 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Special Circumstances: Enter any additional expenses for the debtor here The claims will be listed in the Additional Expense Claims section on Form 22, but per instructions on the form, expenses arising from special circumstances do not affect the debtor s DMI as reported on the form, and they don t affect which box is checked at the beginning of the form (Presumption arises or Presumption Does Not Arise). However, they do give the trustee additional information about your debtor s situation that will be taken into consideration. Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims Form 22 allows the debtor to deduct the average of payments due to secured creditors over the next 60 months. In addition, if a secured claim is in default, and the property securing the claim is necessary for the support of the debtor or the debtor's dependents, the debtor may deduct 1/60th of the cure amount. You can use the Means Test tab for Schedule D creditors to compute the 60-month average payment on a secured claim as well as to include or exclude any arrearages. You can also use the Means Test tab to designate a claim as secured by the debtor's house or vehicles, which Best Case uses to calculate the debtor's housing and utilities and transportation allowances. NOTE: The extra information collected in the Form 22 Means Test tab is only required if the debtor's income is above the state median. If the debtor's income falls below the state median, you can skip this tab. Accessing this Screen To access the Form 22 Means Test screen for a Schedule D claim: If you are entering information on Schedule D: 1. Highlight your claim in the Schedule D summary list window and click Change. 2. Click the Form 22 Means Test tab. If you are working in the Means Test Calculator: 1. Open Form 22 to the Housing tab. 2. Click the Secured Claims button located just below the data fields for mortgage and rent expenses. 3. In the Means Test Debt Treatment window that opens, highlight the secured creditor you want to modify and click Change. 4. The Form 22 Means Test tab for the creditor opens. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 149
NOTE: You can also access the Form 22 Means Test tab from the Debt Pmt tab of Form 22. To do so, simply click on the View/Edit Secured Claims button to the right of the Monthly 1/60th total for secured claims, and then follow steps two through four as outlined above. The Form 22 Means Test Tab Helps You Calculate Future Payments on Secured Claims Check the Exclude checkbox to omit a claim from the Means Test. Specify a Means Test Treatment to link claims to the debtor s Home or Car and subtract them from the IRS Allowances. The Calc Pmt button opens the Means Test Payment Calculator which helps you calculate future payments on claims. Entering Data into the Form 22 Means Test Tab The Form 22 Means Test tab collects information about cure amounts, calculates average monthly payment over the next 60 months and gathers other important means test data not entered in other Schedule D screens. It is available for all individual or joint Chapter 7 and 13 Filings. Means Test Treatment: If you do not want the claim to be included with the secured payments on Form 22, simply click in the Exclude claim from Means Test check box in the top right corner of the screen. If you are including the secured claim, you must specify a Means Test Treatment from the list on the screen. o o o o Secured by Home: Select this option for any debts secured by the debtor's home. (Note: If you select this option, Best Case automatically subtracts the amount you enter for the 60 month average payment for the claim, as described below, from the debtor's IRS mortgage/rental expense allowance when calculating the debtor's Net mortgage/rental expense.) Secured by Car 1: Select this option for any debts secured by the first vehicle for which the debtor intends to take the IRS transportation/lease expense allowance. (Note: If you select this option, Best Case automatically subtracts the amount you enter for the 60 month average payment for the claim, as described below, from the debtor's IRS transportation/lease expense allowance when calculating the debtor's Net transportation/lease expense for vehicle 1.) Secured by Car 2: Select this option for any debts secured by the second vehicle for which the debtor intends to take the IRS transportation/lease expense allowance. (Note: If you select this option, Best Case automatically subtracts the amount you enter for the 60 month average payment for the claim, as described below, from the debtor's IRS transportation/lease expense allowance when calculating the debtor's Net transportation/lease expense for vehicle 2.) Secured by Other: Select this option if the claim is secured by any property other than the debtor's house or his first or second vehicles. Future Payments Due Next 60 Months: There are two ways to determine the 60 Month Average payment for a claim. If you know the debtor's regularly monthly payment and remaining term on the contract, you can enter the information right on this screen. o For the Monthly Payment, enter the debtor's regular monthly mortgage payment, (PMI payment). 150 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
o o o In the Escrow field, enter in the debtor's regular monthly escrow payments plus any other contractually due amount that you want to include in the means test payment. For the Number of Months, enter in the total number of months remaining on the contract. Best Case automatically calculates the total amount due on the claim over the next 60 months as well as the average monthly payment on that amount and displays them in the Total Future Due and 60 Month Average fields. Means Test Payment Calculator: If you do not know the regular monthly payment, or if you want to subtract an arrearage amount or include interest in the regular monthly payment, you can use the Means Test Payment Calculator (Calculator) to determine the 60 Month Average Payment. To use the Means Test Payment Calculator: The Means Test Payment Calculator 1. Click the Calc Pmt button to the right of the Monthly Payment field. 2. The Calculator opens with the Claim Amount from the Creditor Information Screen filled in as the Loan Balance. 3. If the amount in the Loan Balance field includes an arrearage amount, enter it into the Less: Cure Amount field. Best Case automatically subtracts the cure amount from the loan balance and enters the new total into the Future Balance Due field, which will be used to determine the average payment. 4. Enter in the remaining term on the claim, and the interest rate if applicable. Best Case uses this information to calculate an average monthly payment, and displays it in the Monthly Payment field. 5. Click OK to accept the monthly payment, and Best Case will automatically take the information from the Calculator and enter it into the appropriate fields in the Form 22 Means Test tab. Balloon Payments: Enter the total of any balloon payment contractually due over the next 60 months. Best Case automatically calculates the 60 month average of the balloon payment and adds it to the 60 month average payment for the claim. The new total is displayed in the 60 Month Average field, and entered as the payment amount on 60-month Average Payment for the claim on Form 22. Past Due Payments: If you used the Means Test Payment Calculator to compute the 60 month average payment, when you click OK, the cure amount you entered into the Calculator automatically gets entered into the Cure Amount field. Best Case uses this number to determine the 1/60th Cure Amount, displays it on the screen and enters it as 1/60th of the Cure Amount for the claim on Form 22. If you did not enter a cure amount in the Means Test Payment Calculator, or you want to use a different amount to compute the 60 month average for the cure amount, you can manually enter a new value. Best Case then determines an average monthly payment for the amount over the next 60 months, displays it on the screen in the 1/60 th of Cure Amount field and includes it in the arrearage calculation on Form 22. Check the box labeled Property NOT necessary for debtor/dependent support to exclude the arrearage portion from the Past due payments on secured claims section on Form 22. Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 151
Specifying a Means Test Treatment for Priority Claims The Form 22 Means Test tab is available for all individual or joint Chapter 7 and 13 Filings. Use this tab if you want the amount of a priority claim listed on Form 22 to be different than the amount you list on Schedule E. You can also use this tab to completely exclude a priority claim from the total of priority claims that gets calculated on Form 22. Note: The extra information collected in the Form 22 Means Test tab is only required if the debtor's income is above the state median. If the debtor's income falls below the state median, you can skip this tab. Accessing this Screen To access the Form 22 Means Test screen for a Schedule E claim: If you are entering information on Schedule E: 1. Highlight your claim in the Schedule E summary list window and click Change. 2. Click the Form 22 Means Test tab. If you are completing Form 22: 1. Open Form 22 to the Debt Pmt tab. 2. Click on the View/Edit Priority Claims button to the right of the Monthly 1/60th total for priority claims. 3. In the Means Test Debt Treatment window that opens, highlight the priority creditor you want to modify and click Change. 4. The Form 22 Means Test tab for the creditor opens. The Form 22 Means Test Tab Lets You Override Priority Claim Amounts in the Means Test Calculator Editing Information for Priority Claims: Excluding a Claim from Form 22: If you do not want the claim to be included with the priority claims total on Form 22, simply click in the Exclude claim from Means Test check box in the top right corner of the screen. Payments on Priority Claims: When you first open the Form 22 Means Test tab for a priority claim, the priority amount of the claim from the Schedule E Creditor Information tab appears as the Priority Claim, and the 1/60th Priority Claim Amount is equal to 1/60th of the original priority claim. To change these numbers: 1. Check the Override Amount box to activate the Priority Claim field. 2. Enter the new priority amount, and press [Tab] 152 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
3. Best Case re-calculates the amount in the 1/60th Priority Claim Amount and automatically includes this new amount in the calculation of priority claims on Form 22. Schedule E Amounts: This section is included to provide a quick reference when you want to know the original claim and priority amounts from the Creditor Information screen for this creditor. No data is entered or changed here. Frequently Asked Questions about the Means Test and the Best Case Means Test Calculator 1. Q: What is the Chapter 7 Means Test? A: In a Chapter 7 Case, Form 22A (Statement of Currently Monthly Income and Means Test Calculation) is used to determine whether a presumption of abuse exists. The Means Test actually consists of two different tests, a Median Test and, if the debtor's income is high enough, a Means Test. The Median Test The Median Test compares the debtor s Current Monthly Income (an average of the last six months, excluding Social Security benefits), with the state median for the debtor s household size. If the debtor s income is lower than the median, the full Means Test does not apply, and there is no presumption of abuse. The Means Test If the debtor s income is higher than the median, the debtor must complete the full Means Test to determine Disposable Monthly Income (DMI), which is what is left of the debtor s income after the IRS allowances for living expenses, housing and utilities, transportation, and necessary expenses have been subtracted. In addition, the debtor's monthly payments to secured creditors, amounts owed on priority claims (e.g. Taxes, Child Support, Alimony) and certain arrearages are subtracted from the debtor s income. The result of these subtractions yields the debtor's Disposable Monthly Income (DMI). The DMI is then multiplied by 60 to determine the 60 Disposable Monthly Income (60DMI). If the 60DMI is less than $6,000 ($100 a month of Disposable income), then no presumption of abuse is made. If the 60DMI is $10,000 or more ($166.66 per month), then a presumption of abuse is made. If the 60DMI is between $6,000 and $10,000, then the 60DMI is compared to the debtor s non-priority unsecured debt (e.g. credit card or medical bills). If the 60DMI is greater than or equal to 25% of the debtor's non-priority unsecured debt, then a presumption of abuse arises. If the 60DMI is less than 25% of the debtor's non-priority unsecured debt, then there is no presumption of abuse. 2. Q: What is the Chapter 13 Means Test? A: In a Chapter 13 Case, Form 22C is used to determine the debtor's applicable commitment period for a Chapter 13 Plan and, if the debtor's income is high enough, then it is also used to compute a Disposable Monthly Income (DMI). The DMI is intended to double as a monthly payment to unsecured creditors. Like Form 22A, the debtor's Current Monthly Income is first compared to the state median for the debtor's household size. NOTE: The intent of Form 22C is different than that of Form 22a. Form 22C does not look for signs of abuse, nor does being above or below the median preclude anyone from filing a Chapter 13 Plan. It merely sets forth a formula for determining a re-payment schedule and payment to unsecured creditors for debtor's who are above the median income. If the debtor is above the median, his applicable commitment period is automatically 60 months, and he must complete the entire form to determine a monthly payment to unsecured creditors based on his Monthly Disposable Income. This payment amount is calculated similarly to the 60-month Disposable income for a Chapter 7 Means Test. The major difference is that in addition to subtracting IRS allowances, necessary expenses, payments to Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 153
secured claims, amounts owed on priority claims and certain arrearages, the debtor is also allowed to subtract from his income Child Support payments that he receives or 401(k) or other retirement contributions that he makes. If the debtor is below the Median, the applicable commitment period is 36 months, and Form 22C does not instruct the debtor to continue with the form to calculate the disposable monthly income/payment to unsecured creditors. This does not mean that the debtor cannot file a Chapter 13 Plan. However, Form 22C does not give any further instructions as to how the debtor should compute his plan payments. 3. Q: How do I figure out the debtor s average monthly income that I need to enter on the form? A: The CMI Calculator allows you to calculate the average monthly income for any income source using one of three methods. In addition, because you tell the CMI Calculator what line you want to include the income on, if the debtor has more than one source of income for any given type, for example a debtor may have two jobs, the CMI Calculator will also figure out the combined average monthly income for these sources and fill them into the proper line on the form. You can access the CMI Calculator by clicking the Enter CMI Details button in the Income tab of the Means Test Calculator. 4. Q: If my debtor is filing a Chapter 13 and is below the median income, what do I do if the trustee requires all of Form 22C to be completed? A: The instructions for Form 22C indicate that if the debtor s income is below the median, there is no need for him to continue beyond Part IIII of the form, so for debtors below the income, the Means Test Calculator automatically stops at the Median tab. However in some instances you may still need to complete all of Form 22C. If you have a debtor who is below the median income level but you need to complete the whole form, simply click the "Always Compute DMI" checkbox on the Median Income tab. 5. Q: Why do I have to choose an income amount on the Living tab? A: Best Case Bankruptcy offers different income options because the Code does not specify what income level should be used to look up IRS expenses, and you need the flexibility to experiment with different income levels. A higher income level allows for higher expense deductions, which may help the debtor stay under the abuse threshold. The following are the three income levels for a Chapter 7 filing: CMI 707(b)(7) Median Test is the debtor's current monthly income from line 12. It is the income used for comparison in the Median Test. CMI 707(b)(2) Means Test is the debtor's current monthly income from line 18. If the debtor has taken the Marital Adjustment, then this is his income after the adjustment. Other Income allows the user to fill in any income they want. For example a user might want to add SSA payments to one of the options above or use the Net Income from a Schedule I - J calculation. 6. Q: When I am entering a mortgage payment, how do I include property taxes and insurance? A: Form 22 specifically states that for secured claims: "The Average Monthly Payment is the total of all amounts contractually due to each Secured Creditor in the 60 months following the filing of the bankruptcy case, divided by 60. Mortgage debts should include payments of taxes and insurance required by the mortgage." The Form 22 Means Test tab for Schedule D creditors includes a separate field for Escrow Amounts. This field can be used for any contractually required amount due on a claim, but is especially handy for entering insurance and tax payments. 7. Q: What if I don t know how many months are left on a claim? 154 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
A: If there are more than five years left on the claim then enter 60 for the number of months remaining on the claim. The Means Test is looking for the 1/60th of the total amount due on the claim over the next five years, so if there are five or more years left on the claim the average monthly payment will be the same as the current regular payment the user enters in the Form 22 Means Test tab. The number of months left on the payment does not print anywhere on the form, so the form will print correctly as well. If the debtor has less than five years left on the claim, then you need to know the number of months left to correctly figure out the average payment over the next 60 months. 8. Q: How do I list a claim on the Means Test if I don't want to include it on the Petition? A: The best way to do this is to create a dummy creditor for the claim. Enter the claim on Schedule D (or E if it is a priority claim) and enter the Market Value and the Claim amount. Then check the "Do not print/total on Sch D (or E)" and the "Exclude from Mailing Matrix" checkboxes in the top right-hand corner of the Creditor Info screen. Next, click on the Form 22 Means Test tab and specify their means test treatment for the claim. 9. Q: What do I enter for the projected 13 plan payment on the Debt pmt tab? A: Based on the numbers you have entered, the Means Test Calculator suggests a payment that equals the debtor's monthly disposable income from line 50 with the payment amount for secured and priority debts (line 46) added to it. If you do not want to use this amount, you can take the net income that results when you subtract the monthly expenses from Schedule J from the Monthly Gross Income on Schedule I. Section 1325(b) of the Code also lays out a method for computing the debtor s monthly payment. NOTE: The Projected 13 Plan Payment suggested by the Means Test Calculator includes all secured debts subtracted from the debtor's income on Form 22. This means that if you entered a mortgage claim for the debtor for the housing allowance, it is being included in the projected plan payment. In this case the higher payment works to the debtor's advantage because it leads to a higher deduction. However, if you are in a district where mortgage claims normally get paid outside the plan you may want to take the mortgage payment out of the Projected 13 Plan Payment. 10. Q: Why is the unsecured debt that Best Case entered on the Summary tab so high? A: Is there a mortgage claim or a car claim included in the Means Test? If there is, chances are good that you might have entered in the claim amount but never put in a market value for the claim, or you never linked the claim to a property on Schedule A or Schedule B. If this is the case, then the entire claim amount will automatically be listed as unsecured. To correct this, go back into the Creditor Information screen and enter a market value. 11. Q: My Debtor s Current Monthly Income is above the median, but his Disposable Monthly Income is negative. What Happened? A: There are many reasons a debtor may have a negative DMI. For starters, several of the expenses deducted from the debtor's income on the Means Test are based on pre-determined IRS allowances (for example housing and transportation allowances) and may not be at all reflective of the debtor's actual expenses. Another possibility is that the debtor may have income that is not included in the calculation of the Current Monthly Income, (for example if he/she is on Social Security for disability). In real life, the debtor can still spend this money to cover expenses. It just doesn't count as income on the Means Test. Also, When it comes to income, it is important to remember that the debtor's Current Monthly Income is the debtor's Average Monthly Income over the six months prior to the filing of the petition, so if the debtor was unemployed for three months, or if they recently got a raise or a new job, the CMI could be considerably lower than what they are actually earning now. Finally, remember that when the debt payment section of the Means Test is computed, it takes into account all of the debtor's current obligations to secured creditors, arrearages, and any amounts owed to priority creditors. It assumes that the debtor is going to make the full payments on all of them. If the debtor is far enough in arrears to one of his Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 155
creditors or if he owes a large amount of back taxes, it is entirely possible that the regular payment for the claim could be more than the money he has left over after he makes all of his other payments. 12. Q: What do I do if the debtor owns his vehicle outright, and the Trustee says there he is not entitled to the full Ownership Allowance? A: The Means Test Calculator now includes an Override Checkbox for the Ownership/Transportation Allowance in the Car tab. Use this checkbox if there are circumstances which require you to adjust the debtor's standard IRS operating expenses for vehicles owned or operated. The checkbox is located underneath the amount for the operating allowance in the right-hand side of the screen. Checking this box allows the user to override both the operation and ownership allowance amounts. The Housing and Living tabs of the Means Test Calculator also include override checkboxes in case you need to adjust those allowances as well. 13. Q. Can Best Case help me to create a detailed income statement to file with Form 22? A: If you use the CMI Calculator to determine the debtor s average monthly income, Best Case automatically generates an attachment to Form 22 which includes all of the income information you entered for both the debtor and the debtor s spouse. This print out will include the source for all of the debtor s income, and any other comments or remarks about the income that you feel are pertinent. You can also have details for Social Security benefits and other income that is usually excluded from the means test appear on the Form 22 attachment. 156 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator In This Chapter Introduction to the Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator... 158 Quick Overview... 158 What Every Lawyer Should Know About Chapter 13 Plans... 159 Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule D Claims... 159 Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule E Claims... 162 Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule F Claims... 163 Reference Table of Treatment Classes... 164 Working Out a Repayment Schedule... 166 Sections of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator... 167 Working Out a Plan: The Summary Tab... 167 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator: Claims Tab... 171 Entering Attorney s Fees/Filing Fees... 171 Editing Claims from the Claim Treatment Tab... 172 Payout Tab... 172 Liquidation Analysis... 173 Split Claim Tab... 174 Wage Deduction Tab... 175 Errors! Tab... 176 Other Tab... 177 Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options... 177 Changing the Percentage Paid to the Trustee... 183 Don t Accrue Interest on Claims While Unpaid... 183 Common Questions... 179 Troubleshooting Problems... 180 Other Problems... 181 Chapter 4 Means Test Calculator 157
Chapter 13 Plan Calculator Introduction to the Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator Quick Overview (Assigning treatment classes, working out a plan, printing, and editing) Best Case Bankruptcy offers a Chapter 13 Plan Calculator that is more flexible and powerful than ever, allowing you to determine the best possible plan for your client. Assigning Treatment Classes: In entry screens for each creditor schedule, you ll see a 13 Plan Treatment tab. In that tab, the most common treatment class is listed for each creditor based on the type of creditor secured, priority, or unsecured nonpriority. The treatment class determines when and how much that creditor will be paid in the Chapter 13 Plan. As you enter claims, review the treatment for each creditor, paying special attention to Schedule D creditors where there is the most variation. For Schedule D claims, the treatment class you select tells the calculator if the debt should be paid in full through the plan, is a long term debt that will be paid outside the plan, will be treated as unsecured because the lien is being avoided, or if the debtor will surrender the property instead of paying the secured amount. If the amount of the claim is higher than the value of the property securing it, Best Case automatically splits the claim into an unsecured and secured portion and treats each portion accordingly. Because there are so many possibilities for secured creditors, there are several treatment classes available. For Schedule E claims, the calculator automatically treats priority amounts as claims that have to be paid in full, and nonpriority amounts (where the claim exceeds the amount entitled to priority) just like Schedule F claims. Most Schedule F claims will be paid on a pro rata basis, with the percentage determined by the amount of money going into the plan. A special class exists for Schedule F claims that need to be paid in full, such as nondischargeable student loans and claims where there is a codebtor. If you click the Help button while in the 13 Plan Treatment tab, you ll find information that will help you select the appropriate plan class if you know how you want the creditor paid. The Help system also contains information about custom plan classes that we have included for certain local Chapter 13 Plan formats. Working Out a Plan: After assigning a treatment class to each creditor, you ll go into the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator from the Forms and Schedules Menu to work out a plan. The calculator can determine the length of plan, the monthly plan payment, or the percentage to pay unsecured creditors. Printing the Plan: You will print the actual Chapter 13 Plan like any other form: mark it to print in the Forms and Schedules Menu then click the Print button in the toolbar. For your information, or if you want to give additional information about the proposed plan to the trustee, you can also print a more detailed report from each tab in the Chapter 13 Plan calculator. Printing Options There are several Form Preferences for the Chapter 13 Plan that determine language that prints on every plan. See Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options on page 177. Customizing the Plan for Your Client Because each Chapter 13 case is different, Best Case Bankruptcy gives you the ability to edit the Chapter 13 Plan for each client through the Best Case Editor feature. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, simply right-click on the Chapter 13 Plan and choose Edit Form. For formatting options in the Editor and to create a PDF of an edited plan, see The Best Case Editor on page 202. Appendix F contains a Chapter 13 Tutorial that walks you through the assignment of treatment classes for a sample case. The tutorial starts on page 343. 158 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
What Every Lawyer Should Know About Chapter 13 Plans Local Practices and Procedures: Although the plan calculator gives you a great deal of flexibility, practices and procedures vary greatly by district for Chapter 13 cases. Among the variables are the percentage paid to the trustee, how certain types of creditors are treated, the order in which creditors are paid, and the minimum amount that the debtor can pay unsecured nonpriority creditors. The attorney for the case is responsible for ensuring that all local rules have been complied with. Plan Format: The format of the printed plan also varies, as the Chapter 13 Plan is not an Official Form. Before filing a Chapter 13 Plan printed by Best Case Bankruptcy, please check with your trustee to see if there is a custom plan format in your district. The Best Case Standard Chapter 13 Plan format is acceptable in most, but not all, districts. Certain custom local versions are also available for additional fees. Check www.bestcase.com/localforms.htm for the latest information regarding availability of local plans, as new plans are being added frequently. Estimated Plan: Each trustee has his or her own way of distributing payments and determining the order in which creditors are paid. Furthermore, when a plan takes effect, a claim amount or other important factors may have changed. Because of these factors, your trustee may arrive at a different plan payout or percentage for unsecured creditors. Chapter 13 Plans are always said to be estimated plans, based on the information known at the time the plan was prepared. For Attorneys New to Chapter 13 Work: If you are new to Chapter 13 cases, you should take a CLE course and consult other bankruptcy attorneys in your area and your local trustee to determine what the general rules are in your district. The Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator is a tool to help you arrive at a workable plan, performing calculations and showing you how the funds will be distributed throughout the course of the plan. It is not a substitute for legal knowledge, nor does it guarantee that any plan produced will be acceptable to the court. It is the responsibility of the attorney representing the debtor to ensure that local practices, procedures, and laws are followed. Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule D Claims Accessing this screen To access the 13 Plan Treatment tab for a Schedule D claim you can either: go into Schedule D from the Forms and Schedule Menu, highlight your claim, click Change, then click the 13 Plan Treatment tab OR, from the chapter 13 Plan Calculator, click the Claims tab, highlight the claim, click the Edit Claim button, then click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. The Chapter 13 Plan Treatment Tab in Schedule D Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 159
What do the different sections of this screen refer to? A secured claim can potentially be divided into three portions which are all treated differently by the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator: The secured portion, the arrearage portion (which can be separated from the secured portion so that it is listed on the plan and paid earlier), and an unsecured portion, if there is one. The sum of all three portions will be the total amount of the debt. The 13 Plan Treatment Tab lets you specify the treatment of each portion separately, and lists a claim summary in the bottom left for your reference. Each section of this screen is described below. Claim Summary This section gives you a summary of Schedule D information for this claim as described below. Value of Security: The market value of the collateral for this claim. Less: Senior Liens: The secured portions of all senior liens against this item of property. Liens are ranked in Best Case Bankruptcy based on entry order, and the lien ranking can be changed through Schedule A or B as described in Changing Rank Order for Liens on page 56. Equity Available: This is the value of the property minus the secured portions of all senior liens against it. (The debtor s equity before THIS lien.) Amount of Claim: This is the total amount of the claim as entered on the Creditor Information tab. It includes the secured, unsecured and arrearage portions. Unsecured Portion: This is the unsecured portion of the claim as it was input on the Creditor Information tab. Return to the Creditor Information tab to edit this amount. Secured Portion (without Arrears) This section refers to the treatment of the secured portion of the claim. If there is an arrearage which you would like listed on the plan, that will be treated and listed separately in the right half of the screen as described below. Classification of Secured Portion: You will assign a treatment class to each secured creditor by choosing from the drop-down list. For the standard Best Case Chapter 13 Plan, your choices are as follows: Secured, Paid Pro-rata: The most common choice for secured claims that will be paid in full by the end of the plan, this class pays creditors on a pro rata basis. Payments will go through the trustee, with the monthly amount determined by the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator and the Trustee. Secured, Paid Pro-rata, 506 N/A: If you have a claim that is secured by a vehicle for which the debt was incurred within 910 days of filing the bankruptcy petition, or, any claims secured by any other personal property for which the debt was incurred within 1 year of filing, you can use this plan class to indicate that the claim is not subject to valuation under 506. Payments will go through the trustee, with the monthly amount determined by the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator and the Trustee. (Note: if you classify a claim as Secured, paid prorata, 506 N/A, and it includes an unsecured portion, you can check the "Pay Full Claim as Secured" checkbox in the 13 Plan Treatment tab for the creditor if you want the Chapter 13 Calculator to include the unsecured portion as part of the secured claim when calculating plan payments.) Secured, Fixed Payment: An alternative class for claims that are to be paid in full by the end of the plan, this class lets you specify the monthly payment to this creditor. Secured, Fixed Payment, 506 N/A: If you have a claim that is secured by a vehicle for which the debt was incurred within 910 days of filing the bankruptcy petition, or, any claims secured by any other personal property for which the debt was incurred within 1 year of filing, you can use this plan class to indicate that the claim is not subject to valuation under 506. Payments will go through the trustee, however you specify the monthly Payment for this creditor. (Note: if you classify a claim as Secured, fixed payment, 506 N/A, and it includes an unsecured portion, you can check the "Pay Full Claim as Secured" checkbox in the 13 Plan Treatment tab for the creditor if you want the Chapter 13 Calculator to include the unsecured portion as part of the secured claim when calculating plan payments.) 160 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Secured, Long Term, Outside Plan: This class is often used for mortgages, and allows the debtor to continue making regular payments directly to the creditor thus avoiding the trustee s fee on mortgage payments. Claims of this class extend beyond the length of the plan, that is, the debt will not be paid in full by the end of the plan. Note that you can have the arrearage paid through the plan while the mortgage is paid outside the plan by using this class in the Secured Portion and specifying an arrearage amount and class in the Arrearage Portion on the right side of the screen. Secured, Long Term, In Plan: Use this class for claims that will extend beyond the length of the plan but that need to be paid through the plan. For example, if your trustee does not allow mortgage payments to be made outside the plan, or if the debtor has a car loan which extends beyond the length of the plan and terms of the loan are not being modified, you would use this class. Secured, Avoid Lien: You would use this class if the full value of the property securing the lien is exempt and the debtor is avoiding the lien. This claim will then be treated as an unsecured, general nonpriority creditor. Secured, Surrender Property: Use this class if the debtor will surrender property in lieu of paying the secured portion of the debt. Table of Treatment Classes: A table of all available treatment classes appears on page 164, but this section lists the most common ones you would use for a secured claim. Secured Amount: This refers to the secured portion of the claim only that is, the full claim with the unsecured amount entered in the Creditor Information tab subtracted. If there is an arrearage, you ll enter the arrearage amount on the right-hand side of the screen and the arrearage amount will be deducted from the secured amount as described in the Arrearage section below. Interest Rate: This field appears for certain treatment types and asks for the interest rate that the debtor will pay on the debt. Currently, you can only enter an interest rate up to the hundredths, and not the thousandths of a percentage. (E.g. 6.78 instead of 6.775.) Term: For Secured, Fixed Payment creditors, this is the number of months that the debtor will take to pay off this claim in full. Payment: For Secured, Fixed Payment, this is the monthly payment amount being applied to the secured portion of the claim. Leave the check mark in the Auto box to have this calculated automatically and updated when you change the term, or calculate this amount by clicking the PMT button. Arrearage Portion Classification of Arrearage Portion: Typically, this would be Arrearage, Paid Prorata, which pays the arrearage on a pro rata basis in full early in the plan. If you want to specify a fixed monthly payment for the arrearage, select Arrearage, Fixed Payment instead. Note that you can pay the arrearage through the plan and the rest of the claim outside the plan by assigning Secured, Long Term, Outside Plan to the Secured Portion and Arrearage, Paid Prorata to the Arrearage Portion. Arrearage Amount: If the debtor is not behind in payments, leave this 0.00. Otherwise, enter the arrearage amount. Notice that when you input the arrearage, this amount is automatically deducted from the Secured Portion of the screen, and a note appears in the secured section. Best Case does this so that the claim is not overpaid. The arrearage plus secured portion plus unsecured portions of the claim should not exceed the total value of the claim. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 161
When an arrearage amount has been entered in the right half of the screen, this amount is deducted form the Secured Portion Arr Interest Rate: The interest rate to be paid on the arrearage amount. Term: For the Arrearage, Fixed Payment class, this is the number of months that the debtor will take to pay off the arrearage portion. The higher this number is, the lower the monthly payment amount will be. Payment: For the Arrearage, Fixed Payment class, this is the monthly payment amount that the debtor will pay. Leave the check mark in the Auto box to have this calculated automatically and updated when you change the term, or calculate the monthly payment by entering a term then clicking the PMT button. Pre-Confirmation Adequate Protection If the debtor elects to make pre-confirmation adequate protection payments to the creditor through the plan you can enter the payment amount in the Pre-Con Adequate Protection Payment field. Unsecured Portion Classification of Unsecured Portion: The unsecured portion of a secured claim is generally treated like Schedule F claims, and is assigned the class Unsecured, General Nonpriority. The unsecured amount is listed above the classification and is taken from the Unsecured Amount entered in the Creditor Information tab. Use the Pay full claim as secured checkbox to include the unsecured portion of the claim with the secured payments if the claim is secured by any motor vehicle acquired for the personal use of the debtor(s) within 910 days preceding the filing date of the Petition or in other personal property acquired within one year preceding the filing date of the Petition. Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule E Claims Accessing this Screen To access the 13 Plan Treatment tab for a Schedule E claim you can either: go into Schedule E from the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight your claim, click Change, then click the 13 Plan Treatment tab OR, from the chapter 13 Plan Calculator, click the Claims tab, highlight the claim, click the Edit Claim button, then click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 162 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The 13 Plan Treatment Tab in Schedule E Choosing the Treatment Class In the bottom left corner of the screen, you ll see a summary of this claim: the full Amount of Claim, the Priority Amount, and the Nonpriority Portion. If the full amount of the claim exceeds the amount which is entitled to priority, you will have a nonpriority portion. Priority Portion Classification of Priority Claim: On the left half of the screen, you ll see a section labeled Priority Portion. Most priority claims will be classified as Unsecured Priority, which is the default treatment class for claims on Schedule E. These claims will be paid in full on a pro rata basis. When you use this treatment class, an interest rate field will appear which allows you to specify the interest rate that applies to this claim, if any. If there is no interest to be paid, leave the 0.00 in this field. If the claim represents a domestic support obligation, you may want to use one of the Domestic Support Obligation classes. When you classify a claim as a Domestic Support Obligation or a Domestic Support Obligation Government, you to be given the option of assigning a separate treatment information for any arrearage the debtor owes on the claim. Priority Claim: This is the Priority Amount entered in the Creditor Information tab. For this value, Best Case Bankruptcy defaults to the lesser of the claim value or the amount entitled to priority for this type as listed on the first page of Schedule E. Return to the Creditor Information tab if you need to edit this amount. Interest Rate: Enter the interest rate to be paid, if any. Non-priority portion If there is a non-priority portion of this claim, (if the full amount of the claim exceeds the amount which is entitled to priority), a section will appear in the bottom right corner labeled Nonpriority portion: $<dollar amount>. The nonpriority portion of a priority claim is generally treated as a general, unsecured nonpriority claim. Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule F Claims Accessing this screen To access the 13 Plan tab for a Schedule F claim you can either: go into Schedule F, highlight your claim, click Change, then click the 13 Plan Treatment tab OR, from the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator, click the Claims tab, highlight the claim, click the Edit Claim button, then click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. Choosing the Treatment Class Standard Treatment: In this tab, you ll specify how this claim is to be treated in the Chapter 13 Plan by assigning it a treatment class. Most claims on this schedule will be classified as Unsecured, General Nonpriority. These claims Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 163
will be paid on a pro rata basis with other creditors of the same class, and will receive a portion of the amount due based on how much the debtor can pay. The 13 Plan Treatment Tab in Schedule F Paying a Schedule F Claim in Full: Sometimes, you will want or need to pay a Schedule F claim in full when other creditors are receiving only a portion of the amount owed. You might do this if there is a codebtor or if the debt is nondischargeable. Use the class Unsecured, special class, paid 100% to pay the creditor in full. Reference Table of Treatment Classes As you enter creditors into Schedules D, E and F in Chapter 13 cases, you ll notice a 13 Plan Treatment tab at the top of the creditor entry window for each creditor. In the 13 Plan Treatment tab, you ll specify how you want this creditor treated under the 13 Plan by assigning a treatment class to the creditor. Custom Plan Classes for Custom Plans: If you are in a district that has a custom Chapter 13 Plan that we have provided, your treatment classes may vary. Check with the documentation that we provided specific to your district or search your on-line help file for Custom Chapter 13 Plans. If you are in a district that uses the Best Case Standard Plan or a similar plan, the treatment classes that you will use are: * indicates a new treatment class added for BAPCPA 2005 Name of Plan Class How Much Paid and How Through Plan or Direct SPR - Secured, paid pro rata SP5 - Secured, paid prorata, 506 N/A* In full on pro rata basis, with the trustee and calculator determining payments each month to each creditor of this class. In full on pro rata basis, with the trustee and calculator determining payments each month to each creditor of this class. Through Plan. Through Plan Typically Used For Most secured claims Secured claims that do not meet requirements for 506 Valuation Notes Use this instead of Secured, Fixed Payment to give the Calculator more flexibility Use this class for claims that are secured by a vehicle for which the debt was incurred within 910 days of filing the bankruptcy petition, or, any claims secured by any other personal property for which the debt was incurred within 1 year of filing. SFP Secured, Fixed Payment In full on a fixed payment basis; you will specify the monthly payment to the creditor Through plan. Certain secured claims where you want or need to specify monthly payments Gives the calculator less flexibility to vary payments 164 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Name of Plan Class SF5 - Secured, Fixed Payment, 506 N/A* SLTO - Secured, long-term, outside plan SLTP Secured, Long Term, In Plan SAL - Secured, Avoid Lien SSR Secured, Surrender Property UPR Unsecured, Priority DSO - Domestic Support Obligation 507(a)(1)( A)* DSG - Domestic Support Government 507(a)(1)( B)* UGEN Unsecured, General Nonpriority How Much Paid and How In full on a fixed payment basis; you will specify the monthly payment to the creditor You will specify a fixed monthly payment. Generally used for claims that extend beyond the length of the plan that is, the debtor will continue making payments to this creditor after the plan has ended You will specify a fixed monthly payment which will go through the trustee, with payments to this creditor extending beyond the length of the plan as with the SLTO class. The secured portion of the debt will be paid a portion of the amount owed on a pro rata basis with unsecured, nonpriority debts. Secured portion of the debt is not paid, but is satisfied by the surrender of property. Paid in full on a pro rata basis. These claims are paid directly to the creditor by the debtor. They are not included in plan payment calculations. These claims are paid directly to the creditor by the debtor. They are not included in plan payment calculations. Paid a portion of the amount owed on a pro rata basis with other claims of this class, with the amount determined by what the debtor can afford. Through Plan or Direct Through Plan Payments will be made directly to the creditor. Through plan. Through plan. Not paid. Through plan. Outside the Plan Outside the Plan Through plan. Typically Used For Secured claims that do not meet requirements for 506 Valuation where you want or need to specify monthly payments Mortgages Rarely used, but mostly used in districts that do not allow mortgages to be paid outside the plan. Used for secured claims when property securing debt is fully exempt. Used for secured claims when debtor gives property back. Used for priority portions of Schedule E claims. Domestic Support Obligations as defined by 507(a)(1)(A) Domestic Support claims that are assigned to, owed to, or recoverable by a governmental agency. Most Schedule F claims, but also unsecured portions of secured claims, nonpriority portions of Schedule E claims, and secured claims where lien is to be avoided. Notes Use this class for claims that are secured by a vehicle for which the debt was incurred within 910 days of filing the bankruptcy petition, or, any claims secured by any other personal property for which the debt was incurred within 1 year of filing. In most districts, you can separate the arrearage and have it paid through the plan while the debtor continues to make regular payments directly to the creditor. If the claim amount is greater than the property value, there will be an unsecured portion, which, by default, will be treated like other Unsecured, Nonpriority debts. If a claim amount exceeds the amount entitled to priority, the remaining amount is treated as Unsecured, Nonpriority. Claims of this class include a separate arrearage section in the 13 Plan Treatment tab so that you can separate the arrearage and have it paid through the plan while the debtor continues to make regular payments directly to the creditor. Claims of this class include a separate arrearage section in the 13 Plan Treatment tab so that you can separate the arrearage and have it paid through the plan while the debtor continues to make regular payments directly to the creditor. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 165
Name of Plan Class U100 Unsecured, Special Class, paid 100% ARPR Arrearage, Paid Prorata ARR Arrearage, Fixed Payment ATTY - Attorney Fees FILE Filing Fees NOT Not in Plan. How Much Paid and How Paid in full on a pro rata basis. Paid in full on a pro rata basis early in the plan Paid in full with the monthly payment you specify. Paid in full early in the plan on a pro rata basis. Paid in full on a pro rata basis. Through Plan or Direct Through plan Through plan. Through plan. Through plan. Through plan. Typically Used For Schedule F claims where the debtor wants or needs to pay the debt in full, generally if there is a codebtor or a loan (such as a nondischargeable student loan) that must be paid in full. Arrearage portions of Schedule D claims where your trustee pays arrearages ahead of other claims Arrearage portions of Schedule D claims where you want to specify the monthly arrearage payment. Attorney s fees. Filing Fees. Not paid. Not paid. Special circumstances. Notes Gives the calculator more flexibility to vary payments than the ARP class below. This class is assigned by the calculator to the amount you input for attorney s fee in the Claims Tab of the Calculator. You can change it to a fixed payment through your Setup Menu as described in Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options on page 177. This class is assigned automatically to Filing Fees entered in the Claims tab of the Calculator in the appropriate slot. Claims classified as Not in Plan will not be paid and will not appear on the printed plan. Use this only in special circumstances. If you classify a claim as either Secured, paid prorata, 506 N/A, or Secured, fixed payment, 506 N/A and it includes an unsecured portion, check the "Pay Full Claim as Secured" checkbox in the 13 Plan Treatment tab for the creditor if you want the Chapter 13 Calculator to include the unsecured portion as part of the secured claim when calculating plan payments. Working Out a Repayment Schedule Debtor s Excess Income: After you have entered all creditors for a case, you ll enter the debtor s income and expenses on Schedules I and J. Both the income and expense schedules automatically display the debtor s excess income, (income minus expenses). The excess income is a good place to start as you determine how much the debtor will be able to pay each month. 166 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
There is no link in the program between Schedules I and J and the plan calculator. When you first go into the plan the payment line will be blank. Use the calculator to work out a payment then reconcile this with Schedules I and J. Open the Calculator: From the Forms and Schedules, press 3 or double-click on the Chapter 13 Plan to open the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator. Each screen in the calculator is described in full detail in Sections of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator on page 167. To Specify a Monthly Payment Amount: In the Summary tab, you can specify a monthly payment amount and length of plan, then click the Calculate button to have the plan calculator determine how funds will be distributed and how much will be left for unsecured creditors. Or, if you want to find the minimum amount that the debtor would be required to pay, put a question mark in the monthly payment amount, and type the length of the plan and the proposed percentage that unsecured creditors would get. Click the Calculate button to have the Plan Calculator work out the minimum monthly payment required to achieve this payout. (In some districts, unsecured creditors can be left with 0% if the debtor is using all excess income to repay creditors; in other districts the minimum percentage may be higher.) Different tabs in the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator display the amount that each creditor will be paid, including interest, the way funds will be distributed each month, and a liquidation analysis (a comparison of how creditors would fare if the debtor filed under chapter 7 instead.) If you are not able to work out an acceptable payment amount, you can vary the length of the plan or change the treatment of one or more of creditors. Sections of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator Each of these sections is described in greater detail below. To calculate a plan, first click the Claims tab, enter any amount to be paid to the attorney or the court in the Attorney Fee or Filing Fee slot, then return to the Summary Tab. To view a detailed list of how much each creditor will be paid, each creditor s claim amount, treatment class and months of payment, click the Claims tab. (The Claims tab also allows you to change the 13 Plan Treatment of any claim.) To see how payments will be divided each month, click the Payout tab. To compare how unsecured creditors fare under this plan compared to a chapter 7 case, click the Liquidation tab. To view claims that are split between multiple treatment classes, click the Split Claim tab. To enter the amount that should be deducted from the debtor s wages, click the Wage Deduction tab. To view error messages about problems with the plan calculation and distributions, click the Errors tab. To enter text that you want to appear in the Other Provisions section of the printed plan, click the Other tab. Working Out a Plan: The Summary Tab Accessing the Summary Tab Screen To access the Summary Tab, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on the Chapter 13 Plan or press 3. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 167
Chapter 13 Plan Calculator: Summary Tab First, enter any unpaid attorney s fee or filing fee to be paid through the plan in the Claims tab, then return to the Summary Tab to calculate a workable plan. Lump sum payments: If, in addition to the regular monthly payments, the debtor is able to make one-time lump sum contributions, enter those in the lumpsum slots in the lower left corner of the screen. You can enter up to three lump sum payments, with a maximum value of $99,999.99 each. If the debtor needs to make a lump sum payment higher than the maximum, you can enter two lump sum payments in the same month. If you know how much the debtor can pay each month and want to find the amount that unsecured creditors will be paid: 1. Enter the monthly payment that the debtor can pay and the length of the proposed plan. If there will be any lump sum payments, enter those amounts and the months during the plan that these will be paid. 2. Click the Calculate button in the bottom of the Summary Window. 3. The Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator will calculate how much each creditor will be paid and when. The total amount paid to the attorney, trustee, and creditors will be displayed in the Summary Totals section of this screen, as well as the percentage to unsecured creditors. Wage Deduction: When you have calculated a monthly payment amount, be sure to go to the Wage Deduction tab and fill in the correct amount to be deducted from the debtor s paycheck. If you want to find the minimum payment necessary to pay unsecured creditors a given percentage: 1. Type a question mark? in the first payment field then press T. 2. Enter the length of the plan in months. (Typically 36 or 60 months.) If there will be any lump sum payments, enter those and the month during the plan that these will be paid. 3. A question appears in the bottom of the window which says: Pay unsecured non-priority claims: Type the percentage that you would like the unsecured non-priority claims to be paid, or use the b or t buttons to change the number by one percentage point at a time. (Don t enter the percent sign, just the number.) 168 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
When you put a? in the payment slot, a field appears at the bottom asking for a target percentage for unsecured creditors. 4. Click the Calculate button in the bottom of the Summary Window. 5. The Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator will calculate the monthly payment amount and how much each creditor will be paid and when. The total amount paid to the attorney, trustee, and creditors will be displayed in the Summary Totals section of this screen, as well as the percentage to unsecured creditors. Specifying a Different Interval: A Setup Option allows you to specify an interval other than monthly on your printed plan. The monthly payment on the Summary Tab will be prorated to that interval. See Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options on page 177. If you want to find the minimum length of plan to pay unsecured creditors a given percentage with a given monthly payment: 1. Enter the amount of payment then press T. 2. Type a question mark? in the first # of months field. If there will be any lump sum payments, enter those and the month during the plan that these will be paid. 3. A question appears in the bottom of the window which says: Pay unsecured non-priority claims: Type the percentage that you would like the unsecured non-priority claims to be paid, or use the b and t buttons to change the number by one percentage point at a time. (Don t enter the percent sign, just the number.) 4. Click the Calculate button in the bottom of the Summary Window. 5. The Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator will calculate how much each creditor will be paid and when. The total amount paid to the attorney, trustee, and creditors will be displayed in the Summary Totals section of this screen, as well as the percentage paid to unsecured creditors. 6. You may receive a message saying You requested paying <percentage>% to unsecured creditors but the Best Case calculation resulted in paying <percentage higher than requested>%.. This is because the plan calculator cannot make a partial monthly payment. It has to apply the full monthly payment amount to the last month. If this happens, you can get a more exact percentage by leaving the number of months that was calculated and putting a? in the payment field. Click Calculate to find the exact payment. If you want to create a step plan: In a step plan, the debtor pays a certain amount into the plan for a given number of months, then a different amount for a number of months, then, if needed, a third amount for a given number of months. For example, the debtor may be able to pay $500 per month for the first 12 months, then may be getting a raise and may be able to increase payments to $550 per month for the remainder of the plan. The Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator can calculate the payment amount for any given step, the length of any given step or, if you know the payment amounts and length of each step, it can calculate the amount that unsecured Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 169
creditors will be paid in this Step Plan. (The Plan Calculator cannot calculate payment amounts in multiple steps, as there are numerous possibilities.) To calculate a step plan, if you know the payment amounts at each step and want to find the length of any given step: 1. Enter the monthly payment amounts for each step, and the # of months of the step or steps you know. 2. Type a question mark for the # of months of the last step. 3. A question appears in the bottom of the window which says: Pay unsecured non-priority claims: Type the percentage that you would like the unsecured non-priority claims to be paid, or use the b or t buttons to change the number by one percentage point at a time. (Don t enter the percent sign, just the number.) 4. Click the Calculate button in the bottom of the Summary Window. 5. The Best Case Chapter 13 Plan Calculator will calculate how much each creditor will be paid and when. The total amount paid to the attorney, trustee, and creditors will be displayed in the Summary Totals section of this screen, as well as the percentage to unsecured creditors. To calculate a step plan, if you know the lengths of each step and want to find the payment amount of one step: Follow steps 1-5 above, putting the question mark in the payment field that you want to calculate. To calculate a step plan when you know the payment amounts and lengths of each step, and want to calculate the amount going to unsecured creditors: Enter the monthly payment amounts and lengths of each step, then click Calculate. Summary Totals The Summary Totals that appear in the bottom right corner of the Summary tab are: Attorney & Filing Fee: The total attorney and filing fees that will be paid through the plan. These amounts can be entered in the Claims tab. Trustee s Fee: The total amount that will be paid to the trustee through the plan. This is a percentage of the total dollar amount going into the plan. You can change the percentage to be paid to the trustee and whether the amount should be computed using contributions or distributions through the Chapter 13 Setup Options in your Jurisdiction settings. (Described on page 182.) The default is 10% computed on contributions. Principal to Creditors: The total amount paid to all creditors from all plan payments excluding interest. Interest to Creditors: The total amount of interest paid to creditors. (The percentage interest to be paid is specified in the 13 Plan Treatment portion of each claim.) Over Payments: The amount going into the plan beyond what is necessary to pay off the creditors. If this amount is greater than 0.00, see Troubleshooting the 13 Plan Calculator on page 180. Total Plan Payments: The total amount of money going into the plan, including the attorney s, trustee s and filing fee. This is a sum of the numbers above. If you have the words Plan needs calculation in the Summary Totals section, press the Calculate button. If you have an error message in the Summary Totals section such as Plan under funded by... or Plan needs payment and term or Payment will not work, see Troubleshooting on page 180. Printing the Summary Data To print the summary data, click the button with a printer on it in the bottom left corner, then click the Print button when the report appears on your screen. 170 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 13 Plan Calculator: Claims Tab To access this screen: From the Forms and Schedule Menu, double click on Chapter 13 Plan. Click the Claims tab at the top of the window. The claims tab gives you detailed information about how each creditor will be treated in the Plan, and allows you to edit each creditor s treatment. Creditors are sorted by treatment class. To print the Claims data, click the Printer button in the bottom left corner. The Claims Tab Enter the attorney s fee to be paid through the plan here. Click to edit the highlighted claim, or double-click on the claim. Entering Attorney s Fees/Filing Fees If a portion of the attorney s fee or the filing fee is to be paid through the Plan, open the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator from the Forms and Schedules Menu and click the Claims tab at the top of the window. In the bottom of the window, type the amount of the attorney s fee that you want paid through the plan and/or the amount of the filing fee that you want paid. When you are ready to calculate a plan, click on the Summary Tab. By default, the attorney s fee is paid on a pro rata basis. If you want it to be paid in fixed installments instead, see Editing Classification Treatments in the section Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options which begins on page 177. Explanation of Columns in Claims tab For each claim, the claims tab portion of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator lists the following information: Class: The treatment class of this claim. This is determined in the 13 Plan Treatment tab of each claim which appears in the Schedule D, E and F entry windows. R: Payout rank. The payout rank that is assigned to this class. The payout rank refers to the order in which claims are paid. Typically, the filing fee, attorney s fee, and any fixed payment amounts are first, followed by secured pro rata, followed by priority claims, followed by unsecured general nonpriority. Creditor: The name of the creditor. If the name has an asterisk next to it, it is a split portion of a claim that has been divided into multiple treatment classes. This can happen when, for example, only a portion of a claim is secured. Claim Amt.: The dollar amount of the claim. If this creditor s claim has been split into multiple classes, the amount displayed here is just the portion of the total claim which falls into this class. For example, if you have a creditor with a total claim of $5000 against a car worth $3000, the secured portion of the claim would be $3000 and the unsecured portion would be $2000. The claim amount that would be displayed here for the secured portion is $3000. The unsecured portion would be listed on a separate line with a claim amount of $2000. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 171
Rate: The interest rate that is to be paid on this claim. This is defined in the 13 Plan Treatment section for each claim. Payment: The way this creditor s payment is calculated. Either pro rata, fixed, or Not in Plan. First: The first month that this creditor will be paid. Last: The last month that this creditor will be paid. Total Paid: The total amount that this creditor will be paid. (Or, if this creditor s claim is split, the amount of this portion of the claim that will be paid.) Interest: The portion of the total amount that is interest, as opposed to principal. This is determined by the interest rate which you specified in the 13 Plan Treatment section for each claim. Editing Claims from the Claim Treatment Tab You can edit claims and claim treatments directly from the Claims Tab in the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator. To edit a claim, highlight the claim then click the Edit Claim button or just double-click on the claim. This takes you to the Schedule D, E or F entry for this creditor, where you can edit the claim amount or click the 13 Plan Treatment tab to change the treatment of this claim. Payout Tab The payout schedule gives you a breakdown of payments going into the plan each month, showing how each payment will be divided among the creditors. To access the payout schedule, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click in the Chapter 13 Plan. Click the Payout tab at the top of the Window. To print the payout schedule data, click the Print button in the bottom left corner. To calculate the plan, click the Summary Tab. Explanation of columns in Payout tab: M: The month of this payment. (1 = first month of the plan, etc.) Creditor: The name of the creditor. Class: The treatment class of this claim, as defined in the 13 Plan Treatment section of the claim data. (This can be edited through the Claims tab.) Payment: The amount of the payment going to this creditor this month. 172 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Interest: The amount of this payment being used to pay interest. (The interest rate is defined in the 13 Plan Treatment section for each claim.) Principal: The amount of this payment being used to pay the principal. Balance: Amount remaining to be paid on this claim after this payment has been made. (Trustee s fee will always show 0.00 for balance, since the trustee gets a percentage of the amount going in or coming out each month and not a predetermined amount.) Liquidation Analysis To access the liquidation analysis, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click the Chapter 13 Plan. Click the Liquidation tab at the top of the Window. The liquidation analysis compares how creditors would have fared if the debtor had filed under chapter 7 instead The liquidation analysis portion of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator analyzes how much unsecured creditors would be paid if, instead of filing under chapter 13, the debtor filed under chapter 7 and assets were liquidated. To show how much unsecured nonpriority creditors would receive if the debtor filed Chapter 7 instead of Chapter 13, the amount of secured and priority claims, the exempt property, and the administrative costs are subtracted from the debtor s total assets. The amount of the debtor s unexempt property that is left is the amount that would be available for distribution to unsecured creditors in a liquidation. Entering Administrative Costs The administrative costs refer to the estimated costs of liquidating the estate. (Hiring an appraiser, auctioneer, etc.) These costs are deducted from the amount that the creditors would get under a liquidation. In the administrative expenses, you might want to include the attorney s fee for a chapter 7 and the filing fee for a chapter 7. To enter the administrative costs, double-click in the Est. administrative costs field or press A-E. With the field highlighted in blue, type a dollar amount. (Don t enter a dollar sign.) Press T to register your change. To Print the Liquidation Analysis 1. Click the Print button in the bottom left corner of the liquidation analysis window. 2. When the report appears on your screen, click the button with the printer on it in your toolbar. (Or, to cancel out of the report without printing, click the button in the toolbar with the X on it or press E.) Please note that we have prepared this liquidation analysis to help you. It is not a form to be filed with the trustee. If your court or trustee requires a printed liquidation analysis, the format may be different than the format we have included. Nevertheless, some trustees do find the printout helpful. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 173
How the Numbers are Calculated The numbers in the analysis are calculated as follows: (Note that if you mark a property value or claim amount as unknown, it is counted as $0.00.) The Total Property Value is the sum of property values from Schedules A and B combined. To arrive at the number on the Schedule D. Secured Claims line, Best Case Bankruptcy adds the total of all claim amounts on Schedule D and subtracts the unsecured portions of these claims. Secured claims which have been classified as secured, avoid lien are not counted in the secured total because these creditors are counted as unsecured for purposes of the liquidation analysis. The exempt property securing liens being avoided is included in the exempt property total. For the purpose of the liquidation analysis, you ll want to show the full value of the property as exempt on Schedule C, not just the debtor s interest or equity. Note that if you have multiple liens securing an item of property and have not properly input the unsecured portions of claims, your data may show that the secured portion of the liens is greater than the actual property value, which clearly should not happen. Make sure you have entered the correct unsecured amount for each claim to have the liquidation analysis calculated properly. For the Schedule E. Priority Claims line, Best Case adds all of the Priority amount answers that you have input in each Schedule E screen. (For each Schedule E entry, this is not the amount of claim, but the amount entitled to priority.) For the Schedule C. Exemptions, Best Case totals the exempt amount of all Schedule C items. For each exempted item, if there is not an avoided lien, this is calculated as the lesser value of the debtor s equity in the property or the amount claimed as exempt on Schedule C. (So if you exempt more than the debtor actually owns, only the debtor s equity will be included on this line.) If there is a lien being avoided, this is calculated as the lesser value of the market value of the property or the amount claimed as exempt. The Administrative Costs are taken from the amount you input on the right side of the screen. The amount Available to General Unsecured is calculated as the total of all property values from Schedules A and B, minus the secured (unavoidable) and priority claims, the administrative expenses, and the exempt property. Total General Unsecured is the sum of all unsecured, nonpriority portions of claims from Schedules D, E and F. The percentage distribution is calculated by taking the funds available for distribution and dividing by the total amount of unsecured nonpriority claims. It refers to the percentage of the claim that each unsecured creditor would get under a liquidation. (25% is 25 cents paid per dollar owed.) The details portion at the bottom gives you a quick reference of totals from the asset and liability schedules. Unsecured from Schedule D is the total of all unsecured portions of claims on Schedule D. We show the total amount of secured claims classified as Avoid Lien below this line since these are counted as unsecured by the calculator. Unsecured from Schedule E is the total of all unsecured portions of Schedule E claims. Unsecured from Schedule F is the total of all unsecured claims from Schedule F. Split Claim Tab To access the Split Claim tab, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click in the Chapter 13 Plan. Click the Split Claim* tab at the top of the Window. The Split Claim tab in the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator lists claims that are split into multiple treatment classes. In the Claims Tab, split claims are indicated with asterisks (*) next to their names. 174 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Split Claim tab shows claims that have been divided into more than one part Claims can be split for three reasons: 1. Schedule D Claims Not Fully Secured: If there is a piece of property securing a Schedule D claim with a property value less than the claim value, the claim will be split into a secured portion, (the portion that is secured by the property), and an unsecured portion, (the portion of the claim which is not secured by property). For this type of claim, this tab lists the name of the creditor, the total amount of the claim, the market value of the property securing the claim, and the portion of the claim which is not secured by property. 2. Avoided Liens: If a creditor s claim is secured by property which is fully exempt and the debtor intends to avoid the lien, the secured portion of the claim will be listed both as secured-avoid lien and as general unsecured. In fact, the entire amount of the claim will be treated as Unsecured, General Nonpriority since the lien is no longer valid. The Secured, Avoid Lien portion will be listed in the Payout Schedule for your reference, but this line will always show $0 being paid, and the claim will be listed again in the Unsecured, General Nonpriority Class. For this type of claim, this tab lists the name of the creditor, the total amount of the claim to be avoided, the amount of the lien to be avoided (the secured portion), and the unsecured portion of the claim, if any. 3. Schedule E Claims Where Claim Amount Exceeds Amount Entitled to Priority: If there is a Schedule E claim where the full amount of the claim exceeds the amount entitled to priority, the claim will be divided into a priority amount and a general unsecured nonpriority amount. For this type of claim, you ll see the name of the creditor, the total amount of the claim, the portion that is entitled to priority and the portion that is not entitled to priority. If you have no claims of a given type, None will appear under that type of split. To change the treatment of any claim, click the Claims tab. (See page 172.) Wage Deduction Tab To access the wage deduction section: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator. Click on the Wage Deduction tab at the top of the window. If you have a custom plan, you may see an Interval tab instead of a Wage Deduction tab. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 175
The Wage Deduction Tab of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator In the wage deduction section of the 13 Plan, you ll enter the dollar amount to be deducted from the debtor s paycheck and the debtor s payroll interval. Your choices are: daily (365 times per year), weekly (52 times per year), biweekly (every other week), semimonthly (twice a month), monthly (once a month) bimonthly (every other month), quarterly (4 times per year), and semiannually (twice a year). You can also enter an amount for the debtor s spouse s wage deduction. Note that the payment amount that you fill in here does not affect the chapter 13 plan calculations; it prints out on the plan in the paragraph that discusses wage deductions. If there is to be no wage deduction, Best Case inserts the word None in the wage deduction section of the printed Chapter 13 plan. A form preference allows you to specify additional text that prints after the word none. See Printing Options on page 177. Errors! Tab The Errors Tab in the 13 Plan Calculator If there are problems with the monthly payment amount, the Errors tab will list error messages to help you fix the problem. If there are no errors, you will not see an Errors tab. Some of the error messages that you might see are: Remaining balance of $<dollar amnt> (Should have been paid in full) Can be caused by one of two things: Either the total plan payments are too low so that a creditor that should have been paid in full was not, or, if this creditor is being paid a fixed monthly amount, this fixed amount is not high enough to pay the claim in full. 176 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Solution: For fixed payment creditors, edit the claim through the Claims tab, then use the Auto check box in the 13 Plan Treatment tab to find the correct monthly payment amount, or increase the monthly payment amount yourself. If there are not fixed payments, put a? in the payment slot of the Summary tab, enter the number of months, and set the pay unsecured nonpriority claims to the least amount that the trustee will allow then click Calculate to find the minimum monthly payment necessary to pay off claims that need to be paid in full. Fixed Payments Scheduled for <# months>, only <#> payments made If one of your creditors was to receive fixed payments, but the monthly payment amount going into the plan is not high enough to meet the fixed payments, you ll get this message. Solution: do one of three things: change the treatment of the creditor to pro rata so that payments can be broken down into smaller amounts that the debtor can afford, or increase the term of the fixed payment creditor so that the monthly payment amount goes down, or increase the monthly payment amount going into the plan. Classified as Longterm, but paid in full in month <#> - You ll get this error message if you classify a claim as long-term, but put in a high monthly payment amount for the creditor so that the claim actually gets paid off in full through the plan. Solution: either reclassify the claim to a class that gets paid off through the plan, (such as secured, pro rata or secured, fixed payment) or decrease the monthly payment amount to this creditor to spread out payments over a longer period of time. Debt over 109(e) limit This error will appear if your client s debt exceeds the limits of 11 U.S.C. 109(e). Other Tab This section of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator allows you to add your own notes or text to Chapter 13 plans for special cases or circumstances that need to be explained. Text that you enter in this section will print at the bottom of your plan in an Other Provisions section. To access this screen 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on the Chapter 13 Plan. 2. Click the Other tab at the top of the Window. If you have a short bit of standard text that you like to appear in the Other Provisions section on the plan, consider creating a macro that contains this text. See Macro Phrase List on page 320. Specify Permanent Text for Other Provisions: A preference in your Setup Menu allows you to specify permanent language for the Other Provisions section of the Chapter 13 Plan. See Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options on page 177. Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options Printing Options There are several options in the Setup Menu that affect what information is including in the standard Best Case Chapter 13 Plan. Options in the Miscellaneous Options section of your Jurisdiction settings let you choose whether to include the total amount paid to General, Unsecured Creditors, an attorney s signature line, and text about paying all claims less than $10 in full. By default, none of these item print. You can have any or all of them included by doing the following: 1. With the client file open, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, click Setup/Edit Case Jurisdiction and skip to step 4, or - 2. Close your Client List Window and click Setup/Jurisdictions. 3. Highlight your district and click Edit. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 177
4. Click the Misc. Options tab at the top of the window. Chapter 13 plan printing options appear as check boxes on the right side of the window. (Print UGEN total payout on Best Case Standard 13Plan, Don t Print <$10 text on Best Case Standard 13 Plan, and Print attorney signature line on Best Case Standard Chapter 13 Plan. Make your selections then click OK. Other options appear in the Form Preferences section of the program as described below. These options also affect the Eastern District of Wisconsin plan, which is based on the Best Case standard plan. To access these options: If you are in a client file, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, click Setup/Edit Case Jurisdiction (or press C-S-J) then skip to step 4 below. 1. Close your Client List Window. 2. Click Setup/Jurisdictions. 3. Highlight your district and click Edit. 4. In the Basic Information tab, click the Edit Forms List button. 5. When the Forms List appears, highlight the Chapter 13 Plan on the left side then click Edit. 6. In the lower left corner, a Preferences button appears. Click it. 7. Several preferences are listed, each of which is described below. To change a setting, highlight the description and click Change. Make your change, click OK to save, and repeat this step for any other preferences you want to edit. 8. Back in the list of preferences, click Close, then click OK on the next screen. 9. Click Close on the Forms List, then OK on your Jurisdiction window. 10. Repeat for other districts if you like. Revert to the Pre-BAPCPA version of the Chapter 13 Plan: By default, if a client is filing a post-bankruptcy reform petition, the updated Best Case Standard Plan is included in Forms and Schedules Menu. If you check this option, the pre-bankruptcy reform version of the Best Case Standard Plan replaces the revised version even if the client is designated as filing under post-bapcpa 2005 requirements. Show Frequency of Plan Payments: By default, the Chapter 13 Plan lists monthly payments. If you check this option, monthly payments will be prorated to the interval that you select in the Wage Deduction tab of the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator, and the interval selected in the Wage Deduction tab will print on the plan. Attorney s Fee: Remove language, print only the dollar amount: This preference will remove the language to be paid through plan in monthly payments that follows Attorney s Fee (unpaid portion): Trustee s Fee: Print Statement instead of %: This preference removes the Trustee s Fee % that prints on the form and replaces it with the following statement: Trustee s fee: Amount to be determined by the Office of the U. S. Trustee. List Secured Creditors Before Priority Creditors: By default, the Best Case Standard plan lists secured creditors after priority (Schedule E) creditors. With this option, you can have secured claims printed first. You might do this to reflect that secured creditors will be paid before priority creditors, if that is the case in your district. Show Description of Collateral for All Secured Creditors: By default, Best Case Bankruptcy does not list the collateral for each secured claim on the Best Case standard Chapter 13 Plan, but you can have it listed by changing your answer for this option. Show Variable Payment Detail for Creditors: This option shows the months over which each creditor of class Secured, Fixed Payment, Secured Prorata, or Secured, Long Term In Plan will be paid. (E.g. $25.50 Mos. 1-10. ) For each prorata creditor, if the monthly payment amount varies, each step will be detailed. 178 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Print pro rata instead of # cents to unsecured: This preference changes the language printed in 4.d.2., replacing the percent paid to unsecured with the phrase pro rata. This preference is not available for WIE 13 plan. Show Monthly Payment column for #5: Lists the monthly plan payments under section #5, Amount of Default to be Cured, on the printed form of the Best Case Standard Chapter 13 Plan. Text After NONE for #7 (Wage Deduction): If there is to be no wage deduction, Best Case prints NONE in section 7 on the printed plan, which reads The employer on whom the Court will be requested to order payment withheld from earnings is: You can print standard additional text after NONE by changing the preference labeled Text after NONE for number 7. Note that this text will only print if you leave the Wage Deduction section blank in the Chapter 13 plan. Permanent Other Provisions Text: This preference allows the user to specify permanent language for the Other Provisions section of the Chapter 13 Plan. Include Plan Summary and Analysis: This option adds a section at the end of the plan that shows how plan disbursements will be broken down into the broad categories of Attorney Fees, Arrearages, Secured Claims, Priority Claims, Unsecured Claims Paid at 100%, and all other unsecured claims. It also shows the total amount of all plan payments and the breakdown between the amount going to creditors and to the trustee. Include Chap 7 Reconciliation/Liquidation Analysis: This option adds a section to the end of the plan that lists the total value of the debtor s property from Schedules A and B, the total amount of property that is securing debt, the amount of exempt property, the amount of all priority and administrative claims, the percentage amount that unsecured, general nonpriority creditors are estimated to receive under this plan and the amount they would receive if the debtor were filing under Chapter 7 instead. Common Questions How can I change the trustee s fee? See page 183. How can I enter the portion of the attorney s fee/filing fee to be paid through the plan? See page 171. How can I find out the least amount to pay? Generally, the least amount that the debtor would be able to pay would be an amount high enough to pay secured creditors in full, (or surrender the property securing the lien, or claim the property securing the lien as fully exempt, when possible), to pay priority claims in full, and to pay unsecured creditors 0%. Note that in some districts, the debtor may not be permitted to pay the unsecured creditors nothing, or may only be allowed to do so if he can show that he is using all of his excess income to make plan payments. 1. After classifying claims the way you want them to be treated, double-click on the Chapter 13 Plan from the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. In the summary tab, enter the proposed length of the plan in months, then type a question mark in the payment field. 3. In the percentage to pay unsecured nonpriority claims, type 0, or whatever the minimum allowed to unsecured creditors is in your district. 4. Click the Calculate button. The minimum monthly payment required to fund this plan will be displayed. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 179
Can I just enter the monthly amount that the debtor can pay, and see how funds will be distributed? Yes. From the Forms and Schedule Menu, double-click on the Chapter 13 Plan. In the summary tab, enter the monthly payment amount and desired length of plan, then click Calculate. Summary totals will appear on the right side of the screen, showing how much each class of creditors will be paid and the percentage going to unsecured creditors. If this amount is not enough to meet the required minimum, (of paying the secured pro rata and priority creditors in full), you will get a message saying that the plan is under funded. Can I edit the plan? Yes! To edit your chapter 13 plan: 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, click on the Chapter 13 Plan to highlight it. 2. Mark the form to print by pressing the s or clicking in the print column on the right. Only the Chapter 13 plan should be marked to print. 3. Click the Print button in the main toolbar. 4. In the Print dialog box, click the Edit Form button. 5. The plan will appear in the Best Case Editor where you can add or remove text. When you are ready to print, click File/Print in the Editor. Full instructions for editing documents in the Best Case Editor can be found on page 203. 6. If you want to save the edited version of your document, choose File/Save and choose the Replaces Form option. See Saving Documents on page 203. Troubleshooting Problems General Tips 1. The sections Chapter 13 Plan Treatment Schedule D, (page 159) Chapter 13 Plan Treatment Schedule E, (page 162), and Chapter 13 Plan Treatment Schedule F, (page 163), will help you to classify claims on each schedule properly. If the monthly payment amount that you are getting seems too high or low, you may have classified a claim incorrectly. For example, the calculator may be trying to pay off the full mortgage amount when you mean for the debtor to be making only regularly scheduled payments. Before calling technical support, be sure to check that you have each claim classified correctly. If you are still having trouble understanding how to classify basic claims, please read our Chapter 13 Tutorial in Appendix F on page 343. 2. Most problems occur when you have large fixed payments that are not spread over the length of the plan, (i.e. the number of payments is too small for certain fixed payment claims). The amount that the debtor can afford to pay each month is too low to cover the cost of the fixed payments you have specified. To fix the problem, you ll either need to change the claim getting fixed payments to pro rata or to increase the term of the fixed payments to bring the monthly payments down. 3. READ THIS: Improperly calculated fixed payments can account for a number of problems: If you are having trouble working out a plan, it is probably due to bad fixed payment amounts. For example, if you have an arrearage amount that is $1000, and you specify that this is going to be paid in 4 payments, and then, instead of clicking the PMT button, which would generate a fixed payment amount of $250, you input a fixed payment amount of $100, there is no way that this claim can be paid in full in the amount of time you specified. To fix this problem: 180 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
a. Click the Claims tab in the calculator and look for fixed payments. Fixed payments will have a dollar figure in the Payment column instead of Pro rata or Not in Plan. b. Review each fixed payment claim by highlighting the claim and clicking the Edit Claim button, then clicking the 13 Plan Treatment tab. c. Check to see that the figures make sense: Are all the numbers on the 13 plan treatment tab correct? Are the payment amount and term sufficient to pay the full claim? Use the Auto check box to have the monthly fixed payment amounts calculated for you. d. Make necessary adjustments and recalculate the plan. 4. Any time you edit a claim, especially a Schedule D secured claim, you should look at the 13 plan treatment tab and verify that the numbers are still correct. Changes to the creditor information tab are not automatically reflected on the 13 Plan Treatment tab. Other Problems Lump sum Payments If you have a plan with a large lump sum payment, you need to be careful with fixed payment claims. If you are having trouble with a lump sum plan the easiest solution is to change fixed payments to pro rata. The problem is that fixed payments can limit the calculator s ability to fully distribute the lump sum payment. There are Overpayments. Overpayments are caused when there is more than enough going into the plan to pay off all creditors, or when you have incorrect fixed payment amounts. If you have more than enough money going to creditors, you might consider decreasing the length of the plan. (For fixed payment problems, see General Tips on page 180.) Debtor cannot afford minimum payment/ The payment amount required to fund the plan is extremely high. Go to the Claims Tab and look at how each claim is being treated. If there is a mortgage, how is this classified? It should probably be Secured, Long term, outside plan or Secured, Long Term, inside plan. If it is classified as secured pro rata, the calculator will try to pay the entire mortgage off within the length of the plan, giving you a high payment amount. Have you split secured claims into secured and unsecured portions, where allowed, when the market value is less than the claim amount? For secured creditors whose claims are not completely secured, go into the 13 Plan Treatment tab in Schedule D and check to see that everything is being treated properly and that the secured portion plus arrearage plus unsecured is equal to the total claim amount. Check the interest rates that you ve assigned to each claim. Over 5 years, the percentage can make a big difference, especially on claims such as car loans with high interest rates. You may not need to pay the full interest rate of the original contract. Where the property securing the lien is fully exempt, have you classified the claim as Secured, Avoid Lien? If the property is exempt, the lien may become invalid and the claim can be treated as an unsecured claim. (See Chapter 13 Treatment for Schedule D claims on page 159.) If all claims are classified properly and interest rates are correct, you may need to increase the length of the plan, decrease the amount to unsecured creditors, or have the debtor surrender secured property. I originally entered a claim on Schedule D then moved it to F. It s still being treated as a secured claim in the plan calculator. The treatment class for each class is not defined in the plan calculator, but in the 13 Plan Treatment tab located in the creditor schedule. To change a creditor s treatment: 1. In the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator, click the Claims Tab. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 181
2. Double-click on the name of the creditor. 3. At the top of the creditor window, you ll see a tab labeled 13 Plan Treatment. Click on the tab. 4. You can now change the treatment of this claim to any treatment class in the list. Specify interest rate, arrearage amount and treatment, unsecured treatment, and non-priority treatment if applicable, then click OK. 5. When you return to the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator, you can click the Summary Tab, then recalculate the plan, if necessary. I want to change the interest rate being paid on a claim. The interest rate is specified in the 13 Plan Treatment tab for each individual creditor, where applicable. To adjust the interest rate, follow steps 1-3 above, change the interest, and click OK. The amount going into the plan isn t printing properly on Schedule J. You need to manually enter the dollar figure from the Chapter 13 plan into the For Chapters 12 & 13 Only section of Schedule J. Since you may be filing the plan separately from Schedule J, this figure is not automatically transferred. My Schedule E creditors aren t being included on the plan. You need to input the priority amount for each Schedule E creditor in addition to the amount of claim. Edit each Schedule E claim and add the priority amount in the Creditor Information tab. Accessing the 13 Plan Section of the Setup Menu Other choices in the Setup Menu allow you to change settings for each treatment class, the trustee s fee, and the default treatment class for each schedule. 1. With the client file open, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, click Setup/Edit Case Jurisdiction and skip to step 5 below, or - 2. Close all forms or schedules that are open, then close the Client List Window. 3. Click on Setup in the Main Menu Bar to access the Setup Menu, then click Jurisdictions. 4. With the name of your jurisdiction highlighted, click Edit. 5. Click on the tab labeled 13 Plan. The 13 Plan section of the Setup Menu, under Jurisdictions 182 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Changing the Percentage Paid to the Trustee 1. Follow instructions for accessing the Chapter 13 Plan Setup screen, above. 2. In the Trustee s section, on the left side, type the percentage that the trustee is to be paid. In Best Case Bankruptcy you can define up to three steps for the trustee s fee in case your trustee gets paid a varying percentage based on how much is going into the plan. The default percentage is 10%. 3. Specify whether the trustee s fee should be computed based on contributions into the plan or disbursements from the plan. (The default is for it to be calculated based on contributions. The trustee gets paid more if calculations are made on contributions. If you are unsure how your trustee s fee should be calculated, contact your local trustee.) Don t Accrue Interest on Claims While Unpaid By default, claims with interest begin to accrue interest in the first month of the plan, whether or not the creditors begin to receive payment that early. An option in your Setup menu allows you to suspend interest accrual on secured claims until they begin to receive payments. This option was added by customer request and may or may not be allowed in your district. To suspend interest accrual until payments to the creditor begin: 1. Access the 13 Plan portion of your Setup Menu, as described above. 2. In the bottom left corner, there is a check box labeled Don t accrue interest on claims while unpaid. Click in the box to mark the check box, then click OK. 3. Repeat for any other districts that you file in where you want this option marked. 4. Close the Jurisdictions list. Other options in the Jurisdictions section of your Setup Menu allow you to include an attorney signature line on the printed plan, exclude the statement about unsecured nonpriority claims less than $10, and include a statement showing the total payout to unsecured nonpriority creditors. See Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. Changing the Usual (Default) Classification of a Given Type of Claim The standard treatment of a claim refers to the classification that is filled in for you in the 13 Plan Treatment tab of Schedules D, E, and F. The most common treatment class is assigned to creditors of each schedule, though the treatment class of any individual claim can be changed at any time. We have assigned standard treatment classes to the secured and unsecured portions of Schedule D claims, priority and non priority portions of Schedule E claims, all Schedule F claims and arrearage amounts. The standard treatment classes are as follows: Schedule D: Secured Portion: Secured Pro rata Unsecured Portion: Unsecured, General Nonpriority Arrearage: Arrearage, Pro rata Schedule E: Priority Portion: Unsecured Priority Unsecured Portion: Unsecured, General Nonpriority Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 183
Schedule F: Unsecured, General Nonpriority Arrearage: Arrearage, Pro rata To change any of the standard classifications of a claim type: On the left side of the screen, in the section labeled Standard Treatment of Claim, you ll see the code for the usual treatment of each type of claim. For each one that you want to change, double click in the field and type the code for the classification that you would like. Classification codes are listed on the right side of the screen. A full description of each type of treatment class can be found in the Reference Table of Treatment Classes section on page 164. Editing Classification Treatments Best Case Bankruptcy contains about 14 different classifications, as listed in the Reference Table of Treatment Classes on page 164. You can change the treatment of any of these classifications, or add your own classifications. Note that you generally do not want to change these plan treatment settings for plan classes that we have pre-defined; think about whether it makes sense to change them before you do! If you are adding your own new class, think carefully about what information will need to be entered for claims in that class. To change settings of a class, highlight the class in the Classification Codes/Treatment section and click Change. The options that you can change are: 1. Special Intention (Special intentions include surrender property, avoid lien -because property is exempt- or Long Term. ) Most classes will be None. 2. The payment method: fixed amount, paid pro rata with other claims in the same category, or not in plan. (Creditors would be treated as Not in Plan if they are being paid directly by the debtor or if, for some reason, you don t want the creditor included in the repayment plan.) 3. The payout rank, which specifies when creditors of this class will be paid in relation to other creditors. See Payout Rank on page 185. 4. The payoff percent. This would be 100 if the creditor is to be paid at all, and 0 if the creditor is not to be paid. 5. Applicability of trustee s fee to this class. 6. Plan treatment entry screen options let you specify the applicability of various entry fields to the type of claim. These options include: the amount (you generally want to hide this, except for classes like Secured pro rata where there may be an arrearage amount which needs to be separated), the payment, (this refers to the monthly payment, which you would hide unless the creditor is getting a fixed monthly amount), the rate, (interest rate - this is not applicable to many claim types), the arrearage, (which should only be shown if you want to be able to split off the arrearage portion), and the term, which refers to the number of months the debtor will take to pay off the claim, again only applicable to creditors given a fixed payment. 7. Make changes as needed, then click OK. Adding Classifications On the right side of the screen, in the section labeled Classification Codes/Treatment, click Insert. Give your new class a 3 or 4 digit unique code, a name, and choose options for the different items, described above in Editing Classification Treatments. When you have made your selections, click OK. 184 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Payout Rank Note that when you make new classifications, the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator will take creditors of the new class into consideration when calculating the plan, but will not print these creditors on the plan, since presumably they do not fall into any of the categories already listed on the plan. For these creditors, you will need to edit the 13 Plan in the Best Case Editor to add explanations and creditor names. See The Best Case Editor on page 202. The payout rank of a claim determines when the claim will be paid in relation to creditors of other classes. The payout ranks of the Chapter 13 Plan Treatment Classes defined by Best Case Solutions are as follows: (Note that you are able to modify any of these payout ranks, or to create your own treatment classes.) Payout Rank 1 Arrearage, fixed payment Attorney fees Filing Fees Secured, fixed payment Secured, fixed payment, 506 N/A Secured long term, in plan Payout Rank 2 Arrearage, paid pro rata Secured, paid pro rata Secured, paid pro rata, 506 N/A Payout Rank 3 Unsecured priority Unsecured, special class, pay 100% Payout Rank 99 Unsecured, nonpriority No payout rank Domestic Support Obligation 507(a)(1)(A) Domestic Support Government 507(a)(1)(B) Not in plan Secured, avoid lien Secured, long term, outside plan Secured, surrender property Undo changes and go back to original settings If you want to cancel any changes you have previously made in the chapter 13 plan setup options, click the Reset 13 button which appears beneath the Trustee s fee section. This will reset your chapter 13 settings to those that were originally shipped with Best Case Bankruptcy. Chapter 5 Chapter 13 Plan Calculator 185
186 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 6 Printing Forms In This Chapter Printing Forms... 188 Printing Options... 189 Privacy Tab... 190 Printing Multiple Copies... 193 Print Preview Function... 193 Printing Double-Sided on Printers that Can t Duplex... 196 Printing Blank Forms... 197 Amending a Form or Petition... 197 Printing Only the New or Changed Items on an Amended Schedule... 197 Creating an Attachment... 198 Replacing a Form with an Attachment You Create... 201 The Best Case Editor... 202 RTF Documents and the Best Case Editor... 202 Working with Forms in Your Word Processor... 215 Saving Merged Forms... 217 Additional Documents Library... 206 Printing Documents in the Additional Documents Library... 207 Merging Several Creditor Records into a Form... 208 Changing Documents in the Additional Documents Library... 209 Adding a Document to the Additional Documents Library... 209 Merge Codes for Adding Documents to the Additional Documents Library211 Chapter 6 Printing Forms 187
Printing Forms 1. From the Client List Window, highlight a client file then click the Forms button. 2. At the Forms and Schedules Menu, select the document or documents that you want to print by clicking in the far right column, next to the scroll bar, under Click below to print----------------v. Or, highlight the form you want to print then press s. 3. If you want to print all documents, double-click in the print column or press S-s. Double-clicking a second time (or pressing S-s again) will remove all the print selections. Time Saver: Right-click on a form then click Print to mark it and open the Print Documents dialog box. 4. When a document is marked to print, a printer icon appears in the print column next to it. Shown below, the Voluntary Petition, Summary of Schedules, and Schedule A are marked to print. The Forms and Schedules Menu with three forms marked to print (If you have trouble knowing where to click, click once on the form to highlight it. A white box appears at the right end of the blue bar marking the form, where the printer icons appear in the picture above. Click in the white box.) When you have marked the documents to print, click the button in the main toolbar. Keyboard Shortcut: With documents marked to print, press C-P to activate the Print button. 5. The Print Documents dialog box appears. To send documents to the printer listed, click the Print button. Or, to select a different printer, click Select. The Options in the Print dialog box are described below under Printing Options. It is not necessary to check any of them. Selecting All Documents to Print To select all of this client s documents for printing, double-click in the print column (to the right of the document names, below the V which appears at the top of the list), or press S-s. All documents will be 188 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
selected, as shown below. This command is a toggle; repeat command to unmark all documents. After marking all documents to print, follow steps 5-6 above. Supplemental Forms Folder: Note that when you mark all documents to print, documents in the Supplemental Forms Folder are not marked, since they are not normally part of the filing. If there is a supplemental form that you always want to print with the rest of the forms, you can move it into the main Forms and Schedules Menu. See Jurisdiction Forms List on page 299 for instructions. Forms and Schedules Menu: all documents selected to print Time Saver: Press S while right-clicking to mark all forms to print (or press S-s). Press S while double right-clicking to mark all forms to print and bring up the Print Documents dialog box. Printing Options The Print Documents dialog box, pictured below, contains several options for printing: Print Documents Dialog Box Buttons: Select button This allows you to send the job to a different printer and specify printer options such as the paper tray, etc. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 189
Print button Click to send selected documents to selected printer. Preview button Click to view documents on the screen before printing. ECFiling button Click to create files for Electronic Filing. (See Electronic Case Filing on page 220.) Edit Form button If you have an Edit Form button, you have selected a form to print that can be edited through the Best Case Editor. Click the button to open the document in the Editor. Only certain documents can be edited through the Best Case Editor. (See The Best Case Editor on page 202 for more information.) Privacy Tab In September 2002, the Judicial Conference approved changes to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure and the Official Forms. These changes implement the Conference s new policy on privacy and public access to electronic court files. This privacy policy states that the courts must collect debtors social security numbers but must store them separately from the case files that are available to the public. The policy requires that only the last four digits of the debtor s social security number be listed on Voluntary and Involuntary Petitions and Proof of Claim forms, and that the person filing the documents is responsible for redacting the first 5 digits. The court is required to include full social security numbers on the notice of the section 341 meeting sent to creditors, but not the copy of this notice that becomes part of the case file. (For more information on the privacy policy, go to: http://www.uscourts.gov/rules/index.html.) The policy also gives debtors the option of listing full account numbers or only the last four digits on Schedules D-F and the Statement of Financial Affairs. Instructions on creditor schedules note that account numbers are useful to the trustee and the creditor so you may want to include them. Or, you may want to show them for some creditors who would have difficulty identifying your clients without them, and mask them for others when privacy is a concern. (For example, you may want to mask them when social security numbers are used as account numbers.) These changes become effective December 1, 2003. The Petition and Schedules were amended to include instructions regarding the new rules, and Schedule I was amended to show that names of dependents are no longer required. The options described below appear on the Privacy Tab of the Print Documents dialog box to allow you to choose whether to print the old or new forms and whether to mask all account numbers, show all account numbers, or mask individual account numbers. December 2003 New Official Forms The default setting is to use the new forms when printing on or after December 1, 2003. Best Case checks your Windows system clock to see today s date. Through this printing option, you can choose whether to use these new forms or the old forms. (We highly recommend that you always use the new forms when filing on or after December 1, 2003. The option to use the old forms was included because we made the option to print the new forms available in our software prior to the December 1 mandatory date.) 190 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Privacy Tab in the Print Documents Dialog Box Mask Social Security Number By default, starting on December 1, 2003, Best Case will mask the debtor s social security number on Voluntary and Involuntary Petitions, the Proof of Claim, and certain local forms that request it. (We ll use your Windows System Clock so be sure this is correct.) Only the last four digits will print on these forms. You ll input the full number in the Voluntary Petition so you have it for your records. The full social security number will print on Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number, a document stored separately at the court. By changing this option in the Privacy Tab, you can print these documents with full social security numbers which you might want to keep for your records. Mask Creditor Account Numbers By default, Best Case will allow you to mask individual claims by checking the Mask on Form box in each creditor entry screen. All but the last four digits will be masked. If you select one of the other options, Show All Account Numbers or Mask All Account Numbers, Best Case will ignore the Mask on Form choices and will print or mask account numbers for all claims. The account number masking option applies to creditor Schedules D-F, the Statement of Financial Affairs, the creditor address matrix (if you have opted to include account numbers in the matrix through the Setup Menu), and certain local forms that request account numbers. Unlike the Voluntary Petition, where the first five digits are required to be obscured, the debtor may choose to list full account numbers on schedules and other places. The Save Current Privacy Options as Default button allows you to save your preferences for privacy options. Globally Changing Mask on Form Choices If you are using our default choice to mask account numbers of individual claims, we rely on your choice in the Mask on Form check box for each creditor entry. If you find that you want to change the Mask on Form choice for most or all of your claims, you can use a quick option in the File menu to avoid editing each claim. Go to File/Change All Mask Checkboxes. Here you can choose to Mask All Account Numbers (check the Mask box) or Show All Account Numbers (remove the check in the Mask box). You can choose to apply this option to any or all creditor schedules. Notice that if you choose to show all account numbers, an option appears at the bottom to mask account numbers which contain the debtor s social security number. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 191
Changes you make in this screen apply to this client only. An option in the Preferences section of your Setup Menu allows you to choose whether the Mask on Form box is checked by default for each new creditor you add. See Preferences on page 314. Options Note that you can have several options checked and that you can have none checked. If you don t like using the mouse, you can mark any of the options below by pressing A and the underlined letter. Print date on signature lines. When checked, this option will put today s date (or any other text that you enter in the text box) on signature lines. The text box appears when you check this option. Print blank forms. When checked, forms will print without any client data. Blank forms can be used as client interview sheets or for reference in the office. (Also see the client questionnaires in the Supplemental Forms Folder, described on page 122.) Print Draft on Forms. This option puts the word Draft in the background on forms. Client information will still be legible. Use this option when you want to proofread forms before filing, and when you want to differentiate between early versions and the final version the client is to sign. Print date and time in top margin. This option inserts today s date and time of printing (from your computer s clock). Use this option if you print several versions before the final and want to know the difference between them. Print Amended in Form Title. This option inserts the word Amended in the form title. Use this when you want to file an amended form with the court. When you check this choice, a text box will appear allowing you to type the exact text that you want to insert into the form title. A textbox appears when you choose this option allowing you to change the text that prints. By default, the answer is AMENDED but you can change it to CONVERTED or other short text. Note that you can type about 30 characters in this box, but for forms with long titles, long text answers will be truncated. Include only items marked Amended (on Sched A-H + matrix). For Schedules A-H, there is an amended check box on each entry screen. Some courts want only new or changed items to appear on amended schedules and the creditor address matrix. To print just the new or changed items, identify those items by checking the amended box on each item s entry screen, then check this option and the one above when printing. (Also see Amending a Form or Petition on page 197.) Print signature pages only. For the forms that you have marked to print, this option prints pages which ask for the debtor s signature. If the form marked to print does not have a signature portion, all pages will be printed. To have the signature portion of the Statement of Financial Affairs and Form 8 print separately from the rest of the form, see Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. 192 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Do NOT print signature pages. Use this option when you want only the pages without the debtor s signature lines to print. Print /s/ <name> on signature lines (electronic filing). This option can be used when you are submitting a pdf file of the forms to courts that accept electronic filings. If your client s name is Joseph Sample and you check this option, /s/ Joseph Sample will print on signature lines which is used in lieu of the debtor s signature. Of the printing options, your preference for three of them will be remembered each time: Print date on signature lines, Print date and time in top margin, and Print /s/ <name> on signature lines. We have made Best Case remember your choices here because we don t think you ll want to change these three options much. However, you are free to select or deselect any of the options each time you print. Note that you can have several options checked and that you can have none checked. Printing Multiple Copies In the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight the form that you want to print multiple copies of and press the C and the + key in the number keypad on the right side of your keyboard. Each time you press C-+, the number of copies will be increased. To decrease the number of copies, press C--. To change the number of copies for all forms, press A-+ and A--.The number of copies to be printed is displayed as shown: The Voluntary Petition Two copies will print Print Preview Function If you want to preview documents before printing: 1. Follow steps 1-5 under Printing Forms on page 188. You can select one document, several documents, or all documents to preview at once. 2. When the Print Documents box appears, click the Preview button. The number of copies to print is displayed here. The Print Preview Window Chapter 6 Printing Forms 193
The readability of the preview screen depends on the video resolution of your computer. If the preview is not readable, zoom in by clicking the left mouse button or pressing the gray + key in the number keypad on the right side of your keyboard. (Zoom out by clicking the right mouse button or pressing the - in the number keypad on the right side of your keyboard.) Toolbar Icons in Print Preview The following icons appear in the print preview window: Page Navigation Searching For Text Marking Pages Deleting A Page Preview Setup Dialog Fitting Page to Window Thumbnails Create PDF of this form Printing: One Page Printing: Report Exiting Preview Zooming Left Mouse Right Mouse Gray + Gray - tblr Zoom IN Zoom OUT Zoom IN Zoom OUT Scroll Up, down, left or right Page Navigation Go to first page or Hh or C-u Go to previous page or u (press first if you want to jump an entire page instead of a screen.) Go to next page or d (press first if you want to jump an entire page instead of a screen.) Go to last page or e or C-d GO TO page by page number or G Searching For Text These buttons are used to perform text searches within your report. Find previous occurrence or S-3 194 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Set text search options Match case performs case sensitive search. or F (for find) Whole word or phrase will check the preceding and following characters when a match is found. Mark ALL pages found will do just that. All pages which contain a match to the search text will be flagged. Delete un-marked pages. Be careful using this option since it will remove all pages NOT having a match. If no pages are found which contain a match to the search text then no pages will be deleted. Find next occurrence or 3 Marking Pages These buttons mark (flag) and unmark pages which you want to print. Mark by range Unmark all. Mark all. or R or U or A Mark/Unmark this page (single page view only). s (toggle) Deleting A Page Delete current page. (Note that when you delete a page from print preview, your client data is not affected. You are just deleting the page for this print job. If you were to print the document again, all pages would print.) Preview Setup Dialog This button or V (for View/Print Defaults) allows you to preset your viewing and printing preferences. Fitting Page To Window Active only during single page view or thumbnail zoom, these buttons will zoom the current page to full available width or full available height of the viewing window. Fit to width. Fit to height. or press W key or press H key Thumbnails These buttons toggle between 2 pages, 4 pages or 6 pages displayed on the screen at once. 2 pages. 2 (press 2 again to return to 1 page view) 4 pages. 4 (press 4 again to return to 1 page view) 6 pages. 6 (press 6 again to return to 1 page view) 1 will also return to 1 page view while in any thumbnail view. T will toggle between all selected views as set in Preview Setup Dialog. While in thumbnail view, double-left click to zoom. Press E to go back to several pages per screen. Double Click Left Mouse (E to go back to several pages per screen) Marking a Page: Chapter 6 Printing Forms 195
Right-click on the page when in thumbnail view. Printing: One Page This button, or C-P, will open the printing dialog to print the current page. Printing: Report This button, or R, will open the printing dialog window to print the current report. If any pages have been marked, only these pages will be printed. Creating a PDF Click this button to create a PDF document of the pages in the preview window. Once you click it, the Save dialog box appears prompting you for a file name and location. The default directory is ECF\<client name>, and we strongly recommend that you accept the default. This will ensure that all of your PDF documents for this case will be in the same directory and you will be able to view, find, and upload them easily through the ECF Manager feature. Once the file has been created, it will automatically be opened for you in Adobe Acrobat so that you can view it. Electronic Filing is described more fully starting on page 220. Exiting Preview Cancel and return to the Forms and Schedules Menu. (Or press E.) Printing Double-Sided on Printers that Can t Duplex This option in the print preview screen allows you to print double-sided on printers that do not have a duplexing option. This is a paper-saver option for office copies or drafts, but you may not be able to file double-sided documents with the court. This feature works by first printing every odd page, allowing you to reload the paper, then printing every even page on the reverse side. Before printing a full set of forms, you ll need to know which side of the paper your printer prints on, the top or the bottom. If you don t know, just draw an X on one side of one page and print a test page to see which side it prints on. When you know which side the printer prints on: 1. Mark the document or documents to print in the Forms and Schedules Menu, then click the Print button in the toolbar. 2. In the Print Documents dialog box, click Preview. 3. Click the button. 4. When the Report Destination dialog box appears, click the Options tab. 5. Click the Print both sides check box then click the Print button. (The Print button will print the report then return you to the Forms and Schedules Menu. The Print and Remain button will print the report but stay in print preview. You can use either.) 6. If this is the first time you ve used the double-sided printing option with this printer and with this computer, a wizard will appear asking you questions about your printer. Go through the wizard, answering questions appropriately. Your answers will be remembered for next time. 7. When you click the Finish button, the printer will print all odd numbered pages. 8. Retrieve these from the output bin and insert them into the printer again so that the printer will print even numbered pages on the blank sides on the second pass, then click the Continue button. (For standard laser printers, you ll just retrieve the paper stack from the out bin, then insert the stack face down in the paper tray. There is no need to reorder the paper before the second pass.) 196 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Printing Blank Forms In Best Case Bankruptcy, you can print blank forms to use for your client interview or for reference in the office. (Also see the Client Questionnaires in the Supplemental Forms folder.) To print blank forms: 1. You ll first need to decide what chapter of filing and type of debtor you want as these choices affect the list of forms produced. 2. From the Client List Window, highlight a client of appropriate chapter and type of debtor and click the Forms button. (If you don t have any clients of this chapter and type, add one first.) 3. In the Forms and Schedules Menu, mark a form to print by clicking in the print column to the right of the form name, or mark all forms to print by double-clicking in the print column. (S-s also marks all forms to print.) 4. Click the Print button in the toolbar. 5. In the Print Documents dialog box, under Options, click in the check box labeled Print blank forms. 6. If you want to preview forms on the screen before printing, you can click the Preview button. Otherwise, just click Print. Amending a Form or Petition When filing an amended form, you can easily put the word Amended in the title when printing with Best Case Bankruptcy. If you re filing an amendment and know the case number, you can input it in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition, in the lower left corner. 1. Mark the form or forms to print in the Forms and Schedule Menu by clicking in the Print column. (Described in greater detail in Printing Forms above.) 2. Click the Print button in the toolbar. 3. Under Options, click Print Amended in form title then click Print. Note that this option does not apply to the Creditor Address Matrix, which does not have a printed title. Note that your local court may have additional forms or motions that you need to file when filing an amendment. Check your local rules for this information. Printing Only the New or Changed Items on an Amended Schedule When filing an amended Schedule A H or an amended creditor address matrix, some courts want only the new or changed items listed, while some want you to list all original information and all new information. First, you ll need to find out which your court requires. If your court wants only the new or changed items listed on the amended schedule: 1. Go into the schedule which you need to amend and make the necessary changes by editing current records and/or adding new records. 2. Each entry screen for Schedules A-H has a check box in the bottom left-hand corner marked Amended as pictured below. For each item that you want to print on your amended form, check this box. Note that when you return to the summary list window for this schedule, an (A) appears next to each amended item. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 197
Check this box to indicate that this item has been amended and should print on the Amended form. An Amended item on Schedule D 3. When you are ready to print, mark the form to print, then click the Print button in the toolbar. 4. Under options, check Print Amended in form title and the option beneath it labeled Include only items marked Amended then click Print. Note that the word amended does not appear on the matrix since no courts that we know of want it there. For Schedules D-F, additional notice parties associated with amended creditors will appear in the matrix. On Schedule B, the None boxes will not be checked when you are preparing an amended-items-only schedule, since checking the None column for a supplementary form is somewhat misleading. Removing All Amended Checkmarks An option in the File Menu allows you to remove all checks from the Amended checkboxes. You might use this feature if you have a large case and are creating a second amendment to a form, and want to clear the previously selected amended items. To remove all Amended checkmarks: 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, click File/Clear All Amended Checkboxes. 2. A dialog box appears asking you to choose which schedules you want to clear the checkboxes for, and indicating how many items you have marked as amended on each form. Make your choice then click Clear Amended. Creating an Attachment What is an Attachment in Best Case Bankruptcy? In Best Case Bankruptcy, you can add attachments to documents listed in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Each attachment is a separate document that lists additional information not captured in the main form or schedule. You can add an unlimited number of attachments to each document. You can include attachments when printing forms or creating documents for electronic filing. At the top of each attachment, the form title, the debtor s name, and the attachment print title (e.g. Attachment A ) appear. Note that attachments are not the same as continuation sheets, which Best Case Bankruptcy adds for you automatically when you add a lot of items to Schedules A-H. Attachments are specifically for additional information not captured in the form; for example, if you want to itemize many other expenses on Schedule J, include a lengthy property description on Schedule D, or add an explanation for an unusual or confusing answer, you would use an attachment. You can also use the Attachment Editor and the BestScan feature to Attach a scanned document such as pay stubs or the deed to a house. For more information about BestScan see Scanning Documents with BestScan: on page 230. 198 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
For a few documents, such as Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheets and Proof of Claim forms, you cannot add attachments because they use a special printing process. However, you could create an attachment for one of these documents and attach it to a different form. Adding Attachments 1. Select a form: You first need to select your main document. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight the document you would like to add an attachment to then click the Attach button at the bottom of the window, or press A-t 2. Add an Attachment: The attachments list screen appears. Click Insert to add a new attachment. You can add a standard attachment into which you will type text, which is described below, or a PDF attachment, which you might choose if you had a scanned document in PDF format that you needed to include when filing electronically. PDF Attachments are described in Chapter 5, starting on page 230. Choose Standard Attachment to type a text attachment. 3. Type your text: The attachment appears in the Best Case Editor, a built-in word processor in Best Case Bankruptcy. Notice that the caption, title of the main form, and title for the attachment (Attachment A, B etc.) have been inserted for you. You can change these by typing over them if you want. Type the text of your attachment. For detailed instructions on using the various formatting tools available in the Best Case Editor, refer to the section Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor on page 203. 4. Save your document: When you are ready, click File/Save to save this attachment. The Save dialog box appears with common answers marked: The Save Dialog Box for Attachments 5. The Name is the title you will use to refer to this document, and does not actually print on the form. It defaults to Attachment A for the first attachment you create for this form, Attachment B for the second, etc., just like the printed title. 6. Attach to Form refers to how you will access the document and where it will print. It defaults to the form where you created the attachment, but you can select a different document from the list. 7. When does this document print? Your choices here are Before Form, After Form, Replaces Form and Do Not Print. The first three options are in relation to the form the document is attached to, and After Form is the most common choice. When creating an attachment, you generally would not want to use the Replaces Form choice, as this would replace the main document (Schedule I in the example above) with the attachment. Click Save to Case to save the document. 8. After saving, click File/Exit to close the Best Case Editor, and click Close to exit the list of attachments. 9. Back in the Forms and Schedules Menu, you ll notice that a paperclip appears on top of the form icon next to your document indicating that there is an attachment. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 199
Editing and Reordering Attachments To make changes to an attachment that you have already created, go to the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight your document, and click the Attach button. The list screen appears containing all attachments that you have created for this document. Attachment List Window for Schedule I: Two attachments are listed Editing an attachment: To edit an attachment, highlight it and click Edit. The document will appear in the Best Case Editor. Make your changes then click File/Save to save them. Click File/Exit to close the Editor. Reordering an attachment: To reorder an attachment in the list, highlight it and click to move up or to move down. You may then want to edit the print titles of the attachments to reflect the new order. Changing Attachment Options Choices in the Attachment Options screen allow you to change the name of an attachment, the document it is attached to, where and if the attachment prints, and whether the attachment is included in the page count on the Summary of Schedules. To access these options, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight the document your attachment is associated with and click the Attach button in the bottom left corner. Highlight the attachment name and click the Options button. The options window appears as pictured below: The Attachment Options Screen The first three options on this screen are described in the section Adding Attachments beginning on page 199, in steps 5-7, as they are the same options that appeared in the Save dialog box. If this attachment is attached to a Schedule A-H and you check the box labeled Omit from Page Count, the attachment will not be included in the number of pages in the Summary of Schedules. Otherwise, it will be included. Printing Attachments When you print your main document from the Forms and Schedules Menu, the attachment will print with it unless you have checked the Do Not Print option mentioned above. You can also print the attachment from the attachments list screen: from the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight the main document and click Attach. Then, highlight your attachment and click the Print button. 200 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Replacing a Form with an Attachment You Create For a particular client, the attachment feature can be used to replace the standard version of a form with the version that you have edited in the Best Case Editor. Note that this replace option is on a case-by-case basis only. Replacing a form DOES NOT make permanent changes to the form for other cases. It simply replaces the form that is automatically generated by Best Case Bankruptcy with one edited by you for this particular case. The most common application of this feature would be for a Chapter 13 Plan, which often needs to be customized for a particular case. Using attachments, you can open the Chapter 13 Plan in the Best Case Editor, then save it as an attachment that actually replaces the form produced by Best Case Bankruptcy. Then, when you print forms or create documents for electronic filing, you will get the edited version of the 13 plan instead of the regular version. To create an attachment that replaces a form: 1. Enter all information that you can through the entry screen for that form. If this is a Chapter 13 Plan, make sure you have finished inputting information regarding creditors and the plan and have calculated a workable repayment plan. After replacing the main document using the steps below, you won t be able to get back to the entry screen for the form and have your changes reflected in the edited version of the document, so you will want to make sure you have made your changes in entry screens before replacing the form. 2. Your next step depends on whether you want to start your document from scratch (that is, start with an essentially blank document), or edit an existing document that appears in the Forms and Schedules Menu: a. To edit an existing document: Only certain documents can be opened through the Best Case Editor. Highlight the document you want to edit then mark only that document to print in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Click the Print button in the toolbar to open the Print Documents dialog box. For documents that can be edited, an Edit Form button appears. Click it to open your document in the Editor. b. To start from scratch: Create an attachment using steps 1-2 in Adding Attachments on page 199. 3. Make your changes in the Editor, then choose File/Save As in the Editor menu bar. 4. Choose Replaces Form in the Save dialog box. Click File/Exit to exit the Best Case Editor. 5. Back in the Forms and Schedules Menu, you ll see that the word Replaced appears in brackets in front of the form name as pictured below. When you print this document, you will get the version that you edited through the Best Case Editor. A Chapter 13 Plan Replaced with an Edited Version Using the Best Case Editor. If you double-click on the document from the Forms and Schedules Menu, you will get the Attachments window instead of the entry screen for this form. The Attachments window will contain a message that says The normally generated document has been replaced by an attachment. This window and message are to warn you that changes you make in the entry screen for the form will not be reflected in your attachment, which has already been saved. If you want to access the entry screen for the form anyway, you can either click the Options button and change where the document prints from Replaces Form to After Form, or you can delete the attachment, edit the entry screen, then create a new attachment from scratch which will replace the main document. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 201
The Best Case Editor RTF Documents and the Best Case Editor Certain local, supplemental and Official forms are included in Best Case Bankruptcy as RTF files (rich text format) so that you can easily edit them through the Best Case Editor feature when you need to add lengthier explanations. Documents that can be opened in the Best Case Editor include most local forms, all Chapter 13 plans, the Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules, the Attorney Compensation Statement, the Voluntary Petition, Exhibit C to the Voluntary Petition, Form 3. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments, Form 4. Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims, Notice to Individual Debtor of Available Chapters, Form 6. Summary of Schedules, Form 7. Statement of Financial Affairs, Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention, Schedule I. Current Income of Individual Debtors, Schedule J. Current Expenditures of Individual Debtors, and the Verification of Creditor Address Matrix. When you print any of these RTF documents by itself, you ll see an Edit Form button in the Print Documents Dialog box as pictured below. When you click this button, the document will appear in the Best Case Editor. Note that the Edit Form button only appears if you have just marked one document to print. If you mark several documents, it will not appear. The Edit Form button will not appear for most forms, as most forms are not currently included as RTF documents. The Edit Form button appears when a document can be opened in the Best Case Editor QuickForms and the Best Case Editor The Best Case Editor is also available for QuickForms. QuickForms are local or occasionallyused forms which require information about the debtor that is not captured in Best Case Bankruptcy. Since these forms are not required in most districts, we did not create custom entry screens for them. However, we wanted to give you the flexibility to add text to them, so they are included as RTF (rich text format) documents which can easily be filled in through the Best Case Editor. When you go to print these forms, they will automatically appear in the Best Case Editor. Each QuickForm is indicated with a Q icon next to it in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Most QuickForms are in either the Supplemental Forms folder or a Local Forms folder at the bottom of your Forms and Schedules Menu. Not all districts have Local Forms folders. 202 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
To open a QuickForm in the Best Case Editor, just double-click on it in the Forms and Schedules Menu. The QuickForms Options dialog box appears. When you click OK, the document appears in the Best Case Editor. Editing RTF documents and QuickForms in the Best Case Editor The Best Case Editor has basic word processing capabilities. You can choose the font, size and attributes of text, add and delete text, and use the ruler at the top to indent lines or set tabs. To add text, just insert the cursor where you want your text to appear, then begin to type. To remove text, just insert the cursor to the right of the text and press the B key, or highlight a large block of text with the mouse and press B. For other editing options, see Options in the Best Case Editor on page 204. Printing from the Best Case Editor Documents will print to your default Windows printer using the default paper tray and printer options. If you want to change the printer settings before printing, choose File/Printer Setup and make your choices, then follow the steps below. 1. To print, choose File/Print from the main menu. 2. Choose the Print Range (generally the entire file) and the number of copies, then click OK. Importing a Scanned Document into the Best Case Editor The BestScan feature in the Best Case Editor makes it easy for you to include a scanned document in the Petition.PDF or Plan.PDF you file with the court. To import a scanned document, click Insert in the menu bar of the Best Case Editor, and then select Insert Picture/Scan > From Scanner... The BestScan window opens and walks you through importing the scanned image into your Best Case Editor document. For more information about BestScan see Scanning Documents with BestScan: on page 230. Creating a PDF from the Best Case Editor Because edited documents can be saved in the client file, either as attachments to forms or replacements of forms, you generally would not need to create PDFs from the Editor directly unless this is a local or supplemental form that does not print with other documents in the Forms and Schedules Menu. However, this feature is available for you. After making changes in the Editor, click File/Create PDF File. The default file location is the ECF\<client name> folder, which is where all other electronic files will be stored for this client. We strongly recommend that you accept this directory so that you can easily view, edit, and upload all PDF files for this client through the ECF Manager. After you click OK, your document will appear in Adobe Acrobat so that you can review it. You can access the document at any time through the ECF Manager for this client. More information about electronic filing can be found starting on page 220. Print Preview To preview documents on the screen before printing, choose File/Print Preview from the Best Case Editor Menu. To exit preview mode, click the Edit button or File/Exit Print Preview. Saving Documents When you edit a document in the Best Case Editor, you are not actually editing the data record for the debtor in Best Case, as you are when you enter information through Best Case entry screens like the Voluntary Petition window. Instead, you are editing a text document that has information about the debtor filled in for you. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 203
If you want to save changes to a document, choose File/Save. The Save Document in Case dialog box appears, asking you for the name of the document, which form to attach it to, and where to print it. The name is for your reference only and does not print. Type in your answer. The edited document can either be saved as an attachment to a main document, or as a replacement for a main document. The difference between the two is described below. The Save Document dialog box in the Best Case Editor Replaces Form: In general, if you have edited a document to fill in additional information or type an explanation, you would choose the Replaces Form option so that your edited document will print from the main Forms and Schedules Menu instead of the original form. Note that changes that you make to the form apply to this case only, not to all cases. Print Before Form or After Form: If, instead, you choose to print this document Before Form or After Form, the original will be saved and your edited version will be saved as an attachment to the original. Both forms will print when you print the main document from the Forms and Schedules Menu. Do Not Print: Use this option if you never want to print this document automatically from the Forms and Schedules Menu. If checked, you will still be able to print it from the Best Case Editor or the attachment list screen. Click Save to Case to save the document. This document is now a part of this client s file in Best Case. Opening Multiple Documents in the Best Case Editor: Generally, you ll only need to have one document at a time open in the Best Case Editor. Advanced users may want to have multiple documents open. An option in the Preferences section of your Setup Menu allows you to have multiple Best Case Editor sessions running so that you can open multiple documents. See Preferences on page 316. Where Did the Editor Go? When you open the Best Case Editor, you ll notice that a new button appears in the Taskbar at the bottom of your screen, as pictured below. If you switch to another Windows program while working in the Editor, you will need to click this button to get back into the Editor. The Best Case Editor is a separate utility that can run at the same time as Best Case Bankruptcy. Options in the Best Case Editor Basic Editing Tools Choose File/Page Layout to specify the margin settings for your document. 204 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Edit menu options let you cut, copy and paste. (Or you can use the standard Windows keyboard commands (Cut=C-X, Copy=C-C and Paste=C-V). It also contains an option to undo your latest change (or press C-Z). The View menu lets you choose what tools show on your screen as you are editing. It also contains the zoom function. The Format menu option has basic formatting tools for formatting text, paragraphs, and tabs. The Tools menu option has a spell-check feature. The Table menu option allows you to insert and format tables in your document. Note: The unit of measurement in the Table menu is the twip, a twentieth of a point. There are 1440 twips per inch. When specifying exact row heights, you ll generally want at least 360 twips, or about ¼ inch. The Search menu option allows you to search for specific text. (The keyboard shortcut is C-F.) To Search and Replace, choose Replace from the Search submenu, or press C-H. To find the next occurrence, press 3 or choose Search/Find Next. To find the previous occurrence, press C-3 or choose Search/Find Previous. Repaginating When you add a lot of text to a document, you may need to use the Repaginate command to have the Editor redraw the document on the screen. If the formatting starts to look strange as you add tables or large amounts of text, click Edit/Repaginate. Importing RTF Documents from Other Applications If you have created a document in another application such as Word or WordPerfect and want to paste in that document, you ll first need to save the document in the original application in RTF format. (Just choose File/Save As and switch to the RTF format.) Then, either create an attachment to a form or open a document from the Forms and Schedules Menu that can be edited. With a document open in the Best Case Editor, insert the cursor where you would like your document inserted. Choose File/Import From Disk into Document. The dialog box pictured below appears. Choose whether to insert your document at the cursor location, at the end of the document, or to replace the current document. Importing Your RTF into a Document in the Best Case Editor Saving to Your Hard Drive A separate option accessible under File/Export Document to Disk allows you to save a copy of this document to a separate location on your hard drive or network. If you do this, you should still choose File/Save and save to the client s file so that this document will be accessible in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 205
Printing Multiple Copies of a Document If you need to edit an RTF document but want to print multiple copies, just edit your document in the Best Case Editor then click File/Print and change the number of copies. If you increase the number of copies in the Print Documents dialog box before going into the Best Case Editor, only one copy of the document will print. Exiting the Best Case Editor To exit, choose File/Exit. You will be asked if you want to save changes to your document if you have made any changes. If you don t want to save changes, just click No. If you do want to save changes, click Yes then see Saving Documents on page 203. Additional Documents Library The Additional Documents Library contains customizable forms and documents that may be useful when filing a case, such as mailing labels, envelopes, and motions. You also have the ability to add your own forms and letters to the Additional Documents Library. You can access the Additional Documents Library by clicking the Additional Documents tab in the Forms and Schedules Menu. All documents in the Additional Documents Library are created using a mail merge process with your word processing software. Some of these documents may not be appropriate for use in your district. Some of these documents will require you to input additional information through your word processing software that is not captured in Best Case Bankruptcy. It is the responsibility of the attorney filing the case to make sure that documents filed are complete and acceptable to the court. Best Case Solutions, Inc. assumes no responsibility for users who file inaccurate or incomplete documents with the court. The Additional Documents Library contains the following documents: Client Letter (a blank template into which you can insert text) Creditor Address List - #10 Envelope Creditor Address List - 3X9 mailing labels (3 columns, 9 rows) Creditor Address List - 3X10 mailing labels (3 columns, 10 rows) Creditor Address List - BANCAP (single column format) Creditor Envelope #10 (All Creditors) Creditor Envelope #10 (Pick one creditor) Creditor Letter - Notice of Filing/Automatic Stay (Pick one creditor) Client Envelope w/ Return Address (#10) Client Envelope w/ Return Address (6 x9 ) 206 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Creditor Envelope (#10) (Pick multiple creditors) Creditor Envelope w/ Return Address (#10) (Pick multiple creditors) Creditor Envelope w/ Return Address (6 x9 ) (Pick multiple creditors) Creditor Mailing Labels (2x6) (Pick multiple creditors) Creditor Mailing Labels (3x10) (Pick multiple creditors) Creditor Mailing Labels (3x9) (Pick multiple creditors) Best Case also provides Additional Documents related to all of the debtors in the Client List. To access these documents, click the drop-down arrow next to the Export Data field at the top of the Additional Documents window and choose All Clients (Client List). Client Envelope w/ Return Address (#10) (multiple by client filter) Client Envelope w/ Return Address (6 x9 ) (multiple by client filter) Client Letter (blank template for you to modify) (multiple by client filter) Client Mailing Labels (2x6) (multiple by client filter) Client Mailing Labels (3x10) (multiple by client filter) Client Mailing Labels (3x9) (multiple by client filter) Client Report (Client List w/ Attorney Info) Client Report (Client List w/ General Info) You can also add your own documents to this list, which is described later in this section. Note: In addition to the documents listed above, long time users of Best Case may see several other forms listed in their Additional Documents Library. These documents are obsolete and no longer updated. Newer versions of the forms can be found in the Supplemental Forms folder as described on page 114. Printing Documents in the Additional Documents Library To use a document in the Additional Documents Library: 1. From the Client List Window, double-click on the name of the client you want to use. 2. At the Forms and Schedules Menu, click on the Additional Documents tab at the top of the window. 3. Click on the name of the document you want to use to highlight it. To jump to the document you want, start to type the document s name. The text you have typed appears in the top of the window, next to the Additional Documents Tab, and the correct document will be highlighted. Just press R to open the merge dialog box. 4. Click on the Merge/Edit/Print button in the bottom right-hand corner of the window. 5. A Merge Additional Documents box appears. If you have compatible versions of both Word and WordPerfect installed, you will be asked which program you want to use. Mark your choice by clicking on it, then click Merge. 6. Depending on which document you selected, you may be asked to select relevant information before the form will open in your word processor. For example, you may be asked to choose a creditor or may be asked what to do about duplicate creditors. 7. Best Case Bankruptcy will merge the client information into a document in your word processing software. When the merge process is complete, the document will be opened for you in your word processing software. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 207
8. If you merged one of the motions or forms, you may need to fill in additional answers in Word or WordPerfect. Likewise, if there are changes that you want to make in the document for this client, you make them in the word processing software. Be sure to proofread your final documents to ensure that they are complete and accurate. 9. You can then click File then Print from the main menu bar and print just like you would any Word/WordPerfect Document. Documents can also be saved. You must use the Save As command in your File menu and save them to a directory other than c:\bestcase\temp. All documents in the temp directory are erased whenever you print from Best Case Bankruptcy. Note that saving a merged document applies to the edited version for this client only. To make changes to the document that will apply every time you merge, see Changing Documents in the Additional Documents Library on page 209. Merging Several Creditor Records into a Form Certain forms use the export data type Pick ONE Creditor. (Motion to Avoid Judicial Lien on Personal Property, Motion to Avoid Judicial Lien on Real Property, Motion to Avoid Nonpossessory Nonpurchase-Money Security Interest). When you select one of these documents listed in the sidebar to print, you ll be asked to select the creditor that you want to create the document for. If you want to create this document for several or all of your creditors, you can make a quick change to the document to merge all the forms at once: 1. Highlight the document and click Change. 2. Change the Export Data type to Pick MULTIPLE Creditors then click OK. 3. When you highlight the document and click Merge/Edit/Print, a dialog box appears as pictured below. Click on each creditor that you want to create the form for, or click one of the Mark Sch D/E/F buttons to mark all creditors from a particular schedule. Click OK when you have made your choices. The Multiple Address Selector allows you to merge forms for multiple creditors in a case The tabs at the top of the window allow you to select contract/lease parties from Schedule G or codebtors from Schedule H. The Mark All, Unmark All and Mk Amended buttons allow you to select or deselect creditors in the tab you are looking at; in the picture above, these buttons just apply to Schedules D, E and F. If you clicked the Schedule G tab, the same buttons would apply to Schedule G records, etc. The Mark ANP check box allows you to select additional notice parties as well. When your document appears in Word or WordPerfect, there will be a separate page for each creditor. 208 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Changing Documents in the Additional Documents Library Changes you make using this feature will remain each time you use this document, with any of your clients. This allows you to customize forms to your needs. If you want to use advanced formatting in your document, consult the manual that came with your word processing software. Best Case technical support staff cannot help you with your word processing software. To edit a form in the Additional Documents Library: 1. In the Additional Documents Library, highlight a form and press A-E. 2. If you have both Word and WordPerfect installed, you will be asked which you want to use. Make your choice then click Edit ADL. 3. The document appears in your word processing software. You can add text to customize this document to your needs. Field Codes: A list of field codes appears on page 211. If you mistakenly delete merge codes or make other irreversible changes by accident, exit the document without saving and begin again from step 1. 4. When you have finished editing, save and close the document, and return to Best Case Bankruptcy. 5. Whenever you merge this document from the Additional Documents screen, the document will appear with the changes you have made. (If you edited the document in Word, your changes will not appear in the WordPerfect version of the document, and vice versa.) Adding a Document to the Additional Documents Library To add documents to the Additional Documents Library, you must have one of the following word processing packages installed on your computer: WordPerfect for Windows version 6.1, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0 or 10.0 or Microsoft Word 97, 2000, or XP. This procedure requires sophisticated knowledge of your word processing program and its merge functions. If you are not proficient with advanced formatting, merge codes, and merging data into your word processing software, consult the manual that came with your word processing software or any of the numerous books that are available which explain these functions. To make sure that Best Case Technical Support staff are available to answer questions specifically regarding Best Case Bankruptcy, please understand that our staff cannot provide support for word processing products. You can add letters or local forms to the Additional Documents Library for use with any of your client files. There are several data types, each with its own set of data fields. Data fields available include all information on the Voluntary Petition (including debtor s name, address, and social security number), names and addresses of all creditors in a case, data in the Notes section of the program, some information from the attorney compensation statement, and the name and address of any one creditor in a case. One data type gives you basic information about all of your bankruptcy clients. Overview: Adding documents requires 4 basic steps, described in greater detail below: a) Create the document in Word or WordPerfect and save it in the appropriate subdirectory, giving it a file name Best Case Bankruptcy can understand. (Guidelines below). b) Go into the Additional Documents Library in Best Case Bankruptcy and insert a new document. Specify the name you want to appear in the list, the type of data you ll be using, and the actual file name. c) Use the Edit function in the Additional Documents Library to open the form in your word processing software and insert merge codes. Save and close the file. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 209
d) When merge codes are inserted, you ll return to Best Case Bankruptcy where you can print the form from the Additional Documents Library with any of your client files. Detailed Instructions 1. Start in Word or WordPerfect. Create your document, formatting it just the way you want it to appear, except without the merge codes. 2. When you have finished, you will need to save the file to the correct directory, and with a name that follows the following guidelines: a) If it was created in WordPerfect, save the file in the Adl_wp sub-directory of the bestcase directory. Give the file an 8 character file name with the file extension frm. b) If the document was created in Word, save it in the Adl_ms sub-directory of the bestcase directory. Give the file an 8 character file name with the extension wfm. Because some versions of Word automatically add the doc extension to all files, you ll need to put your entire file name in quotes to save it with the wfm extension. E.g. - type CLLETTER.WFM with the quotes for the file name. 3. Close the file and return to the Additional Documents Screen in Best Case Bankruptcy. 4. Click the Insert button in the lower left corner to add your document to the list of documents. 5. A window appears with Additional Document Information in the title bar. Type a description, which is the way the document will be listed on this screen, then press T. For the file name, enter the 8 character file name which you gave to your document, without the extension. 6. Select the type of data that is to be merged into your document, then click OK. A complete list of field names appears on the next page. Your data type choices are: a) Voluntary Petition Information, which includes all debtor information listed on the Voluntary Petition, Attorney Compensation Statement, Application to pay filing fee in installments, and information from the Client Notes section. b) Pick ONE Creditor - complete with Voluntary Petition Information, which contains the name and address of any creditor you select plus debtor information contained in the Voluntary Petition data type above. c) Pick MULTIPLE Creditors, Contracts, Codebtors complete with Voluntary Petition Information, which contains the same field codes as the Pick ONE creditor data type, but will create a separate form for each creditor chosen. With this data type, you can choose parties from Schedule D, E, F, G or H. d) ALL Creditors and others on Master Mailing Matrix - Name/ address /acct. no only, which contains the names and addresses of all creditors in the case, along with any additional notice parties, WITHOUT debtor information. e) ALL Creditors and others on Master Mailing Matrix Complete with Voluntary Petition Information, which gives you the names and addresses of all creditors and additional notice parties, along with debtor information in the Voluntary Petition data type above. f) Client List Information, which gives you information for each client from the Client Notes section of the program and some information from the Attorney Compensation statement and Chapter 13 plan. Use this data type if you want to do a mailing to all of your bankruptcy clients. The Creditor Address Matrix option is reserved for use by our programmers. You won t be able to edit documents which use this data type, however, the ALL Creditors and others on Master Mailing Matrix - Name/ address/acct. no data type contains the same information. 7. After you have clicked OK, your document is listed in the Additional Documents Screen. With the document highlighted, press A-E to edit the document, then click the Edit ADL button. 210 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
8. Your document will appear in Word or WordPerfect. You can then insert the merge codes. Troubleshooting: If you receive an error message that says The document cannot be created because the form file (file name) was not found, you have not saved the document properly. Resave the document using the guidelines in step 2 above. If you are using WordPerfect, click the Insert Field button to insert merge fields. If you are using Microsoft Word, click the Insert Merge Field button wherever you want to insert a field, then select the field you want. In WordPerfect 8.0, you will need to associate the form with a data file. The data file can be found in the C:\BESTCASE\TEMP\DATA directory. Word Tip: In Word, you can see how merged data will look as you work by doing the following: In the main menu, click the Tools option, then select Options. In the View tab, you ll see a list titled Show. Make sure there is no check mark next to Field Codes. If there is, click on it to remove the check mark, then click OK. In your document, you can see how data will look by clicking the ((ABC)) button in the toolbar. 9. When you have inserted all merge fields, save the document again then close it. Back in Best Case Bankruptcy, you will now be able to use this document with any of your client files. To merge the document: open a client file, go to the Additional Documents Screen and highlight the document, then click the Merge/Edit/Print button in the bottom right-hand corner. Click the Merge button. The document will appear in your word processing software with client data merged in. You can then print this document. If you ever want to make permanent changes to the form you just created, see Changing Documents in the Additional Documents Library. (Note: In WordPerfect, colons will appear in the names of most merge fields after the first three letters.) Merge Codes for Adding Documents to the Additional Documents Library Merge Codes by Data Type Voluntary Petition Information data type: Contains all fields used to merge the Voluntary Petition, Attorney Compensation Statement and Form 3. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments, as employer information from Schedule I and wage deduction data from the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator. DbtJurisdiction Name of jurisdiction DbtFileNumber Office File Number DbtBusinessName Name of business for business debtor DbtFirstName Debtor s first name DbtMiddleName Debtor s middle name DbtLastName Debtor s last name DbtOtherNames Other names of debtor DbtIndexAs Client s name as it appears in the Client List Window DbtTypeOfDebtor Coded: 1 = Individual, 2 = Joint (Husband & Wife), 3 = Partnership, 4 = Corporation Publicly Held, 5 = Corporation Not Publicly Held, 6 = Municipality, 7 = Other DbtTypeOther Text answer for other type of debtor DbtNatureOfDebt Coded: 1 = Non-Business/Consumer, 2 = Business DbtVenue Coded: 1 = Residence, 2 = Related case DbtChapter Coded: 1 = Chapter 7, 2 = Chapter 9, 3 = Chapter 11, 4 = Chapter 12, 5 = Chapter 13, 6 = Sec. 304 - Case Ancillary to Foreign Proceeding DbtChapterOfFiling contains the chapter in plain text: 7, 11, 12, 13 DbtFeeAttached Coded: 1 = Attached, 2 = Intends to file DbtPlanStatus Coded 1 = Attached, 2 = Intends to file DbtPlanDate Date of Chapter 13 Plan, if applicable DbtAddr Debtor s street address DbtCity City of Debtor s address DbtState State of Debtor s address DbtZip Zip Code of Debtor s address DbtCounty County of debtor s residence DbtMailAddr Debtor s mailing address DbtMailCity City of Debtor s mailing address Chapter 6 Printing Forms 211
DbtMailSt State of Debtor s mailing address DbtMailZip Zip Code of Debtor s mailing address DbtPriorLocation District where prior case filed DbtPriorCaseNo Case number of prior case DbtPriorDate Date of filing of prior case DbtRelCaseName Name of related case DbtRelCaseNo Case number of related case DbtRelCaseDate Date of filing of related case DbtRelCaseRelation Relation to debtor of related case DbtRelCaseDistrict District where related case was filed DbtRelCaseJudge Judge assigned to related case DbtCaseNo Case number of this filing DbtSocSecNo Debtor s Social Security Number DbtAttorney1 Attorney for debtor (name only) DbtAtty1RegNum Attorney s state bar number (if entered) DbtFirmName Law firm name DbtFirmAddress Law Firm address DbtFirmPhone Law firm phone number Dbt:FirmFax Law firm phone number DbtProSe if Debtor is not represented by an attorney is checked on the Voluntary Petition Filing Information screen, this field will contain the entry for debtor s phone number Non-attorney preparer information DbtNAname Non attorney preparer s name DbtNAaddr1 Non attorney preparer s street address DbtNAaddr2 Non attorney s city state and zip DbtNAss Non attorney s Social Security Number DbtNAphone Non-attorney phone Statistical Administrative Information DbtchkFunds Funds available, Coded: 1=funds available, 2=no funds available DbtchkNoCreds Number of creditors, Coded: 1=1-15, 2=16-49, 3=50-99, 4=100-199, 5=200-999, 6=1000 or over DbtchkAssets Assets, Coded: 1=$0-$50,000, 2=$50,001-$100,000, 3=$100,001-$500,000, 4=$500,001-$1,000,000, 5=$1,000,001-$10,000,000, 6=$10,000,001-$50,000,000, 7=$50,000,001-$100,000,000, 8=more than $100,000,000 DbtchkLiabil Liabilities, coded: 1=$0-$50,000, 2=$50,001-$100,000, 3=$100,001-$500,000, 4=$500,001-$1,000,000, 5=$1,000,001-$10,000,000, 6=$10,000,001-$50,000,000, 7=$50,000,001-$100,000,000, 8=more than $100,000,000 Attorney Compensation Statement DbtCompTotal Total compensation promised DbtCompPaid Total compensation paid DbtCompDue Total compensation due DbtCompSource Source of compensation DbtCompShare No sharing except Form 3. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments DbtFeeWFiling Amount paid with filing DbtFeeInstall Amount to be paid in installments DbtInstallNo Number of installments DbtInstallAmt1 Installment 1 dollar amount DbtInstallDate1 Installment 1 date DbtInstallAmt2 Installment 2 dollar amount DbtInstallDate2 Installment 2 date DbtInstallAmt3 Installment 3 dollar amount DbtInstallDate3 Installment 3 date DbtInstallAmt4 Installment 4 dollar amount DbtInstallDate4 Installment 4 date Business Debtor Questions DbtSmallBiz Debtor is a small business as defined in 11 U.S.C. 101. - 1 for yes, 0 for no DbtSBElect Debtor is and elects to be considered a small business under 11 U.S.C. 1121(e). (Optional) - 1 for yes, 0 for no BusLocationAddr Location of business (street address) BusLocationCity Location of business (city) BusLocationSt Location of business (State) BusLocationZip Location of business (Zip Code) BusSigner Name of signer for business BusSignerTitle Title of signer for business Joint Debtor Information JoiFirstName First name of joint debtor JoiMiddleName Middle name of joint debtor JoiLastName Last name of joint debtor JoiOtherNames Other names of joint debtor JoiSocSecNo Joint Debtor s Social Security Number JoiAddr Joint Debtor s address JoiCity City of joint debtor s address JoiSt State of joint debtor s address JoiZip Zip Code of joint debtor s address JoiCounty County of residence of joint debtor JoiMailAddr Joint debtor s mailing address 212 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
JoiMailCity Joint debtor s city of mailing address JoiMailSt Joint debtor s state of mailing address JoiMailZip Joint debtor s Zip Code of mailing address TotalPages Total number of pages in schedules A-J The following codes are from the Notes section of the program StatusCode Case Status (1=Active, 2=Closed) StatusComment FollowupDate NeedsAttnCode (1= Needs Attention, 2= no check mark) DOSFilename (8 character dos file name of client file) DateOpened DateFiled Date341 Time341 Location341 DateConfirmed DateDischarged DebtorHomePhone DebtorWorkPhone JointDebtorHomePhone JointDebtorWorkPhone Paralegal ReferedBy P13_PayEmpDebtorInter From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the interval that the debtor gets paid val P13_PayEmpDebtorAmo From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the amount to be deducted from the debtor s paycheck unt P13_PayEmpSpouseInte From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the interval that the joint debtor gets paid rval P13_PayEmpSpouseAm From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the amount to be deducted from the joint debtor s paycheck ount P13_AttorneyFee From the Chapter 13 Plan, Claims tab, the amount of the attorney s fee that is being paid through the 13 Plan P13_AttorneyFeeDuratio From the Chapter 13 Plan, Claims tab, the number of months over which the attorney s fee will be paid in the n Chapter 13 Plan Information taken from Employer Data on Schedule I DbtEmployer From Schedule I, the name of the debtor s employer DbtEmpAddr From Schedule I, the address of the debtor s employer DbtEmpHowLong From Schedule I, the amount of time the debtor has been employed by this employer DbtEmpNet From Schedule I, the net amount of the debtor s take home pay (total monthly pay) JoiEmployer From Schedule I, the joint debtor s employer JoiEmpAddr From Schedule I, the joint debtor s employer s address JoiEmpHowLong From Schedule I, the amount of time the joint debtor has been employed by this company JoiEmpNet From Schedule I, the joint debtor s net pay JudgeName JudgeAddress JudgePhone JudgeFax JudgeEmail JudgeWebsite TrusteeName TrusteeAddress TrusteePayName TrusteePayAddress TrusteePhone TrusteeFax TrusteeEmail TrusteeWebsite Pick One Creditor + Voluntary Petition info. data type Contains all fields in voluntary petition info. (all fields above) plus: ClaNameSorted (Word) If there is no tilde in the creditor name, NameEntered will be same as NameSorted. If there is a tilde, NameSorted or ClaName will be the reversed form of the name (i.e. Last Name, First Name). (WordPerfect) ClaNameEntered (Word) or ClaNameD (WordPerfect) If there is no tilde in the creditor name, NameEntered will be same as NameSorted. If there is a tilde, NameSorted will be the reversed form of the name (i.e. Last Name, First Name). ClaAddress Creditor s street address ClaCity City of Creditor s address ClaState State of Creditor s address ClaZip Zip Code of Creditor s address ClaAccountNo Account number of debtor s account with creditor ClaDateIncurred Date debt incurred ClaLienNature Nature of lien (Schedule D entries only) ClaConsideration Consideration (Schedules D, E, F: Description of property for Sched. D, Consideration for Scheds. E and F) ClaCodebtor X if there is a codebtor, blank if not ClaHWJC H, W, J, C (who is responsible for debt, husband, wife, joint or community) Chapter 6 Printing Forms 213
ClaContingent ClaUnliquidated ClaDisputed ClaSetoff ClaClaimAmt ClaPriorityAmt X if checked and blank if not checked. X if checked and blank if not checked. X if checked and blank if not checked. X if checked and blank if not checked. Amount of claim Amount entitled to priority (Schedule E only) ClaForm4Amt Unsecured amount of claim (for use on Form 4) ClaPropertyValue Market value of property Pick MULTIPLE Creditors, Contracts or Codebtors, complete w/voluntary Petition Information Same field codes as the Pick ONE Creditor data type, but allows you to select more than one party from Schedule D, E, F, G or H and creates a separate letter or form for each party. It also allows you to choose any of your additional notice parties. See Merging Several Creditor Records into a Form on page 208 for more information. All Creditors - Name/Address/ Account No. Only data type Contains the Name and Address of all parties included on the Creditor Address Matrix (Master Mailing List) and account number (if any). The entire address is contained in one field. Line breaks are represented by an ASCII character 11 (Ctrl-K) which both Word and WordPerfect interpret as a soft line break. Address Name and address of creditor AccountNo Account number All Creditors - Complete w/ Voluntary Petition Info. Contains the same fields as Pick ONE Creditor - Complete w/voluntary Petition Information, but includes all parties included on the creditor address matrix (master mailing list). Client List Information This data type will merge the following fields for all of your clients. Use this data type for reports about clients or letters to clients. IndexAs Client s name as it appears in the Client List Window FileNumber Office file number entered in the Notes screen DOSFileName The 8 character file name of this client Chapter Chapter of Filing TypeOfDebtor Entity (Joint, Individual, Corporation, etc.) DateCreated The date the file was created in Best Case in MM/DD/YY format DateModified The date of the last change to the file in MM/DD/YY format DateOpened From the Notes screen, the date the case was opened in MM/DD/YY format DateFiled From the Notes screen, the date the case was filed in MM/DD/YY format Date341 From the Notes screen, the date of the 341 meeting, in MM/DD/YY format Time341 From the Notes screen, the time of the 341 meeting Location341 From the Notes screen, the location of the 341 meeting DateConfirmed From the Notes screen, the date that the case was confirmed, in MM/DD/YY format DateDischarged From the Notes screen, the date that the case was discharged, in MM/DD/YY format DbtSSN The debtor s social security number DbtHomePhone From the Notes screen, the debtor s home telephone number DbtWorkPhone From the Notes screen, the debtor s work telephone number JoiSSN The joint debtor s social security number JoiHomePhone From the Notes screen, the joint debtor s home phone number JoiWorkPhone From the Notes screen, the joint debtor s work phone number Attorney The attorney representing the debtor Paralegal From the Notes screen, the paralegal working on the case ReferedBy From the Notes screen, the person who referred the case to your firm Status From the Notes screen, the status of the case: either Active or Closed StatusComment From the Notes screen, the comments about the case FollowupDate From the Notes screen, the follow up date in MM/DD/YY format NeedsAttn From the Notes screen, 1=Yes, 0=No JurisdictionCode The file name of the jurisdiction associated with the case DbtFirstName From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s first name DbtMiddleName From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s middle name DbtLastName From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s last name DbtOtherNames From the Voluntary Petition, all other names that the debtor has used DbtAddr From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s street address DbtCity From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s city of residence DbtState From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s state of residence DbtZip From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s zip code DbtCounty From the Voluntary Petition, the debtor s county of residence DbtMailAddr From the Voluntary Petition, the street address of the debtor s mailing address DbtMailCity From the Voluntary Petition, the city of the debtor s mailing address DbtMailSt From the Voluntary Petition, the state of the debtor s mailing address DbtMailZip From the Voluntary Petition, the zip code of the debtor s mailing address DbtCaseNo From the Voluntary Petition, the case number CompTotal From the Attorney Compensation Statement, the total compensation that the attorney will receive CompPaid From the Attorney Compensation Statement, the amount of the compensation that has been promised CompDue From the Attorney Compensation Statement, compensation still due P13_PayEmpDebtorInterval From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the interval that the debtor gets paid P13_PayEmpDebtorAmount From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the amount to be deducted from the debtor s paycheck P13_PayEmpSpouseInterval From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the interval that the joint debtor gets paid P13_PayEmpSpouseAmount From the Chapter 13 Plan, Wage Deduction tab, the amount to be deducted from the joint debtor s paycheck P13_AttorneyFee From the Chapter 13 Plan, Claims tab, the amount of the attorney s fee that is being paid through the 13 Plan P13_AttorneyFeeDuration From the Chapter 13 Plan, Claims tab, the number of months over which the attorney s fee will be paid in the Chapter 13 Plan JoiFirstName From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s first name 214 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
JoiMiddleName JoiLastName JoiOtherNames JoiSocSecNo JoiAddr JoiCity JoiState JoiZip JoiCounty JoiMailAddr JoiMailCity JoiMailSt JoiMailZip BusinessName BusLocationAddr BusLocationCity BusLocationSt BusLocationZip BusSignerName BusSignerTitle DbtEmployer DbtEmpAddr DbtEmpHowLong DbtEmpNet JoiEmployer JoiEmpAddr JoiEmpHowLong JoiEmpNet JudgeName JudgeAddress JudgePhone JudgeFax JudgeEmail JudgeWebsite TrusteeName TrusteeAddress TrusteePayName TrusteePayAddress TrusteePhone TrusteeFax TrusteeEmail TrusteeWebsite From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s middle name From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s last name From the Voluntary Petition, all other names of the joint debtor From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s social security number From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s street address From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s city of residence From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s state of residence From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s zip code From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s county of residence From the Voluntary Petition, the street address of the joint debtor s mailing address From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s city of residence From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s state of residence From the Voluntary Petition, the joint debtor s zip code From the Voluntary Petition, the name of the business if it is a business debtor From the Voluntary Petition, business debtor s street address From the Voluntary Petition, business debtor s city From the Voluntary Petition, business debtor s state From the Voluntary Petition, business debtor s zip code From the Voluntary Petition, business debtor s name of authorized signer From the Voluntary Petition, business debtor s title of authorized signer From Schedule I, the name of the debtor s employer From Schedule I, the address of the debtor s employer From Schedule I, the amount of time the debtor has been employed by this employer From Schedule I, the net amount of the debtor s take home pay (total monthly pay) From Schedule I, the joint debtor s employer From Schedule I, the joint debtor s employer s address From Schedule I, the amount of time the joint debtor has been employed by this company From Schedule I, the joint debtor s net pay From the Notes screen, the judge's name From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the address linked to the judge selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the phone number linked to the judge selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the fax number linked to the judge selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the email address linked to the judge selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the web address linked to the judge selected in the notes screen From the Notes screen, the trustee's name From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the address linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the payee name linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the payee address linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the phone linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the fax linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the email address linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen From the Jurisdiction setup screen, the web address linked to the trustee selected in the notes screen Working with Forms in Your Word Processor Best Case Bankruptcy gives you the ability to work with some forms in your word processing software. (Not available for creditor forms. Works with WordPerfect for Windows version 6.1, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0 or 10.0 or Microsoft Word 97, 2000, or XP.) The main reason you would want to open bankruptcy forms in your word processing software is to add comments or explanations in special circumstances. However, we recommend using our attachment feature instead which allows you to keep all data together and make electronic filing simpler. (See page 199.) If you need to make changes to client data, do it through Best Case Bankruptcy, if possible, and not through the word processor. You can think of the flow of information as a one-way street going from Best Case Bankruptcy to your word processor. If you make your corrections through Best Case Bankruptcy, your changes are saved with the client information in Best Case Bankruptcy s client database; whenever you merge or print the client s data, the correct data will be used. But if you make changes through your word processor, the data in the Best Case Bankruptcy database won t be updated. Please note that certain local forms or custom documents may not be available to merge in the word processor. Merging will produce the standard version of the form, but most of these documents can be opened in the Best Case Editor, the preferred method, as described in The Best Case Editor on page 202. In addition, the Setup Menu may have ways to customize the appearance or content of a printed document that will not be reflected in the merged version. You must carefully proofread any merged document to insure that it is fit for filing. Chapter 6 Printing Forms 215
The page count of a merged schedule may differ from that of its printed counterpart. Be careful when mixing merged and printed documents to be sure that page counts shown on the Summary of Schedules and Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules are correct. Opening a Form in MS Word or WordPerfect 1. Select the form to be merged in the Forms and Schedules Menu by clicking in the Print Column, as described above in Printing Forms on page 188. 2. Click on the Print button in the Main Toolbar. 3. The Print Documents dialog box will appear. Click on the Merge tab at the top of the window. The Print immediately option should not be checked. If it is, click the Print Immediately box to remove the check mark. No check mark here means that you will be able to open documents in your word processor before printing. Merge Dialog Box 4. Mark the appropriate word processor, if you are asked, then click Merge. 5. When Best Case Bankruptcy has merged data into the word processor, you will get a dialog box with three options: 6. Click Edit documents. Print documents, (which would print the document that you have merged then return you to Best Case Bankruptcy), Edit documents, (which brings you to the Open File dialog box), or Cancel and return to Best Case Bankruptcy. 7. The Open File dialog box will appear, with a list of the merged documents that are in the temporary Best Case Bankruptcy sub-directory. Double-click on the form that you want to edit. 8. The form will open in your word processor. You can edit the form, but remember that changes that you make here will not be saved in Best Case Bankruptcy. If you want to edit or correct data, edit through Best Case Bankruptcy. Print as you would any MS Word or WP document. 9. When you have finished you can close the document with or without saving it. If you choose not to save it, the file will be overwritten the next time you print from Best Case Bankruptcy so that it will not take up room on your hard drive. For instructions on saving, see Saving Merged Forms below. All merged documents are in the bestcase\temp directory. If you want to open another document which was merged with this one, click File, Open and look in the bestcase\temp directory for your other file or files. 216 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Saving Merged Forms Since Best Case Bankruptcy saves client data for you, there is normally no reason why you would want to save completed forms. If you need another copy, you can just print again. Also, saving merged documents will take up space on your hard drive. If you do decide that you want a copy of a completed form on your hard disk, you ll need to do a Save As and save to a different directory because files in the bestcase\temp directory are erased each time you print. 1. In the main menu bar, select File then select Save As from the sub-menu. 2. A Save As dialog box appears. Type a new file name and change the directory to the directory that you want to save the file in. You may want to create a separate directory for merged forms that is a subdirectory of your word processing directory. (For example, if you use WP for Windows and store other word processed documents in c:\office\wpwin\windocs\, you might want to make a sub-directory such as c:\office\wpwin\windocs\bcbforms.) Chapter 6 Printing Forms 217
218 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing In This Chapter Electronic Case Filing... 220 Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them... 220 Paying Filing Fees... 226 Assigning Judge and Trustee... 226 Prior Filings Tab... 229 Scanning Documents with BestScan:... 230 Creating Motions for Electronic Filing... 233 PDF Bookmarks... 234 ECF Options... 230 Attaching PDF Documents Created in Other Applications... 235 Filing an Amended Document Electronically... 237 Creating a PDF of a Proof of Claim, Involuntary Petition... 238 ECF FAQ... 239 Troubleshooting Problems... 241 ECF Requirements... 242 Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 219
Electronic Case Filing Using your court s electronic filing system, you ll submit your clients petitions to your court s website, filing and docketing your case in seconds. If you ve attended a court training session and electronic filing seems intimidating, don t worry! The good news is that you ve already made it much simpler, just by choosing Best Case Bankruptcy! Best Case Solutions stays on top of each court s ECF requirements, and offers the easiest and most reliable system available to file electronically. The Quick Tutorial below takes you through each step in creating electronic files with our ECF Wizard and uploading them using OneTouch Plus (for initial petitions) and ECF Express (for documents filed after the initial petition). If you follow the instructions below and do run into trouble, call Best Case Solutions at 1.800.492.8037. We re here to help! Additional Electronic Filing resources can be found on our web site, at www.bestcase.com/ecfresource.htm. Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them 1. Enter all case information. 2. Return to the Forms and Schedules Menu and click the ECF button in the toolbar or press C-Q. The ECF Wizard opens, which will help you select forms and a few other electronic filing options. ECF Wizard: If there is no case number, choose between a complete or emergency filing. 3. Select the Filing Type: The first screen in the ECF Wizard asks you what type of filing you want to do. It is divided into two main sections: Initial Filing, which applies when you do not yet have a case number, and Post Petition Filing, which is for anything you need to file if you already have a case number. Both of these are described below. a. Initial Filing: If you do not yet have a case number entered in the Voluntary Petition, you will choose between a complete petition and an emergency petition. i. Complete Petitions: For complete petitions, there is very little for you to do! Best Case Bankruptcy will automatically submit all documents in the Forms and Schedules Menu that your local court requires for a complete petition. Best Case will put forms in the correct order according to your court s specifications, will give PDF and matrix text files the correct names, and will exclude forms your court does not want to be filed electronically. (For example, in many districts, the Statement of Social Security Number is only filed on paper.) The options on this screen for complete petitions are: File Chapter 13 Plan: For chapter 13 cases, the check box next to the Complete Petition option allows you to specify whether you want to file the Chapter 13 Plan now. (Uncheck to file later). Manually select forms to be filed: This check box allows you to view or select forms which will be included in this filing. For complete petitions, you generally do not want to manually select 220 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
forms since Best Case will pick them for you based on your court s specifications. If you check this box, you ll see a Forms to File window next where you can see or change the list of forms to be included. (Pictured in the Emergency/Skeletal Petition section below.) After selecting Complete Petition, go to Step 4. ii. Emergency/Skeletal Petition: When you choose this option, you ll automatically be required to select which forms you want to file in the Forms to File screen pictured below. By default, we mark the Voluntary Petition and the Creditor Address Matrix, Form 21 (if appropriate), and, if this is a Chapter 11 case, Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims. The Forms to File screen appears for emergency and post-petition filings You can mark additional forms by clicking in the appropriate check boxes. If you want the documents that are checked to appear at the top of the list, click the Refresh button. Refreshing simply changes the way the list looks on the screen; it does not affect the file creation process at all. To check schedules A-J, the Summary of Schedules, and the Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules, click on the Mark B6 button. After marking forms, click Next and skip to step 4. b. Post Petition Filing: If you do have a case number entered in the Notes button, then in the first screen of the ECF Wizard, you ll choose from several filing types that follow the initial petition, as pictured below: Chapter 13 Plan if this is a Chapter 13 case (you ll specify whether it s the first or an amended plan), an Amendment to forms and schedules other than the 13 plan, a Motion or supplemental document, or an emergency completion. This last choice only appears if you originally filed an emergency petition. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 221
If you already have a case number in the Voluntary Petition, choose the appropriate type of filing from the Post Petition Filing list as pictured above. Mark the appropriate option to select the filing type, then click Next. If you filed the case originally with another software program or on paper and want to do a post-petition filing through our ECF Wizard, simply click on the Notes button and enter the case number to get the post petition options in the Wizard. i. Forms to File: When preparing a post petition filing, you ll always need to review and/or select the documents to be filed. This screen is pictured in the Emergency/Skeletal Petition section above. After selecting forms, click Next to continue. ii. Amended Filing: If you indicated that you wanted to file an amendment to a form, schedule, or Chapter 13 Plan in the first screen of the ECF Wizard, the Amended Filing window appears next, as pictured below. The Amended Filing screen displays the number of amended items on each schedule and allows you to change the text that prints at the top of the form. Text at top of form: The top of the screen displays the text that will appear at the top of the form, which you can change as needed. (Our default is Amended. ) Print Only Items Marked Amended (on Sch A-H and Matrix): If you are amending Schedule A- H and/or the matrix, then by default Best Case would print all items listed on the form. However, each schedule has an Amended check box in the bottom left corner of the entry window so that you can indicate which items are amended. If you mark the Print Only Items Marked Amended box, only the entries for which you have checked the amended box will appear on the new 222 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
schedule or matrix. The list on the right side of the Amended Filing window shows how many items you have marked as amended on each schedule. (Those are the items that would print if you check this box.) Create Creditor Mailing List file (Matrix): If you are amending a creditor schedule or another document which lists parties who are also on the matrix, some courts require you to submit a new text file of the matrix, too. This check box will create your new text file matrix. After making appropriate selections, go to step 4. 4. Ready to Prepare ECF Filing: On the last screen in the ECF Wizard, pictured below, information about the filing appears at the top for you to review: the name and chapter of the client, the type of filing, and the divisional office. (Click the Change Office button to select a different court office.) You can also specify a date for signature lines. We default to today s date. The last screen in the ECF Wizard for initial filings. Review the type of filing, divisional office, and date on signature lines. The last screen of the ECF Wizard for Post Petition documents displays the PDF file names. Click the Prepare Filing button to create electronic files. This will create all applicable electronic files then open the ECF Manager where you can upload them to your court s website quickly, or view them before uploading. After preparing files, go to step 5 below. Filing County and Office: Occasionally when you are creating an initial filing with the ECF Wizard, a screen appears asking you to choose a filing county and office. This window appears if the county code drawn from the debtor s county of residence does not correspond with the list of county codes available in the district of filing or if there are 2 offices available for a county. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 223
This screen appears if there are multiple offices for this county, or if you click the Change Office button in the last screen of the ECF Wizard. On the left-hand side of the screen, in the table labeled ECF County, select the county, if necessary, and make note of the Office Number(s) that appear in the right-hand column of the table. In the Court Office table, select an office with a number that corresponds to the county selected. NOTE: If the office number for the selected county is Any*OD, that indicates that the county code is not available for the current district, Best Case will allow you to choose any office for filing. It is up to the user to check with the court to make sure the case will be filed in the correct office. 5. Uploading Files: When you complete the ECF Wizard, the ECF Manager opens automatically as pictured below. You can access the ECF Manager at any time by clicking the ECF Manager button in the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu. From the ECF Manager, you can view files, erase files, scan documents and view prior filings as described on page 226. If you have any separate documents that you need to scan in and upload as individual PDFs, you can also do that here using the BestScan feature as described on page 230. Note that when you are ready to upload, you ll just click the appropriate button OneTouch or ECF Express, as described below. There are no files for you to select before clicking the button. During OneTouch, Best Case automatically uploads all documents prepared for the initial filing. During ECF Express, which is used for post-petition documents, you ll choose which files to upload while on the court s web site. The ECF Manager. For new cases, a OneTouch button appears as pictured above. 224 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Tip: If you have a dial-up connection, you ll want to connect to the Internet now. You won t need to open your court s web site Best Case will do that for you but you do need to be connected to the Internet before starting OneTouch. a. If this is a new case: Click the OneTouch Case Filing button.* This opens a log in window. Simply input your court login and password then click File Case. You ll see Best Case submitting your files and filling out screens on the court s web site. Don t try to input anything while your case is being uploaded. After a successful filing, Best Case will return court receipts, accessible through the ECF Manager, and a case number. (All options in the ECF Manager are described in greater detail in the section ECF Manager on page 226, including the option to file manually.) Notice the option in the ECF Manager to use the court s training site. This is a great way to practice, or complete your ECF homework from the court! You have a different password for the training site, so be sure to use the correct one. b. If this case has been filed: You ll click the ECF Express button* instead. For post petition filings, an ECF Express button appears instead of the OneTouch button. The drop-down arrow to the right of the ECF Express button takes you directly into specific events on your court s CM/ECF website and can also be used to swiftly go Case Query, Docket Reports, Pay Fees, and Judge/Trustee Assignment. Note that you don t need to select a document before clicking ECF Express; you ll pick which document to upload once you are on the court s web site. At the Login screen, enter in your ECF user name and password. Best Case will open the court s web site and find your case; you ll need to select the appropriate menu choice on the court s web site, which will vary depending on what you are submitting. No OneTouch or ECF Express button? OneTouch is available in all live CM/ECF districts. If you don t see the OneTouch button and your district recently went live with ECF, click Help/Check for Update to download our latest version, which may make OneTouch available. *The Best Case OneTouch Plus and ECF Express systems are web services, the use of which require that you be covered by our annual maintenance program per our licensing agreement. If you allow your maintenance plan to lapse, you will be able to file electronically using the manual method, but you will not be able to use OneTouch Plus or ECF Express. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 225
Paying Filing Fees On-line With Pay Now Express, Best Case helps you pay filing fees via the Internet after the case number has been received via the OneTouch system. Best Case also retains your credit card information, so you won t have to reenter it each time you file a case saving you even more time! (Note that this feature is only available in CM/ECF districts where the court offers Internet credit card payments. In some districts, you will keep one credit card number on file and the court will process the charges.) After the case has been successfully filed with the OneTouch system, the ECF Manager will appear. 1. Click the Pay Fees button in the ECF Manager. 2. Click the Login Now button in the ECF Express window. ECF Express will automatically connect you to the court s website, log you into your CM/ECF account, open the Utilities or Reports menu, and select Internet Payments Due for your account. Do not click anything while ECF Express is working. 3. The U.S. Courts Payment Collections website appears next. Click Pay Now to submit your payment. That s it! To pay fees later/make one payment at the end of the day: 1. Open a client file that you have already filed electronically. 2. Click on the ECF Manager button at the bottom of the Forms and Schedules menu for the client. 3. Click on the ECF Express button in the ECF Manager window 4. Enter your CM/ECF login name and password on the next screen and click the Login Now button. ECF Express will automatically connect you to the court s website and log you into your CM/ECF account. 5. On the main CM/ECF menu screen, click the green dollar ($) sign in the top toolbar of the ECF Express window. 6. Click the Pay Now button on the following screen to submit your credit card payment for all outstanding CM/ECF fees. You may want to print payment confirmation for your records. Assigning Judge and Trustee After you have received a case number, you ll need to assign a judge and trustee for your case. Return to the ECF Manager and click the ECF Express button. Enter your login name and password. Best Case will locate your case. Click the JT button in the toolbar to assign the judge and trustee. You will receive a receipt which you can print. Filing Form 23 with OneTouch To prepare Form 23 for electronic filing: 1. Click the Prepare ECF Filing button in the ECF Manager. 2. Select the radio button labeled Form 23 Post-Petition Financial Management Education and click Next. Note: This option is only available for cases that have been issued a case number or cases in which a case number has been entered in the Notes button. 3. If you have not yet edited Form 23 you may do so from the window pictured below by clicking Edit Debtor Form 23 (or Edit Joint Form 23). If you are filing in a jurisdiction that requires the Financial Management Certificate to be attached to Form 23, you may click the Attachments button to insert the PDF of the certificate. In joint bankruptcy filings, some jurisdictions require both debtor and joint debtor Form 23s to be filed as a single PDF document. Other jurisdictions require each Form 23 to be filed as separate PDFs. Any of these selections may be made by choosing the radio buttons in the lower right corner. When finished, click Next.. 226 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Form 23 in the Preparation Wizard 4. The PDF (or PDFs) will automatically be named appropriately by Best Case. You may change the date on the signature lines here and opt to print the current date and time in the top margin. When finished, click Prepare Filing. OneTouch Filing Form 23: When the above steps are completed, a button labeled File B23 will appear in the lower right corner of the ECF manager. Click this button to see a confirmation screen that allows you to review the PDF documents before filing. After reviewing Form 23, click OneTouch Form 23 and login. Best Case will automatically upload Form 23 to the court s web site and display the receipt at the end of filing. OneTouch Form 23 Confirmation Screen ECF Manager The ECF Manager window appears when you have created files for Electronic Filing. From this screen, you can view, rename, and delete files, copy the name of a file to your Windows clipboard, upload files to the court s web site, and view files for this client that have already been submitted along with court receipts. Access the ECF Manager at any time by opening a client file and clicking the ECF Manager button in the Forms and Schedules Menu. The names of the files are displayed in this window. To view a file, double-click on the name, or highlight it and click the View File button. To copy the file path and name to the Windows clipboard, highlight the file and click the Copy Name button. (You can then go to the court s website and paste this into the appropriate slot.) Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 227
To move all files to the Recycle Bin, click the Erase Files button. Once you delete the files from your Windows Recycle Bin, they will be permanently removed from your computer. To open your Windows Explorer in the folder that contains the files, click the Explore button. To explore documents you ve saved in your My Documents folder, click the My Docs button. From here, you can easily drag and drop files into the ECF Manager. The BestScan button opens the BestScan window, as described on page 230, which allows you to scan documents into PDF format and save them directly to the ECF Manager. To resize the ECF Manager window, click on the Lincoln icon found in the upper left-hand corner and choose Size. To sort files by date or alphabetically by name in the ECF Manager, simply click on the Date or File Name column header. Click the ECF Password button to enter and save your CM/ECF login for future filings. The ECF Manager for new cases that have not been filed. Right-click on a file in ECF Manager to get these options: View the actual file before submitting it to the court. PDF files will open in Adobe Acrobat and text files will generally open in Notepad or WordPad. Print the file to your default printer. Copy the file name and path to the Windows clipboard so that you can paste it into the court s web site without having to browse for the file. (When you get to the question asking for the file name on the court s site, press C-V to paste the path and name.) Rename the file - Change the name of any of your electronic files to give them the names the court prefers. (You can change the default file name settings in the ECF Setup Screen in Best Case.) Delete the file - You can delete files that you do not need. This command sends files to the Recycle Bin. Once deleted from the Recycle Bin, files are permanently removed from your computer. Uploading Files with OneTouch or ECF Express : Generally, you will upload documents to the court s web site using Best Case s OneTouch Plus system (for initial petitions), or our ECF Express system (for postpetition filings). Both features are described in the section Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them on page 220. Uploading files manually: If you have allowed your maintenance plan to lapse, you will not be able to use OneTouch Plus or ECF Express, but you can still upload electronic files manually to the court s web site. 228 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
You ll still create files using the ECF Wizard, but when you get to the ECF Manager, you ll click the Manual Filing button instead of the OneTouch or ECF Express buttons. The Manual Filing button opens your court web site. You ll then follow the instructions provided by your local court to open a case and upload files. For each file you need to upload, you can copy the file name and path to your Windows clipboard using the copy button, then use C-V to paste it into the appropriate Browse box on the court s site. We highly recommend renewing your maintenance plan and using OneTouch Plus to upload your files! When compared to the manual method of filing, the OneTouch Plus system saves lots of time and eliminates many user errors and headaches! Plus, renewing your maintenance plan gives you free updates when your court changes its system. Call 1.800.492.8037 to renew! Prior Filings Tab The Prior Filings tab stores and displays files you have already submitted to the court as well as receipts. Whenever you connect to the court s web site using either OneTouch or ECF Express, Best Case automatically creates a new folder in the ECF Manager where it stores all logs and activity records generated while you were connected to the court. This folder can be accessed by clicking the Prior Filings tab at the top of the ECF Manager, or by pressing A-I. The Prior Filings tab lists all documents previously uploaded and receipts. The Prior Filings tab displays a list of the folder(s) created for each connection to the court web site, along with the date and time each folder was created. To see the contents of a folder, click the [+] button that appears to the left of the folder. NOTE: If there is more than one folder in the prior filings section, and you would like to see the contents of all of them at once, simply click the Expand All button that appears in the lower right-hand corner of the ECF Manager. The folder expands to reveal a list of the individual files stored in the folder. Some examples of what you may find include: An ECF Summary File, which provides a brief summary of the names and locations of all documents filed. The ECF Docket report for the filing An ECF Receipt for each document filed An ECF Log which provides a complete record of all screens accessed and information entered during the filing process Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 229
Copies of any PDF documents or text files uploaded during the filing process. The Prior Filings tab provides several features similar to those listed above in the ECF Manager section. To access these features, simply right click on any file or folder or use the buttons on the right hand side of the ECF Manager window. ECF Options The ECF Options window pictured below is accessible by clicking the Options button in the first screen of the ECF Wizard. Default to file 13 Plan with Complete Petition: When you use the wizard, Best Case will automatically check the File Chapter 13 Plan box on the Select the Filing Type screen. Default to file 13 Plan with Emergency Completion: Will default to always including the 13 plan with the balance of schedules during the completion of an emergency filing. Always replace existing files in the ECF directory: If you have existing files in your ECF Manager that have not yet been uploaded to the court s website and you create new documents with the same names, Best Case will automatically overwrite them whenever newer versions of the documents are created. Always show Filing County and Office: Allows users to select the county and office of filing for all initial case uploads. Do not include bookmarks in PDF Files: When creating a PDF file using the ECF Wizard, Best Case Bankruptcy creates a bookmark for each form in the PDF file. Checking this option allows you to create the PDF files without bookmarks. If the Use Printer Driver for Generation option is selected, no bookmarks will appear. Do not update Office File Number with Case Number: When checked, Best Case will not add the case number in the Office File Number field in the File Setup Information tab of Client Notes after a successful filing using the OneTouch system. ECF Express always available in ECF Manager: Makes it possible for users to connect to the court web site with the ECF Express browser regardless of whether or not a case number has been generated for the client. Scanning Documents with BestScan: Our BestScan feature makes it easy to convert scanned documents to PDF without opening Adobe Acrobat. With just a few mouse clicks your document gets scanned, converted to PDF, and saved to your ECF Manager for easy upload during OneTouch or ECF Express filings. Whether you use a simple flatbed scanner, or an autodocument feeder, BestScan works with any scanner that uses TWAIN drivers, the most common industry standard for scanners at all price levels. Consult the documentation provided by the manufacturer to see whether or not your scanner has a TWAIN driver. You can use BestScan to get documents like the Credit Counseling Certificate or Payment Advices into a client s ECF Manager, but BestScan also enables you to attach and replace documents to any form. For information about how to to include a scanned document as part of your Petition.PDF or Plan.PDF, see Adding Attachments on page 199 230 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
How to Use BestScan in the ECF Manager 1. From the list of Forms and Schedules, click ECF Manager to open the ECF Manager window. 2. Click the BestScan button in the ECF Manager window. Best Case Bankruptcy will automatically detect your scanner and open the BestScan window. BestScan will default to the most commonly selected settings, as shown below. NOTE: BestScan s default settings assume a flatbed scanner and the courtrecommended resolution of 200 DPI. These settings can be changed by using the Scanner, Settings, Size, and Feed drop-down menus. For more information about altering BestScan settings, see Working with BestScan in the ECF Manager below. BestScan start-up window. 3. Load the document into your scanner and click Scan. A pop-up box will prompt you to either Scan another page or Cancel the scanning process. If this is a multi-page document, place the next page on the scanner and click Scan in the pop-up window. Repeat this process until all pages of the document have been scanned. When you have scanned all pages of the document, click Cancel. This will return you to the BestScan window where you can review your scan and perform minor edits. 4. Review the document and click the Save PDF button to create a PDF. 5. A Save PDF File window appears with a list of all of the supplemental documents that can be filed with OneTouch in your district. Select the form or document you scanned from the list and then click Save PDF. Best Case generates the PDF file, gives the file the correct name and saves it to your client s ECF Manager. (For more information on the naming guidelines Best Case follows, see What to Name Your Scanned PDF on the following page). Working with BestScan in the ECF Manager Scanner Settings: BestScan defaults to a flatbed scanner, letter-size paper (8.5 x 11 ), and the court-recommended resolution of 200 dots per inch (DPI). Each setting is described below. Scanner: BestScan will automatically detect your computer s default scanner. If you have multiple scanners and want to change which one BestScan uses, click the drop-down menu and select the scanner of your choice. Settings and Size: The courts recommend that all ECF documents be scanned as a black and white, 8 ½ by 11 image with a resolution of 200 dots per inch (DPI). You may alter these characteristics with the drop-down arrow to the right of the settings field. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 231
NOTE: When changing settings, remember that color scans and scans with higher resolutions will create larger files that will take longer to scan and use more memory and might not be accepted by the court. Feed: Next to the Feed label, choose whether the document is a single page or multiple pages and what type of scanner you will be using. a. Scan Single Page on Platen: Use this setting to scan a single page of a document from a flatbed scanner. (Most common.) b. Scan Multiple Pages on Platen: Allows you import multiple scans from a flatbed scanner. c. ADF (Auto Document Feeder): Use this setting if your scanner allows for the automatic feeding and processing of documents. d. ADF Duplex (both sides): For use with auto feed scanners that can scan both sides of a document. Previewing Your Scanned Document: Once your document has been scanned, review it in the BestScan window. To zoom in on the document, simply left-click in the area you want to see more closely, or right-click on the image to zoom out. Use the Back and Next buttons to switch between the pages of the scan, and the Delete button to delete the highlighted page. The Fix button allows you to rotate your scan and make other simple modifications. To see an enlarged view of the entire scanned image, click the Maximize Button in the title bar of the BestScan window and a full-screen view of the document will appear. Preview your scanned document in the BestScan window. What to Name Your Scanned PDF In order to ensure that OneTouch is able to file your scanned documents, they need to be saved using certain naming conventions. The list below contains the recommended file names: Declaration Re: Electronic Filing save as Declaration.PDF Certificate of Consumer Credit Counseling o If it is an individual filing, or if it is a joint filing but both the debtor's and joint debtor's certificates can be filed as one document - save as CCC.PDF 232 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
o If it is a joint filing and the certificates must be filed separately, save as CCC1.PDF for the Debtor and CCC2.PDF for the Joint Debtor Debtor Pay Stubs or Payment Advices - save as PayStubs.PDF Form 21 Statement of Social Security save as SSNStatement.PDF Northern District of Alabama: Attorney Fee Application save as FeeApp.PDF District of Minnesota: Signature Declaration save as SignDec.PDF District of New Mexico: Individual Debtor s Statement of Intent save as Intent.PDF Note: For more information about the best path to BestScan in any particular situation, please see the table in Appendix H: BestScan for Attachments or BestScan in the ECF Manager. Creating Motions for Electronic Filing You can create motions several ways: Use the attachment feature to create a motion in the Best Case Editor and attach it to a form in the Forms and Schedules Menu: From the Forms and Schedules Menu, simply highlight the form to which you want the motion attached, click the Attach button, click Insert, choose Standard Attachment, then type your motion. If you have a standard motion that you use in Word, you can copy and paste the text from your document into the Best Case Editor for easy PDF creation. Options for formatting in the Best Case Editor are described on page 202. When you have typed your motion, click Save, choose After Form then click Save. Click the ECF button in the toolbar to use the ECF Wizard to create a PDF. You ll select the form that you attached your motion to and your motion will be included in the PDF. Alternatively: In the Supplemental Forms folder, you ll find a blank caption document that you can use to create motions. Simply double-click on the document to open it in the Best Case Editor, then type your text, or paste in text that you ve typed in your word processing software. When you are ready to save, click File/Save. You can attach the motion to an existing document in the Forms and Schedules Menu or save it by itself by choosing the Replaces Form option. If you need to create and file several motions or forms together, you can create multiple attachments to the Caption document in the Supplemental Forms folder. In the Save dialog box, you can use the Replaces Form option for all of them, or use After or Before Form to specify a particular order within the PDF. All of these forms will be included in one PDF when you use the ECF Wizard to make your electronic files. If you have created and filed a motion already using the Caption document, and want to create another motion that needs to be filed separately, you can do the following: Create your second motion (or document) and save using the Replaces Form option. In the Attachments list screen, pictured below, highlight the first motion and click Options. Select Do Not Print. When you create your PDF using the ECF Wizard, attachments or captions marked Do Not Print will be excluded. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 233
The first motion will not be included in the PDF; the second and third will be included in one PDF. To create a PDF, click the ECF button in the toolbar to start the ECF Wizard, then select the appropriate filing type and follow instructions on-screen to select your document. In the ECF Manager, you ll generally use the ECF Express feature to upload motions, unless they are part of the initial filing. PDF Bookmarks Best Case Bankruptcy automatically inserts a bookmark at the start of each form in your Petition.PDF. With the bookmarks, when viewing a Petition.PDF in Acrobat, as pictured below, you access any form by clicking on the title listed on the left side. When you view a petition created by Best Case Bankruptcy in Acrobat, you can jump to a form using bookmarks. Bookmarks help you, the trustee, or any interested party find information quickly in the PDF. If you don t want Best Case to insert bookmarks in your PDF, make this quick change: 1. With a client file open and the Forms and Schedules Menu displayed, click the ECF button in the toolbar to open the ECF Wizard. 2. In the first screen of the Wizard ( Select the Filing Type ), click the Options button. Click the option labeled Do not include Bookmarks in PDF files (Best PDF Only). Best Case will remember this preference when you are working in other client files. Wait! Before you turn off the bookmark feature You should know that many trustees and court personnel have told us they really love the bookmarks our program creates! 234 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The ECF Options window is accessible through the Options button in the ECF Wizard Incorporating PDF Documents Created in Other Applications Using PDF Attachments When filing electronically, Best Case allows you to insert a previously created PDF file into the PETITION.PDF file created by Best Case. You would create a PDF attachment for: A PDF document previously created from a different application. A scanned document converted to PDF, such as a pay stub or legal property description. Note that PDF Attachments are for Electronic Filing ONLY. Your PDF attachment will only be included in the PDF you create using electronic filing. If you try to print directly to the printer or through print preview, Best Case will simply print a reminder that a PDF is attached to the form. For more information on attachments, please see Creating an Attachment on page 198. Adding Existing PDF Attachments 1. Select the document to which you would like to add an attachment by highlighting it in the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click the Attach button at the bottom of the window (or press Alt + T). This will open the Attachments to (form name) screen. 3. Click Insert. 4. Select Existing PDF File. 5. A new window appears asking you to select a PDF file from your hard drive or network. Navigate to the PDF file and double-click it (or highlight it and click Open). Note: multiple files may be selected by pressing CTRL or Shift while selecting files. The Add Attachment screen will with common answers marked: The Name field displays the title you will use to refer to this PDF file. The default name is the filename and path of the PDF. The Attached to Form button allows you to change the form to which the PDF file will attach. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 235
When does this document print? Your choices here are Before Form, After Form, Replaces Form and Do Not Print. The first three options determine where your attached PDF file is printed in relation to the form, and After Form is the most common choice. When creating an attachment, you generally would not want to use the Replaces Form choice, as this would replace the main document with the attachment. The PDF Filename is the drive, path, & filename of the document (e.g. C:\documents\sample1.pdf). Click the button to select a different PDF or click View to open this document in Adobe Acrobat. Click OK to add the PDF file to the document. 6. The PDF file will now appear in the Attachments to (form name) screen. Click Close to exit the list of attachments. 7. A paperclip indicating that ther is an attachment will appear on top of the form icon next to your document in the list of Forms and Schedules. 8. When you create forms for filing using the ECF Wizard, the PDF Attachment will be included in the PETITION.PDF file (or other PDF) created during this process. Scanning an Attachment 1. Select the document to which you would like to add an attachment by highlighting it in the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click the Attach button at the bottom of the window (or press Alt + T). This will open the Attachments to (form name) screen. 3. Click Insert. 4. Select Scanned Attachment. This will open BestScan. 5. Load the document into your scanner and click Scan. A pop-up box will prompt you to either Scan another page or Cancel the scanning process. If this is a multi-page document, place the next page on the scanner and click Scan in the pop-up window. Repeat this process until all pages of the document have been scanned. When you have scanned all pages of the document, click Cancel. This will return you to the BestScan window where you can review your scan and perform minor edits. 6. Review the document and click the Save PDF button. The Name field displays the title you will use to refer to this PDF file. The default name is the filename and path of the PDF. The Attached to Form button allows you to change the form to which the PDF file will attach. When does this document print? Your choices here are Before Form, After Form, Replaces Form and Do Not Print. The first three options determine where your attached PDF file is printed in relation to the form, and After Form is the most common choice. When creating an attachment, you generally would not want to use the Replaces Form choice, as this would replace the main document with the attachment. The PDF Filename is the drive, path, & filename of the document (e.g. C:\documents\sample1.pdf). Click the button to select a different PDF or click View to open this document in Adobe Acrobat. Click OK to add the PDF file to the document. 236 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
7. The PDF file will now appear in the Attachments to (form name) screen. Click Close to exit the list of attachments. 8. A paperclip indicating that ther is an attachment will appear on top of the form icon next to your document in the list of Forms and Schedules. Printing PDF Attachments PDF Attachments are included in the PETITION.PDF file you create when using the ECF Wizard. After creating files for electronic filing, you can print a hard copy by opening the ECF Manager, viewing a file in Adobe Reader, and then printing from Adobe. If you try to print directly to the printer or through the print preview, Best Case will simply print a reminder that a PDF is attached to the form. Replacing a Form with a PDF Attachment You Create For a particular client, the attachment feature can be used to replace the standard version of a form with a PDF file created in another application. To create an attachment that replaces a form: 1. Create an attachment using the steps outlined in Adding PDF Attachments above. When you get to step 4, choose Replaces Form in the Attachment Options dialog box. 2. Back in the Forms and Schedules Menu, you ll see that the word Replaced appears in brackets in front of the form name. If you double-click on the document from the Forms and Schedules Menu, you will get the Attachments window instead of the entry screen for this form. The top of the Attachments window will contain a message that says The normally generated document has been replaced by an attachment. This window and message are to warn you that changes you make in the entry screen for the form will not be reflected in your attachment, which has already been saved. If you want to access the entry screen for the form anyway, you can either click the Options button and change where the document prints from Replaces Form to After Form, or you can delete the attachment. Tip: Use this procedure when creating a 13 Plan from another program like Word or WordPerfect. Filing an Amended Document Electronically 1. Check Your Local Rules to Find Out What You Need to File: Each local bankruptcy court has its own rules regarding the filing of amended forms and schedules. The following are some of the local variations that we have observed: a. In addition to the amended document itself, some courts require an amendment cover sheet, while others do not. An Amendment Cover Sheet appears in the Supplemental Forms folder. b. For those courts that do require additional paperwork, some courts want the cover sheet to be contained in the PDF of the amended document, while others want two separate PDF documents. c. For amended schedules and the matrix, some courts require that all items from the original schedule be listed, while some require that only the new or changed items appear. d. For the creditor address matrix, some courts want just a new text file, while others want a new PDF of the matrix as well. e. If you need to submit a motion with your amendment, please see Creating Motions for Electronic Filing on page 233. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 237
While Best Case technical support staff can help you create amended documents if you know what you need to file, we cannot help you if you don t know what you need to submit. 2. Update Case Information: Go into the entry screen for the form or forms that you need to file and make the necessary changes. 3. Mark Amended Check Boxes in Entry Screens: If you are amending Schedule A-H or the matrix and want only the new or changed items to appear on your new document, click the Amended checkbox in the bottom left corner of the entry screen for each item that you want to appear on the form. The Amended Check Box Appears in the Bottom Left Corner for Schedules A-H. 4. Creating the PDF: Use the ECF Wizard described in Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them on page 220 to create PDFs. Generally, when you are creating an amended filing in the ECF Wizard, Best Case will incorporate all documents you select into one PDF. 5. Creating the PDF for QuickForms (those forms marked with a Q in the Forms and Schedules Menu): a. Opening the Form: Double-click on the form in the Forms and Schedules Menu or Local or Supplemental Forms folder. Mark both options to print the date and /s/ name on signature lines. The form will open in the Best Case Editor. b. Insert Amended in form title: In the Best Case editor, insert the word Amended (or other word your court prefers) in the form title. For help with formatting options, see The Best Case Editor on page 202. c. Save Your Document: Click File/Save. In the Save Document in Case dialog box, you can either choose to attach this document to a form in the Forms and Schedules Menu, or you can choose the default option of Replaces Form. (If this is a motion to amend, you may want to attach it to the document you are amending so that you can find it easily in the future.) Click Save to Case. You can then click the ECF button in the toolbar to use the ECF Wizard to create a PDF of this document and any other forms to be submitted with it. 6. Uploading Files: If the ECF Manager is not already displayed, click the ECF Manager button in the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu. You ll use the ECF Express button to help upload amended files, as described in Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them on page 220. Amended Matrices: The ECF FAQ section starting on page 239 contains some information about filing amended matrices. Creating a PDF of a Proof of Claim, Involuntary Petition, or Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet 1. If you created the Proof of Claim or Involuntary Petition outside of a client file (i.e. through the File/Creditor Forms menu): Close all open windows in Best Case so you just have a blank gray screen in Best Case. At the 238 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
top of the screen, go to File/Creditor Forms/Proof of Claim or Involuntary Petition. This will open a window listing the forms. 2. If you created the Proof of Claim in a client file: Open the Forms and Schedules menu for your client, doubleclick on the Supplemental forms folder, highlight the Proof of Claim, and click Open. This will open a window listing the Proof of Claims for creditors relating to this client. 3. With your new form highlighted, click the Print button in the bottom corner of the screen. 4. The Print Documents dialog box appears. Click in the Preview button on the right side of the box. 5. The form appears with the first page of the first document displayed in preview mode. Click the Adobe Acrobat button in the Print Preview toolbar, which allows you to create a PDF file of the document in the preview window. ECF FAQ After clicking the PDF button in the Print Preview tool bar, you will be asked for a file name and location. Insert your file name and click Save. The PDF of your Proof of Claim or Involuntary Petition will appear for your review. When you are finished reviewing the file close the PDF, and then exit the Print Preview screen. Note: The default file location is C:\ECF\<client name>, which is the recommended directory because that s where other PDF documents will be stored. Saving all of this client s ECF files in one place will make it easier for you to find them when you need to upload them to the court's site. Q. Can I change the order of forms? A. If your court requires that documents be submitted in a different order than the order in the Forms and Schedules Menu, you ll want to reorder your forms before creating any electronic files. (See Jurisdiction Forms List on page 298 to reorder forms.) You may also want to review Setup Options for ECF, such as file names, as different courts have slightly different rules for names of files. See page 308 for Setup Options. Q: Do I need to purchase Adobe Acrobat? A: Best Case has an internal PDF driver that lets you create a PDF of forms printed from within Best Case. To create PDF files from other programs and manipulate PDF documents, you may want to purchase Adobe Acrobat with PDF Writer/Distiller. The Adobe Reader is available free of charge but only allows you to view PDFs. For more information, visit Adobe s site at www.adobe.com, or call Adobe Systems at 1.888.502.5275. Q: How do I receive an ECF login and password? A: Contact your local bankruptcy court to attend an ECF training session where each attorney will be issued an ECF login and password. The class usually teaches basic operations for filing electronically, including how to create PDF files using Adobe, navigate though the court s CM/ECF website, and browse for your electronic files for upload. Part of the training should also include practice filings on the court s training website. Upon completion of the training, you will receive your CM/ECF login and password, which is used to access the live CM/ECF website. (You ll have three passwords: one for PACER, one for your court s training site, and one for your court s live site.) All key filers in your office (attorneys and support staff) should attend the ECF training class. Q: How are electronic signatures handled by Best Case? A: Most courts accept /s/ <name> on a signature line to represent the signature of an attorney or debtor in the PDF file. Best Case automatically inserts /s/ <name> on signature lines, as well as the date, when electronic files are created. Many districts also require a local form called the Declaration Re: Electronic Filing. The debtor signs the form, and you file that one piece of real paper containing the original signatures with the court. Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 239
Q: How do I create the Creditor Address Matrix.TXT file? How do I file an Amended Creditor Address Matrix? A: Best Case simultaneously creates the text (.txt) file of your creditors in the format required by your court along with your other electronic files. The Best Case OneTouch system will automatically upload the matrix as part of your initial filing. See Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them on page 220 for details on the initial filing. Our ECF Express feature will help you file an Amended Creditor Address Matrix. Some courts require a two-step process to docket the amended matrix: (1) Upload a single PDF file of the amended matrix under the Miscellaneous or Other section of the CM/ECF Bankruptcy Events menu; and (2) Upload a text file of the amended matrix in the Creditor Maintenance section of the CM/ECF Bankruptcy Events menu. Check with your court s ECF Help Desk to confirm your district s amended matrix filing procedures. See page 237 for additional details on filing amendments. Q. Can I use ECF Express to file motions or amendments to cases that I filed before I started using Best Case Bankruptcy? A. Yes. You ll just need to start a client file and enter basic debtor information in the Voluntary Petition. Put the case number in the Basic Information tab. If you are creating a motion, you can use the Generic Caption document in the Supplemental Forms folder to create the document in Best Case. Once the document has been created, you can use the ECF Wizard to prepare the PDF, and our ECF Express feature to upload the file. See Quick Tutorial: Creating Files and Uploading Them on page 220 to use these features. Q. How do I send my matrix or Petition.PDF to a floppy disk or removable disk drive? A. From the ECF Manager, click on Explore. Right-click on the file you want to send to disk. Choose Send To, then choose 3 ½ Floppy or your removable disk drive. If there are multiple files you want to copy, click the first, hold down C, and select the others before right-clicking. Q. Can I create electronic files on a writeable or rewriteable CD to take to the court? Yes. In Windows XP, try the following: Create electronic files with the ECF Wizard as described in the tutorial on page 220. After creating files, insert a blank, writable CD into your computer s CD burner tray. A screen will probably appear asking what to do with the CD. Choose Take No Action. Return to the ECF Manager and click the Explore button to open the folder where the electronic files have been saved. At the top of the screen, choose Edit/Select All (or press CTRL + A). Then, at the top of the screen, click File/Send To (or right-click and choose Send To) and choose the CD Drive. At the lower right corner of your monitor, a message will appear saying You have files waiting to be written to the CD. Click the i icon in the bubble to continue. The writable CD folder will appear and display the files that are ready to be burned to the CD. Select the option to Write these files to CD. Follow on-screen instructions for completing the CD burning process. Q: I sometimes file cases in a court location other than where the debtor resides. How do I change the court office code in the debtor.txt file? A: By selecting the ECF Option Always show County Office and Filing Page you can change the answer for the court office in each case (if your court allows you to choose different office locations). The court office of filing is based on the county where the debtor resides, and some courts do not allow you to manually change this assignment. See page 230 for details on ECF Options. Q. Can I combine multiple PDF documents? A. If you have a PDF that you have created through a different application, such as a scanned paystub, you can incorporate it into the Petition.PDF Best Case created by using PDF attachments. See page 235 for instructions. Alternatively, when you use our ECF Wizard to create files, we will bundle them together for you. In some special circumstances, you may want to use Adobe to combine PDFs. To do that, highlight the first form in the ECF 240 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Manager, e.g. CoverSheet.PDF, and click the View File button. In Adobe Acrobat, select Document/Insert Pages. You will be prompted for the file to insert, e.g. AmendedPetition.PDF. Select the PDF file and click Open. An Insert dialog box appears asking where you would like the document inserted. Make your selection, and click OK. Click File/Save to save your changes. Then return to the ECF Manager to upload. Q: How can I change the default location of ECF Files to save to my network, or another drive? A: You can specify the location where you want your ECF files to be created in the Local ECF Directory in the ECF Tab of the Setup Menu in Best Case Bankruptcy. Close any client files, close the Client List Window, Click Setup/Jurisdictions, highlight your jurisdiction, and click Edit. Click the ECF Tab. The default location is C:\ECF. Click the Pick button to choose a different ECF Directory. Each client s electronic files will be stored in an individual subdirectory in this folder. You also have the option of deleting these files if you don t want them taking up room on your hard drive. Tip: If you share Best Case over a network and want to see all ECF files from all workstations, change the folder to a network location. Troubleshooting Problems Q: My ECF login failed and the computer says to verify my login/password. What should I do? A: There are different logins for live ECF sites, training ECF sites, and PACER. First, make sure you re using the correct login and password. Check for typing errors and verify that the login page is correct. Remember that the login/password is case sensitive. If you are still unable to login, please call your court s ECF Help Desk to verify your login information. Q: What should I do if I receive message that says, Unable to connect to the court for 1 minute? A: This is a timeout error after Best Case has waited a minute to connect to the court s website. First, you should check the court s ECF page and the court s home page to see if there are any reported problems with CM/ECF. Then, try filing the case again. If you receive the same timeout message on your second try, then you may need to disable a firewall within your office to determine if the firewall is blocking the OneTouch system. Quick Firewall Tip: To disable Norton AntiVirus, right-click on the globe icon in the lower right corner of the screen and select Disable. Try filing your case with OneTouch again. If you are able to successfully file the case after disabling your firewall, then you can re-enable the firewall and disable it each time you are ready to file a case. Alternatively, your firm s computer specialist can configure Norton AntiVirus to permanently allow the OneTouch System access to your firm s firewall. If your firm installed a firewall other than Norton, please consult the user s manual that came with that particular program for instructions on how to disable the firewall. Q: I think I have the latest release of Best Case Bankruptcy, but I received a message to update after clicking File Case on the OneTouch ECF Login screen. What should I do? This message appears if an update is needed to file electronically at your court. A: If the above screen appears, then Best Case has a critical ECF update available that you need to apply before filing your case with the court. Click the Update button and follow the on screen instructions to update your Chapter 7 Electronic Case Filing 241
program with the latest electronic filing features for your district. Updates require that you be covered by our maintenance plan, which we highly recommend that you purchase to stay on top of ECF changes. Q: What if I discover I made an error on a document I already filed? A: Our technical support specialists can help you create corrected documents. It s always a good idea to confirm with the court what should be in the amended filing and where to upload it on the court s ECF web site. Q: What if I have other questions about ECF and my Best Case software? A: Call Best Case Solutions toll-free at 1.800.492.8037! Our knowledgeable staff has assisted electronic filers in every live district. Occasionally, we may have to investigate an unusual error, but we have been very successful in helping everyone who has called. ECF Requirements To file petitions electronically with Best Case Bankruptcy, you will need to have: Internet access via modem, cable modem, T1/T3, DSL, etc. a web browser, and a valid user name and password on your local court s web site. Although Best Case Bankruptcy has an internal PDF writer, we recommend that you purchase the full Adobe Acrobat program which will allow you to manipulate PDF documents. (Visit www.adobe.com to order.) Check with your local court to see if they require a specific web browser or other software. PDF: Stands for portable document format, a standard file format that allows users to view files with Adobe Acrobat Reader in the exact format that they were created. Some courts now accept bankruptcies to be filed electronically in pdf format for easy electronic storage and retrieval. More information about pdf and Adobe Reader and Writer is available at http://www.adobe.com. 242 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education In This Chapter Credit Report Manager... 244 Introduction to the Credit Report Manager... 244 Independent Vendors Provide Credit Reports... 244 Getting Started... 244 Join a Credit Reporting Service... 244 Ordering and Importing Credit Reports... 248 Viewing Reports and Importing to Best Case... 250 Working with the Credit Report Manager... 251 Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education... 253 Ordering Credit Counseling and Debtor Education through Best Case. 253 Filing Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Certificates... 255 Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 243
Credit Report Manager Introduction to the Credit Report Manager Through the Credit Report Import feature, you can obtain credit reports for your clients on-line and download claims from the reports into creditor schedules in Best Case Bankruptcy. Credit reports are provided by either Credit Infonet (CIN), CoreLogic CREDCO or OCR s Suite Solutions (OCR). Obtaining electronic credit reports offers several advantages. You and your client will get the report quickly, and can review information on the report together. The credit report can alert you to lawsuits or judgments against the client, debts the client forgot to tell you about, debts incurred by former spouses, mistakes on the credit report that need to be corrected, tax liens, and more. Being able to import claims directly to the client file in Best Case saves you time and effort, and means you can get your client s case filed more quickly - important if there is a possibility of foreclosure. There is a form titled How Credit Reports Can Help in Bankruptcy in your Supplemental Forms folder at the bottom of the Forms and Schedules Menu which explains the benefits of ordering credit reports to your clients. Note: The Credit Report Import feature is an on-line service, the use of which requires that you be covered by our annual maintenance per your licensing agreement. Independent Vendors Provide Credit Reports Credit Reports obtained through the Credit Report Manager in Best Case are ordered from OCR s Suite Solutions (OCR), CoreLogic CREDCO, or Credit Infonet. Best Case allows you to view and import data from these reports, but does not provide any of the data and cannot help you to interpret it. For all questions about information on credit reports, please contact OCR at 1.877.311.1234, CoreLogic CREDCO at 1.877.213.2520, or Credit Infonet at 1.866.218.1003. Getting Started Before you can start downloading credit reports into Best Case Bankruptcy, you first need to become a member of Credit Infonet, Inc., CoreLogic CREDCO or OCR s Suite Solutions. To find out more about signing up with any of these providers, install Best Case Bankruptcy version 19 then start Best Case and open a client file. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, go to the main menu bar and click Credit Reports >> What is Credit Report Manager. Then click the More Info button. You will be directed to a web page with the links, forms and information you need to register for this feature. If you have any additional questions about the benefits of each service provider, please contact OCR at 1.877.311.1234, CoreLogic CREDCO at 1.877.213.2520, or Credit Infonet at 1.866.218.1003. Join a Credit Reporting Service After becoming a member of Credit Infonet, CoreLogic CREDCO, or OCR and obtaining your Option Code from Best Case, you are ready to begin. Detailed information is provided in subsequent sections, but this section provides a quick overview of the steps: 1. Accessing the Feature: To access the Credit Report feature, open the Forms and Schedules menu for the client file you wish to download the credit reports into. In the menu bar at the top of the screen, you will see the Credit Report menu. 2. Configuration: You ll input some information and preferences once through our configuration menu. Depending on which credit report provider you use, the information entered in the configuration screens will vary slightly. For more details on how to configure you Credit Report Manager, see page 246. 3. Request a Report: 244 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Request a Report from Credit Infonet (CIN) a. Fill in Voluntary Petition information for your client first. This data is needed to request a report. b. In the menu bar, select Credit Reports >> Credit Reports for this Client to open the Credit Report Order Wizard. Select whether you want to order a report for the debtor, joint debtor or both. Fill in the required information, clicking Next to move through the wizard screens. c. If you have not already authenticated the debtor s identity, select Begin Authentication. This will take you to the Credit Infonet website where the debtor must answer questions to verify his or her identity. If you have already authenticated the debtor s identity, select Already Authenticated. d. Click the Order Reports Now button to start downloading the requested reports. e. Click Import Reports to Best Case. This will open the Import to Best Case Bankruptcy Wizard, which will walk you through importing the claims into your Schedules. Request a Report from CoreLogic CREDCO a. Fill in Voluntary Petition information for your client first. This data is needed to request a report. In the menu bar, select Credit Reports >> Credit Reports for this Client to open the Credit Report Order Wizard. Select whether you want to order a report for the debtor, joint debtor or both. Fill in the required information, clicking Next to move through the wizard screens. a. Click the Order Reports button to send the debtor s information to CREDCO and open the Credit Report Manager. b. Click the Authenticate button to open the Automated Consumer Authentication page on the CREDCO website, where you can choose whether you want to authenticate the debtor now or email the authentication questions to him instead. c. Wait a few minutes for CREDCO to process your request, then click the Download Reports button to download your client s credit report information to your computer. d. Click Import Reports to Best Case to open the Import to Best Case Bankruptcy Wizard and begin importing the claims into your schedules. Request a Report from OCR s Suite Solutions (OCR) a. Fill in Voluntary Petition information for your client first. This data is needed to request a report. b. In the menu bar, select Credit Reports >> Credit Reports for this Client to open the Credit Report Order Wizard. Select whether you want to order a report for the debtor, joint debtor or both. Fill in the required information, clicking Next to move through the wizard screens. c. Click the Order Reports button to send the debtor s information to OCR and open the Credit Report Manager. d. Click the Authenticate button to open the Automated Consumer Authentication page on the OCR website, where you can choose whether you want to authenticate the debtor now or email the authentication questions to him instead. e. Wait a few minutes for OCR to process your request, then click the Download Reports button to download your client s credit report information to your computer. Click Import Reports to Best Case to open the Import to Best Case Bankruptcy Wizard and begin importing the claims into your schedules. Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 245
A form that explains the benefits of obtaining a credit report to your clients is available in the Supplemental Forms folder in the Forms and Schedules menu. Note: Debtors and joint debtors reports may be ordered together and combined into a single request for a joint report. You will be able to see the owner of the debt in the Credit Report Import Wizard, and Best Case will automatically assign the owner of the debts on your schedules based on the information in the report. If you need to get two separate reports, you must order one report, and then after waiting a short time, order the second. Download Report and Import Data 1. Downloaded reports may be viewed in PDF format from the Credit Report Manager. 2. Click the Import Reports button to copy claim data from the credit report to creditor schedules with the Import Wizard. To access the Credit Report feature, open the Forms and Schedules menu for the client file you wish to download the credit reports into. In the menu bar at the top of the screen, you will see the Credit Report menu. 246 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Credit Report Manager Configuration Before you can begin downloading credit reports, you will need to fill in some basic information in the Credit Reports Configuration screen. With a client file open to the Main List of Forms and schedules, in the main menu bar, click Credit Reports/Configuration to access the configuration window, which appears with several tabs at the top. Report Providers You must select which provider(s) you will be ordering reports from. If you have signed up to receive credit reports from multiple providers, you have the option of selecting a default provider. If no default provider is selected, the Order Credit Reports Wizard will prompt you to select a provider before each credit report that you order. Login OCR s Suite Solutions Users: Here you will be required to input the Company ID, User ID and password. This information is provided to you when you set up your account with OCR s Suite Solutions Agency. The Provider ID is produced by Best Case and cannot be changed. You cannot download credit reports into Best Case without your Login Information. After you have entered this information, Best Case will automatically save it so it won t have to be reentered each time you order a credit report. Once your login information has been filled in, click the Next Tab button to advance to the Credit Card tab. Credit Card (OCR s Suite Solutions Only) Here you will enter information for the credit card that will be charged when you order a credit report, including the card number, expiration date, and name on the card. After entering the required information, click the Next Tab button to advance to the Security tab. Online Credit Reporting (OCR) Login Configuration Screen CoreLogic (CREDCO) and Credit Infonet (CIN)Users: Here you will be required to input the Client Code, User Name and Password. This information is provided to you when you set up your account with CoreLogic or Credit Infonet. You cannot download credit reports into Best Case without your Login Information. After you have entered this information, Best Case will automatically save it so it won t have to be re-entered each time you order a credit report. Once your login information has been filled in, click the Next Tab button until you advance to the Security tab. Note: In this screen, you will also be able to select whether you download a two source or three source report. For more information on what sources are used for these reports, you can call or email Credit Infonet. CoreLogic (CREDCO) Login Configuration Screen Security Information in the Security tab allows you to restrict access to the Credit Report Manager. If you have not specified any passwords in this section, anyone accessing your Best Case software will be able to use the Credit Report Import feature and view information in the Configuration window. There are two types of passwords: Supervisor Password: This password controls access to order credit reports and access the configuration window to view and modify login, credit card, and security settings. User Password: This password controls access to order and download credit reports ONLY. It cannot be used to view or modify Credit Infonet (CIN) Login Configuration Screen Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 247
configuration settings. Options As a default, the following options are checked for your convenience. Change UPPERCASE data to UpperLower: Changes the format of the credit report information from all upper case to lower case with the first letters of each word in upper case. Change UpperLower data to UPPERCASE: Changes the format of the credit report information from upper lower case to all upper case. (Applies only to Credit Infonet Customers.) Remove Joint Debtor Duplicates: If there are duplicate claims shown on the credit report for both the debtor and joint debtor, Best Case will remove the joint debtor's claim. Once you have confirmed your configuration settings, click OK. This will close the configuration window and return you to the Forms and Schedules Menu for your client. Ordering and Importing Credit Reports To order and import a credit report into Best Case, you will need to complete following basic steps: 1) Select the credit reports to request; 2) Specify an address for the debtor/ joint debtor; 3) Authenticate the debtor s identity; 4) Download the Report; and 5) Import the report into the debtor s forms and schedules. The Order Credit Report Wizard and the Credit Report Manager walk you through each step in the process. To start the order process, open your client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu, and then click Credit Reports >> Credit Reports for this Client in the menu bar at the top of the screen. (Note that before you can order a credit report you ll need to enter the debtor s/joint debtor s current Social Security number and address information in the Voluntary Petition. If you have not added this information, Best Case will prompt you to input it and return you to the Forms and Schedules menu.) 1. Select Credit Reports to Request: If this is an individual filing, the debtor s name will automatically be selected. If you are ordering reports for a joint filing, this window allows you to choose whether you want to request credit reports for the debtor, joint debtor, or both. You need to make a selection in order to continue. 2. Specifying the Debtor s Address: This section asks you to specify the debtor s address. If you have entered both a street address and a mailing address for the debtor in the Voluntary Petition, you will be able to select which address to use. If the debtor has not lived at the same address for more than two years, you can add his/ her former address in the fields at the bottom of the window. Joint Debtor Address: If this is a joint filing, you will need to specify an address for the joint debtor as well. You can choose from the joint debtor s street address or mailing address, according to the information inputted in the Voluntary Petition. If the joint debtor has not lived at the same address for more than two years, add his/her former address in the fields at the bottom of the window. 3. Authenticate the Debtor s Identity: The three credit reporting bureaus require debtors to authenticate their identity before they will release a credit report. When you order a credit report from either Credit Infonet or OCR s Suite Solutions, you authenticate the debtor by going to a website where the debtor must answer a series of questions to verify his or her identity. 248 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Authenticating Identity Online: Credit Infonet: Once the debtor and joint debtor information has been entered, you will need to select the authentication status. If you have not already authenticated the identity of the debtor, select Begin Authentication. This will take you to a Credit Infonet website where the debtor must answer questions to verify his or her identity. After the debtor s identity has been successfully authenticated, you will have the option to close the browser and return to Best Case where you will be able to finish your order. If you have already authenticated the identity of the debtor, select Already Authenticated. This will take you to the Finish New Credit Report Order screen and allow you to place an order or save your information and place your order later. CoreLogic CREDCO or OCR s Suite Solutions: Click the Order Reports button to send the debtor information to First American or OCR, who will process your order. Save Info/ Order Later: If you are not yet ready to order the credit report, click the Save Info/ Order Later button to save the debtor information you have entered so far. After you have clicked the Order Reports button, you will be taken to the Credit Report Manger where you can begin the authentication process. To do this, click the button labeled Authenticate. This will take you to the Automated Consumer Authentication page on the OCR website. Here you will be asked if your client is present to answer questions to verify his or her identity. If your client is available in person or over the telephone, select the Consumer Is Present button. If the client is not available, you will have the choice to email the authentication questions to them instead. (Please note that the client has a pre-set amount of time to answer the questions; once they have begun answering the questions they must complete them within that timeframe.) Step 3: Authenticating the Debtor s Identity with Credit Infonet Step 3: Authenticating the Debtor s Identity with OCR 4. Download the Credit Report: Once you have authenticated the debtor s identity, the next step is to download the reports to your computer: Credit Infonet: Click the Order Reports Now button to send the debtor information to Credit Infonet, who will process the request and release the report for download into Best Case. When the report is done downloading, click OK to return to the Credit Report Manager. Save Info/ Order Later: If you are not yet ready to order the credit report, click the Save Info/ Order Later button to save the debtor information you have entered so far. CoreLogic CREDCO or OCR s Suite Solutions: Once you have ordered your reports and the debtor has authenticated his or her identity through OCR, wait at least 20 minutes for OCR to process your request, then click the Download Reports button in the Credit Report Manager to download your client s credit report information to your computer in preparation for importing Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 249
creditors into your client file in Best Case. Contact OCR at the number above if your reports are unavailable. Finish Order: Either Order Information Now or Save Information You ve Input and Order Later Download your Report: Once OCR has notified you that your report is ready, click the Download Reports button 5. Import the Credit Report: Once your report is done downloading, click Import Reports to Best Case. This opens the Import window where you can view the credit report and begin importing creditors to the debtor s schedules. Click the Import Reports Button to see the Debtor s Credit Report. Viewing Reports and Importing to Best Case You can access credit reports that you have requested and authenticated in order to view information or copy claims to Best Case Bankruptcy. To View Credit Reports 1. First, open the Credit Report Manager: With your client file open, go to the Forms and Schedules Menu and then select Credit Report >> Credit Reports for this Client in the menu bar at the top of screen. 2. Click the View PDF button in the Debtor Credit Report or Joint Debtor Credit Report section. The report opens in Adobe Acrobat. This report contains debts reported to Trans Union and Experian. 3. To view data reported to Equifax but not the other two bureaus, click the Supplement button. A web page opens containing this data. (Note that the Supplement button is available only for Online Credit Report users.) Note: Your client will receive a printed credit report in the mail with data from all three credit bureaus merged together. To Import Claims to Best Case Bankruptcy 1. First, open the Credit Report Manager: With your client file open, go to the Forms and Schedules Menu and click Credit Report/Credit Reports for this Client. 250 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
2. Click the Import Reports to Best Case button. 3. The next screen lists all claims that appeared on the merged credit report. For each claim, you can see the creditor name, account type, loan type, date reported, last activity date, balance, the person responsible for the debt, the status, and account number. Additional information for the highlighted creditor, such as the creditor s address and the collateral for the debt, appears at the bottom of the screen. The View PDF button in the upper right allows you to view a PDF of the merged credit report. The Omit $0.00 & Paid checkbox in the bottom left corner allows you to exclude claims that have both a $0 balance and a status of Paid. The Omit ALL $0.00 checkbox excludes all claims that have $0 balances. 4. You can either import all records to Schedule F and then move individual creditors from schedule F to another schedule, or select a schedule for each debt in this screen. To import all debts to Schedule F, click the Tag All as Sch F button at the top of the window then click the Import to Client button. To select a schedule for each debt, highlight the first creditor record and press D, E or F on your keyboard or use the Sch D, Sch E, or Sch F buttons at the top of the window. For Schedule E claims, you ll need to select the type of priority for each debt. After you select a schedule, the highlighter bar will automatically move to the next record. Select the appropriate schedule for each creditor. Click Import to Client when you have marked each record that you want to import. A message will appear telling you how many creditors were imported. You can either import all of the records to Schedule F and move a creditor from Schedule F to another schedule, or select a schedule for each debt in this screen. A message will appear telling you how many creditors were imported. Data Imported For each creditor record you import, Best Case will copy the following information from the credit report if it is available: The creditor name and address The claim amount (from the balance column) The account number The consideration for Schedule E or F or collateral ( automobile or mortgage ) for Schedule D (from the Loan Type) The date the debt was incurred (as Opened <date> Last Active <date> ) Working with the Credit Report Manager The Credit Report Manager is where you will order and download the credit reports in preparation for importing them into your client file. At any point in the credit report ordering process, you can close the Credit Report Manager and return to the Forms and Schedules menu for the client. You can reopen the Credit Report Manager by clicking Credit Report >>Credit Reports for this Client in the menu bar. The options available to you when you open the Credit Report Manager will vary based on which credit report provider you are using and which steps in the ordering process you have completed. (See Ordering and Importing Credit Reports on page 248 for more information on how the credit report ordering process works.) Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 251
The Credit Report Manager Screen for Credit Infonet users The Credit Report Manager for OCR users: Notice that if you ordered reports through the Wizard, the Step 1 button (Order Reports) is disabled and you can move on to Step 2. 252 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide The Authenticate button takes you to a website where the debtor must answer a series of questions to verify his or her identity. If you are using Credit Infonet, you will authenticate the debtor s identity before you order the credit report. If you are using OCR s Suite Solutions (OCR), you will be able to authenticate the debtor s identity after the credit report has been ordered. (See Ordering and Importing Credit Reports on 248 for more information on the authentication process.) Clicking the Order Reports button sends the debtor s information to the credit report provider so that it can process the credit report request. When you are using Credit Infonet, you will select this button after you have authenticated the debtor s identity and you are ready to download the credit report to your computer. If you are using OCR, clicking the Order Reports button will signal the provider that you are ordering a report for this client. Once the order has been processed, you will be able to click the Authenticate button and confirm the debtor s identity. Once you have ordered your reports and the debtor has authenticated his or her identity through OCR, wait at least 20 minutes for your request to be processed, then click the Download Reports button in the Credit Report Manager to download your client s credit report information to your computer. ( Note that when you order a credit report from Credit Infonet clicking the Order Reports button automatically downloads the credit report to your computer, so the Download Reports button is not needed and will not be available to you.) Once your report is down downloading, click Import Reports to Best Case. This opens the Import window where you can view the credit report and begin importing creditors to the debtor s schedules. When you download a credit report into Best Case, a PDF file of the debts reported to Trans Union and Experian is created as well. Click the View Report button to open the PDF version of the report in Adobe Reader. If you order a credit report from OCR, the Supplement button is available to you once you have downloaded the report. This button opens a web page containing data reported to Equifax but not the other two bureaus. If you are unable to authenticate the debtor electronically, you may be required to submit to the credit report provider specific paperwork signed by the debtor. To print the forms, return to the Credit Report Manager and click the Print Paperwork button. (Note that you should not fax the paperwork unless your provider specifically instructs you to do so.)
Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Best Case now helps you to order due diligence and credit counseling products online through CIN Legal (Credit Infonet). You can use the Due Diligence Explorer to order tax transcripts, real property appraisals, title products, automobile valuations and credit counseling and debtor education. Credit Counseling Requirement (pre-petition) The new bankruptcy law that went into effect October 17, 2005, requires that consumers who wish to file under Chapter 7 or 13 obtain credit counseling in the 180 days preceding filing a bankruptcy petition. The credit counseling must be provided by a nonprofit credit counseling agency approved by the Office of the U.S. Trustee, and the average length of the counseling is 90 minutes. Once counseling has been obtained, a credit counseling certificate is provided by the agency, which in most districts must be filed with the petition. (See Filing Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Certificates on page 255 for more information.) Debtor Education Requirement (Prior to Discharge) Prior to discharge, an individual debtor filing under Chapter 7 or 13 must obtain Debtor Education, which must be provided by an agency approved by the U.S. Trustee. Debtor Education should take about 2 hours to complete. Upon completion of the course, the debtor will receive a certificate of completion, which must be filed with the court. Both credit counseling and debtor education can be provided over the telephone, Internet, or in person. Ordering Credit Counseling and Debtor Education through Best Case Best Case has partnered with CIN Legal to streamline the process of requesting credit counseling and debtor education services and to deliver the certifications to you promptly in easy-to-upload PDF format. CIN Legal works with two agencies which provide credit counseling and debtor education at competitive prices: Debt Education and Certification Foundation ( DECAF) (www.debt-foundation.org/), and Money Management International (MMI) (www.crediteducation.org) The agencies are approved by the Office of the U.S. Trustee, and offer courses over the telephone, and through the Internet 24 hours per day, 7 days a week. Before You Can Order To order due diligence or credit counseling products, you will need to become a member of CIN Legal (Credit Infonet). If you are already downloading credit reports from CIN Legal, there is nothing more you need to do to configure your software. If you are not yet signed up to receive credit reports from CIN Legal you can find out more about becoming a member by logging onto the CIN Legal website at http://www.creditinfonet.com/. (For help entering your login and password information, consult page 246.) Ordering Due Diligence Products, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 1. Open a client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. In the Menu bar, select Credit Reports >> Due Diligence and Credit Counseling. 3. Click the Order Due Diligence or Credit Counseling button. 4. The Due Diligence Explorer connects you to the CIN Legal website where you will find an order wizard with a menu of products. Best case helps you by filling in information about your client based on what you have entered in the Voluntary Petition. Simply follow the wizard to request the products and services you want. Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 253
Note: The Due Diligence Explorer functions like a simple web browser and connects directly to the CIN Legal website. The products that you order and the order wizard are produced outside of Best Case by CIN Legal. If you have any questions about either the products or the ordering process, you can call CIN Legal directly at 1.866.218.1003. The Due Diligence Explorer connects you directly to the CIN Legal Website. 5. When you have completed your order, you can close the Due Diligence Explorer and return to Best Case by clicking the close button ( X ) in the top right corner of the window. After You Have Completed Your Order 1. If you ve ordered Credit Counseling or Debtor Education services, both you and your client will receive an email from CIN Legal. The email gives the client an 800 number for a telephonic course and a web link for completing the course on-line your client can choose either method. Note: If your client does not have email, you ll need to provide him with the telephone number and/or web link so that he can complete the course. With every course that s ordered, you will receive an acknowledgement email with the toll free telephone number and the web link and login credentials. Upon completion of the course, your client will be required to have a telephone call lasting from 15 to 30 minutes with a credit counselor at the number provided in the email. The agency will then release the completion certificate to CIN Legal. 2. Both you and your debtor will receive an email with a PDF attachment containing the completion certificate, assuming both email addresses have been provided. 3. If you ordered the pre-petition credit counseling: Save the Credit Counseling certificate to the ECF Manager for the client (see Filing Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Certificates). If it is required in your district, the Best Case OneTouch system automatically uploads it with your petition. -OR- 4. If you ordered the post-petition debtor education: Once you get notice that Debtor Education has been completed, you can either save and file the certificate provided by CIN Legal, or create a Debtor Education certificate in Best Case (Form 23). (See Filing Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Certificates.) Checking the Status of Your Order Best Case makes it easy to check the status of your Due Diligence product orders that cannot be completed while you wait. To see if your order has been completed: 254 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
1. Open the client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. In the Menu bar, select Credit Reports >> Due Diligence and Credit Counseling. 3. Click the Check Status of an Existing Order button. 4. The Due Diligence explorer will open and connect you to a page on the CIN Legal website, similar to the one pictured below, where you can quickly verify the status of any of the products you have ordered. Checking the status of your order on the CIN Legal website. Ordering Due Diligence and Credit Counseling from OCR Suite Solutions Best Case gives you the option to order due diligence and credit counseling products online through OCR Suite Solutions. You can use the link to connect to the Suite Solutions website and order tax transcripts, real property appraisals, title products, automobile valuations and credit counseling and debtor education. Getting Started To order due diligence or credit counseling products from OCR, you will need to become a member. If you are already downloading credit reports from OCR, there is nothing more you need to do to configure your software. If you are not yet signed up to receive credit reports from OCR you can find out more about becoming a member by logging onto their website at http://www.suitesolutions.info. (For help entering your login and password information, consult the Credit Report Manager: Configuration help topic) Ordering Due Diligence and Credit Counseling Products 1. Open a client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. In the menu bar, click on Credit Reports >> Due Diligence and Credit Counseling>> Online Credit - Suite Solutions. 3. Best Case connects you directly to the Suite Solutions website where you can pick the products to order. Filing Credit Counseling and Debtor Education Certificates If your court requires that the Certificate of Credit Counseling be filed electronically, and you want to include it with your case filing, follow the steps below to ensure that your file gets uploaded properly during OneTouch. Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 255
If you receive a PDF copy of the certificate via email, you can simply save the file to the ECF Manager as described below. If you have a paper copy of the credit counseling certificate, you can scan the document and convert it to PDF using BestScan. If you are including the certificate with the debtor s initial filing, you court may also require you to attach the PDF file to Exhibit D using the PDF Attachment Feature. Saving Your Credit Counseling Certificate in the Right Place If you order the debtor s credit counseling from CIN Legal, when the debtor has completed the counseling, CIN Legal will send you an email with the Certificate of Credit Counseling attached to it in PDF format. Once you have received the email from CIN Legal, or any other company which emails you a PDF of the certificate, here is what you need to do to save the PDF file to Best Case for electronic filing: 1. Open the email which contains the PDF and right click on the link to the attachment. Then choose Save As in the pop-up menu that appears. 2. In the Save As window that opens, click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Save In box at the top of the screen. Select the C: drive. 3. Double Click on the ECF Folder in the main portion of the window and then again on the folder with your clients last name. By Default the clients ECF Manager folder is located in C:\ECF\{Client Name} Saving the Certificate of Credit Counseling to the ECF Manager Note: By default Best Case creates the clients ECF Manager folder in C:/ECF/{Client Name}. If you are unsure of where your ECF directory is located, Best Case displays the file path for each clients ECF Manager folder at the top of the ECF Manager. Best Case displays the ECF Manager Folder path at the top of the client s ECF Manager Screen. 4. In the box labeled File name, make sure the file is called CCC.PDF. 5. Click the Save button. 6. If there is a separate certificate for the joint debtor, return to the email and right click on the attachment with the joint debtor s certificate. Then follow steps 2-4, making sure to name the second file CCC2.PDF. 7. If you will be including the certificate with the debtor s initial filing, you court may require you to attach the PDF(s) to the debtor's Exhibit D. If you do not need to attach the certificate to Exhibit D, stop here. Best Case will automatically upload CCC.PDF, and CCC2.PDF if applicable, during OneTouch. 256 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Scanning a Paper Certificate of Credit Counseling If you have a paper copy of the Certificate of Credit Counseling, you can quickly scan it, convert it to a PDF file and save it to the ECF Manager using our BestScan feature. 1. Open the client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu, and then click the ECF Manager button at the bottom of the forms list. 2. Click the BestScan button on the right hand side of the ECF Manager window. Best Case Bankruptcy automatically finds your scanner and opens the BestScan window with the courtrecommended settings selected. 3. Load the document into your scanner and click Scan. If this is a multi-page document, put the next page on the scanner and click Scan in the pop-up box that appears after you scan the first page. When you have scanned all of the pages, click Cancel to close the pop-up and return to the BestScan window where you can review your scanned image. When you click the Save PDF button, BestScan automatically selects the client s ECF Manager folder as the destination for the scanned document. 4. When you have reviewed the document, click the Save PDF button to create a PDF of your document. 5. Name the file CCC.PDF, and then click Save. The name of the electronic file you created is displayed in the ECF Manager. 6. If there is an additional certificate for the joint debtor, repeat steps 2-5, making sure to name the new scanned document CCC2.PDF. 7. If you will be including the certificate with the debtor s initial filing, you court may require you to attach the PDF(s) to the debtor's Exhibit D. If you do not need to attach the certificate to Exhibit D, stop here. Best Case will automatically upload CCC.PDF, and CCC2.PDF if applicable, during OneTouch. For a more complete description see Scanning Documents with BestScan: on page 230. Attaching the CCC.PDF to Exhibit D 1. Select a form: You first need to select your main document. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight Exhibit D, then click the Attach button at the bottom of the window, or press [Alt]-[T]. 2. Add a PDF File: The attachments list screen appears. Click Insert and select Existing PDF File to add a new PDF file. 3. A window appears asking you to select a PDF file from your hard drive or network. If you used BestScan to scan the debtor s pay stubs you will need to browse to your clients ECF Manager to find Paystubs.PDF. To do so: a. Click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Look in box at the top of the Select PDF files to Attach window. Select the C: drive. b. Double click on the ECF folder in the main portion of the window and then again on the folder with your client s last name. 4. Double-click on the CCC.PDF file, or highlight it and click Open. Chapter 8 The Credit Report Manager, Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education 257
5. The Add Attachment screen appears with common answers marked. Click OK to add the PDF file to the document. (See Adding Attachments on page 199for a complete description of the options available here) 6. The PDF file will now appear in the attachments list screen. Click Close to exit the list of attachments. When you return to the Forms and Schedules Menu, you ll notice that a paperclip appears on top of the form icon next to your document, indicating that there is an attachment. 7. If this is a joint filing, and you need to attach the joint debtor s Certificate of Credit Counseling to Exhibit D, follow steps 1-6 above using the Exhibit D (Joint Debtor) form and attaching the CCC2.PDF file. Filing Form 23: Debtor s Certification of Completion of Instructional Course Concerning Personal Financial Management (Debtor Education Certification) The option to OneTouch Form 23 is only available for cases that have already been issued a case number. To create and file Form 23 with Best Case: 1. Open the Electronic Case Filing Preparation Wizard by clicking the ECF lightening bolt in the Best Case tool bar or by clicking the Prepare ECF Filing button in the lower left corner of the ECF Manager. 2. Select the radio button labeled Form 23 Post Petition Financial Management Education and click Next. Note: This option will not be available for cases that have not been issued a case number or cases for which no case number has been entered. Case numbers may be entered in the Notes section. 3. If you have not yet edited Form 23 you may do so from this window by clicking Edit Debtor Form 23 (or Edit Joint Form 23). If you are filing in a jurisdiction that requires the Financial Management Certificate to be attached, you may click the Attachments button to insert a PDF of the certificate. In joint bankruptcy filings some jurisdictions require both debtor and joint debtor Form 23s to be filed as a single PDF document. Other jurisdictions require each Form 23 to be filed as separate PDFs; consult your court for local requirements. Mark the appropriate radio button in the lower right corner and click Next. 4. The PDF (or PDFs) will automatically be named appropriately by Best Case. You may also change the date on the signature line here. When finished, click Prepare Filing. 5. When the above steps are completed, a button labeled File B23 will appear in the lower right corner of the ECF Manager. Click this button to login to the court. Best Case will automatically upload Form 23 to the court s website and a receipt will be displayed at the end of filing. 258 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 9 File Management, Case Management and General Procedures In This Chapter AddressFill... 260 Spell Check... 261 Case Status, Notes and Filing Information... 262 Changing the chapter of filing or type of debtor... 265 Working with the Client List... 267 Right-Click on Client Name for File Options... 267 Using the Filter Drop-Down to Hide and Sort Cases... 267 Searching the Client List... 268 Copying One Client File to a Diskette or a Separate Folder... 270 Copying a Client File from Another Drive... 272 Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another... 276 Copying Creditors from One Schedule to Another... 276 Exporting and Importing a Common Creditor List... 277 Combining Common Creditor Lists from Multiple Machines... 279 Making a Duplicate Copy of a Client File... 279 Making a Standard Client Template... 280 Using the Calculator... 280 Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export... 280 Copying a Creditor Schedule from One Client to Another... 286 Converting and Importing Word or Word Perfect Addresses... 286 Property Import and Export... 287 Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 259
File Management, Case Management and General Procedures AddressFill * AddressFill provides a quick way for you to select a creditor from either your Common Creditor List or a list of creditors entered on Schedules D, E and F in this case. When you insert a creditor (or other address data) in places where your Common Creditor List is available, the AddressFill list appears just below the name field as pictured below. If the name you want is in the Common Creditor List, just begin to type the creditor name, then press R when the appropriate creditor is highlighted. The AddressFill list appears automatically when you add a creditor. Just start to type the name. When the creditor is highlighted, press R. The DEF tab lets you copy a creditor from any of the creditor schedules. When you press R, the name and address will be filled in for you, and the cursor will move to the next field. 260 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If you specified a default answer for consideration in the Common Creditor List for this creditor, that will be filled in for you in Schedules E and F. Choosing a scheduled creditor: If the creditor you want is not in the Common Creditor List, but is already listed on a creditor schedule for this case: Click the DEF tab or press 8 in the AddressFill list. Begin to type the name of the desired creditor, then press R when the correct creditor is highlighted. If you are in creditor Schedule D, E or F, and want to add this creditor to your Common Creditor List, click in the Add to CCL box or click in the creditor name field and press C-0. Typing in a new creditor: If the creditor you want is not in either list: Just type the name of the creditor then press T. The AddressFill list disappears when you press T. Enter the address. If you accidentally select the wrong creditor, just press S-T until you return to the creditor name field, then begin to type the correct name. As you begin to type, the AddressFill list will appear again. To make the AddressFill list disappear, press E. While the AddressFill list is displayed, you can add new creditors to your Common Creditor List or edit existing creditors. To add new creditors, click the New button or press the I key on your keyboard. To edit a creditor, highlight it then click the Edit button. Wherever AddressFill is available, you can view more detailed information about each common creditor, including notes, by pressing 0. AddressFill is a trademark of Best Case Solutions, Inc., based in Evanston, Illinois. Turning AddressFill On or Off By default, Best Case Bankruptcy ships with AddressFill turned on. If you want to turn AddressFill off, close your Client List Window, click on Setup, then on Preferences, then click on Disable AddressFill Popup. Note that there is really no disadvantage to having AddressFill on: if you need to enter creditors that are not in your Common Creditor List while AddressFill is on, just begin typing the name then press T as if the floating list were not there, or press E to make it go away. Spell Check The spell check feature checks the spelling of individual fields. To use spell check, with the cursor in any text field you want to check, press C-\. (The back slash key is generally above the R key on your keyboard.) If there are no suspect words, a message appears saying that the spell check is complete. Click OK or press R to acknowledge the message. If there are suspect words, the spell check window appears with the first word that was not found in the dictionary highlighted. A list of suggestions will appear with the closest match appearing in the Change To box. To skip the word, click Skip. To skip all occurrences of the word in this field, click Skip All. To accept the Change To answer, click the Change button. To change all occurrences of the word in this field, click Change All. To select a word that appears in the list of suggestions, double-click on the desired word, or highlight the desired choice and click Change. To change to a word that is not in the list of suggestions, type in a new word in the Change To box, then click Change. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 261
To search for more suggestions based on the word that appears in the Change To box, click Suggest. (To go back to the original list of suggestions, click Resume.) To add the Not Found word to the dictionary, click the Add button. To undo all spelling corrections that you ve made to this field, click Undo. To exit Spell Check without saving changes, click Cancel. To save changes and exit Spell Check before it has completed checking words, click OK. When all words have been checked for this field, you will see a message that says that the spell check is complete. Just click OK to acknowledge the message. You can change the command key for Spell Check to C-S or another letter by using your Keyboard Macros. See Macro Phrase List on page 320. Note: Spell Check is not available in number fields, date fields or drop-down list fields. Case Status, Notes and Filing Information After you have added a new client, the name, chapter of filing, type of debtor and office file number (if applicable), appear in the Client List Window. There are also several columns which are blank. At any point while you are working on a case, you can enter a follow-up date, change the case status, add notes to the case, or mark the case as needing attention. 1. With your client highlighted in the Client List Window, click on the button labeled Case Notes. 2. Click Insert to add a new note or Change to edit an existing note. 3. In the Notes Form Window, as pictured at right, add a subject and the text of the Note. You can also copy your notes for pasting in other applications by clicking the Copy button. Accessing notes while working on a case The Case Notes and Filing Information sections are available from any entry screen when the client file is open. Just click the button in the toolbar to access the notes or press C-S-N. Date Picker To help you select dates in Best Case Bankruptcy, the Date Picker is available in the Notes section and in Form 3. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments. You ll see the Date Picker icon, pictured below, in the Case Notes section next to the follow-up date field and in the Filing Information tab next to all date fields. You ll also see it next to date fields in Form 3. Click the blue and white calendar icon to select a date, if you want to see a calendar To access Date Picker, just click on the icon pictured above next to the relevant field or press 0. (You can also press the [*] key in the number key pad on the right side of your keyboard.) 262 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
A calendar appears with today s date marked. When you click on a date in the Date Picker, the date will be filled into your field for you and the Date Picker will disappear. You can navigate through the calendar using the following tools: - Jump backward or forward one year. - Jump backward or forward one month. - Paste in today s date. in. - Find a date exactly 1, 2, 3 or 4 weeks from today s date, or 15, 30, 60, 90 or 120 days from today, and paste it - Close Date Picker without selecting a date. Or, if you are not using a mouse, using the following keyboard shortcuts. With the cursor in the date field but with the calculator closed: T fills in today s date. + key moves forward one day - key moves back one day [pagedown] moves forward one week [pageup] moves back one week Changing File Status and Case Status All cases are marked active and preparing to file until you change them to closed or prospective client. To indicate that a case is closed or prospective or to change the Case Status: 1. Go to the Client List Window. 2. Highlight the appropriate case. 3. Click on the Case Status button. 4. A window will appear with Case Status as the first tab. 5. Click on the Closed or Prospective radio button, and/or 6. Click the drop-down to the right of your File Status and select the new case status. Click OK to save your changes. Adding/changing a follow-up date The follow-up date appears in the Client List Window as a reminder to you. To add or change a follow-up date, go into the Case Status section as described in steps 1-4 above, then type a date in the field labeled Next Follow-up Date. Marking a case that needs attention If you mark a case as needing attention, it will appear with a red exclamation point next to it in the Client List Window. To mark a case as needing attention: Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 263
1. Go to the Client List Window. 2. Highlight the appropriate case. 3. Click on the Case Status button. 4. A window will appear with Case Status as the first tab. 5. Click in the box next to Needs Attention. 6. To remove the check mark, click on it again. Adding comments and notes Comments that you add in the comment field will appear in the Case Status column in the Client List Window next to the status of the case. Notes do not appear in the Client List Window. The field for notes is longer than the comment field, allowing you to enter a more detailed reminder to yourself about anything in the case. To add comments or notes: 1. Follow steps 1-4 above to get to the Case Status tab. 2. If you want to add a short comment type it into the Comment field. If you want to add a longer reminder to yourself about the case, click the Notes tab to type it into the notes field. 3. Click OK when finished. Adding debtor s phone number, etc. There are places in the notes window where you can add the debtor s telephone number at work and home, social security number and employer. These questions are optional. To add the debtor s personal information: 1. Open the Client List Window. 2. Highlight the client. 3. Click on the Case Notes button. 4. Click on the tab labeled Debtor. 5. Enter information about the debtor and joint debtor then click OK. Note that the social security number also appears in the Debtor tab of the Voluntary Petition. You can enter it in either place. Listing Debtor s Phone Number on Voluntary Petition: To include the debtor s phone number on page 2 of the Voluntary Petition, you can change a quick Setup option. See Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. Changing the way a client is listed in the Client List Window The way a client is listed is specified in the field called Index As. This field appears in both the Voluntary Petition entry screen and in the Notes window. You can change it in either place. Instructions for changing it in the Notes window are listed below. 1. Open the Client List Window. 2. Highlight the client. 3. Click on the Case Notes button. 4. Click on the tab labeled File Setup Information. 5. You ll notice that all of these answers have been copied from the New Client Information you entered when you added this case. 264 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
6. Type a new answer for Index As, then click OK. If you want this debtor alphabetized by last name, type the last name, first name. Changing/adding an office file number This file number is for your information only and is optional. Follow steps 1-5 above, then type a file number in the field labeled Office File No. You can use both letters and numbers in this field. Note that this is different than the case number, which can be entered in the Filing Information tab in the Voluntary Petition and prints on forms. Changing the chapter of filing or type of debtor If you need to convert chapter, (for example, change a Chapter 13 filing to a 7), or the type of debtor, (individual to joint, etc.), you can do so quickly and easily, and retain any information that you have entered. The chapter or type of debtor can be changed in the Filing Information section of the Voluntary Petition. (See page 34 for more information.) Case dates and filing information The Case Status tab in the Notes window helps you track the date the case was opened, filed, confirmed and/or discharged, the date, time and location of the 341 meeting, and the attorney and paralegal working on the case, along with a host of other information helpful in monitoring a case s progress. It is also where you will change, edit or delete the Case Number. Case Notes: File Setup Information The information stored here is mostly for your reference. To access the Case Status, 1. From the Client List Window, highlight the client. Click the Case Status button. 2. Enter the information that you want in the appropriate fields. You might want to use the Date Picker feature, described on page 263. 3. Click OK. Important Dates For your own custom forms and letters, you have access to these fields in the Additional Documents Library. See Additional Documents Library on page 206. To access the various dates associated with a client s case, select the Important Dates tab in the Notes window. Important Prior to Filing and Post Filing dates are automatically calculated and displayed in this window based on the Filing Date. If you want to only display dates without reference to code, click the Simple Dates checkbox. You may also Print or Copy from this window. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 265
User Defined Note Fields Best Case provides text fields, check boxes, date fields, and dollar amount fields which you can customize to meet your needs. Each of these variables has a Merge Code that can be used when creating documents in the Additional Documents Library. (See Additional Documents Library on page206.) Also, each of these fields will be included in a spreadsheet if you export the client list in Comma Seperated Variable (CSV) format. (See page284.) To access the User Defined Fields: 1. Open a client file and click the Notes button on the Best Case toolbar. 2. Select the tab labeled User Defined 1. 3. Click Edit Field Prompts to create a new User Defined Field. You can label a User Defined Field by entering text into the Field Prompt Text box. The Field Tip Text box allows you to enter text that will appear when a Best Case user hovers the mouse pointer over the field. Changing the Case Number and Filing Date Open the Client List Window. 1. Highlight the client. 2. Click on the Case Status button. 3. Fill in the new Case Number, or delete the existing one by clicking on the Clear Case # button. You can also copy the Case Number for pasting in other applications by clicking the Copy button to the right of the Case Number. 4. Add, change or remove the Date Filed as needed. You might want to use the Date Picker feature, described on page 263. 5. Click OK to save your changes. Assigning a Judge or Trustee to a Case Use the File Setup Information tab in the Client Notes Screen to assign a judge or trustee to a client file. Highlight the client's name in the client list, or open the client file to the Forms and Schedules Menu. 1. Click the Notes button in the top toolbar. 2. Go to the File Setup Information tab. 3. Select the judge and/or trustee from the drop-down list provided. The Judge and Trustee lists are created and edited in the Basic Information tab of the Juridiction setup screen. See page 298 for more information. 266 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Working with the Client List Right-click on any client file to open a menu of client options. Use the search button to search for client files containing specific data. The Filter drop-down allows you to sort your client list based on the Case Status and other criteria Right-Click on Client Name for File Options The Client List offers several options for sorting and managing your client files In the Client List Window, move the mouse to a client s name and press the right mouse button for a drop-down list of menu choices: Open Client opens the Forms and Schedules Menu for this client. Edit Notes/Status takes you to the case notes for the client. See page 262 for more information on using the Client Notes features. Explore ECF Folder allows you to have instant access to a client s ECF folder. New Client opens the Creating New Client File window and prompts you for the name of the new client. Delete Client deletes the highlighted file. Copy Client allows you to make a duplicate of the highlighted client. Send to Disk allows you to save the client file to a disk to transfer client data between computers, copy a client file to a separate location on your network or hard drive. Restore from Disk copies a client file previously saved with send to disk from a diskette or a separate location on your computer to the clients folder of this installation so that it will appear in the Client List Window. Send via Email allows you to email client files to colleages or to transfer client files from your home computer to your office computer. Using the Filter Drop-Down to Hide and Sort Cases To sort cases in the Client List, or to hide the files that you don t want to see, use the Filter drop-down at the top of the Client List Window. This filter does not delete any cases; it merely controls which cases are displayed and the order cases are listed in. By default Best Case displays all Active cases sorted alphabetically when you open the client list. However you can click the Filter drop-down at the top of the client list to sort your client files by any of the following: Active: displays only cases with a File Status set to Active in the Notes window. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 267
Closed: displays only cases with a File Status set to Closed in the Notes window. Prospect: displays only cases with a File Status set to Prospective Client in the Notes window. All: displays all cases and can be set as the default tab by clicking on All Tab as Default. Follow-up: displays all cases with a Next Follow-up date entered in the Notes window. Attention: displays all clients that have the Needs Attention checkbox checked in the Notes window. Filed: displays all clients with a Case Number and a Date Filed entered in the Notes window. 341: displays all clients with a Case Number, a Date Filed, and a 341date entered in the Date 341 Meeting field in the Notes window. Confirmation Hearing: displays all clients with a Case Number, a Date Filed, and a date entered in the Confirmation Hearing field in the Notes window. Confirm: displays all clients with Case Number, a Date Filed, and a date entered in the Date Confirmed field in the Notes window. Various Date Ranges: displays clients specified by date. Case Number: displays all clients with a Case Number and Date Filed entered in the Case Status tab of the Notes Screen. Office Number: displays all clients with an Office Number on the File Setup Information tab of the Notes window. Once you have sorted the client list using the Filter drop-down, you can further refine the results using the Show drop-down to separate-out a list of clients based on the Case Status, or, if the clients are sorted by name, you can jump to a name in the list by typing the first few letters. (See Searching Within the Filtered Client List on page 268 for more information on using the client list search options.) Changing File and Case Status: The File and Case status can be changed in the Case Status tab of the Client Notes Screen. (See Changing File Status and Case Status on page 263 for more information.) Searching the Client List The Client List search feature allows you to search your client files based on any of a number of fields available in the Client Notes screen. To use this feature: 1. Open the Client List Window and click the Search button in the upper right corner. 2. In the Client List Search window, select the text field you would like to search by using the Find Item dropdown menu. Available options include Debtor's Name, Social Security Number, Index As, Address, Phone, Email, Employer's Name, Case Number, File Number, Attorney Name, Referred By or Paralegal. 3. Enter the text you would like to search for in the Find Text field and click Search. 4. The clients who fit your search criteria will be displayed in the section below. 5. Double-click any particular client to open the client's list of Forms and Schedules, or click the Print button to print a summary of the client files that match your print criteria. Searching Within the Filtered Client List In addition to filtering your Client List by both the Case Status and the File Status, you can also further narrow the results by searching within the Client List. 268 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Searching for Text: If the Client List Window is set to All, Active, Closed or Prospect, you can search for a particular client name or file number by using the following search feature. This feature searches for text that you specify and applies a filter to the Client List, showing only clients who meet your search criteria in the Index as, file number or comments field. If the Client List Window is set to Case Number or Office Number, and you follow the instructions below, Best Case will filter the list based on either the Case Number or Office Number field, but it will not search any other field. 1. Open the Client List Window and make sure it is sorted by name. (If you aren t sure, select All By Name in the Filter drop-down.) 2. In the Client List Window, type!! then the text you want to find. For example, to search for any clients with the word Smith in the Index As field, the comments field or the office file number, you would type!!smith. Note that you don t want to put a space after the exclamation points. 3. The text you have typed appears at the top of the Client List Window next to the Name tab. If you want to revise your search, you can just press B to erase characters. 4. As you type, your client list will be filtered to include just those files that meet your search criteria. If you find your file, double-click on it to open it. 5. If you want to see all clients again, just close the Client List then open it again using the Open button in the toolbar. Searching by Date Range: If the Client List Window is set to Followup, Filed, 341 or Confirm, you will narrow the list based on an on or before date. 1. Open the Client List Window and make sure it is sorted by Followup Date, Filing Date, 341 Date or Confirmation Date using the Filter drop-down. 2. In the Client List Window, enter the On or Before Date in the text box provided. (The default date is 12/31/2099) 3. Hit J on your keyboard, and your client list will be filtered to include just those files that meet your search criteria. If you find your file, double-click on it to open it. 4. If you want to see all clients again, just close the Client List then open it again using the Open button in the toolbar, or reset the On or Before Date to 12/31/2099. Printing a List of Clients or Client Count Summary You can print two different types of reports of your client database: Client List Report: A list of all cases entered in Best Case Bankruptcy. This report lists, for each client: the name of the client, type of debtor, case number, chapter of filing, office file number, filing date, office file number, 341 date, discharge date, follow-up date and case status. Using filter options, you can print several different lists of clients including a list of all clients, only active or closed cases, or only cases that have follow-up dates or that are marked as needing attention. Client Count Summary: A report showing how many total cases you have in the system, with a breakdown by chapter, type of debtor, status (active, prospect or closed), a count of the number of cases with each case status (filed, discharged, dismissed, etc ) and year entered in Best Case Bankruptcy. It will also print a summary of prospective clients and a brakedown of those which are Possible, Inactive or Rejected. To print a report: 1. Go to the Client List Window. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 269
2. Click the button or press A-R. 3. If you are printing a Client List Report, the report that prints will be based on the Filter Options you have selected in the Client List when you print the report. Click the button in the bottom left corner that corresponds with the report you want. A report will be sent to your screen before being sent to your printer. 4. To send the report to your printer, click the button which appears in the print preview report screen. If you want to cancel without printing, click the X button or press E. More options in the preview screen are described in the Print Preview section on page 193 and in the Print Preview help topic. 5. After printing or exiting the preview screen, you will be returned to the Client List Sort Order window. Click OK to apply your filter to the list of clients displayed in the Client List Window, or Cancel if you don t want to apply it. Exporting the Client List to Comma Seperated Variable (CSV) Format Best Case allows you to export the client list into CSV format so that you can open the information in Excel and use it for mailing or tracking purposes. From the Client List, navigate to the menu bar and select File/Export Client List. Choose the folder destination in which you would like to save the CSV file. Best Case automatically names the file BestCaseClients.csv, but you may choose to change the name by editing the File Name field. Printing a Client Summary Sheet/Client Notes You can print a cover sheet for each client which lists information you have entered in the Notes section of the program. This includes the debtor s name, employer, phone number, next follow up date, case status, date and time of 341 meeting, and more. This is for use in your office, and is not a document that you would file with the court. To print a client cover sheet: 1. In the Client List Window, highlight the name of your client. 2. Click the Case Notes button at the bottom of the window. 3. You ll see a Print button in the bottom left-hand corner of the window. Click the Print button. 4. A report will be sent to your screen before being sent to your printer. To send the report to your printer, click the button which appears in the print preview report screen. Copying One Client File to a Diskette or a Separate Folder There are several reasons why you might want to copy a client file to a disk. If you want to take the file home to work on a case, you can copy it to a diskette using this procedure then from the diskette to a different computer using the next procedure Copying a Client File From a Diskette to Your Computer. You can also use this procedure to backup a file so that if anything happens to your hard disk, you still have a copy of the data. (If you want to back up all client files, see Backing Up and Restoring Files on page 273.) Note that this does NOT create a creditor address matrix on disk, which is described on page 111. To copy a client file to a diskette: 1. From the Client List Window, highlight the desired client. 2. In the menu bar, select File, then select Send Client to Disk from the File sub-menu. 3. A dialog box will appear, with the name of the client at the top: 270 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If you want to copy to a floppy diskette, put a blank, formatted disk in your disk drive and click Copy to diskette drive A: or Copy to diskette drive B:, depending on which drive you put the disk in. If you want to copy to a separate location on your hard drive, to a zip drive, or to your network, use the button to access the most recently used directories or click the Copy to Other Location button, navigate to the appropriate drive and folder, and click OK. (If you were copying the client file to a different bestcase/clients folder on your network, you will need to Rebuild the Client List in the version of Best Case that you copied to for the client to appear in the Client List Window. To rebuild, open Best Case Bankruptcy, go to the Client List Window and press C- S-R.) 4. A message will appear telling you that the file has been copied successfully. Click OK. 5. The file name will be the first 8 characters of the client name, with the.tps extension. You can then copy another client file to the same diskette. Keep in mind that diskettes can be unreliable. We recommend copying files to two different diskettes for an extra margin of safety. Drag and Drop Files The drag and drop feature allows you to copy client files from a diskette or a separate location on your hard drive or network drive directly into Best Case Bankruptcy. This feature is useful if you take client files home to work on cases or if you have more than one installation of Best Case in the office. If you are not familiar with how to drag and drop or how to resize windows, you might prefer to use the Restore Client From Disk feature, which does the same thing. To drag and drop a client file into Best Case: 1. Open the Client List Window in Best Case Bankruptcy and either Windows Explorer or My Computer. Make the My Computer or Windows Explorer window smaller so that you can see both programs. 2. In Windows Explorer or My Computer, navigate to the client file, click on it and hold the mouse button, dragging the file into the Client List Window in Best Case Bankruptcy. Release the mouse button. You ll get a message that the client file has been restored successfully. If you get an error message, the client file may be corrupt, most likely due to a bad diskette. You can try to copy the file to a new disk, or call technical support at 1.800.492.8037. Tip: This feature also works with some e-mail programs. Technical note: this feature only works for client files created in Best Case Bankruptcy which have the.bcb extension. If you are restoring a client file from the Old Copy folder, which contains automatic back up copies of recent files, you ll need to rename the file to give it a.bcb extension before dragging and dropping. Copying a Client File from a Diskette or Another Drive to Your Computer This procedure will copy client data from a diskette or a separate location on your hard drive or network drive to the bestcase folder on your hard drive. 1. Insert the floppy disk containing the client data file into your computer. 2. With the Client List Window open, select File from the Main Menu. 3. From the File sub-menu, select Restore Client From Disk Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 271
4. A dialog box appears. Click the button to access the most recently used directories or click the Restore from Other Location button, navigate to the appropriate drive and folder, and click OK. 5. A list of all client files on the disk or in the specified directory will appear. Click in the checkbox next to each client that you want to restore (or use the b to move the highlighter and press s to check each box). Press S-s to select all files to be restored. When your clients are selected, click Restore. Tip: If you just have one client that you want to restore, double-click on it and skip step 6. 6. You will get a message that the file has been restored successfully or you may get a message which says The file you selected already exists! If the disk file is the most recent file, click Replace to update the file on your hard disk with the new file. If there are two separate client files with the same name, or if you aren t sure which is the most recent version, you can click Add New to create a new file, then open both to see which has the most recent changes. The Skip File option allows you to skip this file and continue with the restore process for the next file. If a file on the computer has the same name as the one you are restoring, you will see this message. A message box will appear telling you that the file has been successfully copied. Click OK. Rebuilding the Client List If you don t use our Restore command or the drag and drop feature above, and instead just copy *.tps files into your bestcase\clients folder through Windows Explorer, you will need to rebuild the client list to have these copied files appear in your Client List Window. To rebuild, open Best Case Bankruptcy and go to the Client List Window. Press C-S-R to rebuild, then click Open to open your client list. If you still don t see your client files, exit Best Case Bankruptcy and open it again. Emailing a Client File This procedure attaches a Best Case client file to a new email message so that you can easily send it to a colleague who uses Best Case. It is also useful if you want to email files from your home to your office computer. Note that only Best Case users would be able to open a Best Case data file. This procedure does NOT create a file your court can read. To create a matrix on disk for your court, see Creating an ASCII Text File of the Creditor Address Matrix/Copying the Matrix to Disk on page 111. To create a PDF file of forms, see Electronic Case Filing on page 220. To email a client file: 1. From the Client List Window, highlight the desired client. 2. In the menu bar, select File/Send Client via Email, or right-click on the client file and choose the email option. 272 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
3. Best Case will start a new email message using your email program and will attach the client file for you. Best Case inserts Best Case Client: <name> as the subject matter, and the file name and path as the body of the message. You can add your comments below this text, if you want. 4. Type in the recipient s email address then send your email. If someone emails you a client file: 1. In your email program, click on your attachment and choose the save option. (This option is a bit different in each email program, but you can refer to the on-line help system in your email program if you have trouble finding it.) 2. Choose a location to save the file temporarily. You will need to remember this when restoring the file in Best Case, so we recommend either the C: drive or a C:\temp folder, or your desktop. 3. Start Best Case Bankruptcy. In the Client List Window, click File/Restore Client From Disk. Navigate to the location you chose in step 2. You ll see a list of all client files in that location. Choose the file or files you want to restore. The file now appears in your Client List Window. Backing Up and Restoring Files Best Case Bankruptcy allows you to back up your data files to a diskette or to a separate location on your hard drive or network. The restore function allows you to copy files from a diskette or separate location on your computer into the appropriate data folders in the bestcase directory. Using the backup function, you can back up any or all of the following data files: Setup Files, which include your Common Creditor List, your macro phrase list, your zip code database, law firm information, attorney name choices, non attorney information, and your stored list choices, (such as the choices for description of lien on Schedule D) Common Creditor Lists: Note that there is a separate import/export feature for your Common Creditor List described on page 277 which can be used to copy the list from one machine to the other, and will combine two lists instead of overwriting one. The backup/restore function cannot combine two Common Creditor Lists. Client Files, which include all client files in the database, (to backup just one client file, see Copying One Client File to a Diskette or a Separate on page 270.) Jurisdiction Files, which include all jurisdiction settings in the jurisdiction portion of the Setup Menu Exemption Files, which include all exemptions listed in the exemption section of the Setup Menu, and Additional Documents, which include all Word and WordPerfect documents in the Additional Documents subdirectories. You would generally only want to back this up if you had made changes to these documents or added your own documents. Tips for backing up files Exit all programs that are running before backing up files. If you are backing up files to a diskette, flip the write protect tab on the diskette after you have copied data files to the disk. This will help to prevent accidental erasure. Cycle through several sets of backup disks or locations. That way, if something happens to your backup disk or file, you have another copy in another place. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 273
Backing up files Use this procedure to make a backup copy of your data files, or to copy data files from one computer to another. If you are backing up to a diskette, use a blank, formatted disk as all data on the diskette will be overwritten using this procedure. If you have the network license, have all other users exit Best Case before beginning the backup. 1. In Best Case Bankruptcy, close any entry screens that are open, close the Forms and Schedules Menu, then close the Client List Window. 2. Click on File in the Main Menu. 3. Move the mouse to Backup/Restore, then click on Total Backup/Restore Utility. 4. Click the Backup button. 5. Select the files to be backed up. The file types are described above. 6. In the bottom of the window, you ll see the estimated number of disks that it will take to back up the files you have selected. Click Next. 7. Select the drive you want the files to go to. If you are backing up to a diskette, you will generally want to select drive A: or B:. If you are backing up to your hard drive or network drive, choose Other drive, select the drive from the drop-down menu, and select the directory from the drop-down Path list then click OK. Click Next. Make sure the path name appears here. Selecting the Backup Directory 8. In the Done by box, type your name. You can also type a description, if it is helpful to you. The backup date and time are displayed for you. (If you later restore this data to your computer, this information will be displayed for you.) 9. Click the Begin Backup button. You will be asked to insert a diskette. Insert a blank, formatted diskette and press OK, or, if you are backing up to a hard drive, just click OK. 10. If you are backing up to a floppy disk, a message will appear telling you that any information on the floppy diskette will be deleted. Click OK to continue. 11. When the backup is complete, summary information will be displayed which you can write on your disk. Click the Backup Complete button to exit this screen. 12. Click Close to exit the Backup/Restore function. 274 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Restoring backed up files This procedure restores data that was saved using the Best Case backup function. You will be asked to specify whether you want to overwrite existing files. 1. Start Best Case Bankruptcy. In the Welcome Screen, click Close. 2. If you are already in Best Case Bankruptcy, close any entry screens that are open, close the Forms and Schedules Menu, then close the Client List Window. 3. Click on File in the Main Menu. 4. Move the mouse to the Backup/Restore option, then click Total Backup/Restore Utility. 5. Click the Restore button. 6. Choose the drive you are restoring data from. If this is a directory on your hard drive or network drive, choose the path by clicking from the drop-down list. Click Next. 7. If you are copying from a diskette, insert the diskette when prompted for disk 1, then click OK. If you are copying from a hard drive, just click OK. 8. If the directory you backed up to is different from the directory you are restoring to, a warning message will appear. Click Yes to continue. 9. Next you will need to choose which files to restore. The backed up data files in the selected location will be displayed. If you want to restore all of them, click Next. If you only want some of the types of data that are marked, remove the checkmark from the files you don t want to restore, then click Next. If a choice is grayed out, that means that you did not select that data type during this backup. 10. Next you will be asked what to do if a file being restored already exists on your machine. Your choices are: Replace All Existing Files - If there is a file with the same name on your computer, it will be replaced. For example, if the Joseph and Sarah Sample file is included on the disk you are restoring from and is also on your hard drive, the one on the disk will replace the one on the hard drive, regardless of which one has the newest revisions. Replace Older Existing Files - If you select this option, data files on your computer will only be replaced if they are older than files of the same name that are being restored. Do Not Replace Existing Files - If you select this option, data from the backup files will only be added to your computer if no files of this name already exist. Ask if Each File is to be Replaced. - For each case where a data file on the hard drive has the same name as a file being copied from the backup disk, you will be asked whether to replace the existing file on your hard drive with the file of the same name on the disk. For each duplicate, the date and time the file was last modified will be displayed. 11. Select your replace option, then click the Begin Restore button. 12. When the restore is complete, the number of files replaced and not replaced will be displayed. You can view the names of the restored files, or click the Restore Complete button to exit. Restoring Deleted Files There is an easy way for you to restore client files that you accidentally deleted. Follow the steps below: 1. Open the Client List. 2. Press C-S-U. 3. A list of deleted clients appears. Select the deleted file that you wish to Restore and click the Restore button. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 275
Network Users: While performing the restore procedure above, other users can be in Best Case Bankruptcy. However, in order for them to see the restored client file, they will need to close then reopen the Client List Window. Troubleshooting: If the client file does not appear in the list produced in step 3, the file was likely a. entered in a separate installation of Best Case (your home machine, another worker s hard drive, etc.), or b. is still in the list and was never deleted, but appears under a different name than you thought or c. is marked as closed and your filter is set to Active Only. To change your filter, click the Filter/Report button then mark All Clients in the Show selection. If your client still doesn t appear, you can search for a client by name: click Filter/Report and sort clients by name, then click OK. Back in the Client List Window, type!! followed by the text you want to find. For example, to search for all clients with the word Smith anywhere in the Index As field, you would type!!smith. Note that you don t want to put a space after the exclamation points. General Procedures Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another Sometimes, you may enter creditor information under one schedule then later decide that it needs to be moved. For example, a creditor entered on Schedule D may need to be moved to Schedule F. To move a creditor: 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open the creditor schedule which contains the creditor to be moved. 2. In the summary list screen which lists all creditors entered for this schedule, highlight the creditor by clicking with the mouse or by moving the highlighter bar to the creditor with the b key. 3. With the creditor highlighted, click on the button that says Move to D/E or Move to D/F or Move to E/F. 4. A pop-up box will appear asking which schedule to move the creditor to. Click on the appropriate choice, then press R or click OK. 5. The creditor will be moved to the new schedule and an entry screen will appear for the creditor with information filled in. You ll need to fill in any information that is now required. For example, if you are moving a creditor to Schedule D, you ll need to select the property which secures the claim and enter the nature of the lien. If you are moving a creditor to Schedule F, you ll need to indicate whether the claim is subject to Setoff. If you are moving the creditor to Schedule E, you will need to select the priority type and enter the priority amount. 6. If this is a Chapter 13 case, you should review the 13 Plan Treatment tab as the plan settings will likely need to be changed. Note: If you move a creditor from Schedule D to E or F, the property associated with the creditor will no longer be associated with the creditor; the link will be removed. Lots of Creditors? Using the locator keys, you can begin to type the name of a creditor to jump to it in the summary list window. What you ve typed appears just above the creditor name column; press B if you make a typo. Copying Creditors from One Schedule to Another If one creditor should be listed on more than one schedule for a particular case, you can select the creditor from the DEF tab of the AddressFill list, or copy the creditor name and address using the button that appears in each of the creditor entry screens. If you want to use the button: 276 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
1. Enter the creditor on the first schedule and save your entry. 2. Go to the second schedule where you want the creditor listed and click Insert to get a blank entry window. 3. Press 9 or click the list button pictured above which appears next to the Common Creditor List button. A list of all schedule creditors appears. Double-click on the desired creditor. Exporting and Importing a Common Creditor List If you want to copy a Common Creditor List from one computer to another, you can use the import/export feature in the Common Creditor List section of the Setup Menu. The import feature adds creditors in the import file to the Common Creditor List on your hard drive, so it can be used to combine two lists. The import feature is capable of importing Common Creditor Lists from Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows, Best Case Bankruptcy for DOS, Collier s Topform for DOS by Matthew Bender, and Chap7..13 DOS (Typeset version) by West Group, (formerly by Specialty Software). It can also import a file of Generic CSV format, which may be useful if you have used a different competing program and are able to convert your common creditor information into the proper format for import. (See About Generic CSV format on the next page.) The export feature exports the data in a special CSV format, which is a comma-delimited text file. If you want to use the exported file on another computer, you will need to import it using the import feature described below. If you have switched from Collier s TopForm for Windows or West s Chap7..13 for Windows, we can convert your common creditor information for you if you mail or email the file to us. If you switched from a competing program which you do not see listed here, we may be able to convert your file. Contact technical support at 1.800.492.8037. Technical support is free for the first year Exporting Your Common Creditor List Use this feature to copy your Common Creditor List to a diskette, or to a separate directory on your computer. 1. Close any entry windows that are open in Best Case Bankruptcy, then close the Client List Window. 2. Click Setup in the Main Menu bar. 3. Click on Common Creditor List. 4. Click the Export button in the bottom right corner. 5. A pop-up window asks if you want to continue. Click Yes. 6. You will be asked if you want to include the notes field in the exported data. This is the field that you can use to make notes about a creditor. It is not part of any particular client file or part of the address data. If you export the notes field, the file will be larger and may not be as easily imported into other applications. If you want to export the notes data, click Yes. If not, click No. 7. Navigate to the desired drive and folder, then click Save. 8. The file will be exported as a comma-delimited text file called CommCred.CSV. When all records have been exported, you will get a message that the export is complete. The number of records exported will be displayed for you, as well as the file location. Click OK to acknowledge the message. 9. If you now want to use the exported file on another computer, follow the import steps below. Importing a Common Creditor List Use this feature to import a Common Creditor List from a diskette to your computer, or from a separate location on your hard drive or network to the appropriate Best Case directory. You can import a common creditor list in one of five different file types: Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 277
Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows (*.CSV) - created using the export feature above, Best Case Bankruptcy for DOS, (Commcred.DAT), Collier s TopForm for DOS by Matthew Bender (BFP.CRD), Chap7..13 DOS (Typeset version) by West Group, formerly by Specialty Software, (COMMON.FIL). Generic CSV format a comma delimited ASCII file with the CSV extension. To import from a different program, contact technical support at 1.800.492.8037 and be prepared to email us your file. The import feature does not work with *.tps files that you have copied directly from the Best Case Directory. The import feature adds creditors from the import file to your existing Common Creditor List, and does not overwrite your existing list. If a creditor being imported matches exactly a creditor already in your Common Creditor List, this creditor will be skipped so that you won t have duplicates. (Unless you are importing a file of type Generic CSV format.) To import a Common Creditor List: 1. Close any windows that are open in Best Case Bankruptcy, then close the Client List Window. 2. Click Setup in the Main Menu bar. 3. Click on Common Creditor List. 4. Click the Import button in the bottom right corner. 5. A pop-up window appears asking you to select the format of the import file. Your choices are: Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows (CSV format), Best Case Bankruptcy for DOS (Commcred.DAT), Collier TopForm for DOS (BFP.CRD) (by Matthew Bender), and Chap7..13 DOS-Typeset (COMMON.FIL Format) (By West Group). Generic CSV format (see About the Generic CSV format on page 278.) Click on the appropriate file type, then click Import. 6. Choose the appropriate file location by selecting the correct drive and folder. If you are copying from a diskette, the drive generally would be your A: or B: drive. Navigate to the import file then click Open. 7. The Common Creditor List will be imported. 8. When the list has been imported, you will get a message stating the number of creditors added, the number skipped, and the number rejected. Click OK. About the Generic CSV format The Common Creditor import feature can import several file formats. The CSV format is just a comma delimited text format, which can be created in many database or spreadsheet applications. You would use this format if you created your own common creditor information without bankruptcy software, or if you are able to export common creditor information from your previous bankruptcy software package and convert it to the correct format for import. If you do not have the proper tools to convert your common creditor information to the correct format listed below, or if you don t understand how to do it, please contact our technical support department at 1.800.492.8037. We may be able to convert the file for you. 278 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Field names: Name (Required field) Address1 Address2 Address3 City (see note below) State (see note below - 2 characters) Zip (see note below - 5 or 9 digits) Contact Phone (40 character limit) Fax (40 character limit) Consideration (50 character limit) Note: Alternatively, you can import the city, state and zip code names in one field called CityStZip. Please note that unlike the other formats, the import function will NOT check for duplicates when you import a generic CSV file. Combining Common Creditor Lists from Multiple Machines Using the export and import features described above, you can combine common creditor lists on two machines. From the first machine, export your Common Creditor List to a floppy diskette or a temporary location on your server as described above under Exporting Your Common Creditor List on page 277. At the second machine, import the exported list using the instructions in Importing a Common Creditor List on page 277. Exact duplicates will be skipped. The second machine will now have a combined Common Creditor List. You can then repeat the procedure to copy the common creditors that were on the second machine but not on the first. Making a Duplicate Copy of a Client File Sometimes, it may be useful to make a duplicate copy of a client file. For example, if you have two debtors who have many of the same creditors in common, you may want to make a copy of the client file, then make changes to the second file for the second debtor. This duplicate feature is also useful when you have a client who converts from chapter 7 to chapter 13 and you want to save both cases as separate files. Note that this is a different procedure than copying a client file from one computer to another. (See page 270.) If only the creditors in both cases are the same, you can use our creditor export/import feature instead of the procedure below to copy any of the schedules, D, E, F, or G to the new case. This feature is also available for the List of Equity Security Holders. See Copying a Creditor Schedule from One Client to Another on page 286. To duplicate an entire client file: 1. If you have the Multi-User Network version of Best Case Bankruptcy, make sure no one is in the client file. 2. At the Client List Window, highlight the name of the client whose file you want to copy then click the Copy Client button in the bottom of the Client List Window. (The keyboard equivalent is aa-c.) Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 279
3. A window will appear displaying the name of the client to be copied and asking for the name of the new file. Type the name, then click the Duplicate button. 4. The new client will now appear in the Client List Window. The two files are now completely independent; changes that you make in one will not be made in the other. Making a Standard Client Template The Client Templates feature allows users to create new client files with standard information pre-populated. This may be useful when you see many clients who have similar personal property and similar exemptions. You can make as many templates as you like. To make a template: 1. Open the Client List, click on the Filter drop-down, and select Templates for New Clients. 2. Click the New Client button located at the bottom of the Client List and enter basic information about the template file. 3. Click OK, returning you to the template list. 4. Double-click the template you created to further customize forms and schedules. 5. When creating a new client you will now have the option to choose an empty client file or choose from a previously created template. Changes you make to the new file will not affect the template, and changes you make to the template won t affect the new client s file. If your office has a high volume bankruptcy practice, you ll also find our macro phrase feature helpful, which allows you to save up to 30 common phrases for use throughout Best Case Bankruptcy. See page 320. Using the Calculator The Windows calculator is always accessible from the Main Toolbar. To use the calculator: 1. Click on the button in the Main Toolbar. 2. The calculator appears on the screen. You can use the mouse to press buttons on the calculator, or you can use the corresponding keys on your keyboard. (Press * to multiply, / to divide, etc.) 3. Note that the calculator has a feature that allows you to save the calculator s answer and copy it into a field in the bankruptcy program. To use this feature, press C-C or click on Edit in the calculator menu bar, then click on Copy. The number will be copied to the Windows clipboard. Close (or minimize) the calculator, then move the cursor to the field where you want the number to appear. Paste the number into the field either by pressing C-v or by clicking on Edit from the main menu, then Paste from the sub-menu. Additionally, a Prorate Calculator is available. To open the calculator, hold down the Shift key and then click the Calc button located in the toolbar. Advanced Feature: Creditor Import/Export The creditor import feature allows you to import creditor data from other applications into Best Case Bankruptcy. For example, if a corporate client gives you a spreadsheet of creditors, you can convert the spreadsheet file into the 280 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
proper format, import the names, addresses, and claim amounts into Best Case Bankruptcy, then enter any other information required on the Schedules. The creditor export feature allows you to export creditor data from Best Case Bankruptcy so that you can work with it in other applications. You can also use the creditor import and export features to copy entire creditor schedules from one client file to another within Best Case Bankruptcy. Creditor Import This feature requires you to be knowledgeable about data management, data file structure, and data manipulation. It is YOUR RESPONSIBILITY to get your creditor data into the correct format for importing. The correct data structure is outlined below. If you do not know how to manipulate your data file so that it is in the proper format, contact your computer technician or consultant. We have provided some tips in the sidebar for converting data from other applications into CSV format. If you are having trouble importing and would like our technical support team to help, you will need to email the data file to us. You can import creditors directly into Schedules D, E, F, G, the List of Equity Security Holders or as additional notice parties for the creditor address matrix. Additional Notice Parties are not listed on any schedule; they will appear ONLY on the matrix. File format for creditor import Your file should be a comma-delimited text file with an 8 character file name, and the extension CSV. (E.g. CREDITRS.CSV.) You can create the file in any spreadsheet or database application. See Tips about Data Format on page 283 and Tips on Exporting from Other Applications below. Converting Word or WordPerfect addresses into CSV format for import: Our Text2csv utility allows you to convert Word or WordPerfect address data into CSV format so that it can be imported into Best Case Bankruptcy. See page 286. Generally, you ll just import creditor names, addresses, and sometimes claim amounts, but the fields that you can import are: Field Name Type of field Name REQUIRED text field - the creditor name. (Maximum field length is dictated by the matrix formatting requirements in the district where the case is being filed. This setting, which also controls the length of the address lines, is found in the jurisdiction section of your Setup Menu, matrix tab.) Address1 Street address line 1 Address2 Street address line 2 Address3 Street address line 3 (when applicable) City (see note below) State (see note below) Zip (see note below) AccountNo DateIncurred HWJC Contingent Unliquidated Disputed City 2 character text field Text field - 5 or 9 digit zip codes acceptable Text field (Schedules D, E and F only) Text field (Schedules D, E and F only) 1 character text field - H=Husband, W=Wife, J=Joint, C=Community. (Only applicable in joint cases; Schedules D, E and F only) 0=no, 1=yes (Schedules D, E and F only) 0=no, 1=yes (Schedules D, E and F only) 0=no, 1=yes (Schedules D, E and F only) Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 281
ClaimAmt Number field - do not enter a dollar sign (Schedules D, E and F only) indicate that this is unknown by using a U here, or any word that starts with U Amended ExSchedule ExMatrix PropertyName LienNature PropertyValue Unsecured Amt SeniorLiens Consideration PriorityAmt PriorityType Setoff Intention Indicates whether creditor is marked as amended (0=no, 1=yes) Indicates whether creditor should be excluded from the schedule. (Schedules D, E and F only) (0=no, 1=yes) Indicates whether creditor should be excluded from the matrix. (Schedules D, E and F only) (0=no, 1=yes) Text field for description of property-78 character limit (Schedule D only) Text field for the Nature of Lien -90 character limit (Schedule D only) Numeric Dollar Value of the property - do NOT include a dollar sign (Schedule D only) indicate that this is unknown by using a U here, or any word that starts with U Normally, Best Case Bankruptcy fills this in based on the value of the claim and the value of the property but you can override this value by putting your own answer here. If you put a numeric value in, Best Case will show that value for the unsecured amount and will uncheck the Auto calculation box in the Schedule D entry screen. If you put UNK in this field in your text file, Best Case will check the Unknown box. If you leave this field blank, Best Case will calculate this automatically. (Schedule D only) Total of other liens against the property that are ranked higher. This amount is deducted from property value to compute unsecured amount. (Schedule D only) Text field - 240 character limit (Schedules E and F only) Number field (Schedule E only) 1 character field where 1=Domestic Support, 2=Extensions of Credit, 3=Wages, 4=Benefit contributions, 5=Farmers, 6=Deposits, 7=Taxes, 8=Maintain Capital, 9=Death or Injury while Intoxicated. (Schedule E only) 0=no, 1=yes (Schedule F only) For Chapter 13 cases only, this refers to the debtor s intention regarding each lease or contract 0 = None specified; 1 = Assume; 2 = Reject; 3 = Assign (assign is for MI-East only) (Schedule G only) Description Class Number Interest Description of contract or lease 2000 character limit (Schedule G only) Text field - 160 character limit (List of Equity Security Holders only) Text field - 160 character limit (List of Equity Security Holders only) Text field - 160 character limit (List of Equity Security Holders only) Note: If you have the city, state and zip all in one field, you can use the field name CitySTZip in place of the three fields City, ST and Zip listed above. The Best Case Import function will intelligently separate the data in this field into its three parts, where possible. When it is not possible, the data will be put into the city field so that the address prints normally on schedules and the matrix. You do not need to have all of the fields above in your text file. However, for any fields you do want to import, the field name must match the field name above exactly. (E.g. - A street address field called Address will not import; it must be named Address1. ) Record Header: 282 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If you already have a text file and just need to attach a record header, use the following format for the record header: (There should be no spaces in the record header between the commas and the text. These are also available in your on-line help file. You can copy and paste the record header from the help file into your file.) If you are importing to Schedule D (Secured) Name, Address1, Address2, Address3, City, State, Zip, AccountNo, DateIncurred, HWJC, Contingent, Unliquidated, Disputed, ClaimAmt, Amended, ExSchedule, ExMatrix, PropertyName, LienNature, PropertyValue, UnsecuredAmt, SeniorLiens If you are importing to Schedule E (Unsecured Priority) Name, Address1, Address2, Address3, City, State, Zip, AccountNo, DateIncurred, HWJC, Contingent, Unliquidated, Disputed, ClaimAmt, Amended, ExSchedule, ExMatrix, Consideration, PriorityAmt, PriorityType, Setoff If you are importing to Schedule F (Unsecured Nonpriority) Name, Address1, Address2, Address3, City, State, Zip, AccountNo, DateIncurred, HWJC, Contingent, Unliquidated, Disputed, ClaimAmt, Amended, ExSchedule, ExMatrix, Consideration, Setoff If you are importing to Schedule G (Contract/Lease Parties) Name, Address1, Address2, Address3, City, State, Zip, Amended, Intention, Description If you are importing to the List of Equity Security Holders Name, Address1, Address2, Address3, City, State, Zip, Amended, Class, Number, Interest If you are importing additional notice parties into the Creditor Address Matrix Name, Address1, Address2, Address3, City, State, Zip Note that if you are using the record headers above and your data does not contain a field listed in the record header, you should delete the field name from the record header. If you have the city, state and zip in one field, substitute the single field CityStZip for the three (City,State,Zip) listed above. Tips about Data Format The only field that is required is the Name field. You will only be able to import one Name field. If your file has both first name and last name fields, you will need to combine these fields into one name field before importing, or lose one of the fields. If you do not have the city, state and zip codes in three separate fields, you can import these as one field called CitySTZip. In the CitySTZip field, you can have the cities and states separated by commas or by spaces. Best Case will attempt to separate the data into three fields; where this is not possible, the CityStZip field will be imported to the city field so that the addresses print properly. The import program is fairly forgiving if you have some blank records, which Excel often adds when you convert to a delimited text file. If you are using the CitySTZip field, the import program will tolerate files with addresses of different lengths. For example, if some records have 1 address line and some have 2 or 3, they should all import properly. For foreign address, don t put data in the zip or state fields. The country name should be in all caps in the city field. Note that for foreign addresses in Best Case Bankruptcy, zip codes will appear on the screen as 00000-0000, but will not print on forms. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 283
If you have a creditor name that you want alphabetized under a word other than the first word, insert a tilde character right before the first character of the word it is to be alphabetized under. (E.G. - Joseph ~Sample will print as Joseph Sample but will be alphabetized under S.) If your data contains any fields which do not have the specific field names listed above, you should remove them before importing. If you don t, you will get a message while importing which says that the field is not recognized. You can choose to continue with the import, but unrecognized fields will not be included. You can import your data to Schedules D, E, F, G, the List of Equity Security Holders, or as Additional Notice Parties on the creditor address matrix screen. If you want some of your imported creditors to be listed on one schedule and some on another, you can either 1.) create an import file for each schedule which contains only the creditors you want on that schedule OR 2.) import one large file to the schedule that will list most of the creditors, then use the Move to D/E button in the creditor schedule to move individual creditors to other schedules as described in Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another on page 276. (Only available for Schedules D, E and F.) There is not a way to import a file to several schedules simultaneously. Tips on Exporting from Other Applications in CSV Format If you are exporting data from Excel: Type the field names in the first row of your file while in Excel, typing each field name in a separate column: When you are ready to save data, choose File/Save As. Give your file an 8-character file name and for Save as Type, pick the CSV (comma delimited) (*.csv) option. When you save the file, you may get a message telling you that the file might contain features that are not compatible with the CSV format. The message asks if you want to keep this format. Click Yes. Close the file before attempting to import. If you are exporting data from MS Access: Go into the design view of the table and rename fields with the correct field names, if necessary. If there are any fields that are defined as date fields, change them to text fields. (This is because Access includes the time in date fields, and this shows up as 0:00:00 at the end of your field when you export to text.) Choose File/Export. For the type of file, choose Text Files (*.txt; *.csv; *.tab; *.asc) and for the name of the file, type the name and the csv extension - e.g. - Creds.csv. In the export wizard, choose Delimited. In the next window, choose comma as your delimiter and put a check mark in the box that says include field names on first row. When you have formatted your creditor data according to the specifications above, you are ready to begin. Test Import Data Before Importing to Your Actual Client File! Since there is no way to undo the import once you have imported*, we recommend that you first create a duplicate client file and import your text file to the duplicate client file as a test. (To make a duplicate file, go to the Client List Window, highlight the client file, then click the Copy Client button. Import into the copy first.) That way, if any of the fields were labeled incorrectly or if there are problems with the data, you won t have to delete each of the imported entries. Once you are sure your import has worked, import the text file to your actual client file and delete the dummy client. 1. Prepare your creditor file according to specifications above, making sure you save the file as a commadelimited text file, with an 8 character file name and the CSV extension, and that you have the correct field names. Test the import as described in the sidebar. 284 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
2. Go to the form where you want your creditors listed. Your choices are Schedule D, Schedule E, Schedule F, Schedule G, the List of Equity Security Holders, or the Creditor Address Matrix for additional notice parties who will not be listed on a schedule but need to be notified of the filing. 3. In the summary list screen for the form, click the File option from the main menu, then click the Import option. 4. Click the Import button to continue. 5. You will be prompted for a file location. You can import your file from any location on your hard drive, network, or floppy disk drive. Navigate to the file to be imported, then click Open. 6. If you are importing any fields to a schedule which does not ask for those fields, you will get a message telling you that the field name is not recognized. Click Skip Field. When data has been imported, you will get a message telling you how many records were imported. Click OK. Troubleshooting: If you get a message that the import file contains the field TABLE which is not recognized, and you are unable to import, it is likely that the file was saved as a dif file (Data Interchange Format) instead of a CSV file, and was just given a CSV extension. Solution: Open the file in Excel and do File/Save As. Be sure to change the file type to CSV (comma delimited) (*.csv). If you are importing data containing address fields that are longer than the local rules allow on the matrix, you will receive a warning message. You can either abort the import or ignore the warning. It is recommended that you abort the import and correct your data before importing, since the import feature will not truncate or correct addresses that are too long. Deleting All Creditors on a Schedule Although there is no way to undo an import, there is a way to delete all creditor entries on any given schedule. The kill all feature DELETES ALL ENTRIES ON THIS SCHEDULE, so if you had any entries before you imported, those will be deleted, too. To delete all entries on a creditor schedule, go into the schedule and press C-A-S-K. A warning message will appear; click Yes if you want to continue. The schedule will be completely deleted and you will be returned to the Forms and Schedules Menu. Note that if you had any additional notice parties or codebtors associated with creditors on this schedules, this information will be deleted also. If you are deleting all creditors from Schedule D, and you have claims that are linked to property on Schedule A or B, the property information will NOT be deleted from Schedules A and B, but the lien information will. There is no way to undo the kill all feature, so use it with caution. Creditor Export This feature exports creditor data to a text file in comma-delimited ASCII format. This procedure requires you to be knowledgeable about data management, data file structure, and data manipulation. If you do not know how to manipulate the exported data file, contact your computer technician or consultant. To ensure that our technical support representatives are available to help customers with our program, we cannot assist you with changing the format of your exported data file for use in other applications. Use this feature to export scheduled creditors (Schedules D, E, F or G), equity security holders, or additional notice parties from Best Case Bankruptcy to a text file for use in other applications. The file will have the CSV extension and will be a comma delimited text file. 1. Go to the Schedule containing the creditors you want to export. For Additional Notice Parties, go to the creditor address matrix screen from the Forms and Schedules Menu. (When exporting Additional Notice Parties, Best Case only includes those added through the Creditor Address Matrix screen.) 2. In the summary list screen, click on File, then on Export In the window that appears, notice that you can export all creditor schedules to one file by clicking in the Export all schedules box. Click the Export button to continue. 3. Select the drive and folder where you want the file exported, then click Save. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 285
4. When creditors have been exported, a pop-up box appears telling you how many records were included. Click OK to acknowledge the message. Copying a Creditor Schedule from One Client to Another Using the export and import features in Best Case Bankruptcy, you can easily copy all creditors from one client file to another. This will be useful if you have related corporate entities filing separate cases, or if a debtor is filing both as a consumer and as a business. (Also see Making a Duplicate Copy of a Client File on page 279 which copies all information, not just creditor info.) For simplicity, we ll say that the original file is Client 1, and the second file is Client 2. To copy a creditor schedule from one case to another: 1. Enter all creditors into Client 1. 2. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open Schedule D. 3. With Schedule D open, click File, then click Export Schedule D. 4. Click the Export button. 5. The export feature will create a file called Sched-D.CSV. The default file location is your bestcase folder. You can accept the default by clicking Save, or change to a different directory then click Save. 6. An export box appears telling you how many creditors were exported. Click OK to acknowledge the message. 7. Repeat procedures 2-6 for Schedules E, F and G if you have creditors on these schedules, and the List of Equity Security Holders if this is a corporate Chapter 11 case. When you export from Schedule E, accept the default file name Sched-E.CSV, etc. 8. After exporting, close the creditor schedule you have open, then close Client 1. At the Client List Window, open Client 2, or create Client 2 if you haven t already, then open it. 9. From the Forms and Schedules Menu in Client 2, open Schedule D. 10. Click File, Import Schedule D. 11. Click the Import button. 12. Click on the Sched-D.CSV file, and make sure the directory is the same directory you exported to, then click Open. 13. A message will appear telling you how many creditors were imported. Click OK to acknowledge the message. 14. Close Schedule D, and repeat steps 10-13 for Schedules E, F and G, importing Sched-E.CSV, Sched-F.CSV and Sched-G.CSV. Converting Word or WordPerfect Addresses into CSV Format for Import The import features in Best Case Bankruptcy allow you to import CSV files (*.CSV - comma delimited text files) but not regular text files (*.txt). Using the Text2csv utility that we have included in your bestcase folder, you can convert text files into CSV files for import into Best Case. You can use this utility if a client gives you a Word or WordPerfect file of addresses that you want to import into Best Case. Your text file should be in the following format: There should be a hard return at the end of each line. At the end of each record, there should be either 2 hard returns (i.e. - one blank line between each address) or a page break. For each address, City, State and Zip should all be on one line; the city and state can be separated with a comma and a space or just a space. There should be no text other than names and addresses in the file. Your addresses can be formatted as follows: 286 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Mike Creditor 123 Main Street Apartment A Chicago, IL 60610 Janet Creditor 856 Post Oak Rd. Houston, TX 77050 If the file is a Word or WordPerfect document, you will need to do a Save As.. and save the document as file type Text Only (*.txt) with an 8 character file name. (In WordPerfect, for the As type, select either ASCII DOS Text or as ASCII DOS Generic Word Processor. ) Close the file before running the Text to CSV utility. 1. When you have the file ready, go into My Computer on your desktop (or Start/Programs/Windows Explorer) and navigate to your Bestcase folder. (If you can t find your bestcase folder, click the About button in Best Case Bankruptcy and look at the exe path.) 2. In your bestcase folder, you ll see a file called Text2csv.exe. Double-click on this exe file. 3. The Convert Text to CSV dialog box appears. Click the button to the right of the In File Name to navigate to your text file. Select the drive, directory and file name to be converted. 4. By default, the Out File Name is Outfile.CSV, and the default location for the out file is your bestcase folder. You can accept the default or choose a new path and file name. (Note that the conversion process does not overwrite the original text file; it merely creates a CSV version of it. The input and output files will never have the same name.) 5. For End of Record, you need to select either Blank line, as in the sample above, or Page break. If your text file was a text file formatted for labels in WordPerfect, you will have a page break between each record. Make your choice, then click Convert. 6. The file will be converted, and a Conversion Complete box will appear containing the name of the output file and the number of records. Click OK to acknowledge the message. Click Close to close the Text2CSV utility. 7. If there are problems with converting any of the records, Best Case adds warning messages in a new Note field. (For example, if a zip code was entered improperly and the Text2csv utility was unable to separate the city, state and zip code into three separate fields, you will see a warning message for the record.) Open the CSV file in Excel or another spreadsheet application to search for any warning messages and fix data, and to delete any non-address data that was included in your file, then resave and close the file. Import the file using instructions in Creditor Import on page 281. Note that when you import a file that was converted using this utility, you will always get a message that there is an unrecognized Note field. Just click Skip Field and proceed with the import. Property Import and Export The property import feature allows you to import property data from other applications into Schedules A and B in Best Case Bankruptcy. For example, if a corporate client gives you a spreadsheet of property to be included in your petition, you can export the data from the spreadsheet application in the proper format, then import the property description, market value, and other information into Best Case Bankruptcy. The property export feature allows you to export property schedule data from Best Case Bankruptcy so that you can work with it in other applications. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 287
Tip: You can also use the property export and import features to copy entire property schedules from one client file to another within Best Case Bankruptcy. See Copying Property Schedules from One Client File to Another on page 290. Property Import This feature requires you to be somewhat knowledgeable about data management, data file structure, and data manipulation. It is YOUR RESPONSIBILITY to get your property type data into the correct format for importing. The correct data structure is outlined below. If you do not know how to manipulate your data file so that it is in the proper format, contact your computer technician or consultant. If you need the help of our technical support team to convert the data into the proper format, you will need to e-mail the file to us and allow a few days for the conversion. File format for schedule import Your file must be a comma-delimited text file with a CSV extension (E.g. - PROP.CSV.). You can create the file in any spreadsheet or database application by assigning the correct field names and saving or exporting the data file as a comma delimited text (CSV) file. (See Tips about Data Format on page 283.) The fields that you can import are: Field Name Type of field Type REQUIRED 2 character text field: A or 0 = Schedule A (Real Property)1-33 = Refers to the property type for Schedule B (Personal Property) HWJC MarketValue SecuredAmt 1 character text field - H=Husband, W=Wife, J=Joint, C=Community. N = If the type of claim is not specified Numeric field - do not enter a dollar sign or commas - indicate that this is unknown by using a U here, or any word that starts with U Numeric field - do not enter a dollar sign or commas - indicate that this is unknown by using a U here, or any word that starts with U Interest Indicates nature of debtor's interest in property (e.g. joint tenant, etc.) Text field - 88 character limit (Schedule A only) Description Amended OwnedPercent REQUIRED text field - Description of Property - text field - 1320 character limit Indicates whether property is marked as amended (0=no, 1=yes) Numeric field - do not enter a dollar sign or commas, only numbers and decimals - 1-100 = 1-100%, if no number is specified, the default is 100% You do not need to have all of the fields above in your text file. However, for any fields you do want to import, the field name must match the field name above exactly. (E.g. - A Secured Amount field called Secured Amount will not import; it must be named SecuredAmt. ) Tips About Data Format: The only fields that are required are the Type and Description fields. You cannot import data that does not have a field called Type or Description. If your data contains any fields which do not have the specific field names listed above, you should remove them before importing. If you don t, you will get a message while importing which says that the field is not recognized. You can choose to continue with the import, but unrecognized fields will not be included. 288 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
If you enter a U or any word that begins with U in the MarketValue and SecuredAmt fields, the Unknown checkbox will be checked when the property is imported into Best Case. For more tips, see Tips about Data Format on page 283. When you have formatted your property data according to the specifications above, you are ready to begin. Importing Your File Since there is no way to undo the import once you have imported*, we recommend that you first create a duplicate client file and import your text file to the duplicate client file as a test. (To make a duplicate file, go to the Client List Window, highlight the client file, and click the Copy Client button) That way, if any of the fields were labeled incorrectly or if there are problems with the data, you won t have to delete each of the imported entries. Once you are sure your import has worked, import the text file to your actual client file and delete the dummy client. 1. Prepare your property file according to specifications above, making sure you save the file as a comma-delimited text file with the CSV extension, and that you have the correct field names. 2. Open the form for Schedules A or B. It does not matter which form you have open, both property types are imported into Best Case at the same time. 3. In the summary list screen for the form, click the File option from the main menu, then select the Import Property menu item. 4. Click the Import button to continue. 5. You will be prompted for a file location. You can import your file from any location on your hard drive, network, or disk drive. Navigate to the file to be imported, then click Open. 6. If you are importing any fields to a schedule which does not ask for those fields, you will get a message telling you that the field name is not recognized. Click Skip Field if you want to continue. When data has been imported, you will get a message telling you how many records were imported. Click OK. Printing the Error Report Certain conditions will cause warnings or error messages when you import data. For example, if you have extra blank records at the end of your data, you will get a warning. In the Import Errors and Warnings window, a button appears that says Print Report of Errors. Click this button to preview the error report, then click File/Print to send the report to your printer. If you don t get an Import Errors and Warnings window, there were no problems with the format of your data. Deleting All Properties on a Schedule * Although there is no way to undo an import, there is a way to delete all property entries on any given schedule. The kill all feature DELETES ALL ENTRIES ON THIS SCHEDULE, so if you had any entries before you imported, those will be deleted, too. To delete all entries on a property schedule, go into the schedule and press C-A-S- K. The Mass Delete Property window will appear. Here you will have the choice of deleting schedule A or B individually or both schedules at once. The selected schedules will be completely deleted and you will be returned to the Forms and Schedules Menu. There is no way to undo the kill all feature, so use it with caution. Property Export This feature exports property from schedules A and B to a text file in comma-delimited ASCII format, also commonly known as a CSV file. This procedure requires you to be knowledgeable about data management, data file structure, and data manipulation. If you do not know how to manipulate the exported data file, contact your computer technician or consultant. To ensure that our technical support representatives are available to help customers with our program, we cannot assist you with changing the format of your exported data file for use in other applications. Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 289
Use this feature to export property schedules from Best Case Bankruptcy to a text file to use in other applications or to import to a separate client file within Best Case Bankruptcy. The exported file will have the CSV extension, and will be a comma delimited text file with the field names listed above. 1. Open the property window for Schedules A or B. 2. In the summary list screen, click on File, then on Export Property. 3. Click the Export button to continue. 4. Select the drive and folder where you want the file exported and type in a file name, then click Save. 5. When your property types have been exported, a pop-up box appears telling you how many records were included. Click OK to acknowledge the message. For a list of field names, see Property Import on page 288. Copying Property Schedules from One Client File to Another To copy the property schedules from one client file to another client file in Best Case Bankruptcy, use the export procedure to export all property, and the import feature in the second client file to import it. (If you need to copy the entire file, use the copy client file feature instead.) This procedure will copy Schedules A and B together: 1. Open the client file whose property you want to copy. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, open either property schedule (A or B) so that you can see a full list of all property on that schedule. 2. Click File/Export Property, then click Export. 3. Select a destination and file name. 4. A message will appear telling you how many records (pieces of property) were exported. Click OK, then close this client file. 5. Open the second client file, then open either Schedule A or B. From the list screen which would show all property for the schedule, click File/Import Property then click Import. 6. Navigate to the directory and file you chose in step 3 and click Open. 7. A message will appear telling you how many pieces of property were imported. Internet Options If you have Internet Access, several features are available to you in the Help Menu, next to File, Edit, and Setup at the top of the screen. Connect to Websites In the main menu at the top of the screen, click Help (or press A-H) then one of the following to open the desired website in your default Windows web browser: Connect to Best Case Website (connects to www.bestcase.com). Best Case Support Desk In the main menu, click on Tools to access the following: Credit Report Due Diligence My Case Info Loislaw Primary Law 290 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Best Case Training U.S Courts Web Information Online Tools U.S. Courts Web Information In the main menu, click on Tools/U.S Courts Web Information to access the following: Court Website (connects to the home page of the court where the open case is being filed using the website URL specified in Setup/jurisdictions/ECF). Court ECF Website - (connects to the ECF website of the court where the open case is being filed using the Court ECF URL specified in Setup/jurisdictions/ECF). U.S. Courts Website Official Bankruptcy Forms U.S. Trustee Website Means Testing Information If no client file is open and you connect to the court website through Best Case Bankruptcy, Best Case uses your default jurisdiction to choose which court s site to open. Keyboard Shortcuts: Press C-S-B to connect to the Best Case site. Press C-S-w to connect to the home page of the Court s web site. Press C-S-f to connect to the Court s ECF page. Online Tools This area is designed to provide you with a selection of tools that can be accessed from any computer with the Internet. Navigate to Tools/Online Tools in the Menu bar to access the following options: Date Calculator Days Between Dates Calculator Holiday Calculator Quick Median Income Test Check for Update Best Case Bankruptcy contains a feature which checks our web server to see if there are minor updates available which affect forms in districts in which you file. This feature requires that you have Internet access and are covered by our annual maintenance plan. Every 60 days, you ll be prompted to run the Check for Updates feature, but you can also run it yourself at any time. We recommend that you do it more often if you are in an ECF district or if Best Case contains local forms for your district. 1. If you have a network version installed, make sure all users have exited the program except you. 2. Close any client files that are open, then close the Client List Window. 3. Press C-S-U or click Help/Check for Updates. (Not the Help button but the Help option in the main menu bar, next to File, Edit and Setup.) Chapter 9 File Management and General Procedures 291
What Happens When I Check for Updates? When you run Check for Updates, Best Case Bankruptcy will contact the Best Case Updates Server and send information about your Best Case installation. This information includes the version number, release number, and Add-Ons that you have, your serial number, and the jurisdictions you have installed. If there is a patch available that affects your installation, and if you are still covered by our annual maintenance plan, Best Case Bankruptcy will download a patch for you and you will be prompted to install it by clicking an OK button. Important Points About Update Files 1. Patches won t affect your client files, they ll just update local forms and jurisdiction files when needed. 2. Patch files are generally very small and quick to download and install. 3. The Check for Updates process will never harm, erase, or even touch your client data. 4. This Check for Updates feature is specifically for minor changes made to the program on an on-going basis. Major releases, when they are available, are still mailed on CD-ROM to customers covered by the maintenance program. If You Have the Multi-User Network License After downloading the patch files, make sure all users have exited Best Case Bankruptcy before you install the patches. If you don t, you won t hurt anything, but you won't be able to install the new files. If you download patch files but cannot install them because other people are in the program, you can install them later by just clicking Help/Check for Updates. Best Case will see that you have downloaded patch files but have not installed them and will prompt you to install the downloaded files. 292 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 10 The Setup Menu In This Chapter Law firm information... 295 Attorney names... 295 Jurisdictions... 296 Installing Jurisdictions... 296 Editing Jurisdiction Settings... 297 Basic Information Tab... 298 Jurisdiction Forms List... 298 Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup... 301 Creditor Address Matrix: Disk File Formatting Options... 304 Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options... 305 ECF Setup... 308 Defining Your Own Jurisdiction Settings... 309 Exemption tables... 311 Printing and Editing Exemption Statutes... 312 Non-attorney preparer information... 314 Preferences... 314 Attorney Compensation Statement Setup... 317 AddressHelper * (Zip Code Lookup List)... 319 Macro Phrase List... 320 Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 293
The Setup Menu You can only access the Setup Menu when the Client List Window is closed. If you have any entry screens open, close them, close the Forms and Schedules Menu, then close the Client List Window before trying to access the Setup Menu. With the Client List Window closed, click on the third menu item labeled Setup or press aa-s. The Setup Menu contains settings that don t vary by case, such as the law firm name, jurisdiction settings, the zip code database for the AddressHelper, your macro phrase list, Common Creditor List, etc. If you went through the Setup Wizard when you installed the program, there is nothing you need to fill out in the Setup Menu. However, you may occasionally want to change some of the settings. The Setup Menu contains the following sections, each of which is described in detail below: Law Firm Information: The name and address of the firm to whom the program is registered. This will appear on the Voluntary Petition for all cases. (See page 295.) Attorney Names: The name(s) of the attorney(s) who will appear on petitions as the attorney representing the debtor. (See page 295.) Jurisdictions: The jurisdictions where the firm files cases. Jurisdiction settings include many options that vary by jurisdiction but not by case, such as the format of the creditor address list (mailing matrix), the forms that apply and the order of forms, miscellaneous printing options that may vary by district or user preference, which exemption tables apply, Electronic Case Filing settings, and Chapter 13 Plan options such as treatment classes and percentage paid to the trustee if this program includes Chapter 13. (See page 296.) Exemption Tables: The exemption statutes for all 50 states, D.C., and Puerto Rico are provided by Best Case Solutions but can be edited and updated by the user through the Setup Menu. (See page 311.) Non-Attorney Preparer Information: Information about the petition preparer if a non-attorney is preparing forms for the debtor. (See page 314.) Common Creditor List: Described on page 69, the Common Creditor List allows you to build a directory of creditors that you encounter frequently. Typically, you will build your Common Creditor List as you enter cases, accessing it through creditor schedules, but you can access it through the Setup Menu as well. If you have previously used Best Case Bankruptcy for DOS, Collier s TopForm for DOS by Matthew Bender, or Chap7..13 Typeset version for DOS by West Group, you can import your Common Creditor List from your previous program. (See page 277.) Macro Phrase List: The Macro Phrase feature allows you to define your own shortcut keys. (See page 320.) Zip Code Lookup List: The Zip Code Lookup List is part of the AddressHelper feature. As you type in address data, the AddressHelper fills in the city and state when you enter the zip code using this zip code database. (See page 260.) Preferences: Allows you to set miscellaneous options, including preferences for the Attorney Compensation Statement. (See page 314.) Setup Wizard: Prompts you for information about your firm, attorney names, and jurisdictions. Usually, you would go through the Setup Wizard before adding any new cases, but you can access it any time through the Setup Menu. (See page 20.) 294 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Law firm information If you ran the Setup Wizard when you installed Best Case Bankruptcy, this section will already be filled in. The law firm name will appear for all cases on the Voluntary Petition, and does not need to be entered again. If your office moves or the name changes, you can update the law firm information at any time. 1. In the Setup Menu under Law Firm Information, enter the name of the law firm then press T to get to the next field. Enter the address of the firm, pressing T each time you need to get to the next field. If you need to go backwards, press S-T to get to the previous field. If you are a sole practitioner, you ll generally want to enter <your name>, Attorney at Law or <your name>, P.A. instead of just your name, since in some places on the forms both the attorney name and the firm name will print. 2. Enter the telephone and fax numbers of the law firm, if desired. The e-mail address is used in certain local forms for districts participating in electronic case filing programs. Click OK when you have finished. Please let us know if your firm moves so that we may update our records! For your protection, for us to update our records, a Change of Registration form must be completed if the law firm name or contact person changes. Attorney names The Attorney Names section of the Setup Menu stores names that you can choose for each case as the attorney representing the debtor. To add or edit attorney names: Close the Client List Window and click on Setup in the Main Menu, then click Attorney Names. You will get a window with several buttons at the bottom. This is a list screen which will list all attorney names that you enter as pictured below. If there is just one attorney name entered in the Setup Menu, this name will automatically be selected on the Voluntary Petition. Click to add an attorney choice. List of Attorney Choices in the Setup Menu 1. Click Add to add an attorney name. 2. Type the attorney s name as you want it to appear on forms. The tilde character appears before the state bar number if the state bar number is to appear just on the Voluntary Petition. The attorney names you enter in the Setup Menu will appear in a drop-down list when you enter information on the Voluntary Petition. Adding an Attorney Signer Choice Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 295
3. You can add the attorney s state bar registration number if you want it to print on the signature line of the Voluntary Petition. If you want the state bar number to appear on all attorney signature lines throughout the filing, put a checkmark in the box marked Always print state bar number with attorney name. 4. Click OK when you have entered the name. 5. You can then add another attorney name by clicking Add again, typing in a second attorney name, then clicking OK. 6. When you have finished, click Close. 7. If you edited an existing attorney s name, go back into the Filing Information section of the Voluntary Petition and reselect the attorney to register your changes for this case. Attorney s name on both pages of the Voluntary Petition: Changes to the Official Forms by the Administrative Offices of the U.S. Courts effective March 1998 removed the attorney s name from the first page of the Voluntary Petition but kept the attorney s name on the second page. In response to customer and court requests, we ve added an option that allows you to print the attorney name on both the first and second pages of the Voluntary Petition. See Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options on page 305. Jurisdictions The jurisdiction section of the Setup Menu contains settings that vary by district and settings that are a matter of personal preference. Included in the jurisdiction section is the name of each district you ll be filing in and, for each district, the set of exemption statutes that apply, the forms that apply to each type of case, the format of the creditor address matrix, miscellaneous printing options, electronic filing options, and the 13 Plan Setup. Installing Jurisdictions When you run the Setup Wizard after installing Best Case Bankruptcy, you can install as many jurisdictions as you need. If you later find you need additional jurisdictions, you can easily install them: 1. Close any entry screens that are open, then close the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. Close the Client List Window. 3. Click on Setup in the Main Menu bar, then click Jurisdictions. A list of all jurisdictions that have already been installed appears. 4. Click the Install New Jurisdiction button in the bottom left corner. 5. A list of jurisdictions appears. Highlight the name of the one you want to install and click Select. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each jurisdiction you want to install, then click Close. Some settings for your district are pre-defined in Best Case Bankruptcy The format of the creditor mailing matrix and the set of exemption statutes that apply in your state are installed with your program. You may need to add the trustee s name or other names to the matrix; see your local rules for specifications. You can change the format of the creditor mailing matrix at any time through the jurisdictions section of the setup menu. See Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup beginning on page 301. Other settings are defined by the user Your jurisdiction comes with standard settings for the 13 Plan Setup, (which defines treatment classes and miscellaneous options), and standard settings for various printing options, such as whether to include questions 19-296 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
25 on the Statement of Financial Affairs for all debtors or just debtors engaged in business, whether to print separate exemption schedules for joint debtors, and more. You can change any of these settings at any time. Editing Jurisdiction Settings Since some rules vary by division within a jurisdiction, and since local rules are subject to change, this section describes ways to alter the jurisdiction settings. If you want to make adjustments for rules that vary within a district by division or chapter of filing, or want the division names to appear in the form caption, see Defining settings for divisions within a district on page 310. To get into the Setup Menu: 1. Close the Client List Window. 2. Click on Setup in the Main Menu. 3. Click the Jurisdictions option. You will see a list of all installed jurisdictions, as pictured below. (If you do not see your jurisdiction listed, install the Jurisdiction as described on page 296.) Shortcut to Edit Jurisdiction File: With a client file open, you can edit the jurisdiction file by returning to the Forms and Schedules Menu and clicking Setup/Edit Case Jurisdiction or by pressing C-S-J. Click to edit the settings for the highlighted jurisdiction. Click to copy the settings of this jurisdiction to a new jurisdiction. Jurisdictions Screen in Setup Menu Click to delete the highlighted jurisdiction. 4. Highlight your jurisdiction and click the Edit button. The basic information screen appears as pictured below. The name of the district as it will appear in the caption on printed forms. This refers to the set of state exemption statutes that apply in this district. Jurisdiction Section of the Setup Menu If your state is a community property state, check this box so that C is the default answer for the person responsible for the debt on each creditor entry in joint cases. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 297
Basic Information Tab Jurisdiction Name This is the name of the district as it will print on forms. If you want the division name to print as well, you can insert the cursor after the district name and type in the division name. You can also add non-printing comments to the name which are for your reference only by inserting a tilde character (~). Any text after the tilde will not print. This may be useful if you have defined separate matrix settings for separate trustees or types of cases, and want to differentiate between districts when selecting them. The tilde is generally found to the left of the number 1 on the keyboard. Exemption Choices The State Exemption Table should be filled in for you, but can be changed by selecting from the drop-down list. This is the state exemption table that will be associated with the jurisdiction. The choice to Use Debtor s Address State for exemption table allows you to override the usual state exemption table with the exemption laws from the debtor s state of residence. If you check this option, then create a file for a debtor who lives in Kentucky but is filing in Tennessee, the Kentucky exemptions will be available in Schedule C even though the Tennessee district will appear in the caption on forms. If federal bankruptcy exemptions under 11 U.S.C. 522(d) are permitted in this state, make sure this choice is marked. If the federal exemptions are permitted, then for each case you will have the choice of selecting either state or federal exemptions in the Filing Information section of the Voluntary Petition. If this box isn t checked, the state exemption table will always be selected for each case. Check the Default for new cases box if you want Best Case to default to federal exemptions for all new cases in this district. Community property state If this option is checked, then for each creditor that you enter, the question of who is responsible for the debt defaults to Community. (This question only applies to joint debtors.) Jurisdiction is obsolete and cannot be assigned to new cases. Use this option if you have old cases that rely on this jurisdiction file but no longer want to assign it to new cases. The most common application of this would be for districts for which we have added custom chapter 13 plans and plan classes, requiring new jurisdiction files. For new cases, you d want to use the new Chapter 13 plan and plan classes, but for old cases, you d want to use the old file so that you don t have to reassign plan classes to each creditor. Judge and Trustee Lists The judge and trustee lists allow you to maintain a database of judges and trustees for each jurisdiction in which you file. Use these lists to store the names, addresses, phone numbers and other information for any judge or trustee to whom one of your clients may be assigned. When you assign a judge or trustee to a client file, Best Case can use the contact information you entered to fill out any forms which may require judge or trustee information. Note that you assign the judge or trustee to client in the File Setup Information tab of the Client Notes screen as described on page 266. Adding a Judge or Trustee to your list: 1. Click the "Edit Judge list for Jurisdiction..." button or the "Edit Trustee list for Jurisdiction..." button. 2. Click the Insert button in the Judge/Trustee List screen that opens. 3. Fill in the name, and all of the applicable contact information in the spaces provided. 298 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
4. Trustee Payment Address: Use the Payment Address tab to enter a separate payment address for any trustees you enter. To make the payment address the same as the general address click the "Copy General Address" button. 5. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Judge/Trustee list screen. Jurisdiction Forms List The Jurisdiction Forms List allows you to select and reorder the documents that appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu. Since the list of forms or order of forms varies by jurisdiction, this setting is stored in the Jurisdictions section of your Setup Menu. Note that if you file in multiple jurisdictions, you may want to customize these settings for each jurisdiction. To access the Jurisdiction Forms List: 1. With a client file open, press C-S-J from the Forms and Schedules Menu then skip to step 5, or - 2. Close the Client List Window. 3. Click Setup in the main menu, then click Jurisdictions. 4. Highlight the name of the first jurisdiction you want to change then click the Edit button. 5. Click the Edit Forms List button. The Edit Jurisdiction Form List window appears. The forms that appear in your Forms and Schedules Menu appear on the left side, in the order that they will appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu. The list of possible forms to add to the Forms and Schedules Menu appears on the right side. To Reorder Forms: On the left side of the Jurisdiction Form List, highlight the form you want to move then click the Up or the Down button. Each time you click, the form is moved up or down in the list one slot. Continue to click until it is in the desired position. To Remove a Form from Your Forms and Schedules Menu Highlight the form on the left side of the screen then click the Remove>> button. To Add a Form to Your Forms and Schedules Menu Highlight the desired form on the right side of the screen and click the <<Add button. Note that some custom forms are in the Local Forms section at the bottom of the list. For certain custom forms, such as local versions of the Verification of Creditor Matrix, you ll need to remove the standard version before adding the custom one. Note that you cannot add forms of your own creation to the Forms and Schedules Menu. To add custom Word or WordPerfect documents, see Additional Documents Library on page 206. Supplemental Forms The supplemental forms folder in the Jurisdiction Forms List is for forms that you file occasionally but not with every case. Forms in your Supplemental Forms folder will appear at the bottom of your Forms and Schedules Menu in a special Supplemental Forms section. When you mark all of a client s forms to print, forms in the Supplemental Forms section will NOT be marked. You can print the supplemental forms by marking them individually. To put a form in the Supplemental folder, the form first needs to be in your Jurisdiction Forms List. If it isn t, add it per the instructions above. If the form is in the Jurisdiction Forms list, highlight it then click the Down button until the form appears under the words Supplemental Forms. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 299
To move a form from the Supplemental Forms folder to the main Forms and Schedules Menu, highlight it and click the Up button until it appears above the words Supplemental Forms. To Specify that a Form Should/Should Not Appear for a Given Type of Case To give you added flexibility, you can specify that a form should or should not appear for a given type of case in Best Case Bankruptcy. It is not common that you would want to change these settings, but if you do: Highlight the form on the left side of the window and click the Edit button. A grid appears that allows you to specify that a form should or should not be included for each chapter of filing and type of debtor. The Update Jurisdiction Form window lets you specify which types of cases each form applies to The column on the left side refers to the type of debtor and the headings across the top refer to the chapter of filing. If you want a form to appear for a certain type of case, put a check mark in the box that corresponds to the chapter of filing and type of debtor. If you don t want a form to appear for a given type of case, remove the checkmark from the corresponding box. To Change the Title of a Form Highlight the form on the left side of the window and click the Edit button. You ll notice that there is a Form Title and a Print Title. The form title just refers to the way the form is listed in the Forms and Schedules Menu. The print title refers to the way the title prints on the forms. Make your changes then click OK. Note that for the Voluntary Petition and certain custom local forms, you won t be able to change the form title. Form Preferences Some forms, like the Chapter 13 Plan, have Form Preferences that allow you to change printing options specific to the form. For a list of options having to do with the form being edited, click the Preferences button which appears in the lower left corner of the Update Jurisdiction Form window pictured above. Print as QuickForm to Allow Editing Before Printing Highlight the form on the left side of the window and click the Edit button. If this form is available in RTF format, you ll see a check box labeled Print as QuickForm to Allow Editing Before Printing. If this option is checked, whenever you print this document it will appear in the Best Case Editor so that you can add text or answers. If this option is not checked, the document will just be sent to your printer when you print it and you will need to click the Edit Form button in the Print Documents dialog window in order to edit it. This option only appears for documents included as RTF files. Currently, this includes certain supplemental and local forms but not most Official Forms and Schedules. By default, we ve checked this option for documents that require information not collected in Best Case since you would generally want to fill this information in before printing. 300 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
To Reset to Standard Settings The Reset button undoes all of your changes and restores the original settings. Jurisdiction: matrix (Creditor Mailing List) setup The format of the creditor s mailing matrix varies by district. In Best Case Bankruptcy, we have defined the format for each district in the country. As these requirements are subject to change, or may vary by division within a district, you have the option to change these settings through the Setup Menu, and will want to check with the court periodically to ensure that you are using the correct format. Jurisdiction Section of Setup Menu: Matrix Setup Some options that are listed in the matrix setup are a matter of personal preference. Each option is described in detail below. Format: Changes the number of columns, margins, and font The Format question allows you to choose a standard template for the matrix. The template specifies the number of row, columns, font and direction of alphabetization. You can choose a different format from the drop down list. Your choices are: BANCAP, single-column, 2.5 left margin single column down the center of the page, courier font, left justified - most common format BANCAP12T, single-column, Times 12 Pt - 2.5 left margin. A BANCAP (single-column) format that uses the Times Roman font instead of Courier. BANCAPAL, 1 left margin, Times 12 PT - same as BANCAP12T except with a 1 left margin instead of 2.5 BANCAPL, single-column, 1 left margin - single column on the left side of the page, courier font BANCAPLA, Los Angeles, 1 left margin - use in Los Angeles division, courier font BANCAPPX.25 left margin - courier font LBL3X10, Labels, 3 columns, 10 rows which is a 3-column format sorted down the page LBL3X9, Labels, 3 columns, 9 rows which is a 3-column format sorted across the page MS3X9 Southern Dist Mississippi - use in Southern District of Mississippi - a label format that uses courier font VLBL3X9 Labels 3 X 9 sorted down the page which is a 3-column format sorted down the page Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 301
The Edit button next to the format field allows you to change the margins, font and layout of a predefined format. You generally would not need to do this. Options in the Edit window are: Margins: You ll notice that you can define separate margin settings for laser and ink jet (or Deskjet) printers. If you want the margin settings to be the same for both types of printers, put a check mark in the "Same" box. If you don't, remove the check mark from the "Same" box. The measurements for the margins are in margin units, where 1 inch = 300 margin units. For example, if you want to increase the left margin by 1/4 inch, you would increase the left margin by 75 margin units, (or 300/4). Font Name: Choose from the pop-down list. Your choices are Courier 10, Arial 10, or Times Roman 10. Layout: Your choices are single column (BANCAP) or grid. If you select Grid, (or label) format, you can specify the number of columns and rows and the print direction, (horizontal or vertical.) Sort Order Grouping: Choose which parties appear on the matrix The Sort Order/Grouping section allows you to specify which scheduled parties should be included in the matrix and in what order. Any party with a 0 will not be included. By default, Schedule G parties (contract lease parties) and Schedule H entries (codebtors) are excluded, as are equity security holders. To include these parties, put a 1 or higher next to them. To group creditors by the type of creditor, place a 1 next to the type of creditor you want listed first, a 2 next to the second, and a 3 next to the third. Or, if you want two types grouped together and sorted alphabetically, give them the same number. For example, in the picture below, Schedule D, E and F creditors and additional notice parties will be listed first, sorted alphabetically, followed by Schedule G and H parties, followed by Equity Security Holders. The Sort Order/Grouping section allows you to specify which parties should be listed on the matrix. Duplicate Checking: Choose How You Want Duplicates Handled Allows you to specify how you want Best Case Bankruptcy to handle duplicate addresses. Your choices are: Display and ask : (The default) When Best Case Bankruptcy encounters a duplicate creditor name, both names and addresses will be displayed and you will be asked whether you want to include both in the matrix or just one. (If you select this choice, a possible duplicates window will appear when you print the matrix and duplicates are found.) Don t check : All duplicates will be included. Exclude if Line 1 matches : If the creditor s name appears in more than one address block, only the first listing of the creditor will be included in the matrix. Exclude if all lines match : If all lines of the creditor name and address match that of another creditor entry, only one will be included in the matrix. 302 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Special Characters to Exclude This option was added for districts where the court specifically asks that you exclude certain characters such as % or #. Type in the characters to be excluded in this box. Note: The easiest way to exclude punctuation is not to type it in the first place. This option will leave a space where the character was. If you don t want commas in the matrix, be sure to check the No comma in City, ST Zip option as well. Miscellaneous Print Options Print Matrix in all upper case - if this option is not checked, each address will print in the case you typed them when entering names in the schedules. No comma in City, ST Zip - Normally, Best Case Bankruptcy inserts a comma between the city and state. Check this option if you don t want a comma. Print acct. no in line 2 - Normally, no account number is included in the matrix. If you check this option, any account number which you typed in the creditor schedule will appear under the creditor's name after the phrase Acct No. If you want different text to appear before each account number, type it into the text box labeled precede with, but note that some clerks offices do not want punctuation or certain characters included in the matrix, so you won't want the # or a period. Note: This option overrides the Special Characters to Exclude option, so if you put a # here and then try to exclude the # character, it will print in the account numbers line. Name/Case# in top margin - Inserts the debtor s name and case number, if known, in the top margin. (If you know a case number, you can enter it in the Filing Information tab of the Voluntary Petition. Page # of Pages in top margin - this option prints the page number and total number of pages on every page of the matrix, and was added for users in Oregon. If you are not in Oregon, check with your local clerk s office before using this option, since most local rules specify that no text other than names and addresses should appear on the matrix. Maximum length of address line - Controls the maximum length of addresses that you are able to enter in creditor schedules. Maximum number of lines in address block - Controls the number of lines per address. If your court has a maximum number of lines per address block and you want the account numbers to print, you should set the maximum number of lines in the Setup Menu to one less than the required maximum number, since the account number will add a line. Blank lines between addresses - Controls the number of lines inserted between each address block. Maximum number of addresses per page - For the BANCAP format only, this allows you to specify a maximum number of addresses per page. The default here is 0, which means that there is no maximum. Fixed # of Lines in address block - The default answer for this option is 0, which means that the field is disregarded. For just 2 districts where each address block must take up exactly 6 lines, this is set to 6. For this option to work, you need to change the option for the Number of blank lines between addresses to 0. Constant Names: (put debtor, trustee, etc. at top of matrix) This section allows you to specify that the attorney s name, debtor s name, trustee s name, etc., should be inserted at the top of the matrix for every case in this district Note: Most courts no longer want the debtor s or attorney s name on the matrix, as the clerk s office inserts these names, so please check with your local rules before adding them. 1. To add a constant name, click Add. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 303
2. Your Common Creditor List will appear, with constant names at the top such as ##Debtor## and ##Attorney for Debtor##. Your choices for constant names are: ##Attorney for Debtor##: inserts the name and address of the attorney signing the petition ##Debtor##: inserts the name and address of the debtor as it appears on the Voluntary Petition ##Debtor/Joint Debtor##: inserts the names and address of the debtor and joint debtor in one address block ##Joint Debtor (if any)##: inserts the name of the joint debtor in its own address block if there is a joint debtor. If there is no joint debtor, the next name will be moved up to this block. ##Joint Debtor##: same as joint debtor, if any. (This appears in this version of Best Case to allow compatibility with previous versions.) ##New Page##: inserts a page break. (Used only in districts which require the creditors to appear on a separate page from the constant names) 3. Move to the name that you want on your matrix, then click Select. 4. To add another name, repeat process. Names will appear in the order that you add them. If your local courts require that the debtor s and attorney s names appear on the first page, with creditor names and addresses starting on the second page, insert the debtor s and attorney s names as described in the instructions, then insert ##New Page## as the last constant name. 5. When you have finished, click OK. 6. Click Close to exit the Jurisdictions section of the Setup Menu. If this party should be listed for all cases of a certain chapter, such as chapter 11, or for all business debtors, you can make a new jurisdiction just for this type of case. Change the jurisdiction name to include a non-printing description such as ~Chapter 11 cases, then edit the new jurisdiction to include these constant names. See Define settings for different types of cases on page 310. To force a name to the end of the matrix Constant names are usually listed at the beginning of the matrix. To force a name to appear at the end of the matrix: 1. Follow step 1 above. 2. In your common creditor list, click New to add a new name. 3. Type @end@ in front of the creditor s name. 4. Type the rest of the address, then click Select. 5. Click OK when you have finished with matrix formatting. Creditor Address Matrix: Disk File Formatting Options The matrix on disk produced by Best Case Bankruptcy is in ASCII text format, the format that courts require. The default file name for most districts is creditor.scn. There are a few formatting options for the matrix text file in the Setup menu: Accessing Disk Formatting Options To access the matrix formatting screen: 1. With a client file open, press C-S-J from the Forms and Schedules Menu then skip to step 7, or 304 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
2. Close any open forms or schedules. 3. Close the Forms and Schedules Menu. 4. Close the Client List Window. 5. Click Setup, then click Jurisdictions. 6. Highlight the name of your jurisdiction then click Edit. 7. Click the Matrix tab at the top of the window. Formatting Options for Matrix on Disk In the lower right corner of the matrix window, you ll see a section labeled Disk File with the following options listed: All upper case - Converts all characters to UPPERCASE when creating the matrix on disk. If not checked, characters will appear in the same case they were entered in. Include constant names - Includes the constant names, such as the attorney s and debtor s names in the matrix which are specified in the Constant names at beginning of matrix section above the disk file options. (Most courts don t want constant names in the disk file since these are added automatically by the court.) Include Account Numbers The option to Print account numbers on line 2 applies to both the printed matrix and the text file. Fixed # of lines - In a few districts, the courts require that each address block take up exactly 6 lines. For those districts, you can enter the number of lines here that each address block should fill. # of blank lines - This refers to the number of blank lines between each address block. The default is 1 line. The answer you provide here is ignored if Fixed # of lines above has a value in it other than 0. Filename - This refers to the name that is given to the file on disk when it is created. For most districts, the default is creditor.scn, which is the name most courts require. (If this answer is blank, the default will be used.) If your court requires the file name to be derived from the debtor s social security number, select {SSN} from the drop-down list. The file name will be the first 6 digits of the debtor s social security number followed by a period, then the last 3 digits. This option was added for users in the Eastern District of North Carolina, but other courts may require it in the future. If your court requires the file name to be derived from the debtor s last name, select {LAST}.TXT from the dropdown list which will produce a disk file with a name using the first 8 characters of the debtor s last name. The {FLAST}.TXT option uses the first character of the debtor s first name then the debtor s last name. Ask each time - If you check this box, you will be prompted for a file name each time you create a matrix on disk. Advanced Disk Formatting Options: If you click the Advanced button, you will also be able to specify that the debtor s name should appear on the first line, the number of blank lines between the debtor s name and first address block, if applicable, whether the case number should appear at the beginning, whether the pipe character ( ) should appear as the field separator, (usually there is just a line break instead of a field separator), and whether 0000 should be added to zip codes when you have just entered the first 5 digits. (Usually just the first 5 digits would be included if that is all you have entered.) For instructions on creating a matrix on disk, see Creating an ASCII Text File of the Creditor Address Matrix on page 111. Jurisdictions: Miscellaneous Options To access the screen pictured below, see Editing Jurisdiction Settings on page 297 then click the Misc. Options tab. This screen contains the following options: Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 305
The Miscellaneous Options screen in the Jurisdiction portion of the Setup Menu contains various printing options Print Statement of Financial Affairs Questions 19-25 for all debtors? By default, questions 19-25 print for all debtors. If you remove the check mark from this option, questions 19-25 will only print for debtors engaged in business, or if you answer any of the questions 19-25. Note that if you want to exclude questions 19-25 for consumer debtors, you ll still see these questions on the screen, but they won t print on the form unless you answer at least one of them. Print Statement of Financial Affairs declaration on its own page? The default is to print the declaration at the bottom of the last page. Print Form 8 signatures on a separate page? This refers to the Chapter 7 Debtor s Statement of Intention. The default is to print the signature portion at the bottom of the form. Voluntary Petition - No lines in bottom right corner: With this option, you can exclude the lines that print around the space for court use only on the first page of the Voluntary Petition. This option was requested by customers in the Eastern District of California where the courts apply a bar code to this section. No other districts that we know of have requested this format. Always print phone # of debtor on Voluntary Petition: This option was added specifically for customers or courts that want the debtor s phone number on the petition even if the debtor is represented by an attorney. Enter the debtor s phone number through the Notes section of the program, accessible from the Client List Window. The phone number prints on the phone number line on the second page of the petition, and the phrase if not represented by attorney will be crossed out. Number creditors on Schedules D, E and F? If checked, a line appears above each creditor on Schedules D through F numbering the creditor. For example Creditor #3 will appear above the third creditor on Schedule E. As far as we know, no courts require this format. We have added this option based on customer requests. (Note that this option does not apply if you merge the forms in your word processing software.) Include Additional Notice Parties on Schedules? This refers to additional notice parties entered through Schedules D, E and F. Additional notice parties are individuals or organizations who should be notified of the filing but are not creditors. Examples include collection agencies and attorneys representing creditors. Normally, they are included on the creditor address list, but not on the schedules. If you mark this option, each additional notice party will appear under the corresponding creditor on the creditor schedule with the phrase Representing: creditor name. If you want different text to appear above each creditor, replace the word Representing with your text in the heading box. (For more information about additional notice parties, see Adding names other than creditors to the matrix on page 109.) Print UGEN total payout on BC standard 13 Plan? By default, the percentage that unsecured nonpriority creditors will receive prints on the plan, but the total dollar amount that they will receive does not. If you check this box, a 306 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
statement will be inserted in section 4.d.(2) which reads The total payout to unsecured creditors at <percentage>% is $<total dollar amount>. (Only applies to the standard Best Case Plan.) Print separate exemption schedules for joint debtors? Normally there is just one exemption schedule. This option allows you to print separate exemption schedules for the husband and wife. If you do check this option, you will need to specify for each item on Schedule C whether the husband or wife is claiming the exemption. Don t print <$10 text on BC standard 13 Plan: This option refers to the text on the 13 Plan that reads provided that where the amount or balance of any unsecured claim is less than $10.00 it may be paid in full. If you check this option, this phrase will be excluded. (Only applies to the standard Best Case Plan.) Chapter 11: Sort Form 4 by amount rather than name? This option applies only to Chapter 11 cases. By default, Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims is sorted by creditor name. If you have this option checked, creditors on Form 4 will be sorted by the amount of the unsecured portions of the claims, in descending order. Print attorney sig. line on BC standard 13 plan: Normally, just a debtor signature line will appear but if you check this option, a line will appear for the attorney also. (Only applies to the standard Best Case Plan.) Print Certification of Non-Attorney Petition Preparer? This refers to the certification section that can be printed at the bottom of some of the forms. If an attorney is representing the debtor, there is no need to print the certification. The actual non-attorney Certification and compensation forms can be printed from the Additional Documents Library. (See page 207.) To enter the non-attorney information, see page 314. Print Form 3 Installments order on same page as application? Normally, the application to pay filing fee installments is printed on one page and the order approving the application is printed on another, but if you check this option they will be printed on the same page. Form 3: Cash Only: Inserts a line in the Order to Pay Filing Fee in Installments that reads: ALL PAYMENTS MUST BE MADE BY CASH, U.S. POST OFFICE MONEY ORDER OR CASHIER S CHECK. Print attorney name/bar # on Voluntary Petition page 1: Until the amended forms became mandatory in March of 1998, the attorney s name appeared on both pages of the Voluntary Petition. The Administrative Office of the U.S. Courts decided that it was repetitive to have the attorney s name on both pages, and removed the attorney name from the first page. However, some local courts still prefer to have the attorney name on the first page, since this page gives a brief summary of the whole case. In response to customer and court preferences, we now give you the option of putting the attorney name on the first page of the Voluntary Petition. If you check this option, the attorney name will print at the bottom of the filing fee section and on the second page. Verification of Creditor Matrix: No debtor signature the default format is to print a debtor s signature line but no line for the attorney s signature. If you check this option, the debtor s signature line will be excluded. (Does not apply to custom local verification formats.) Verification of Creditor Matrix: Include attorney signature line: On the Verification of Creditor Matrix, some courts require the attorney s signature be included in addition to or instead of the debtor s. If your court requires the attorney s signature on the Verification, put a check here. (Does not apply to custom local verification formats.) Include attorney verification text: If checked, an additional paragraph will appear on the Verification stating that the attorney has checked the matrix against the actual schedules and that the clerk can rely on the matrix to be accurate. (Does not apply to verification formats for custom local plans.) Text for right corner of caption: This option was added for users in the Eastern District of New York who need to put an attorney code in the caption of each form. (Note that this option does not apply if you merge the forms in your word processor to print. If you merge, you will need to edit the document yourself to add this text.) If you are in the Eastern District of NY, enter either: the law firm s 9 digit tax id, or Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 307
the first initial of your first name and first initial of your last name and the last 4 digits of your social security number, or if you are a trustee, a t then the first initial of your first name and first initial of your last name and the last 4 digits of your social security number. All text should be in lower case. Term for Unknown/Undetermined amounts: The default is unknown, which will appear for unknown values if you don t change this option. You can type a different word if your court prefers it. Jurisdiction: 13 Plan Setup Generally, the only change you ll want to make to the Chapter 13 Plan settings is the trustee s fee, which is set to 10% by default. 1. To access the 13 Plan Setup screen, Follow steps 1-4 under Editing Jurisdiction Settings on page 297, then click the 13 Plan tab at the top of the window. 2. Enter the percentage that is paid to the trustee in your district. (The default value is 10%.) Other options in this screen are described in the Chapter 13 Plan Setup and Printing Options section of Chapter 3 as found on page 177. ECF Setup The Electronic Case Filing feature in Best Case Bankruptcy creates a PDF of the client s petition, a text file of basic case data called the Case Extract File and a text file of the creditor address matrix. The ECF Setup Screen comes with predefined settings, but can be changed at any time This screen allows you to specify which files are to be created for electronic filing, where the files are to be created, and the address of the web site where the files are to be uploaded. To access this screen, close any client files that you have open then close the Client List Window. 1. Click Setup/Jurisdictions. 2. Highlight your jurisdiction and click Edit. 3. Click the ECF tab. Jurisdiction Websites (URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator - i.e. - web address.) In the Court URL box, type the web address of the court s web site. For example, for the Southern District of California, you would type http://www.casb.uscourts.gov. 308 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
In the ECF URL field, type the web address of the login page for the electronic case filing. If you don t know what this is, go to the court s main web page and navigate to the login page, then, in the address box of your web browser, highlight the URL and press C-C to copy the address. Switch back over to Best Case, insert the cursor in the ECF upload box and press C-V to paste. To test the web address, click the Go button which will open your web browser to that address. We have attempted to fill this information in for you. However, at this time, only a few courts are accepting cases filed electronically. If you need assistance with this step, contact Best Case Solutions at 1.800.492.8037. Location of ECF files on this Computer When you use the ECFiling option in Best Case, you will create several files for upload to the court s website. This option lets you specify where you want the files to be created. You ll have the option of deleting these files if you don t want them taking up room on your hard drive. The default location is C:\ECF. Each client s electronic files will be stored in an individual subdirectory in this folder. ECF Upload Package This section lets you specify default file names and which files are to be included. The default file name for the entire petition is Petition.PDF. The default file name for the Chapter 13 Plan is Plan.PDF. (When you are creating the files, you ll have the option of including the 13 plan with the other documents in one PDF file or creating a separate PDF of the 13 Plan.) The Case Extract (or upload) File is a text file that some courts require containing basic information about the case from the Voluntary Petition. The default file name is Debtor.TXT. The option Include Matrix file in package allows you to create a text file of the creditor address matrix to be uploaded with your PDF file or files. If you do want to include the text file of the matrix, check this box then click the Matrix tab at the top to review or change the Formatting Options for Matrix on Disk. In the matrix tab, you can specify a default file name, various spacing options, and other formatting selections. Click OK to save your changes. The Reset ECF button allows you to restore settings that were shipped with Best Case. To create files and upload them, see Electronic Case Filing on page 220. Defining Your Own Jurisdiction Settings In Best Case Bankruptcy, we have defined settings for each jurisdiction in the country. Each jurisdiction s settings are stored in a separate file. You may want to edit our settings or create jurisdiction settings of your own for any of the following reasons: Formatting of the creditor address matrix may vary by division within a district. Formatting of the creditor address matrix may vary by chapter of filing, and you want to define settings for more than one type of case. Chapter 13 Plans vary by trustee. You want the name of the division to print on the Voluntary Petition. You want to change the order of forms. To edit any of the settings for a jurisdiction: Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 309
1. With a client file open, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, press C-S-J or click Setup/Edit Case Jurisdiction, or follow steps 2-4 below: 2. Close the Client List Window and click on Setup in the Main Menu bar. 3. Click Jurisdictions. 4. Highlight the name of a jurisdiction and click Edit. You can then make any changes that you want. See previous pages for instructions for changing jurisdiction name, matrix settings, miscellaneous options, and chapter 13 plan settings. Defining settings for divisions within a district 1. Go into the Setup Menu and select Jurisdictions. 2. Highlight the name of your jurisdiction then click Copy. In the Copy Jurisdictions dialog box, click OK. 3. A window will pop-up telling you that the jurisdiction has been copied and has been given a name. Click OK. 4. For Jurisdiction name, change the name to the way you want the district to appear in the caption information in the Voluntary Petition. (E.g. Northern District of Illinois - Chicago Division. ) A nonprinting comment may be added at the end of the jurisdiction name by using the tilde character (~) usually found to the left of the number 1 on your keyboard. The tilde and the text that follow it will appear on-screen but will not print on the forms. Once you have copied the jurisdiction, you may modify the new jurisdiction as needed. A Copied Jurisdiction You can then repeat the process for any number of divisions. Define settings for different types of cases You can also adjust settings for different types of cases within a district or division. For example, if the IRS is required on the matrix for just Chapter 11 cases, you can set up a jurisdiction specifically for Chapter 11 files. 1. Follow steps 1-3 above. 2. For the jurisdiction name, you can add non-printing text to the name of the jurisdiction so that you can identify the jurisdiction file with the correct settings when you starting a new case. To add non-printing text: Type a tilde ~ (left of the number 1 on your keyboard) after the district name, then type any text to identify the settings. For example, if you type Western District of North Carolina~Chapter 11 cases for the jurisdiction name, 310 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Western District of North Carolina~Chapter 11 case will appear in your pop-up list of jurisdiction choices, but only Western District of North Carolina will print on the form. Enter the name of the district as you would like it to appear on the Voluntary Petition. If you want to insert some nonprinting text, insert a ~before it. Creating a New Jurisdiction: Changing the Jurisdiction name 3. If you need to make formatting changes for this district, do so, as described in the preceding section Jurisdictions then click OK. You can then repeat the process for any number of districts. Print Report of Jurisdiction Settings To print a report of the options you have selected for a particular jurisdiction in the Setup Menu: 1. With a client file open, from the Forms and Schedules Menu, press C-S-J then skip to step 6, or - 2. Close the Client List Window. 3. Click on Setup in the Main Menu. 4. Click on Jurisdictions. 5. Highlight your jurisdiction name and click Edit. 6. Click the Print button in the bottom left corner of the window. 7. This will send a report to your screen. 8. Click the button with a printer on it in the toolbar to send the report to your printer. Exemption tables The exemption statutes for all fifty states, the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico are included with Best Case Bankruptcy. To make the exemption picking process go more quickly in Schedule C, we have associated each statute with one or more types of property. When you exempt property, the most common statutes used will appear at the top of the list. Of course, the attorney for the case is responsible for selecting the statute that should be used for each property item and ensuring that statutes are being applied correctly. (See the section Please Read About Exemptions in Best Case Bankruptcy in the Schedule C instructions, beginning on page 63.) The Exemption Tables item appears in the Setup Menu so that you can edit the description of the laws as they appear on the screen, print a list of statutes for your reference, change which types of property are associated with each exemption statute, or update the statutes yourself. Best Case Solutions does not issue updates every time exemption statutes change. As an attorney practicing in your state, you are in a better position to follow these changes in the law. For each case, a choice in the Voluntary Petition/Filing Information section of the program allows you to choose which set of exemption statutes applies. You can change this setting at any time while working on a case. Choices in Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 311
the Basic Information tab of the Jurisdiction settings allow you to specify whether federal exemptions are allowed in this state and whether the state exemption table associated with each client should be based on the debtor s state of residence instead of the state where the case is being filed. See Basic Information Tab on page 298. Printing and Editing Exemption Statutes You can print a report of the statutes as they appear in Best Case Bankruptcy for reference in your office. You can also edit the statutes yourself through the Setup Menu, adding statutes, reordering statutes, changing the property associated with each statute, the codes themselves, or just the descriptions that appear next to the codes. This section describes how to print and edit the statutes. Printing exemption statutes 1. Close any entry or list screens that are open, then close the Client List Window. 2. On the main menu bar, click on Setup. 3. At the Setup sub-menu, click on Exemption Tables. 4. Highlight the appropriate state then click the Edit button. 5. Click the Print button. A report is generated, as shown below. A report of exemption statutes 6. In the Description/Property Types column, you ll see the type or types of property that this statute usually applies to. If the statute is commonly applied to a particular type of property, the property type is preceded by Applies to: If it can apply to a property type but is used less often, Less Common precedes the property type. For the property type, we use A for real property (for schedule A) and the property type number from Schedule B for personal property. You can edit the associations between statutes and property types by editing exemption statutes. As an attorney practicing in your state, you are in the best position to know which statutes commonly apply to which property types. 7. Print the report by clicking on the button then clicking Print, or, if you want to review the report first, left-click on the report to zoom in or right-click to zoom out. 8. Reports for most states fit on one page, but some states require a second page. Best Case Bankruptcy will print the report then return you to the list of statutes for the state you selected where you can edit or view statutes. When you have finished, click Close. 312 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Editing exemption statutes You may want to print out the set of exemptions for your reference, as described below, before editing. To edit the statutes provided: 1. Follow steps 1-4 under Printing Exemption Statutes above to get the list of statutes for your state. The list of statutes for the state you selected will appear as shown below: Individual limit. Joint limit. Scroll down to view the entire list. Viewing a Table of Exemptions If this is checked, Best Case won t overwrite your changes when you install the next update. 2. Highlight the law that you want to edit then click the Change button. The Statute Tab allows you to change the statute number, description, and limits. 3. There are four main fields in the Statute Tab; Statute is the code as it will appear on the printed form, Description is for your reference; it appears in your pop-down list of choices when you are working in Schedule C. If you change only the description, the way the statute appears on the printed forms will not change. Individual limit is the limit of this exemption for an individual; joint limit represents the limit for two debtors filing jointly. 4. The Delete check box can be used if you do not want to allow this statute to be selected on Schedule C. 5. The Do not update checkbox can be used if you never want Best Case Bankruptcy to update this statute when new updates are issued. You might use this for statutes you add yourself. 6. The Property Types Tab, pictured below, lets you specify what type of property the statute applies to. To show that a statute commonly applies to a property type, click once in the check box next to the property type. The box will turn dark blue. To specify that it sometimes applies to a property type, click in the blue box; the box will turn half white, half blue. When statutes appear in the drop-down list Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 313
in Schedule C, those marked with blue boxes will appear first, followed by those with half blue boxes, following by those with white boxes. The Property Tab lets you specify which property types the statute applies to 7. After you have made changes, click OK. 8. Repeat for other laws you want to edit. Keyboard Shortcut Press C-t or C-b to move the highlighted statute up or down in the list. 9. Notice the check box on the list of exemptions for your state that says Do not update entire exemption table with next software release. If you check this box, next time you install an update, statutes for this state will not be overwritten. In other words, checking the box allows you to keep your changes permanently. If you don t check the box, Best Case will automatically overwrite your changes with our latest information when you install the next update. Canceling Your Changes To cancel your changes and restore the exemptions that shipped with Best Case Bankruptcy, click Setup/Exemption Tables. Highlight your state and click Edit. Click the Reset All button. Non-attorney preparer information If you will be filing the form Certification of Non-Attorney Petition Preparer, and also need the certification to appear on all appropriate forms, you ll need to enter your name, address, social security number and telephone number in the Non-Attorney Preparer Information section of the Setup Menu. Access the Setup Menu by closing any cases that are open, then closing the Client List Window. Fill out the non attorney information, then click OK. Also, make sure you ve got the Miscellaneous Option Print Certification of Non-Attorney Petition Preparer marked yes as described in the miscellaneous options section, starting on page 305. The form titled Certification of Non-Attorney Bankruptcy Petition Preparer is found in the Additional Documents Library, as is the compensation statement for the non-attorney. Preferences To access Preferences, close any forms or schedules that you have open, close the Forms and Schedules Menu, then close the Client List Window. Click Setup in the Main Menu Bar, then click Preferences. Or, from the Forms and Schedule Menu, press C-S-P. 314 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
With the Client List Window Closed, click Setup/Preferences to access this window The following choices are available in the Preferences section of the Setup Menu. They can be changed at any time. Usual Jurisdiction The usual jurisdiction that you select will appear as the default in the Creating New Client File Window. Selecting a default jurisdiction does not change the jurisdiction for any cases that have already been created. To select a jurisdiction as the default, click the next to the jurisdiction name field, then click on your jurisdiction. If you don t see the jurisdiction that you want as the default in your list, see Installing Jurisdictions on page 296. Don t show welcome screen when starting program This option allows you to turn off the Welcome screen described on page 21 that appears when you open Best Case Bankruptcy. The Welcome screen displays your tip of the day. Disable Lookup city and state using zip code This option controls whether the AddressHelper is on or off. As you enter address information for debtors, creditors, codebtors, etc., the AddressHelper will automatically fill in the city and state for you after you enter the zip code. The default is for the AddressHelper to be on. If you want to turn it off, click in the check box labeled Disable Lookup City and State Using Zip Code. For more information about AddressHelper, see page 319. Disable AddressFill Popup When the AddressFill is on, the Common Creditor List appears automatically as you begin to type in creditor names and addresses. There really is no disadvantage to having AddressFill on; if you want to type in a creditor which is not in your Common Creditor List, just type in the creditor name and address. The AddressFill list disappears when you press T after the creditor name, just as if the popup weren t there. In any screen, you can press E to make the AddressFill list go away. If you turn the AddressFill feature off, you will need to press 0 to access your Common Creditor List while typing in creditor data. If you want to turn it off, just put a check mark in this box. See page 260 for more information about AddressFill. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 315
Disable Credit Card Number validation on Schedule F The credit card validation system looks at account numbers formatted like Visa, MasterCard, American Express, or Discover cards. If a number is formatted like a major credit card, but is a digit short or doesn t conform to the mathematical formula for that type of card, a warning message appears. You can click OK to acknowledge the message. (The validation system does not prevent you from entering bad credit card numbers, it merely warns you if it thinks a number is bad.) If you don t like the warning messages, click here to disable this feature. Disable Right-Click Menu on Forms and Schedules If you check this box, you will no longer have access to the drop-down menu that appears when you right-click in the Forms and Schedules Menu, allowing you to open forms, create attachments, and print quickly. This disable option was added for users who prefer the old right-click shortcuts in the Forms and Schedules Menu (double rightclick to print a form, S-double- right-click to print all forms.) Add new creditors to Common Creditor List By default, new creditors are not automatically added to your Common Creditor List as you type, but you can add them by pressing C-0 or by checking the box in the creditor entry screen marked Add to CCL. This Add new creditors to Common Creditor List option in the Preferences section of your Setup Menu allows you to specify that you want new creditors added to the Common Creditor List automatically. You can choose whether to have just Schedule D, E, F, or G creditors added automatically by clicking the option for any schedule, or all creditors by checking all the boxes. The ANP box refers to additional notice parties, parties who are notified of the filing but are not creditors. Note also that this option is not retroactive ; if you check this option, all creditors that you have already entered for client files will not be added to the Common Creditor List. Default to mask Creditor Account Numbers in Schedules D, E, F This applies to the Mask on Form check box that appears next to account numbers in creditor entry screens. If, when you print forms, you have the option selected to allow masking of individual claims, Best Case will mask account numbers marked with the Mask on Form check box. With this option in the Preferences window, you can automatically check the Mask on Form box for all new creditor entries. Like the option above, this is not retroactive; it only applies to new entries. Also see Privacy on page 190. Best Case Editor: Use Word instead (appears after you click Advanced) This option refers to some forms in Best Case Bankruptcy which you can modify through the Best Case Editor. The Best Case Editor allows you to add and remove text and change formatting. If you always want your QuickForms to open in Microsoft Word instead of the Best Case Editor, check this option. (This option is not recommended since merging the document into Word will be slower than opening them in the Best Case Editor. Also, if you upgrade to a higher version of MS Word in the future, you may have trouble with the merge process.) (See System Requirements on page 14 for a current list of the supported Word versions.) This option will appear grayed out for users with Word 97. See page 202 for more information about the Best Case Editor. Allow Multiple Editor Sessions This option is for advanced users who would like to have more than one document open at one time in the Best Case Editor. For each document that you open in the Best Case Editor, a new Editor button will appear in your task bar at the bottom of your screen. You can switch between documents by clicking on these buttons. 316 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Reset Window Positions (appears after you click Advanced) The Reset Window Positions button can be used when you have moved or resized any of the windows in Best Case Bankruptcy and don t know how to move them back to their original positions. Forms Font The Forms Font button allows you to select the data font used when printing the forms. Please note that: Your font choices are: The font selection is solely a matter of personal preference. Your court will accept any of the font choices. The font selection does not affect the creditor mailing matrix. Regardless of the font you select, the creditor mailing matrix will be printed in courier 10 pitch for courts that require it. The font selection only affects documents printed using the regular print method. Documents merged in your word processing software are not affected. Font selection only works when the Bypass Windows Printer Driver is NOT turned on. Arial Regular: The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog. Arial Bold: The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog. Arial Bold Italic: The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog. Courier New: The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog. To change the font: 1. Click on Setup in the main menu bar. Click on Preferences. 2. In the Preferences window, click the Forms Font button. 3. The Font Selection window appears. Click on your choice of fonts, then click OK. Other Advanced options are only to be changed on the advice of our technical support representatives. Attorney Compensation Statement Setup Through the Attorney Compensation Statement Setup screen, you can specify services related to the case that your fee covers, any services that your fee does not include, and whether the amount of the filing fee that has been paid prints on the compensation statement. Since most attorneys prefer to have standard answers to these questions for all cases, the Attorney Compensation Statement Setup screen refers to all cases, and does not need to be filled out for each case. You can, however, change your answers here at any time. Simpler format: If you prefer the shorter, simpler, non-customized attorney compensation form, you can select the Compensation Statement (Short Form) in the Jurisdiction Forms List. See page 298. After specifying your preferences for this form through the Setup Menu, then for each case that you add, you ll just need to fill in information that is more likely to vary with each client: the total amount of compensation promised, amount received, filing fee paid, source of compensation, and an explanation of any sharing of compensation. (These will be entered through the Compensation Statement entry screen; see page 104.) To access the Attorney Compensation Statement Setup: 1. From the Forms and Schedules Menu, press C-S-P then skip to step 4, or close any forms or schedules that are open, then close the Forms and Schedules Menu. 2. Close your Client List Window. 3. Click Setup in the main menu bar, then click System Preferences. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 317
4. Click the Compensation Statement button. 5. Highlight the appropriate chapter and click the Change button. The Attorney Compensation Statement Setup Window is divided into two tabs: the Basic Layout tab, pictured below, allows you to specify whether you want to show how much of the filing fee has been paid and to choose standard answers for what your fee includes. The Other Included/Excluded tab allows you to type in text to further specify what your fee includes and excludes. There is already standard text filled in here, but you ll want to review it and make modifications as necessary. The Basic Layout Tab of the Attorney Compensation Statement Setup Window If you want to list the amount of the filing fee that has been paid in the compensation statement, click in the check box labeled Show filing fee paid. The exclusion section refers to the paragraph on the printed form that reads In return for the above-disclosed fee, I have agreed to render legal services for all aspects of the bankruptcy case, including: a. Analysis of the debtor s financial situation, and rendering advice to the debtor in determining whether to file a petition in bankruptcy; b. Preparation and filing of any petition, schedules, statement of affairs and plan which may be required; c. Representation of the debtor at the meeting of creditors and confirmation hearing, and any adjourned hearings thereof; d. Representation of the debtor in adversary proceedings and other contested bankruptcy matters e. Reaffirmations* f. Redemptions* g. Other* You have the option of excluding any or all of the common answers listed above. Click in the checkbox next to the text of the common answer to exclude that portion. (By default, only section d is excluded.) *Sections e and f refer specifically to the custom compensation statement format that we have added for the Eastern District of Michigan. These items will not appear on the basic compensation statement that Best Case prints. If you are not in the Eastern District of Michigan but want to show that your fee includes reaffirmations and/or redemptions, you can always include this information in the Includes/Excludes tab, as described below. Click the Other Included/Excluded tab to specify other provisions included in fee and specifics of what your fee does not include, as pictured on the next page: Any answer that you type in the Other provisions under items included in fee box will appear on the printed form under the heading other. 318 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Any answer that you type in the block By agreement, fee does not include will print under the statement By agreement with the debtor(s), the above-disclosed fee does not include the following services. The Other Included/Excluded Tab of the Attorney Compensation Setup Window Other answers that appear on the Attorney Compensation Statement are entered through the Attorney Compensation Entry Screen, accessible from the Forms and Schedules Menu and described on page 104. Title of form: The title that prints on the form is Disclosure of Compensation of Attorney for Debtor(s). If you prefer a different title, such as Statement Pursuant to Rule 2016(b), see To Change the Title of a Form on page 300. Printing Preferences: A few printing preference exist for this form. See Compensation Statement of Attorney for Debtor(s) on page 104. AddressHelper * (Zip Code Lookup List) As you enter address information for debtors, creditors, codebtors, etc., you will enter the zip code first and AddressHelper will automatically fill in the city and state for you. In places where you also input the county, such as the Voluntary Petition, AddressHelper will fill in the county for you as well. Here s how it works: 1. When the AddressHelper is on, the cursor will skip the city and state fields and go straight from the last street address line to the zip code field. 2. You ll type the zip code (either 5 digits or 9) then press T. The city name and state will be filled in for you and the cursor will move to the next field. If you type in the five digit zip code, the four digit extension will appear on the screen as 0000 but will not print on the forms. Problem: AddressHelper filled in the wrong city name! Solution: Sometimes, a zip code is shared by several towns or cities. However, the United States Postal Service has one preferred city name for each 5-digit zip code, and this is the city name filled in by AddressHelper. You can leave the USPS s preferred city name in and the mail will get there. If you do want to change the city name for this entry, simply type over the city name which AddressHelper filled in. If you want this zip code associated with your city always, see Editing Zip Codes in the Zip Code Database below. You can turn the AddressHelper off in the Preferences section of the Setup Menu. See page 314. Editing Zip Codes in the Zip Code Database Through the Setup Menu, you can edit zip codes or add zip codes to the zip code database. To correct or edit an entry in the zip code database: 1. Close any forms and schedules that are open, then close the Forms and Schedules Menu. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 319
2. Close the Client List Window. 3. Click on Setup, then on Zip Code Lookup List. 4. The records appear in zip code order. Jump to the zip code you want to change by typing it, then click Change. 5. You can then change the city, state and/or county that are associated with this zip code. 6. Click OK after you have made your change. Note that editing the zip code database will not change client records that have already been entered. To add zip codes to the zip code database, follow steps 1-3 above, then click Insert. Enter the relevant information then click OK. Converting City and County Names to all Uppercase If you generally type all addresses in all uppercase, you might want to convert the addresses in the Zip Code Database to all caps. Note that this feature does not change any address data in client files. In the future, when you enter addresses, city names will appear in all caps but addresses that are already in the program will not be changed. Also note that you will want to convert addresses using this feature every time you reinstall Best Case Bankruptcy. Close any client files you have open then close the Client List Window. 1. Click Setup/Zip Code Lookup List. 2. Click the Uppercase Zips button. 3. At the pop-up message, click Yes. 4. Your city and county names will be converted to all uppercase. A pop-up message appears telling you that you will need to convert your zip codes each time you install Best Case Bankruptcy using this procedure. Click OK to acknowledge the message. *AddressHelper is a trademark of Best Case Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Macro Phrase List The macro feature in Best Case Bankruptcy allows you to save common phrases and copy them into text fields anywhere in the program with a few keystrokes. You can define up to 30 macros. To access your list of macros: 1. Close any schedules that are open, close the Forms and Schedules Menu, then close the Client List Window. 2. Click on Setup, then on Macro Phrase List. 3. Your list of macros appears. 4. To add a macro, click the Insert button. 5. The first question asks for the key you want assigned to the macro. You can use all keys 0 through 9, A through U except C. (C-c, v, W, X, Y and Z are reserved by Windows.) Click the down arrow for a list of choices. 6. Enter your key then press T. 320 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
7. In the next block, type the text that you want to appear when you use this macro. If you want data such as the debtor s name, address, social security number, or today s date, click the Data button and select the field you want. 8. If you want a space to be inserted after the text, put a checkmark in the box marked Add Trailing Space. 9. Click OK. To use a shortcut that you have already defined To insert the text of the macro in any text field, press C and the letter. To access your list of macros from entry screens, press C-S-M. Printing your list of macros To print your list of macros, access your macro list through the Setup Menu as described above, or by pressing C-S-M from any entry screen. Click the Print button to send the report to your printer, then click the button with the printer on it to send the report to your printer. Changing the Hotkey for Spell Check If you don t like using C-\ for Spell Check, you can assign any key + the Control key for spell check using the Keyboard Macro Phrase List. Just go into Setup/ Macro Phrase List, and click Insert. Type in the key that you want assigned to Spell Check, then, for the macro text, click the {Data} button. Click Perform Spell Check. Click OK. Your new key + C will activate the Spell Check feature. For more about Spell Check, see page 261. Common Text Blocks The Common Text Blocks List allows you to store re-usable chunks of text that you can quickly insert into data entry screens in Best Case or directly into documents in the Best Case Editor. It allows you to include common merge fields like the debtor's name address and Social Security Number in your text blocks, and it can be used to create a template entry screen where you can enter client-specific data into the text block. Some examples of how Common Text Blocks may be used include: Saving common property descriptions or Legal Comments; Creating text blocks for Motions or Orders not found in Best Case; or Saving other common paragraphs and descriptions that you use in the Attorney Compensation Statement, the Statement of Financial Affairs or any other form or schedule in Best Case. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 321
The Common Text Block List Accessing the Common Text Blocks: You can access the Common Text Block list from the Setup Menu in Best Case, from the data entry screens for any form or schedule or from the Best Case Editor. To access the Common Text Blocks from the Setup Menu: 1.) Close every open window in Best Case until you have a blank Best Case Screen in front of you. 2.) Then Select Setup>>Common Text Blocks in the Menu Bar at the top of the screen. To access the Common Text Blocks from a form or schedule: 1.) Open the data entry screen for an item in any form or Schedule (e.g. Open Schedule A, and then click Insert to add a new property) 2.) Place your cursor in the field where you want to add text. 3) Press Ctrl+Shift+B on your keyboard to open the Common Text Blocks List. To access the Common Text Blocks from the Best Case Editor: 1.) Open a document in the Best Case Editor. 2) Place your cursor at the position in the document where the text will be added. 3) Press Ctrl+Shift+B on your keyboard, or select Insert>>Common Text Block from the Menu Bar at the top of the screen. Creating a Standard Common Text Block To insert a Common Text Block: 1. Open the Common Text Blocks list as described above. 2. Click Insert. 3. Enter a name for your text block. 4. Enter the text you want to save. You can enter simple text, or click the Data Tokens button to insert commonly used information from the Voluntary Petition such as the debtor's name, address or Social Security Number. Additional User Input: If you need to collect additional user input, like an address or a phone number, you can use the Input Data Data Token to quickly add a text box or a drop-down menu to your Common Text Block. (See Creating an Updateable Common Text Block for more information.) 5. Select the Schedules and Forms where the text block will be used. Click the All button to make the text block available on all your Forms and Schedules, or select the specific form(s ) where it should appear. 6. Click OK to save your text block. Creating an Updateable Common Text Block In addition to standard phrases and static text, you can also create Common Text Blocks that rely on user input. To create a user input field: 1. Open the Common Text Blocks list as described above. 2. Click Insert. 3. Enter a name for your text block. 4. Enter any basic text you want to save. 5. Place your cursor where you want the input data to appear. 322 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
6. Click the {Data Token} button. 7. Select Input Data. 8. In the Input Data Definition window, type a name for the field (e.g. phone, or interest rate ). Then select the data type from the drop-down list. 9. If there is a common value that will be entered, you can enter it as the initial value, or you can leave this field blank. This will create text field where the user can enter data when he uses the Common Text Block. To create a drop-down list of values the user can select from, simply fill in the Initial Value field with the option most likely to be used, then fill any other values you want to choose from in the Additional Values fields. 10. Click OK to save your input field and return to the CommonText Block Entry Screen. 11. Select the Schedules and Forms where the text block will be used. Click the All button to make the text block available on all your Forms and Schedules, or select the specific form(s ) where it should appear. 12. Click OK to save your text block. Using a Common Text Block To Insert a Text Block into a Form or Schedule: 1. Open any data entry screen in Best Case. 2. Place your cursor in the field where you want the text block inserted. 3. Press Ctrl+Shift+B on your keyboard to access the Common Text Blocks. 4. Highlight the text block you want to insert. 5. Click Select. 6. Fill in any required data, and then click OK. If you are working in the Best Case Editor: 1. Open a document in the Best Case Editor. 2. Place your cursor at the position in the document where the text will be added. 3. Press Ctrl+Shift+B on your keyboard, or select Insert>>Common Text Block from the Menu Bar at the top of the screen. 4. Highlight the text block you want to insert. 5. Click Select. 6. Fill in any required data, and then click OK. Chapter 10 The Setup Menu 323
324 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 11 Common Questions and Troubleshooting In This Chapter How can I change the chapter of filing?... 326 How can I create a matrix on disk?... 326 Can I enter negative property values for Schedule B?... 326 What if there is no property of a given type for Schedule B?... 326 Whoops! I misspelled the debtor s name. How do I change it?... 326 How do I get a creditor alphabetized under his/her last name?... 327 How do I enter foreign addresses?... 327 Can I copy a creditor from a schedule to my Common Creditor List?... 327 Aside from the AddressFill List, is there a keyboard command to bring up the Common Creditor List?... 327 Is there a way to insert the debtor s name and/or address in places like the description of property?... 327 I m having trouble selecting exemption statutes. I m getting a message that says No exemption table is available.... 327 I want to change to Federal Exemptions, but that selection is grayed out.... 327 How can I make the section symbol?... 327 I have a debtor who is filing as an individual and, in a separate case, as a business. Do I need to retype all of the information?... 328 My court accepts/requires electronic filing. Can I create a PDF file with Best Case Bankruptcy?... 328 Chapter 11 Common Questions and Troubleshooting 325
Common Questions and Troubleshooting How can I change the chapter of filing? Changing the chapter of filing is quick and easy in Best Case Bankruptcy. Just go to the Forms and Schedules Menu, open the Voluntary Petition, click the Filing Information tab at the top of the window, then click on the appropriate chapter of filing. All information that you have entered will be retained. You may have new forms that appear on the Forms and Schedules Menu, or additional questions on some of the Official Forms. Alternatively, if you want to save the original client file separately, you can make a duplicate copy of the client file as described on page 279 then make changes to the second file, changing the chapter of filing and any other information. This way, you ll have two independent client files. If the chapter you want appears grayed out, you have purchased the chapter 7 only or the 7 & 13 package of Best Case Bankruptcy. For upgrade costs, call our customer service representatives at 800.492.8037. How can I create a matrix on disk? You can create a matrix on disk easily. See Creating an ASCII Text File of the Creditor Address Matrix on page 111 for instructions. To change formatting options for your matrices on disk, see page 304. If you are filing electronically, a text of the matrix is created when you click the ECFiling button. See Electronic Case Filing beginning on page 220. Can I enter negative property values for Schedule B? Schedule B asks for the debtor s assets including money in checking and savings accounts. Several users have asked how to enter a negative market value for an item on Schedule B when the debtor s checking account is overdrawn. Since Schedule A and B are specifically designed for positive property values, there is not a way to enter negative property values on these schedules. Since a negative asset is really a liability, we recommend that you list the negative balance of the checking account as a debt on one of the creditor schedules, such as Schedule F. You can also list the checking account on Schedule B with a $0 market value. Since the debtor has no money in the account, this property is not worth anything. You may want to note the negative balance in the description of property. What if there is no property of a given type for Schedule B? If there is no property of a given type, (for example, no cash on hand), do not insert any property of this type. If the property type is never selected, the None column will be marked automatically. Whoops! I misspelled the debtor s name. How do I change it? To change the way a debtor s name is listed on the forms: 1. From the Client List Window, double-click on the client. 2. At the Forms and Schedules Menu, double-click on the Voluntary Petition. 3. In the debtor tab, change the debtor s name, then click OK. All forms will be updated with the new name. Note that the Index As answer below the debtor s name refers to the way the client is listed in the Client List Window, and not to the way the debtor s name prints on the form. 326 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
How do I get a creditor alphabetized under his/her last name? Normally, creditors are alphabetized on the schedules based on the first word in the creditor name field. Albert Smith would appear under the A s, for example. To have the creditor appear under S, insert the tilde (~), found to the left of the number 1 on your keyboard, before the S. Make sure there is no space between the tilde and the S. The tilde won t print, but it will signal that the creditor should be alphabetized under S. This feature works on Schedules D, E, F, G, H, and the List of Equity Security Holders. How do I enter foreign addresses? Use the creditor name field and your street address fields for the street, city and postal code, if applicable. Type the country in ALL CAPS in the city field, then ignore the state and zip fields. If you follow this procedure, no comma will appear between the city and state on the printed forms. Although the zip code appears as 00000-0000 on the screen, it will not print out. Can I copy a creditor from a schedule to my Common Creditor List? Yes. Go the schedule (D, E or F) that lists the creditor, highlight the creditor, and click Change. In the entry screen that lists the creditor, press C-0. You ll get a message that the creditor has been added. (This works in the Additional Notice party screens also.) Alternatively, you ll see an Add to CCL check box that appears in the upper right corner of Schedules D, E and F. Put a check here then click OK to add this creditor to your Common Creditor List. An option in the Preferences section of your Setup Menu described on page 314 allows you to specify that you want all new creditors added to the Common Creditor List automatically. Aside from the AddressFill List, is there a keyboard command to bring up the Common Creditor List? Yes. Just press 0 from the name field wherever you see the Common Creditor List button. Is there a way to insert the debtor s name and/or address in places like the description of property? Yes. Use the macro feature described on page 320 to insert common phrases or the debtor s name and address. I m having trouble selecting exemption statutes. I m getting a message that says No exemption table is available. Close any entry screens that are open, close the Forms and Schedules Menu, then close the Client List Window. Click on Setup in the Main Menu bar, then on jurisdictions. Highlight the name of your jurisdiction and click Edit. In the state exemption table box, select your state from the drop-down list, then click OK. I want to change to Federal Exemptions, but that selection is grayed out. In Best Case Bankruptcy, the exemption election question appears in the bottom right hand corner of the filing information section of the Voluntary Petition. If the exemption election question appears grayed out, then a setting in the Jurisdictions portion of the Setup Menu specifies that the Federal exemptions are not permitted in this state. To change this section: To edit your jurisdiction file: with a client file open, close the Voluntary Petition and press C-S-J. Click in the box labeled Federal bankruptcy exemptions under 11 U.S.C. 522(d) permitted in this state then click OK. Open the Voluntary Petition and click the Filing Information tab. You can now change the exemption election question. How can I make the section symbol? This should work in most Windows programs, including Best Case Bankruptcy and your word processing software. Hold down A and, in the number keypad in the right side of your keyboard press 2 then press 1. Chapter 11 Common Questions and Troubleshooting 327
I have a debtor who is filing as an individual and, in a separate case, as a business. Do I need to retype all of the information? No. You can use the duplicate file feature described on page 278 to make a copy of the debtor s file. In the second file, change the entity to a business and make any other changes you need to, deleting or adding information. A separate feature allows you to export and import schedules D, E, F and/or G only. See Copying a Creditor Schedule from One Client to Another on page 286. My court accepts/requires electronic filing. Can I create a PDF file with Best Case Bankruptcy? Yes! See Electronic Case Filing on page 220. 328 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Buttons and Icons A p p e n d i x Main Toolbar Add a new client file. This will open the Creating New Client File window. Open an existing client file. Clicking here will take you to the Client List Window containing a list of bankruptcy clients entered in the database. Shortcut to open any of the last 9 files you worked on. Click to access the case notes for this client. The notes are for your reference. Print forms. This button is only accessible from the Forms and Schedules Menu. (See Printing Forms on page 188.) Starts the ECF Wizard to create files for upload. Use a standard calculator to perform calculations. Use the prorate calculator to convert to monthly amounts. Access on-line help screens. (Brings up the general help. The help button in the bottom right brings up context-sensitive help.) Access About Best Case Bankruptcy window, which lists your version, package, serial number, maintenance expiration date, data path, user path and, if a client file is open, the jurisdiction file associated with the open file and the client file name and location. Client List Window Open the Forms and Schedules Menu for the client highlighted in the Client List Window. Access Case Notes and File Setup Information for the highlighted client. You can change the status of a case, enter a follow-up date, add notes about the case, mark the case as needing attention, or change file set-up information. You can also print your notes. Add a client to the Client List Window. Make a duplicate copy of the highlighted client s file. Delete the entire file of the client highlighted on the Client List Screen. Add a filter to sort cases by follow-up date or with needs attention cases first, to display only open or only closed cases, or to print a report of all cases. (The default is to display all cases sorted alphabetically.) Close the Client List Window. Use when you want to access the Setup Menu. Index 329
Help about this window. (Context-sensitive help.) Forms and Schedules Menu Open the highlighted form or schedule to view, add, or edit data. Close the current menu or list. Create an attachment to the highlighted form. Opens the Electronic Case Filing Manager which allows you to view files and upload them to the court s web site. This button only appears if you have already created the files for electronic filing. List Screens Add an item to the list that is displayed. This will take you to a blank entry screen for the list on the screen. Edit the highlighted item. This button takes you to the entry screen with detailed information about the highlighted item filled in. Delete the highlighted item. Close the current menu or list. Move the highlighted creditor to one of the other 2 creditor schedules. Appears on the Summary Window for the Statement of Financial Affairs; click to view or edit the items entered for the highlighted question, or to add new answers. Appears in Schedule C allowing you to edit the property item on Schedule A or B from this screen. Appears in Schedule D allowing you to edit the property item on Schedule A or B from this screen Entry Screens, general buttons Takes you to the next tab listed at the top of the entry window. (Alternatively, you can click directly on the tab that you want to go to or press C-F to get to the next tab.) Exit the current window and save changes. Exit the current window without saving changes. Entry Screens, specific buttons In the Voluntary Petition, this button copies address information of the debtor to the joint debtor information screen. Browse a list of choices. 330 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Browse a list of state or federal exemption statutes. Access your Common Creditor List. Once you open the Common Creditor List, you can select, add, edit, or delete creditors. Browse a list of entry choices. Once you open the list, you can add to it, inserting your own common answers. Select from a drop-down list of entry choices. ECF Manager buttons Click to start OneTouch Plus electronic filing. Available for initial case filings only. Launches ECF Express, a tool that helps you electronically file post-petition documents, such as amendments and motions. Available immediately after a OneTouch filing. It connects you to the court s site, opens the payment page and enters stored credit card information for you. Opens a highlighted file so that you can review or print it. Copies the file path of the highlighted document to the clipboard. Faster than browsing for a file when uploading a single document to the court s site. Sends all of the files in the client s ECF Manager to the Recycling Bin. Opens Windows Explorer to the client s ECF Directory. Once here you can quickly send documents to a new folder or save them to a disk. Opens Windows Explorer to the My Documents Folder. Use in concert with the Explore button to quickly drag and drop documents between My Documents and the ECF Manager. Closes the ECF Manager. Opens the BestScan window which walks you through scanning a document, converting it to PDF format and saving it to the ECF Manager. Opens your web browser to the court Credit Report Manager buttons Takes you to a website where the debtor must answer a series of questions to verify his or her identity. Index 331
Sends the debtor s information to the credit report provider so that it can process the credit report request. Click the Download Reports button in the Credit Report Manager to download your client s credit report information to your computer. (Note that Credit Infonet users do not see this button.) Opens the Import window where you can view the credit report and begin importing creditors to the debtor s schedules. Opens a PDF version of the debts reported to Trans Union and Experian in Adobe Reader. Opens a web page containing data reported to Equifax but not the other two bureaus. (OCR users only.) Prints authorization forms for the debtor to sign if his identity can t be authenticated online. (Note that you should not fax the paperwork unless your report provider specifically instructs you to do so.) 332 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse B A p p e n d i x In some places, it might be more convenient for you to use the keyboard than the mouse, especially when working on a laptop, or you might be more comfortable using the keyboard. For that reason, there are alternatives to using the mouse in Best Case Bankruptcy as described below. Note that if you don t mind using the mouse, you don t need to remember the keyboard commands. You can also define your own custom keyboard macros for common phrases or for data such as the debtor s name, address and social security number. See Macro Phrase List on page 320. Hot Keys: Menu items, buttons, and check boxes that have one letter underlined can be activated by pressing A and the underlined letter. For example, to access the Setup Menu, which is listed as Setup, press A-S. To use the Filter/Report button, press A-R. In entry screens, you can jump to questions that have one letter underlined by pressing A and the underlined letter. Help: Press 1 at any time for context-sensitive help. In newer versions of Microsoft Windows Help, press E to exit the help file. In older versions, press A-4. Recent Cases: To open a recent case, press A-F for the File menu, R for recent cases, then press the number that corresponds to the desired case. (This is the keyboard equivalent of the Last button.) Notes: Press C-S-N to open the Notes window. Client List Window: In a blank screen, press C-O to open the Client List Window. Press C-Q to start the ECF Wizard. List Screens (including Client List Window and Forms and Schedules Menu and list screens for Schedules A-H) Open highlighted item in list: The R key is equivalent to double-clicking in places where one item in a list is highlighted. Use it to open a highlighted client s file, to open a highlighted form in the Forms and Schedules Menu, or to change a highlighted entry on the summary list windows for Schedules A-H. To select the client or item, use the t and b keys to highlight the item. Return to Previous screen: The E key takes you to the previous screen. (Equivalent to clicking Close.) Use it to move from the summary list window to the Forms and Schedules Menu, or the Forms and Schedules Menu to the Client List Window. Add new entry: The I key in the summary list windows for Schedules A-H opens a new data entry screen. (Equivalent to clicking the Insert button.) In the Client List Window, I starts a new client file. The D key in the summary list windows for Schedules A-H deletes the highlighted entry. (After pressing D, you ll get a window asking if you are sure you want to delete. Cancel is the default answer, so press T to move the focus to the OK button then press R.) Jump to next or previous schedule: In the list screens for Schedules A-H, C-N will take you to the next schedule and C-P will take you to the previous schedule. Jump to Schedules A-J: In the list screens for Schedules A-H, you can switch to a different schedule by pressing C-A through C-J. Jump to creditor record: In summary list windows for creditor Schedules D, E and F, jump to a creditor that you want to edit by beginning to type the creditor name. When the creditor is highlighted, press R to edit. Copy creditor to clipboard: In Schedules D-H, summary information about each entry appears in the bottom of the window. Highlight the name and address and press C-C to copy the creditor name and address to your clipboard. Index 333
Forms and Schedules Menu To open the Voluntary Petition, press 1. To open Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims, press 4. To open the Summary of Schedules, press 6. To open the Statement of Financial Affairs, press 7. To open the Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention, press 8. To open the Chapter 13 Plan Calculator, press 3. To open any of the Schedules, A-J press the corresponding letter, A, B, etc. Entry Screens - General Moving forward and back: Use T to move forward from field to field. Use S-T to move backward. AddressFill: AddressFill appears wherever your Common Creditor List is available. With this feature, you can choose a creditor from your Common Creditor List, or you can pick a creditor from Schedule D, E or F. When the correct creditor is highlighted, just press R to select. (If you want to pick from the list of Scheduled creditors, click the DEF tab or press 8 before beginning to type the creditor name.) AddressClipper: Use the AddressClipper feature, described on page 30, to copy and paste addresses within Best Case. Spell Check: Press C-\ to spell check a text field. Save entry: Press R in an entry screen to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Pressing R is identical to clicking OK except in long text fields where R inserts a line break. Exit without saving: The E key takes you to the previous screen. (Equivalent to clicking Cancel.) Use it to exit the entry screen if you don t want to save changes or haven t made changes. Move to next tab: To move to the next tab listed at the top of an entry screen, press C-T. To move to the previous tab, press C-S-T. (Tabs can also be accessed by pressing A and the underlined letter.) Activate Options: Options like the Unknown and Amended features that appear in property and creditor schedules can be activated by pressing A+[the underlined letter]. Add second new entry: When adding new items to a schedule, press A-R in an entry screen to save changes to this new item and get to a new entry screen. Tab to buttons: You do not need to use the mouse to activate buttons at the bottom of entry screens. Use the T key to move to the button that you want to press then press R. Multiple choice buttons: For multiple-choice buttons, such as those used in the New Client Information Window and the Statistical/Administrative section of the Voluntary Petition, use t and b to move between choices then press T to select your choice and move to the next question. Drop-down lists: In general, for drop-down lists where you cannot type an alternate answer (such as the priority type on Schedule E or property type on Schedule B), you can type the first letter of the answer you want to select the answer. If there are several answers that begin with the same letter, continue to press the letter until the answer you want appears then press T to select it. If you need to view the list, you can press the b key. For drop-down lists where you have the option of typing in a new answer or choosing from the list (such as the attorney name question on the Voluntary Petition), press the b key to view the list then press b again until your answer is highlighted. Press R to select the highlighted answer. Prorate Calculator: To access the single field prorate calculator, press * in dollar fields. Undo changes: To undo a change to a field, press C-Z. Highlight all text in field: If the cursor is at the beginning of a text field, press C-S-e to highlight all text in the field. If the cursor is at the end, press C-S-h. 334 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Cut, copy and paste: The general Windows cut, copy and paste commands work in Best Case: C-C to copy, C-X to cut and C-V to paste. Entry Screens - Specific Forms Property type: When adding a new item to Schedule B, you can type the number that corresponds to the property category instead of using the mouse to select from the drop-down list. For a double-digit category, such as 24, press 2 until you get to 24. (Press b if you need to see the list before typing the number.), Or, with the Sort box checked, press the first letter of the property type. List of Scheduled Creditors: In creditor schedules and relevant sections of the Statement of Financial Affairs, use 9 to access a list of all creditors already listed in the case. Exemption Statutes: Use 0 in Schedule C to pull up a list of exemption statutes while in the statute field, and a list of property in the property field. Nature of Lien: In Schedule D in the Nature of Lien field, press 0 to access a list of choices. Locate an answer already in the list by pressing b or by typing the first letter of your choice. Or, press I to add a new choice. Press R to copy the highlighted choice to the schedule. List of Property: In Schedule D for the description of property, press 0 to access a list of property already entered on A and B. Use the b to select your answer and R to copy it to the schedule. Consideration answer: In Schedules E and F, you can access your list of answers for consideration by pressing 0. Answers appear in alphabetical order. Press the first letter of the desired answer, then press R when the answer is highlighted. (If you have more than one answer that begins with that letter, press the letter again to go to the next answer before pressing R.) Type of Priority: For the type of priority in Schedule E, just type the first letter of the category (E=Extensions of Credit, W=Wages, A=Alimony, etc.) then press T to get to the next field. (Press b in the priority type field to view the list of choices.) List of Codebtors: Use 9 to access all codebtors in the codebtor section of Schedule H, and 9 to access a list of all creditors in the case in the creditor section of Schedule H. Last name of dependents: While in Schedule I entering dependents, press A-L to insert the debtor s last name or A-J to insert the joint debtor s last name. Index 335
C Windows is an operating environment that is used to run programs like your word processing software, database program, time and billing software, etc. For Users New to the Windows Environment What is Windows? Windows is NOT the name of your word processor. (Your word processor is probably a windows-based program. It may be WordPerfect for Windows or MS Word for Windows.) Windows-based programs To the user, there are two main differences between DOS-based and Windows-based programs: 1. The most obvious is the way the screen looks. With DOS programs, you use menus and keyboard commands to perform tasks. With Windows programs you use the mouse to click on buttons and icons on the screen. The Windows graphical interface is intended to make computer programs more user-friendly and simpler to use. 2. The second main difference is that the Windows environment allows you to have several programs running simultaneously. For example, you can have your word processor, a spreadsheet and the bankruptcy program running at the same time. Switching Between Programs in Windows The Mouse You can switch between open programs by pressing A-F. The Taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a button for each open program. Click on the button corresponding to the program you want to switch to. The mouse that you use to click on buttons and icons has at least two buttons on it. Unless otherwise specified, click means push the button on the left side of the mouse. If you need to use the right mouse button, you will be instructed to right-click. Generally, a task is performed with a single click, but in some cases you will doubleclick, (quickly click twice). For example, you double-click on icons to start programs. In Best Case Bankruptcy, you can double-click to open client files or forms on the Forms and Schedules Menu, or you can highlight the desired item and press R. Generally, you only double-click when you want to open something. For our users who are switching from DOS programs to Windows, or who find that using the mouse slows them down, a special section, Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse is included on page 333 of this manual. Terminology of Windows Screens Icons and buttons A p p e n d i x Icons are the pictures which appear on your desktop. Each of these is a shortcut to a particular software program. Double-click on an icon to start the program. Buttons (also called icons) are the pictures which appear inside programs. They represent shortcuts to specific tasks. Click once on a button to activate it. (For example, most programs have a button with a picture of a printer. Clicking the printer button allows you to print.) 336 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Toolbars, taskbars, menu bars, title bars and scroll bars Toolbar: A toolbar appears in each of your programs which contains a row of the most common buttons that you would use. (See diagram below.) In programs such as your word processing software, you can customize your toolbar with the buttons you personally use most frequently, and you may choose which toolbars to display. (For example, you can choose whether to display the ruler, status bar, etc.) You can often choose how large or small you want the buttons in the toolbar to be. The title bar has the name of the program or window in it, and often the name of the file you are working on, if applicable. Toolbars allow quick access to commands with the mouse. This ruler is a toolbar, too. This is a scroll bar, too. This is the thumb of the scroll bar. The menu bar appears just below the title bar. Scroll bars allow you to scroll down the page to see what s in the bottom of the window. Diagram of toolbars, title bars, scroll bars and menu bar in Word Title bars appear in the top of each window, giving you the name of the window. Title bars appear in the main window for each of your programs and in dialog boxes or specific screens within programs. Title bars are important because they tell you where you are within a program, what document you are working on, or what program you are in. If your machine uses the default Windows colors, title bars will appear in dark blue. In the dialog box below, Creating New Client File appears in the title bar: Creating New Client File window Scroll bars allow you to see part of an item which does not fit on the screen. To use a scroll bar, click the thumb and drag it up or down, (or left or right, if a horizontal scroll bar.) This is the thumb of the scroll bar. Index 337
A task bar appears at the bottom of your screen which has a button for each program that is running, as pictured below. If you don t have a taskbar, you can press C-E, go to settings and change the taskbar options so that it is displayed, (change to always on top ). The menu bar is the line just below the title bar which lists menu options, usually beginning with File and Edit. The menu bar is accessible with the mouse or the keyboard. Press A and the underlined letter to access a menu option. Getting Around in Windows Programs Learning how to get around in Windows programs is a bit like learning to drive a car with manual transmission: it may seem strange at first, but once you learn how to do it, you can change gears without thinking about it. The commands used in Windows-based programs are generally the same for all Windows programs as described below. Moving Between Fields In programs where you enter information into boxes called fields, the standard Windows command to move between fields is T and not R. (Move backwards by pressing S-T). In any given window, pressing R is the keyboard equivalent of clicking the OK button. This is true in Best Case Bankruptcy and it is also true for other Windows programs. For example, when you go to print a document in your word processor, you can press R at the Print dialog box or click OK to start printing. Double-clicking in a field highlights the information that is already there. If you start typing, the new information you type will replace the highlighted information. Single-clicking in a field places an insertion bar in the field. As you type, information to the left of the insertion bar stays put, information to the right moves to the right to make room for the new text. If you start to type with text highlighted, the highlighted text will be replaced. Windows-programs also use radio buttons and check boxes to help you enter information quickly. Radio buttons are generally used when you need to pick one answer from a list of answers: You can select your answer by clicking on it or by moving to it with the r key then pressing T. 338 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
To mark a check box, you can use the mouse to click in the box, or press A and the underlined letter; in the example below A-u. To remove the check mark, you do the same thing. Alternatively, you can press T until you get to the check box, then press s to mark it. Drop-down lists are also used in Windows programs. To select an item from a drop-down list, click on the m next to the field then click on your answer, or, with the list displayed start typing an answer that you know is in the list. When an item in a list has been successfully selected, it appears in the answer box highlighted, as the Northern District of Illinois does above. Index 339
Table of Forms D A p p e n d i x Chapter of Filing 7 11 13 Entity* I J C P I J C P I J Form 1. Voluntary Petition Exhibit A to Voluntary Petition (only required if the debtor is a corporation which has issued publicly traded equity securities or debt instruments) Exhibit C to Voluntary Petition (only required if the debtor answers Yes to the Exhibit C question regarding harmful property) Exhibit D to Voluntary Petition (required for all individual and joint filings) Form 3A. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments Form 3B. Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims Form 6. Summary of Schedules Schedule A - Real Property Schedule B - Personal Property Schedule C - Property Claimed as Exempt ** ** ** ** Schedule D - Creditors Holding Secured Claims Schedule E - Creditors Holding Unsecured Priority Claims Schedule F - Creditors Holding Unsecured Nonpriority Claims Schedule G - Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases Schedule H - Codebtors Schedule I - Current Income of Individual Debtors ** ** ** ** Schedule J - Current Expenditures of Individual Debtors ** ** ** ** Form 7 - Statement of Financial Affairs Form 8 - Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention Compensation Statement of Attorney for the Debtor Chapter 13 Plan List of Equity Security Holders Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number Form 22A. Statement of Current Monthly Income and Means Test Form 22B. Statement of Current Monthly Income (Ch. 11) Form 22C. Statement of Current Monthly Income and Calculation of Applicable Commitment Period and Disposable Income Corporate Ownership Statement * Entity: I = Individual, J = Joint, C = Corporation, P = Partnership 340 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
** Your local rules may vary as to which Official Forms should be filed for which type of case. For example, a few districts require that Schedules C, I and/or J be filed for corporations. The Jurisdiction Forms List section of Best Case Bankruptcy allows you to specify which forms should appear in the Forms and Schedules Menu. See page 298. Index 341
E A p p e n d i x Technical Details of Installation The following information is provided for those who may need it. Shared DLLs Required Installation of the Best Case Bankruptcy program disks places the following files in the C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory: 1. VBOA300.DLL 2. VBRUN300.DLL 3. CTL3DV2.DLL Our installation program will NOT overwrite an existing version of one of these files. They are only installed if they are not already there. A Word template file, BESTCASE.DOT is installed into the Word User Templates directory. If you are using Word97 or Word 2000, the template file is BEST97.DOT. (If you are using WordPerfect, and do not have a Word User Templates directory, the templates are not installed.) Additional DLLs are required only for Word97/Word 2000. These are: 1. CTL3D32.DLL 2. MSVCRT20.DLL 3. MSVCRT40.DLL 4. OLEPRO32.DLL 5. VB40032.DLL Again, no existing files will be replaced. The files are only installed if they are not present and if the installation program detects Word97 or Word 2000 on your computer. This means that if you upgrade to Word97 or Word 2000 after Best Case has been installed, you should reinstall Best Case in order to have the required DLLs added to your system. Registry Entries Best Case Bankruptcy makes no entries in the Windows registry. The practical consequence of this is that it is very easy to move the program from one location to another. For example, the program could be moved from a C: drive to an N: drive just by copying the entire C:\BESTCASE directory and all of its sub-directories. BESTCASE.INI Best Case Bankruptcy maintains an initialization file, BESTCASE.INI, in the Windows directory. This file contains settings of a temporary or non-critical nature, such as the positions and sizes of windows within the program. There are no user editable settings in this file. In the event that BESTCASE.INI is accidentally deleted or if the program is moved to a computer without a BESTCASE.INI file, the file will be recreated. 342 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Chapter 13 Plan Tutorial F A p p e n d i x Introduction: John and Nancy Taylor have one house in Naperville, Illinois and a summer home in Ferryville, Wisconsin. They each own a car, but they also have a motorcycle, a snowmobile, a washer, dryer, and flat screen television. John has fallen behind in his child support and skipped last year s tax payment. On top of all of this they have high interest credit card debt. The Taylors have decided to hire you to help them file for Bankruptcy. Follow the instructions below to see how easy it is to handle their case with Best Case. Creating a New Client and Setting up the Voluntary Petition. Create the Client File: 1. Open Best Case and click. 2. Set up a joint Chapter 13 filing for the Taylors. 3. Click. You will be brought to the Client List. 4. Double-click on the client you just created to open the list of Forms and Schedules. Filing Fee: The Taylors have paid half the filing fee upfront and will pay the rest of the filing fee through the plan. Follow the instructions below to enter this information. 1. Double-click the Voluntary Petition and select the Filing Information tab. 2. Since our fictional debtors have elected to pay half of the filing fee upfront and the other half throughout the life of the Chapter 13 Plan, click the Installments radio button in the Filing Fee section. 3. Set the jurisdiction to Central Illinois, which uses the Best Case standard plan. 4. Close the Voluntary Petition window and open the Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments. The Taylors have agreed to pay $75.00 toward the filing fee upfront and the rest through the Trustee, so enter the upfront portion in field labeled Payment # 1. Chapter 13 Plan Format: This tutorial is set-up for the Central District of Illinois, which uses the Best Case Standard Chapter 13 Plan. If you are in a jurisdiction with a custom plan, this tutorial serves as a general introduction. Consult your local Chapter 13 instructions for information specific to the custom plan. 5. Select the Balance to be paid through plan by Chapter 13 Trustee checkbox in the lower section of this window. 6. Click. Handling Claims: Best Case uses a classification system to determine how to calculate Chapter 13 Plans. Each claim that you needs to be classified appropriately in order for the calculations to be accurate. Class assignments are selected in the Chapter 13 Plan treatment tab, and they determine when a claim gets paid, whether or not it is paid inside or outside of the plan, how it gets paid (fixed payments or prorata), what percentage of the claim gets paid, and where it will be listed on the printed plan. For example, a claim classified as Secured, long term, outside plan (SLTO) would calculate as a secured claim with a regularly occurring payment that will not be paid through the Trustee and will continue beyond the life of the plan; whereas, a claim classified as Unsecured, general, nonpriority (UGEN) will calculate as an unsecured claim to be paid through the plan whose creditor might only receive a percentage of the full claim amount. This tutorial Index 343
highlights the most commonly used plan classes in Best Case. A list of all the treatment classes available in Best Case with their calculation information is available in the help file. Real Property. Primary Residences: The Taylors own a $320,000 3-bedroom house at: 1544 Main Street in Naperville, Illinois 60540. They still owe LaSalle Bank $290,000 at 7.9% interest on the mortgage. This amount includes a $7,000 arrearage (also at 7.9% interest). Their regular monthly payment is $1,200, and they will continue to make these payments to their bank, but they will pay the arrearage portion through the plan. To set this up in Best Case: 1. Double-click on Schedule A from the List of Forms and Schedules and click. 2. Enter the description, location and the Market Value of the property. 3. Select the Liens tab and click. 4. Enter the Creditor Name (LaSalle Bank), Street Address, and Claim Amount on this screen. 5. Click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 6. Secured Portion: Best Case automatically enters the Secured Amount of the claim, but you will have to specify the Interest Rate and monthly Payment in the Secured Portion without Arrears section of the 13 Plan Treatment tab. a. Use the Classification of Secured portion dropdown menu to classify this claim as Secured, long term, outside of plan since these mortgage payments will not be paid through the plan. b. Set the Interest Rate to 7.90 and the Payment to $1200. Note: When entering the Interest Rate do not to enter a percentage sign and do not carry the decimal further than two digits. 7. Arrearage Portion: Verify that the Classification of Arrearage Portion is set to Arrearage, paid prorata. a. Enter the Arrearage Amount and Arrearage Interest Rate. b. You will notice after entering the above information that Best Case automatically reduces the Secured Amount by the Arrearage amount. Click. NOTE: For the purposes of this tutorial, we will choose to Ignore the Form 22 Means Test warnings. For more information on calculating the Form 22 Means Test consult Chapter 4. 8. Click the Description tab. The house also has a $10,000 tax lien owed to the Du Page County Assessor s office. To enter the tax lien: 1. Click the Liens tab, and then click. 2. Enter the Creditor Name (Du Page County Assessor s Office), Address, and Claim Amount. 3. Click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 4. Verify that the lien is classified as Secured, paid prorata. 5. Click. Secondary Residence: 344 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
The Taylors own a second home at 6445 Backwater Ave. in Ferryville, Wisconsin worth $75,000. The property was originally worth $100,000 and purchased with a loan from LaSalle Bank, but this value has depreciated with flood damage. They still owe $80,000 on the house at 12% interest toward which they pay $800 monthly through the plan. Enter this information by following the instructions below: 1. Double-click on Schedule A from the List of Forms and Schedules and click. 2. Enter the description, location and the Market Value of the property. 3. Select the Liens tab and click. 4. Enter the Creditor Name, Street Address, and Claim Amount on this screen. 5. Assign treatment classes by clicking on the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 6. Enter the Secured Amount, Interest Rate, and Payment. 7. Classify this portion as Secured, long term, in plan. 8. Click. They took out a $20,000 second mortgage on the property with DiTech to pay for John s medical bills. This mortgage is now entirely unsecured and the Taylor s will attempt to void it. Enter the second mortgage by following the instructions below: 1. From the Liens tab, click. 2. Enter the Creditor Name, Street Address, and Claim Amount on this screen. 3. Assign treatment classes by clicking on the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 4. Classify this claim as Secured, Avoid Lien. 5. Click. Personal Property. Vehicle Secured Fixed Payment John Taylor owns a Honda Accord worth $10,000. He still owes Honda Finance $4000 at 8.7% interest. The monthly payment on the car is $349.25. He should be able to pay it off within the next 12 months. 1. Open Schedule B and click. 2. Change the Property Type to Automobiles, Trucks, Trailers and Other Vehicles. 3. Enter the Market Value as $10,000. 4. Select the Liens tab and click. 5. Enter the Creditor information and Claim Amount. 6. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 7. In this case the Secured portion of the debt should be classified as Secured, fixed payment. 8. Enter the Interest Rate, Term (12 Months), and Payment ($349.25). Index 345
Vehicle 910 Day 506 Not Applicable: Nine months ago Nancy purchased a brand new Mazda for $22,900 at 10% interest from Mazda Finance. She still owes the full purchase amount, but the car s market value has depreciated to $15,000. Because the car was purchased less than 910 days ago, it is not subject to valuation under 506, so Nancy must repay the full amount of the claim. In other words the full claim must be paid as secured despite the fact that the car is no longer worth this amount. 1. Open Schedule B and click. 2. Change the Property Type to 25. Automobiles, Trucks, Trailers and Other Vehicles. 3. Enter the Market Value as $15,000. 4. Select the Liens tab and click. 5. Enter the Creditor information and Claim Amount ($22,900). 6. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 7. In this case the Secured portion of the debt should be classified as Secured, fixed payment, 506 not applicable. 8. Enter the Interest Rate and Term. 9. Best Case will automatically calculate the unsecured portion of this claim $7900. Check the box that says Pay full claim as secured since 506 does not apply. The unsecured amount will be added automatically to the Secured amount. Secured Prorata (Washer and Dryer): The Taylors purchased washer and dryer from Sears 13 months ago for $2000 at 9% interest, but have not yet made their first payment. The market value on these appliances has since dropped to $1,600. Follow the instructions below to enter this claim. 1. From the list of Forms and Schedules double-click on Schedule B and click. 2. Select the Property Type, then enter the Description, Location and Market Value. Enter the Market Value as $1,600. 3. Click and then to enter the Lien. 4. Type in the Creditor Name and address. 5. Specify the Claim Amount in the lower right portion of the window (in this case, $2,000). 6. Click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. a. Classify the secured portion of this claim as Secured, paid prorata. b. Enter the interest rate. 7. Click. Secured Fixed Payment (Flat Screen Television): The Taylors owe $700 on a $2,000 flat screen television purchased from Best Buy. They have kept up with their payments of $50 per month at 11% interest and will continue these payments throughout the life of the plan. 1. From the list of Forms and Schedules double-click on Schedule B and click. 2. Set the Type of Property to 4. Household Goods and Furnishings, and enter the Description and Location of the property. Enter the Market Value as $2,000. 3. Click and then to enter the Lien. 4. Type in the Creditor Name and address. 5. Specify the Claim Amount in the lower right portion of the window (in this case, $700). 6. Click the 13 Plan Treatment tab. a. Classify this claim as Secured, fixed payment. b. Enter the monthly payment as $50.00 346 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
c. Enter the term as 16 months. d. Enter the Interest Rate at 11%. 7. Click. Secured Surrender Property: John bought a Honda Shadow motorcycle from Cycle City for $4,500, but he has only paid $500 and has agreed to surrender the vehicle in exchange for forgiveness on the debt. Enter this information by following the instructions below. 1. Open Schedule B from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click. 3. Set the Property Type to Automobiles, Trucks, Trailers and Other Vehicles, and enter the Market Value as $4000. 4. Select the Liens tab and click. 5. Enter the Creditor information and Claim Amount ($4000). 6. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 7. Classify this claim as Secured, surrender property. 8. Click. Unsecured Priority Debts Unsecured Priority Debts (Domestic support obligations and taxes) Note: Best Case automatically classifies anything entered into Schedule E as Unsecured priority (UPR). Use the dropdown menu to select a different classification when appropriate. John and Nancy have not paid last years taxes. They owe $5000. Follow the instructions below to enter this claim: 1. Double-click on Schedule E from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click. 3. Set the Type of Priority to Taxes and certain other debts. 4. Enter the Creditor Name as IRS, and enter the Claim Amount ($5000). 5. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 6. Classify this claim as Unsecured, priority. 7. Click. John Taylor is required to make monthly child support payments of $800 per month, but has fallen into arrears and now owes $4,000. Regular payments will be made directly to child s mother, but the arrearage portion will be paid through the plan. To cure the arrearage through the plan: 1. Double-click on Schedule E from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click. 3. Set the Type of Priority to Domestic support obligations. 4. Enter the Creditor Name as Minor Child. 5. Enter the Claim Amount ($4000). 6. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 7. Set the Classification of Priority Claim field to Domestic Support Obligation 507(a)(1)(A). 8. Click. Unsecured Nonpriority Debts. Note: Best Case automatically classifies anything entered into Schedule F as Unsecured General Nonpriority (UGEN). Use the dropdown menu to select a different classification when appropriate. Unsecured Debt (Student Loans): John still owes $9000 at 5% interest to Student Lending Services for student loans on which his father cosigned. Follow the instructions below to enter this information: Index 347
1. Double click on Schedule F from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click. 3. Enter the Creditor Name and Claim Amount. 4. Select the radio button labeled Student Loan (8) in the PND Statistics 28 USC 159 box to include this claim in the Statistical Summary. 5. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 6. This claim should be classified as Unsecured, special class, paid 100%. 7. Click. Unsecured Debt (Credit Cards): The Taylors have three outstanding debts on credit cards: Visa - $5,000 Mastercard - $2,500 Discover - $2,500 Follow the instructions below to enter each of these claims. 1. Double click on Schedule F from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click. 3. Enter the Creditor Name and Claim Amount. 4. Select the 13 Plan Treatment tab. 5. Verify that the Unsecured Portion is classified as UGEN, Unsecured General Nonpriority. 6. Click. Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases Leased Vehicle to be Assumed (Snowmobile): John and Nancy lease a snowmobile for $200 a month which they need to get back and forth from the road to their cottage in the winter. They want to assume this lease. Enter this information by following the instructions below. 1. Open Schedule G from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Click. 3. Enter the Creditor Information. 4. Enter the Description of Contract or Lease and Nature of Debtor s Interest in the textbox provided. 5. Select the radio button marked Assume in the Intention box. 6. Click. Calculating the Chapter 13 Plan Once all of the client data has been entered into the various schedules you will need to calculate the Chapter 13 Plan. The Taylors have agreed to allow you to calculate a plan based on their monthly income. After calculating their cash flow, you see that they will be able to pay $2,500 a month into the plan. Follow the instructions below to calculate the plan: 1. Open the Chapter 13 Plan from the list of Forms and Schedules. 2. Enter the Payment as $2,500.00 on the Summary tab of the 13 plan calculator. 3. Place a question mark? in the # of Months field. You will notice a new box appears in the lower middle portion of the window labeled Pay unsecured non-priority claims. 4. Best Case will automatically calculate the percentage paid to Unsecured, non-priority creditors. 5. Click the Calculate button. 6. Best Case automatically calculates the term of the plan at 60 months and pays of 47% of the Unsecured General Nonpriority debt. 348 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Using the Year-to-Date Subtraction Method to Calculate the Debtor s Gross Income G A p p e n d i x Form 22 requires the debtor's average monthly income over the six months preceding the month in which the debtor is filing. No matter how much the debtor's income may fluctuate from month to month all you just need to know t the total amount that the debtor earned during the six-month look-back period. Using the year-to-date subtraction method in the CMI Calculator you can determine the debtor's total six-month income by entering as few as two numbers. The first step is to enter the debtor's total year-to-date income at the end of the six-month look-back period. Next, you will enter the debtor's year-to-date income from the start of the look-back period. The CMI Calculator then takes the ending income and subtracts from it the starting income. The result of this calculation is the debtor's total gross income for the six-months in the look-back period. The total income is then divided by six to produce the average monthly income that prints on Form 22. If the debtor's expected filing date is June 30 or earlier, his look-back period extends into the previous year, and this adds an extra step to the year-to-date subtraction method. Because the debtor's year-to-date income totals reset on the first of the year, it is no longer possible to simply subtract the year-to-date income at the start of the period from the ending year-to-date income, so instead the CMI Calculator splits the year-to-date Calculation into two parts, last year and this year. In the first part of the calculation, you will enter the debtor's year-to-date income from the start of the six-month period and his total year-end-income from the last income statement he received in the previous year. The Calculator then subtracts the debtor's year-end income from his starting income to determine how much the debtor earned during last year's portion of the look-back period. Next, the CMI Calculator helps you to determine the total year-to-date income the debtor earned during this year's portion of the look-back period. Because the debtor's income reset to $0.00 on January 1st, all you need to enter to determine this year's income is the debtor's year-to-date income from the last income statement he received during the look-back period. The CMI Calculator then adds the year-to-date total from last year to the year-to-date total for this year. The total of the two incomes is then divided by six to produce the average monthly income that prints on Form 22. The following example cases are designed to provide a few simple illustrations of how the year-to-date subtraction method might be applied. Example 1 The debtor s six-month look-back period does not extend back into the previous year Basic Info: Debtor A will be filing on September 15 and has all of his pay stubs for the entire year. He works fulltime as an elementary school teacher. Figuring Out the Gross Income: Based on the anticipated filing date of September 15, you know that the look-back period runs from March 1 to August 31. Check A: Debtor A gets paid on the 1st and the 15th of each month, so the last paycheck he received during the 6 month look-back period came on August 15. On his August 15th pay stub, his gross year to date income was Index 349
$26,667. Enter August 15 for the date of Check A and 26,667 for the YTD Income amount. Check B: The last check that Debtor A received prior to the start of the 6-month look-back period came on February 15th. At that date, his year-to-date gross income was $5,000. Enter February 15 for the date of Check B and 5,000 for the YTD Income amount. YTD Difference (A-B): The next step is to use the data for Check A and Check B to determine what Debtor A s gross income from March 1 to August 31. This is done by taking the year-to-date gross income from Check A ($26,667) and subtracting from it the year-to-date gross from Check B ($5,000) which equals a total gross income of $21,667 earned during the six month period ending August 31. This number is then divided by 6 to yield an average gross monthly income of $3,611.17. Example 2 The debtor s six-month period extends back into the previous year Basic Info: Debtor B has an anticipated filing date of April 15 and all of his pay stubs. He works as a help desk operator for a small software company. Calculating the Gross Income: The anticipated filing date of April 15 means that Debtor B s 6-month period for calculating the current monthly income starts on October 1 of last year and continues until March 31 of this year. Because the look-back period spans two different years, Debtor B s year-to-date totals reset on January 1, so you need to determine what his gross income was for September through December of last year separately from his gross income for January and February of this year. To do this you will need to enter the year-to-date information from three different pay statements: Check A: In order to determine Debtor B s total gross income for the October-December period, you first need to enter in his YTD gross from his last paycheck of the year. In Debtor B s case, his final gross income was $35,000. Check B: Debtor B s last paycheck before the 6-month period for calculating his CMI began came on September 22, and his YTD Gross at that point was $26,250. YTD Difference: By taking the $35,000 total gross income the Debtor B had last year, and subtracting from it the $26,250 he earned from January through September, the CMI Calculator determines that Debtor B had a gross income of $8,750 from October through December. Check C: Since Debtor B s income as of January 1 is $0.00, the only number you need to determine his gross income for January through March is the year-to-date gross from the last paycheck he received in March. In Debtor B s case, his March 31 paycheck shows a year-to-date gross of $8,750. Total Income/ Average Monthly Income: To calculate the Debtor s six-month gross income, the CMI Calculator takes Debtor B s gross income from October through December ($8,750) and adds it to the gross income from January through March ($8750). This results in a total gross income of $17,500. This number is then divided by six, giving Debtor B an average monthly income of $2,916. Example 3 - The debtor owns a rental property and has a six-month look-back period that extends into the previous year. Basic Info: Debtor C owns a two family rental property on Main Street. He uses financial management software which produces a monthly statement of his income and expenses at the end of each month. The anticipated filing date of March 15 means that Debtor C s 6-month period for calculating the current monthly income starts on 350 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
September 1 of last year and continues until February 28 of this year. Because the look back period spans two different years, you will need to enter 3 different amounts to determine his gross income. Calculating the Gross Income: The anticipated filing date of March 15 means that Debtor C s 6-month period for calculating the current monthly income starts on September 1 of last year and continues until February 28 of this year. In order to compute his average income using the year-to-date subtraction method, you will need to enter the income and expenses from 3 different financial statements: Financial A: Because the 6-month period for computing Debtor C s income spans two different years, the first thing you need to do is determine his gross income for September through December of last year. So for Financial A, you will enter the yearto-date income and expenses from Debtor C s December statement which shows that last year, the total gross income on the property was $17,600 with $12,000 in expenses. Financial B: According to Debtor C s statement for August of last year the year-to-date income on the property was $11,200 with $8,000 in expenses. YTD Difference: Looking at the data for September through December, The CMI Calculator takes the yearto-date income from Financial A ($17,600) and subtracts from it the year-to-date income from Financial B ($11,200). Next, the Calculator takes the total expenses from Financial A ($12,000) and subtracts from that the expenses from Financial B ($8,000). The two calculations yield a gross income of $6,400 and total expenses of $4,000, or a net income of $2,400. Financial C: In order to determine what Debtor C s year-to-date income and expenses are for the January and February portion of the 6-month period, you will use the financial statement for February of this year. The February statement shows that, thus far, Debtor C has taken in $3,200 in rent and has encountered $1,500 in various expenses. These numbers indicate that for January and February Debtor C has a net year-to-date income of $1,700 on the property. (Note that because the year-to-date gross as of January 1 will always be $0.00, you do not need to enter a starting income to calculate this portion of Debtor C s income.) Total Income/ Average Monthly Income: To determine Debtor C s Total Income for the 6-month period and the Average Monthly Income to include on the Means Test, the CMI Calculator takes the YTD Net income from September through December ($2,400) and adds to that the $1,700 YTD net income for January and February. This produces a $4,100 net income on the property for the 6-month period, which translates to an average monthly income of $683.33. (Note that the Calculator will also calculate the average monthly gross income and expenses and enter those in the proper places on Form 22 as well.) Index 351
BestScan for Attachments or BestScan in the ECF Manager? A quick guide for determining which path to use: Document to Scan Situation BestScan to Use Name for File or Attachment Cert. of Credit Counseling (Primary Debtor.) Cert. of Credit Counseling (Primary Debtor) Cert. of Credit Counseling (Joint Debtor) Cert. of Credit Counseling (Joint Debtor) Certificate of Credit Counseling: Debtor/Joint Debtor combined Filed as a separate PDF ECF Manager CCC.PDF or CCC1.PDF Notes: H A p p e n d i x Attached to Exhibit D Scanned Attachment Attach Document to Debtor s Exhibit D. Filed as a Separate PDF ECF Manager CCC2.PDF Attached to Exhibit D Scanned Attachment Attach to Joint Debtor s Exhibit D Combined - Filed as one PDF file Debtor Pay Advices Filed as Separate PDF ECF Manager Paystubs.PDF, or ECF Manager CCC.PDF Scan both Certificates at the same time using the Scan Paystubs1.PDF Joint Debtor Pay Advices Filed as separate PDF ECF Manager Paystubs2.PDF Debtor Pay Advices Attached to Coversheet* Scanned Attachment Multiple Pages feature in BestScan to create one PDF Joint Debtor Pay Advices Attached to Coversheet Scanned Attachment Some districts have separate coversheets for Debtor and Debtor and Joint Debtor Pay Advices combined F. 21. Statement of Social Security Number file. Joint Debtor. Be sure to attach to Joint Debtor Coversheet if available Combined - Filed as one PDF ECF Manager Paystubs.PDF Use Scan Multiple Pages feature to scan all pay advices Filed as separate PDF - Physical signature req d Declaration Re: ECF Filed as separate PDF - Physical signature req d Dec. Re: ECF: FL-SOU only Filed as separate PDF - Physical signature req d Dec. Re: ECF: CA-CEN only Inserted into Petition.PDF - Atty Fee Application: AL- NOR only Electronic Signature Declaration: MN only F 7. Statement of Intent: NM only Cert. of Financial Management Deed to House or Car/ Description of Property Physical signature req d Filed as separate PDF - Physical signature req d Filed as separate PDF - Physical signature req d Filed as separate PDF - Physical signature req d Attached to Form 23 Attached to Schedules Tax Return Attached to Schedules or 13 Plan ECF Manager SSNStatement.PDF for both filers, and save as one PDF. (Note that court limit for document size is 2.0MB. If Doc is too big split into two and name second file Paystubs2.PDF) ECF Manager Declaration.PDF Applies to all districts where scanned Declaration is ECF Manager Scanned Attachment DecRe.PDF Electronic Filing Declaration required except CA-CEN and FL-SOU Attach to the Voluntary Petition. Select Prints After Form. ECF Manager FeeApp.PDF Only required in Northern District of Alabama ECF Manager SignDec.PDF Only required in District of Minnesota ECF Manager Intent.PDF Only required in District of New Mexico Scanned Attachment Scanned Attachment Scanned Attachment * Best Case contains custom payment advices coversheets for several local districts. For all other districts there is a generic coversheet available in the Supplemental forms folder. Consult Filing Payment Advices with OneTouch in the help file to see if there is a coversheet available for your district and for special instructions on preparing local coversheets. 352 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Index A Access tips on exporting from other applications, 286 Access data. See Creditor Import and Export Account number masking, 192 Adding a New Client, 24 Adding forms. See Additional Documents Library Adding items to list screens, 53 Adding names other than creditors to the matrix, 111 Additional Documents Library, 208 20, 208 20, 208 20 adding a document to, 211 changing documents, 211 merge codes for adding documents, 213 merging several creditors into a form, 210 printing documents, 209 Additional Notice Parties, 111 associating with a creditor in the Common Creditor List, 71 entering through Schedule D, 80 entering through Schedule E, 85 entering through Schedule F, 88 include in schedules, 308 AddressClipper, 30 Addresses Copying and pasting. See AddressClipper AddressFill, 70, 262 turning off or on, 263 AddressHelper, 321 converting city names to uppercase, 322 turning on/off, 317 Adobe Acrobat, 241 Adversary Proceeding Cover Sheet, 118 Alimony. See Schedule E Priority Claims Alphabetizing Creditors by last name, 70 Amending a form or petition for electronic filing, 239 Amending a Form or Petition, 199 clearing all amended checkboxes, 200 Amendment Cover Sheet. See Supplemental Forms Folder Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee. See Form 3B Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments. See Form 3A. Application/Order for Fees. See Supplemental Forms Folder Archiving data files backup and restore, 275 ASCII file copying the creditor address matrix to diskette, 113 importing to a creditor schedule, 282 Assets. See Schedule A and Schedule B Attachments creating, 200 replacing a form with an attachment you create, 203 Attorney code in upper right for Eastern New York, 308 Attorney Compensation Statement. See Compensation Statement of Attorney Attorney Names entering choices, 297 entering through Setup Wizard, 20 including state bar number, 297 option to print on first page of petition, 309 Attorneys representing creditors. See Additional Notice Parties Auto-calc on Voluntary Petition, 39 Automatic stay. See Additional Documents Library B Backing up data files, 275 Best Case Editor, 204 creating a PDF from, 198 Blank Forms printing, 199 Bookmarks created automatically in PDFs, 236 Business Income and Expenses form in the Supplemental Forms Folder, 120 Buttons and Icons, 331 C Calculator, 282 Calendar Date Picker in Case Notes, 265 Caption (Generic). See Supplemental Forms Folder Case Dates and Filing Information, 267 Case Management. See Case Status, Notes and Filing Information and Case Dates Case Notes accessing from any screen, 264 adding comments and notes, 266 Case Number adding, changing, deleting, 268 Case Status, 264 changing, 265 Certificate of Service. See Supplemental Forms Folder Certification Concerning Financial Management, 117 Certification of Non-Attorney Petition Preparer print, 309 Changing the chapter of filing, 267 Changing the type of debtor, 267 Chapter 13 Plan change frequency of payments. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options enter monthly payment on Schedule J, 98 include liquidation analysis. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options include plan summary and analysis. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options insert text about wage deduction if none. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options list secured creditors before priority. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options other provisions, 179 print monthly payment for arrears. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options print pro rata instead of cents to unsecured. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options printing collateral descriptions, 179 printing options, 179 printing summary data, 172 Index 353
remove debtor's signature line. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options remove language about attorney's fee. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options show descriptions of collateral. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options specify permanent text for other provisions. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options trustee's fee statement. See Chapter 13 Plan: printing options Chapter 13 Plan Calculator changing the default classification, 185 changing the trustee s fee, 185 Claims Tab, 173 Common Questions, 181 Editing Classification Treatments, 186 Entering Attorney s Fee or Filing Fee, 173 if you know how much debtor can pay, 170 if you want to find the minimum payment, 170 Introduction, 160 Liquidation Analysis, 175 lump sum payments, 170 Other tab, 179 Payout Schedule Tab, 174 printing the payout schedule, 174 Setup Options, 179 specifying treatment of leases/contracts, 89 Split Claims Tab, 176 Step Plans, 171 Summary Tab, 169 suspending interest accrual until attorney s fee is paid, 185 Treatment classes, 166 Treatment of Schedule D Claims, 161 Treatment of Schedule E Claims, 164 Treatment of Schedule F Claims, 165 Troubleshooting, 182 tutorial, 345 Wage Deduction Tab, 177 Working out a plan, 169 Working out a repayment schedule, 168 Chapter of Filing changing, 267 Check for Update, 293 Checklist of Forms to File, 121, See Supplemental Forms Folder Child Support. See Schedule E. Priority Claims City names converting to uppercase in AddressHelper, 322 Client File add new client, 24 making a duplicate, 281 making a template, 282 opening an existing file, 26 search for client file, 270 Client files backup and restore, 275 dragging and dropping into Best Case, 273 printing reports, 271 restoring deleted, 277 sorting the client list, 269 Client files not appearing. See Rebuilding the Client List Client letters. See Additional Documents Library Client List Window, 12, 24 adding a new client, 24 changing the way a client is listed, 266 filter, 269 opening an existing client file, 26 print list of clients, 271 right click for file options, 269 search for client file, 270 sort order, 269 Client notes, 264 printing, 272 Client Questionnaire, 124 Clients print client summary sheet, 272 print list of clients, 271 print report of number of cases by chapter, year, 271 search for client name, 270 CMI Calculator, 137 YTD method examples, 351 Codebtor List, 79 Codebtors. See Schedule H entering through Schedule D, 79 entering through Schedule E, 84 entering through Schedule F, 88 Collection Agencies. See Additional Notice Parties and Schedules D, E and F Collier s TopForm importing common creditor information, 279 Common Creditor List accessing, 71 add all new creditors, 318 adding a creditor, 71 adding contact information for a creditor, 71 adding notes about a creditor, 71 associating an additional notice party with a creditor, 71 combining from multiple machines, 281 combining two lists. See exporting and importing default consideration, 71 importing and exporting, 279 in AddressFill, 262 Printing, 72 use for common employers, 93 Common Text Blocks, 323 accessing, 324 adding, 324 using, 325 Community property states, 299 Compensation Statement of Attorney for Debtor(s), 106 customizing your statement, 319 Consideration on Schedules E and F default for a common creditor, 71 Contact information for common creditors, 71 Contracts. See Schedule G Converting chapter 7 to 13 or 13 to 7, 267 Converting Text to CSV for Import, 288 Copy copy, cut and paste, 31 Copy and Paste a creditor name and address, 73 Copying a client file (making a duplicate), 281 Copying a Client File From a Diskette to Your Computer, 273 Copying a creditor schedule from one client file to another, 288 Copying and pasting addresses. See AddressClipper Copying creditors from one schedule to another, 278 354 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
Copying Property Schedules from One Client to Another, 289 Copying the Creditor Address Matrix to a Diskette, 113 Corporate Ownership Statement (Rule 7007.1), 115 Corporate Resolution. See Supplemental Forms Folder Credit Card validation disabling, 318 Credit Counseling Certification, 255 Filing Electronically, 257 ordering through Best Case, 255 Credit Infonet importing data from credit reports, 246 Credit Reports configuring the Credit Report Manager, 249 importing data to Best Case from reports, 246 providers and overview, 246 Creditor Address Matrix, 110 adding names other than creditors, 111 adding other parties to, 80 copying to a diskette, 113 disk file formatting options, 306 disk file name, 306 exclude creditor from, 73 formatting, 303 of creditors holding 20 largest claims, 50 possible duplicates screen, 110 print verification, 109 specify name of matrix on disk, 307 view/edit matrix on disk, 113 Creditor Forms Involuntary Petition and Proof of Claim, 125 Creditor Import and Export, 282 converting text to CSV format for import, 288 tips about the data format, 285 Creditor Letter - Notice of Filing/ Automatic Stay, 121 Creditor Mailing List. See Creditor Address Matrix Creditors alphabetizing by last name, 70 Common Creditor List feature, 70 copying creditor information to the Statement of Financial Affairs, 101 copying from one client file to another, 288 copying from one schedule to another, 278 deleting all on a schedule, 287 entering information. See Schedules D, E and F exclude from matrix, 73 holding 20 largest unsecured claims, 48 including additional notice parties on schedules, 308 jumping to a creditor in the list, 72 make dummy creditor (exclude from Schedule), 74 moving from one schedule to another, 278 number creditors on Schedules D E and F, 308 print numbered list of all creditors, 114 tools and shortcuts available in Schedules D, E and F, 70 CSV format. See Creditor Import and Export and Common Creditor List import Current Monthly Income Calculator. See CMI Calculator Customer Support, 16 Customized forms/letters. See Additional Documents Library Cut and Paste, 31 D Data files backup and restore, 275 Date insert using Macro Phrase List, 322 Date Picker in Case Notes, 265 Dates and filing information, 267 Debtor filing as business and individual, 330 Debtor Education, 255 filing Form 23 electronically, 260 ordering through Best Case, 255 Debtor Information phone number, etc., 266 Debtor not represented by attorney, 37 Debtor s address insert using Macro Phrase List, 322 Debtor s name changing, 328 insert using Macro Phrase List, 322 Declaration Concerning Debtor s Schedules, 99 Declaration of Compliance with Rule 9009, 121 Deleted client files restoring, 277 Deleting all creditors, 287 Deleting Items on a List Screen, 54 Deleting items on schedules, 54 Dependents, 93 Designation of Agent, 122 Disable credit card validation on Schedule F, 318 Discharge of Debtor. See Supplemental Forms Folder Districts. See Jurisdictions docket number adding, changing or deleting, 268 Drag and drop client files, 273 Due Diligence, Credit Counseling and Debtor Education, 255 filing electronically, 257 ordering through Best Case, 255 Dummy Creditors, 74 Duplicating a client file, 281 E ECF Manager, 229 Prior Filings tab, 231, 233 Editing documents through Best Case Editor, 204 Editing Forms in Your Word Processor, 217 Editing Items Appearing on List Screens, 53 Electronic Filing, 222 amended creditor address matrix, 242 amending forms, 239 assigning judge and trustee, 228 changing default file location, 243 changing the court office code, 242 copying ECF files to removable drive or floppy disk, 242 creating a CD of electronic files to take to the court, 242 creating a PDF from the Best Case Editor, 198 creating motions, 235 disabling firewalls, 243 ECF login and password, 241 ECF Manager options, 229 FAQ, 241 filing an amended document, 239 incorporating PDF documents created in other applications using PDF attachments, 237 Index 355
OneTouch System, 222 options, 232 paying filing fees, 228 PDF bookmarks, 236 prior filings (viewing), 231, 233 quick tutorial, 222 Setup Menu, 310 signatures handled by Best Case, 241 system requirements, 244 training site. See OneTouch System troubleshooting, 243 unable to connect to court, 243 uploading files manually, 231 using Adobe to combine multiple PDFs, 242 E-mail address of attorney. See Law Firm Information Emailing client files, 274 Emergency filings, 50 Entering Information, 24 Entering Information, Tips on, 28 Entering Unlock Information, 18 Entry screen, 52 Envelopes for creditors. See Additional Documents Library Equity Security Holders entering, 108 Excel tips on exporting from other applications, 286 Excel data. See Creditor Import and Export Exclude creditor from matrix, 73 Exclude Creditor from Schedule D, E or F, 74 Exempt property claimed as. See Schedule C. Property Claimed as Exempt Exemption Election 522 Exemption Analyzer, 40 based on debtor s state of residence, 300 choosing between state and federal, 36 Exemption Statutes as they appear in pop-up list, 64 default to federal for new cases, 300 editing and printing, 314 no exemption table available message, 329 restoring defaults, 316 review before entering first case, 22 Exemptions entering through Schedule A or B. See Schedule A: entering exemption and lien information Exhibit "C" to Voluntary Petition, 42 Exhibit "D" tovoluntary Petition, 43 Exhibit A to Voluntary Petition, 41 Exhibit D tovoluntary Petition, 43 Exporting creditor data. See Creditor Import and Export Exporting Property Schedules, 289 F Files backup and restore, 275 Client File Status, 265 sorting client files, 269 Filing fee application for waiver, 45 application to pay in installments, 43 Filing Fees paying on-line for ECF, 228 Filter, 269 Financial Interest Disclosure. See Corporate Ownership Statement Firewalls disabling for ECF, 243 Firm information, 297 Follow-up Date adding/changing, 265 Font selection, 317 Foreign Addresses, 329 Form 1.. See Voluntary Petition Form 21. Statement of Social Security Number, 115 Form 22. See Means Test Calculator Form 23 Certification Concerning Financial Management, 117 filing electronically, 260 Form 3. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments cash only line, 309 print order approving on same page, 309 Form 3A. Application to Pay Filing Fee in Installments, 43 Form 3B. Application for Waiver of the Filing Fee, 45 Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims, 48 creditors who are insiders, 49 editing the form, 50 matrix of, 50 print sorted by amount rather than name, 309 Form 7. Statement of Financial Affairs, 99 100 entry screen, 100 print declaration separately, 308 pulling creditor information into, 101 questions 19-25, 102 reordering answers, 102 Form 8. Chapter 7 Individual Debtor s Statement of Intention specifying multiple intents for one claim, 105 treatment of unsecured claims, 104 Forms. See Schedules adding an Official Form to the menu, 301 changing the title of a form, 302 for each chapter, table of, 342 removing from the Forms and Schedules Menu, 301 reordering in Forms and Schedules Menu, 301 specifying that a form should/should not appear for a given type of case, 302 Forms and Schedules Menu, 13 hotkeys to open common forms, 27 G Generic CSV format, 280 H Hardware Requirements, 14 I Important Dates, 267 Importing creditors from consumer credit reports, 246 Importing Creditors in ASCII files, 282 Importing Property Schedules, 289 Income. See Schedule I Insider defined, 49 Installation, 18 356 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
technical details of, 344 Intake Questionnaires, 124 Internet Options, 292 Involuntary Petition, 128 creating PDF, 240 printing a blank form, 129 J Joint debtor information on Schedule I, 93 Joint Debtors print separate exemption schedules, 309 Judge adding to Best Case, 300 creating judge list, 300 selecting for client file, 268 Jurisdiction Forms List, 301 Jurisdictions, 298 basic information tab, 300 choosing default through Setup Wizard, 20 editing settings, 299 exemption election choices, 300 installing, 20 print report of jurisdiction settings, 313 selecting default, 317 K Keyboard, Using Instead of the Mouse, 335 L Law Firm Information, 297 entering through Setup Wizard, 20 Leases. See Schedule G Letters to clients. See Additional Documents Library Liens entering for Schedule D, 74 entering through property schedules, 56 multiple liens against one piece of property, 81 multiple property items securing one lien, 81 ranking and changing rank order, 57 Links Between Schedules, 52 Liquidation Analysis in Chapter 13 Plan Calculator, 175 in Schedule C, 69 List of Creditor Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims. See Form 4. List of Equity Security Holders, 108 alphabetizing, 109 Locator key, 72 M Macro Feature, 322, See Common Text Blocks Mail merge working with forms in word processor, 217 Mailing labels for creditors. See Additional Documents Library Making a Standard Client Template, 282 Master Mailing List. See Creditor Address Matrix Matrix. See Creditor Address Matrix Matthew Bender s TopForm importing common creditor information, 279 Index 357 Means Test Calculator Applying the Means Test, 135 Calculating Average Monthly Income, 137 Comparing the CMI with the Median, 139 Creating a Detailed Income Attachment Sheet, 137 Deducting Additional Expenses, 147 Deducting Necessary Expenses, 146 Determining Current Monthly Income, 136 Entering Debt Payments, 147 Entering General Information, 135 Frequently Asked Questions, 155 IRS Housing Allowance, 143 IRS Living Allowance, 141 IRS Transportation Allowance, 144 Other Additional Expenses, 150 Quick Start Guide, 132 Specifying a Means Test Treatment for Priority Claims, 154 Specifying Means Test Treatment for Secured Claims, 151 Summary and Outcome, 149 What is the Means Test?, 134 Merging Forms into Word/WordPerfect, 218 Motion blank for you to modify. See Supplemental Forms Folder Motion to Amend Bankruptcy Petition, 122 Motion to Convert Case. See Supplemental Forms Folder Motions. See Additional Documents Library creating for electronic filing, 235 Moving Creditors from One Schedule to Another, 278 Moving from field to field, 28 Moving Property from Schedule A to B, 60 Moving Property from Schedule B to Schedule A, 63 Multi-User Network Version, 18 N Nature of Debtor s Interest save answer choices, 55 Needs Attention marking a case, 265 Network Version, 18 Networking the single user version, 18, 19 New client, 24 Non-Attorney Compensation Statement, 122 Non-Attorney Preparer entering information in Setup Menu, 316 forms for. See Supplemental Forms Folder Non-Attorney Preparer Certification, 117 Non-Attorney Preparer Information print certification, 309 None never enter, 28 Notes. See Case Notes Notice of 527(a) Disclosures. See Supplemental Forms Folder Notice of 527(b) Disclosures. See Supplemental Forms Folder Notice of Available Chapters, 107 Notice to Individual Consumer Debtor of Available Chapters, 107 Notify of filing adding other parties to appear on Matrix. See Additional Notice Parties Numbered List of Creditors, 114
O OCR s Suite Solutions importing data from credit reports, 246 Office File Number changing/adding, 267 OneTouch Electronic Filing System, 222 Opening a Form in MS Word or WordPerfect, 218 Opening an Existing Client File, 26 Order to Convert Case. See Supplemental Forms Folder Other forms. See Additional Documents Library Overview of Best Case Bankruptcy, 12 P Patch files check for update feature, 293 PDF Attachments, 237 PDF Bookmarks created automatically in Best Case, 236 PDF Files - Creating for electronic filing, 222 Personal Property. See Schedule B. Personal Property Phone Number of Debtor adding through Notes screen, 266 print on Voluntary Petition, 308 Possible Duplicate screen, 110 Preferences, 317 Previewing forms before printing, 195 Print Preview, 195 deleting a page from the report, 197 hotkeys, 195 marking pages to print, 197 searching for text, 196 Printer Selection, 22 Printing blank forms, 199 client cover sheet, 272 client reports, 271 date and time in top margin, 194 double-sided, 198 exemption statutes, 314 exemption summary reports, 67 keyboard shortcuts, 190 list of clients, 271 marking all documents to print, 190 multiple copies, 195 print preview, 195 print single pages of long documents. See Printing: print preview report of jurisdiction settings, 313 select all documents to print, 190 selecting documents to print, 190 the word Draft on forms, 194 to a PDF file for electronic filing, 222 your Common Creditor List, 72 Priority Claims, 82 Privacy new forms, 192 Privacy Options, 192 Pro Se filings, 37 Proof of Authority to Sign and File Petition. See Supplemental Forms Folder Proof of Claim creating PDF, 240 when you represent the creditor, 128 when you represent the debtor, 125 Proof of Service by Mail. See Supplemental Forms Folder Property. See Schedule A, Schedule B or Schedule C importing and exporting, 289 Prorate Calculator, 98 Purpose of Best Case Bankruptcy, 12 Q Questionnaires, 124 R Ranking Liens, 57 Reaffirmation Agreement. See Supplemental Forms Folder Reaffirming unsecured claims, 104 Rebuild the client list, 274 Redemption of Property Agreement. See Supplemental Forms Folder Registration Information, 18 Related cases. See Duplicating a Client File Removable disk drive copying ECF files to, 242 Reordering forms, 301 Restoring deleted files, 277 RTF Documents. See Best Case Editor S Saving Merged Forms, 219 Scanned documents incorporating in PDF documents created in Best Case, 237 Schedule A. Real Property, 54 60 add an item, 54 claim property as exempt under multiple laws, 60 debtor has no real property, 54 entering exemption and lien information, 56 entering real property, 54 importing and exporting/copying to another client file, 289 moving an item to Schedule B, 60 nature of debtor's interest, 55 Schedule B. Personal Property, 60 63 entering exemption and lien information, 63 entry screen, 62 importing and exporting/copying to another client file, 289 list screen, 62 moving an item from Schedule B to Schedule A, 63 negative market values, 328 no property to list for a category, 61 Schedule C. Property Claimed as Exempt claiming a percentage, 66 editing property through Schedule C, 68 exempting property under multiple statutes, 60 exemption detail tab, 67 Liquidation Analysis, 69 print for corporate debtors, 302 print separately for joint debtors, 309 printing exemption summary reports, 67 property summary tab, 67 specify multiple statutes for a single piece of property, 67 Statute Summary Tab, 68 view by statute, 66 358 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide
viewing exemption summaries, 67 viewing property with unexempted equity. See Schedule C...Property Summary Tab Schedule D. Creditors Holding Secured Claims 13 Plan Treatment, 161 adding property through Schedule D, 76 additional notice parties, 80 codebtor information, 79 entering lien information through property schedules, 56 entering secured claim information, 74 exclude from matrix, 73 multiple liens against one piece of property, 81 multiple property items securing one lien, 81 ranking and changing rank order, 57 total secured and unsecured amounts, 51 Schedule E. Creditors Holding Unsecured Priority Claims, 82 85, 82 85 13 Plan Treatment, 164 additional notice parties, 85 codebtor information, 84 exclude from matrix, 73 sort by priority type on screen, 84 view priority and non-priority totals, 51 Schedule F. Creditors Holding Unsecured Nonpriority Claims 13 Plan Treatment, 165 additional notice parties, 88 codebtor information, 88 disable credit card validation, 318 exclude from matrix, 73 Schedule G. Executory Contracts and Unexpired Leases, 89 specifying treatment for Chapter 13 Plan, 89 Schedule H. Codebtors. See Also Codebtors and Codebtor List entering through Schedule D, 79 Schedule I. Current Income of Individual Debtors, 92 96 debtor has more than one employer. See Schedule I, editing dependents, 93 editing Schedule I, 97 expected changes, 96 joint debtor information, 93 list on Forms and Schedule Menu for corporate debtors, 302 listing multiple jobs, 93 other income, 95 prorate calculator, 95 wages, 94 Schedule J. Current Expenditures of Individual Debtors, 97 98 chapter 12/13 plan payment, 98 creating attachment for extra other expenses, 98 editing Schedule J, 99 entering information, 97 print for corporate debtors, 302 prorate calculator, 98 separate spouse s schedule, 98 Schedules A. - H. links between schedules, 52 List Screens and Entry Screens, 52 54 adding items to list screens, 53 deleting items in list screens, 54 editing items in list screens, 53 Search for client file, 270 Search for file number, 270 Section Symbol, 329 Secured Claims. See Schedule D Separate Expense Schedules for Joint Debtors, 98 Setup Information attorney names, 297 chapter 13 options, 179 jurisdictions, 298 law firm, 297 matrix setup, 303 Setup Wizard, 20 Shortcut keys user defined. See Macro Feature Shortcuts codebtor list, 79 Common Creditor List, 70 duplicate a client file for quick entry of related cases, 281 keyboard, 335 links between schedules, 52 making templates of common information, 282 moving or copying creditors from one schedule to another, 278 right click on client for file options, 269 use Common Creditor List for common employers, 93 use Common Creditor List in Statement of Fin. Affairs, 101 Social Security Number insert using Macro Phrase List, 322 masking, 192 Specialty Software s Chap7..13 importing common creditor information, 279 Spell Check, 263 changing the hot key, 322 Spouse separate Schedule J for spouse, 98 State Bar Number. See Attorney Names:entering Statement of Financial Affairs. See Form 7. Statement of Financial Affairs Statement of Information Required by 11 U.S.C. 341, 124 Statement of Social Security Number, 115 Suggestion of Bankruptcy. See Supplemental Forms Folder Summary list window, 52 Summary of Schedules, 51 completed automatically, 51 editing, 52, 97, 99 Statistical Summary of Certain Liabilities, 51 viewing information, 51 Supplemental Forms, 301 Supplemental Forms Folder, 116 System Requirements, 14 T Table of Forms, 342 Taxes. See Schedule E Priority Claims Technical Details of Installation, 344 Technical Support, 16 Telephone Number of Debtor adding through Notes screen, 266 print on Voluntary Petition, 308 Template making a client file template, 282 Text2csv utility, 288 Tip of the Day. See Welcome Window TopForm importing common creditor information, 279 Index 359
Trustee adding to Best Case, 300 creating trustee list, 300 selecting for client file, 268 Trustee s fee, 185 Twenty largest. See Form 4. List of Creditors Holding 20 Largest Unsecured Claims Type of Debtor changing, 267 Typeface choosing the data font, 317 U Unknown term for, 310 Unlock Information, 18 Unsecured Claims. See Also Schedules E and F specifying treatment for Form 8, 104 Updates check for update feature, 293 Uppercase converting city names in AddressHelper, 322 User Defined Note Fields, 268 V Verification of Creditor Matrix, 109 option to include additional text in verification, 309 Voluntary Petition, 34 40 Chapter 11 filings, 37 editing through the Best Case Editor. See Best Case Editor exclude lines around court use section, 308 exemption election, 36 Exhibit "C", 42 Exhibit "D", 43 Info 2/ Exhibit "D", 37 print attorney code in upper right corner, 308 print debtor s phone number, 308 prior/related cases, 38 statistical/administrative information, 39 W Wages, 94 Web address of Best Case Solutions, 16 Websites - Connect to, 292 Welcome Window, 21 turning on/off, 317 West s Chap7..13 importing common creditor information, 279 Windows for users new to the windows environment, 338 Word 97/2000 upgrading to. See Technical Details of Installation Word/WordPerfect address data converting to CSV for import, 288 Z Zip Code Database. See AddressHelper 360 Best Case Bankruptcy for Windows User s Guide